Home

Mediatrix 2102 Reference Manual

1. Parameter Value On Off Sequence s Elect Levels Dial Tone 400 50 Hz CONTINUOUS 16 dBm Busy Tone 400 Hz 0 5 0 5 10 dBm Ringback Tone 400 Hz 1 0 4 0 10 dBm Special Information Tone 950 Hz 0 33 15 dBm 1400 Hz 0 33 1800 Hz 0 33 1 0 Stutter Dial Tone 400 50 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 CONTINUOUS 16 dBm Confirmation Tone 400 50 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 End 16 dBm Receiver Off Hook ROH Tone 1400 Hz 0 1 0 1 19 dBm 2060 Hz 19 dBm 2450 Hz 19 dBm 2600 Hz 19 dBm Message Waiting Indicator Tone 400 50 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 10 CONTINUOUS 16 dBm Network Congestion Tone 400 Hz 0 3 0 3 10 dBm Ring AC 45 VRMS 25 Hz 1 0 4 0 DC 15 Vdc Input Impedance 600 Q Default Caller ID BELLCORE FXS Line Attenuation Input 3 dBr FXS Line Attenuation Output 3 dBr Mediatrix 2102 297 Appendix D Country Specific Parameters UK UK The following parameters apply if you have selected the United Kingdom as location Table 182 UK Parameters Parameter Value On Off Sequence s Elect Levels Dial Tone 350 440 Hz CONTINUOUS 22 dBm Busy Tone 400 Hz 0 375 0 375 19 dBm Ringback Tone 400 450 Hz 0 4 0 2 0 4 2 0 22 dBm Special Information Tone 950 Hz 0 33 19 dBm 1400 Hz 0 33 1800 Hz 0 33 1 0 Stutter Dial Tone 350 440 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 CONTINUOUS 22 dBm Confirmation Tone 350 440 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 End 2
2. Parameter Value On Off Sequence s Elect Levels Dial Tone 400 Hz CONTINUOUS 13 dBm Busy Tone 400 Hz 0 5 0 5 13 dBm Ringback Tone 400 Hz 16 1 0 2 0 16 dBm Special Information Tone 400 Hz 0 1 0 1 13 dBm Stutter Dial Tone 400 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 CONTINUOUS 13 dBm Confirmation Tone 400 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 End 13 dBm Receiver Off Hook ROH Tone 1400 Hz 0 1 0 1 19 dBm 2060 Hz 19 dBm 2450 Hz 19 dBm 2600 Hz 19 dBm Message Waiting Indicator Tone 400 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 10 CONTINUOUS 13 dBm Network Congestion Tone 400 Hz 0 5 0 5 13 dBm Ring AC 45 VRMS 20 Hz 1 0 2 0 DC 15 Vdc Input Impedance 600 Q Default Caller ID BELLCORE FXS Line Attenuation Input 0 dBr FXS Line Attenuation Output 9 dBr 286 Mediatrix 2102 Malaysia Reference Manual SIP Version Malaysia The following parameters apply if you have selected Malaysia as location Table 171 Malaysia Parameters Parameter Value On Off Sequence s Elect Levels Dial Tone 425 Hz CONTINUOUS 14 dBm Busy Tone 425 Hz 0 5 0 5 18 dBm Ringback Tone 425 Hz 0 4 0 2 0 4 2 0 16 dBm Special Information Tone 900 Hz 1 0 14 dBm 1400 Hz 1 0 1800 Hz 1 0 1 0 Stutter Dial Tone 425 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 CONTINUOUS 14 dBm Confirmation Tone 425 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 End 14 dBm Receiver Off Hook ROH Tone 1400 Hz 0 1 0 1 19 dBm 2060 Hz 19 dBm 2450 Hz 19
3. LED Pattern Meaning Steady On All lines are enabled operational state Ready Steady Off All lines are disabled operational state Blink 0 25 Hz 75 At least one line is enabled and at least one line is disabled operational state Steady On At least one line is busy usage state In Use Steady Off All lines are not busy usage state Blinking 1 Hz 75 The PPP connection could not be established Steady On Ethernet connection detected rey Ctrl Steady Off Ethernet connection not detected Blinking variable rate Ethernet activity detected Steady On Power is On Power Steady Off Power is Off Blinking 1 Hz 75 Waiting for a DHCP answer 18 Mediatrix 2102 LED Indicators Reference Manual SIP Version Recovery Mode LED Patterns There are two different sequences of LED patterns indicating that a recovery is in process At Start Time When pressing the button at start time the state sequence goes as follows Figure 8 LED Pattern at Start Time Booting RecoveryModePending RecoveryMode Button Held Button Released This leads to the following LED patterns Table 11 LED Patterns at Start Time LEDs Pattern State Ready In Use LAN Power Booting Off Off HW On RecoveryModePending Blink 1 Hz 50 Blink 1 Hz 50 Blink 1 Hz 50 Blink 1 Hz 50 RecoveryMode Blink 0 5 Hz 75 Off Blink Hw Blink 0 5 Hz 75 At Run Time When pressing the button at run time the
4. 60 Mediatrix 2102 Services Reference Manual SIP Version Table 43 Syslog Source Continued Variable Default Static Value DHCP Source syslogPort 5148 Not provided by the DHCP use the default static value a The port number is as per RFC 1340 SIP Servers The pAddressConfigSipServer group provides the configuration necessary for contacting different SIP servers a In the Unit Manager Network Administration Manual refer to chapter Signalling Protocols Parameters section SIP Configuration Window LF Note Although the DHCP option 120 is reserved for SIP servers no standard currently defines the content and layout of this option LF Note If for a given server the port is 0 then the host and port for this server are obtained through a DNS SRV request See Chapter 6 DNS SRV Configuration on page 79 for more details K To select the SIP Servers configuration source 1 In the ipAddressConfig folder locate the sipServerSelectConfigSource variable under the ipAddressConfigSipServer group 2 Set this variable to either static or dhcp vendor site specific option Table 44 SIP Servers Source Variable Default Static Value DHCP Source sipHomeDomain 192 168 0 10 Use option specified in variable ProxyHost sipHomeDomainProxyDhcpSiteSpecificCode bytes 0 3 If not specified 0 use option 43 sub option 204 bytes 0 3 sipHomeDomain 0 Use opt
5. Mediatrix 2102 299 Appendix E Glossary Cable Modem Table 184 France Numbering Plan Continued No Description Z Geographical regional zone of the number in France there are five zones It has two digits ABPQ First four digits corresponding to a local zone defined by central offices 12 34 Unique number to reach a specific destination In this context the area code corresponds to the Z portion of the numbering plan Because virtually every country has a different dialing plan nomenclature it is recommended to identify the equivalent of an area code for the location of your communication unit Cable Modem A device that connects a computer to a local cable television line and receives data at about 1 5 Mbps This data rate far exceeds that of the prevalent 28 8 and 56 Kbps telephone modems and the up to 128 Kbps of Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN It is about the data rate available to subscribers of Digital Subscriber Line DSL telephone service A cable modem can be added to or integrated with a set top box that provides your TV set with channels for Internet access In most cases cable modems are furnished as part of the cable access service and are not purchased directly and installed by the subscriber Country Code CC In international direct telephone dialing a code that consists of 1 2 or 3 digit numbers in which the first digit designates the region a
6. for the of the IP address 3 Dial F to terminate the IP address 4 Dial the telephone number of the specific line you want to reach For example let s say you want to reach the telephone connected to Line 2 of the Mediatrix 2102 with the IP address 192 168 0 23 The phone number assigned to Line 2 of this Mediatrix 2102 is 1234 You must then dial the following digits 192 168 0 23 1234 218 Mediatrix 2102 PIN Dialing Reference Manual SIP Version In this case the Mediatrix 2102 sends an INVITE 1234 0192 168 0 23 PIN Dialing Standards Supported The PIN Dialing feature allows you to configure a PIN Personal Identification Number that would be dialed n milliseconds after an outgoing call was established This feature could be used in the case where a user makes an automatic call to an IVR system and after a pre defined delay the Mediatrix 2102 sends the DTMF tones PIN to indicate where the call is coming from The PIN is transmitted by using the DTMF out of band by signalling protocol transport type Both parties involved must thus support the draft choudhuri sip info digit 00 txt draft The PIN must be negotiated in the call See DTMF Transport Type on page 149 for more details on the DTMF out of band by signalling protocol transport type K To configure the PIN dialing feature 1 In the pinDialingMIB define the PIN to dial in the pinDialingPin variable The PIN contain
7. 38 Mediatrix 2102 CHAPTER 3 MIB Structure and SNMP This chapter describes how the Mediatrix 2102 uses the SNMP protocol for its configuration SNMP Overview The Mediatrix 2102 uses the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP for initial software configuration provisioning and subsequent software configuration SNMP is a simple request reply protocol for Internet network management services It consists of network management stations in this document they are referred to as a management server communicating with network elements Management stations are normally workstations that display relevant facts about the elements being monitored SNMP works over the IP Internet Protocol communication stack SNMP network management consists of three pieces gt The protocol between the manager and the element SNMP This details the format of the packets exchanged Although a wide variety of transport protocols could be used UDP is normally used with SNMP gt A set of common structures and an identification scheme used to reference the variables in the MIB This is called the Structure of Management Information SMI gt A Management Information Base MIB that specifies what variables the network elements maintain the information that can be queried and set by the manager Definitions Structure of Management Information SMI The SMI is the set of rules for specifying the management information that a device maintai
8. Mediatrix EMPOWERING THE EDGE OF THE IP NETWORK Mediatrix 2102 Reference Manual SIP Version Document Revision 06 Product Version 5 0 March 3 2005 Mediatrix Telecom Inc Reference Manual Mediatrix Telecom Inc 4229 Garlock Street Sherbrooke Qu bec Canada J1L 2C8 Mediatrix 2102 Reference Manual SIP Version O 2005 Mediatrix Telecom Inc All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced or used in any form or by any means graphic electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording taping or information storage and retrieval systems without the express written permission of the publisher Mediatrix Telecom Inc reserves the right to revise this publication and make changes at any time and without the obligation to notify any person and or entity of such revisions and or changes Trademarks Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Adobe and Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners Mediatrix Telecom Inc Reference Manual Supplementary Copyright Information CMU UCD copyright notice BSD like Copyright 1989 1991 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University Derivative Work 1996 1998 2000 Copyright 1996 1998 2000 The Regents of the University of California All Rights Reserved Permission to use cop
9. 2 Be sure that UDP ports 60000 to 60512 inclusively are opened in your firewall 3 If not already done configure the Image path as described in Setting up the Image Path on page 128 4 If not already done configure the image hosts and ports as defined in Software Servers Configuration on page 126 5 Set the TFTP root path in your TFTP server It is assumed that you know how to set the TFTP root path If not refer to your TFTP server s documentation 6 Set the image TransferProtocol variable to tftp 7 Set the groupSetAdmin variable in the groupAdminMIB to ForceLock All activities in progress on the Mediatrix 2102 are terminated immediately and the unit enters the maintenance mode the value of the groupAdminState variable is locked The software upgrade may take place The Mediatrix 2102 lines will be unlocked after successfully downloading the software and restarting If for any reason the software download is not successful you must manually unlock the lines as per Lines Administrative State on page 139 8 Initiate the download by setting the sysAdminCommand variable in the sysAdminMIB to downloadSoftware This starts the download process Caution Never shutdown the Mediatrix 2102 manually while in the download process because the image may be partially written and the Mediatrix 2102 is unable to restart The software download may take several minutes depending on your Internet co
10. E1 PRI IP Routers Designed to address the voice fax and data transmission needs of enterprises the Mediatrix 2600 series E1 PRI IP routers combine VoIP and call switching with QoS access routing and VPN The Mediatrix 2600 series units are integrated IP routers with two Ethernet ports a serial V 35 X 21 port and one Mediatrix 2631 or two Mediatrix 2632 ISDN E1 primary rate interface ports They constitute an ideal solution for enterprise networks or for connecting to a service provider s network Software Applications Mediatrix Software Applications produce substantial benefits and provide a value added enhancement to solutions making use of Mediatrix access devices and gateways IP Communication Server SIP Server The IP Communication Server translates phones numbers into their corresponding network locations It looks up its database of registered SIP users or administrator defined call routing mechanism and rules to find the network location associated with the called party and returns the information to the calling party SIP services are essential components of the IP Communication Server architecture However the Route Manager module provides additional intelligence enabling various dial maps and digit manipulation scenarios For example calls can be routed to SCN gateways IVRs or other SIP servers Unit Manager Network Element Management System User friendly element management system designed to facilitate the de
11. Figure 15 System log Page F Mediatrix 2102 Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help esk gt gt OA A Qsearch Favorites Queda G Ei a 9 9 6 Address http 192 168 10 1 zl Po Mediatrix 2102 overview admin config File Bandwidth STUN System log Warming Dec 31 19 1 8 SystemManager SNMP The notification msTrapConfigInformation 700 could not be sent to msHost 0 0 0 0 and msTrapP ort 162 SNMP The notification msTrapConfigInformation 700 could not e Drepp nn be sentto msHost 0 0 0 0 and msTrapPort 162 SNMP The notification msTrapConfiginformation 700 could not be sent to msHost 0 0 0 0 and msTrapPort 162 SNMP The notification msTrapConfiginformation 700 could not be sent to msHost 0 0 0 0 and msTrapPort 162 SNMP The notification msTrapConfigInformation 700 could not be sent to msHost 0 0 0 0 and msTrapP ort 162 SNMP The notification msTrapConfiginformation 4700 could not be sent to msHost 0 0 0 0 and msTrapPort 162 SNMP The notification msTrapConfiginformation 700 could not be sent to msHost 0 0 0 0 and msTrapP ort 162 SNMP The notification msTrapConfiginformation 700 could not be sent to msHost 0 0 0 0 and msTrapPort 162 SNMP The notification msTrapConfiginformation 700 could not be sent to msHost 0 0 0 0 and msTrapP ort 162 SNMP The notification msTrapConfiginformation 4700
12. This step depends on the WAN connection type set in the web interface see Chapter 2 Web Interface on page 25 Most DSL users will need to enable PPPoE after they have installed the Mediatrix 2102 The Ready LED will remain off until this setting has been changed For more informations refer to Chapter 2 Web Interface on page 25 If you are using a cable modem the Mediatrix 2102 default MIB parameters are set so that the unit can be directly plugged into a network and provisioned with a DHCP server It is strongly recommended to set your DHCP server before installing the unit on the network See Chapter 4 IP Address and Network Configuration on page 51 for more details If you are experiencing problems or if you do not want to use a DHCP server perform a Recovery Mode procedure as explained in Recovery Mode on page 21 Initial Provisioning Sequence gt When starting the Mediatrix 2102 for the first time it needs to be configured before it can support calls This process is known as provisioning This sequence assumes that you have installed the Mediatrix 2102 hardware as per Hardware Connection on page 8 The Mediatrix 2102 requests its configuration only on the first restart You can change the configuration at will after the initial provisioning and the provisioning system can refresh the Mediatrix 2102 configuration The provisioning system consists of the Management Server and a DHCP server The
13. Using Call Waiting The call waiting feature alerts the user if he or she is already on the telephone and a second call happens A beep the call waiting tone is heard and repeated every ten seconds to indicate there is a second incoming call K To put the current call on hold 1 Perform a Flash Hook by pressing the Flash button on your analog telephone This puts the call on hold and the second line is automatically connected to your line 2 Answer the call on the second line K To switch from one line to the other 1 Perform a Flash Hook each time you want to switch between lines K To terminate the first call before answering the second call 1 Hang up the telephone 2 Wait for the telephone to ring 3 Answer the telephone The second call is on the line Removing the Call Waiting Tone You can temporarily activate deactivate the call waiting tone indicating a call is waiting This is especially useful when transmitting faxes If you are about to send a fax you can thus deactivate the call waiting tone to ensure that the fax transmission is not disrupted by an unwanted second call When the fax transmission is completed and the line is on hook the call waiting tone is automatically reactivated K To deactivate the call waiting tone 1 Take the receiver off hook 2 Wait for the dial tone 3 Dial the sequence the system administrator has implemented to deactivate the call waiting tone This sequence could b
14. 60 as the sequence a user must dial to start the urgent gateway service This sequence must follow the syntax for digit maps see Chapter 18 Digit Maps on page 187 Dialing this digit map does not have any effect unless the service s status is enabled The activating sequence is set for all the lines of the Mediatrix 2102 You cannot have different sequences for each line 3 Set the number to reach for an urgent call in the emergencyCallUrgentGateway TargetAddress variable Accepted formats are e telephone numbers 5551111 SIP URLs such as scheme user host For instance sip user foo com Note that this string is used literally so cosmetic symbols such as the dash in 555 xxxx should not be present Mediatrix 2102 201 Chapter 19 Telephony Features Emergency Call 202 Mediatrix 2102 CHAPTER 20 Subscriber Services The Mediatrix 2102 offers subscriber services users can directly access on their telephone However you must set these services before they can be used Most of the variables related to the subscriber services are located in tables These tables display the information for all lines Before changing a parameter value build its corresponding table with your MIB browser s table functionality E In the Unit Manager Network Administration Manual refer to chapter Subscriber Services Parameters section SIP Configuration Window Call Hold The Call Hold service allow
15. Choosing a Suitable Installation Site The Mediatrix 2102 is suited for use in an office or residential environment where it can be wall mounted or free standing Warning The analog lines of the Mediatrix 2102 are not intended for connection to a telecommunication network that uses outside cable Warning To prevent fire or shock hazard do not expose the unit to rain or moisture Location Install the Mediatrix 2102 in a well ventilated location where it will not be exposed to high temperature or humidity Do not install the Mediatrix 2102 in a location exposed to direct sunlight or near stoves or radiators Excessive heat could damage the internal components When deciding where to position the Mediatrix 2102 ensure that K The Mediatrix 2102 is accessible and cables can be easily connected K The cabling is away from the following e Sources of electrical noise such as radios transmitters and broadband amplifiers e Bower lines and fluorescent lighting fixtures e Water or moisture that could enter the casing of the Mediatrix 2102 K The airflow is not restricted around the Mediatrix 2102 or through the vents in the front and back of the unit The unit requires a minimum of 25 mm 1 in clearance The operating temperature is between 0 C and 40 C gt The humidity is not over 85 and is non condensing 6 Mediatrix 2102 Choosing a Suitable Installation Site Reference Manual SIP Version Wall
16. Default Value 10 10 100 with increments of 1 voicelfCodecPcmaMaxPTime Upper boundary for the packetization period Default Value 100 10 100 with increments of 1 G 723 voicelfCodecG723MinPTime Lower boundary for the packetization period 30 60 90 120 Default Value 30 voicelfCodecG723MaxPTime Upper boundary for the packetization period 30 60 90 120 Default Value 120 G 729 voicelfCodecG729MinPTime Lower boundary for the packetization period Default Value 10 10 100 with increments of 10 voicelfCodecG729MaxPTime Upper boundary for the packetization period Default Value 100 10 100 with increments of 10 Note The packetization time is not negotiated between endpoints so a minimum and a maximum don t make much sense The selected value is the default RTP value 20 ms for G 711 and G 729 AB 30 ms for G 723 if it is included in the range delimited by the minimum and maximum Otherwise it is the minimum 148 Mediatrix 2102 DTMF Transport Type Reference Manual SIP Version DTMF Transport Type Standards Supported You can define how to transport the DTMFs K To set the DTMF transport type 1 In the voicelfMIB set the DTMF transport type in the voicelfDtmfTransport variable voicelfDtmfTransportTable group The following choices are available Table 99 DTMF Transport Type Parameters Transport Parame
17. Mediatrix 2102 107 Chapter 9 Configuration File Download Configuration File Download Server Configuration File Server Settings The Mediatrix 2102 must know the IP address and port number of its configuration file server This server contains the configuration file the Mediatrix 2102 will download You can assign these information to the Mediatrix 2102 through a DHCP server or manually enter them yourself in static variables DHCP Configuration Using the DHCP configuration assumes that you have properly set your DHCP server with the relevant information See Chapter 4 IP Address and Network Configuration on page 51 for more details K To use DHCP assigned information 1 In the ipAddressConfig folder locate the configFileFetchingSelectConfigSource variable under the ipAddressConfigFileFetching group This variable defines whether the Mediatrix 2102 must ask for its configuration file server settings through a DHCP server or not 2 Set the configFileFetchingConfigSource variable to dhcp You can query the configuration file servers IP address and port number assigned by the DHCP server in the following read only variables in the pAddressStatus folder configFileFetchingHost e configFileFetchingPort 3 Set how you want to define the configuration server information in the DHCP server Table 69 Configuration File Server DHCP Information To use a Set vendor specific code The configFileFetchingD
18. The default Value is 3 seconds 4 Enable the emergency bypass feature by setting the fxsEmergencyBypassEnable variable to enable Standard Bypass The following describes how to enable disable the standard Bypass feature K To enable the standard Bypass feature 1 In the fxsMIB locate the fxsByPassEnable variable This option enables disables the bypass service Table 105 Bypass Values Value Description disable The line with the bypass service is never redirected on the bypass line except when there is a power failure enable When the line with the bypass service is unusable ifAdminUsageState is idle unusable it is redirected to the bypass line When this line becomes usable again ifAdminUsageSiate is idle the redirection is stopped within 10 seconds if the bypass line is unused or 10 seconds after the termination of the call LF Note The control of the bypass service is only possible when the unit is powered on When power is off the bypass service is always enabled The default value is enable 162 Mediatrix 2102 CHAPTER SIP Protocol Features This chapter defines the SIP specific feature to set up to properly use the SIP signalling programs and information defined in Mediatrix SIP stack User Agents A user agent is a logical entity that can act as both client and server for the duration of a dialog Each line also known as endpoint of the Mediatrix 2102 is a us
19. on page 107 for more details Mediatrix 2102 3 Chapter 1 Installation Panels Panels This section provides an overview of the front and rear panels of the Mediatrix 2102 Front Indicators Figure 1 shows the four visual indicators located on the front of the Mediatrix 2102 Figure 1 Front Panel Indicators Line can be used LAN link pulse indicator indicator Line in use Power ON indicator indicator Table 5 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the Mediatrix 2102 Table 5 Front Panel Indicators Indicator Description Ready When lit the Mediatrix 2102 is ready to initiate or receive a call The unit does not have to be registered to a server In Use When lit at least one of the FXS lines is in use LAN Provides the state of the network connected to the Network connector Power When lit power is applied to the Mediatrix 2102 See LED Indicators on page 15 for a detailed description of the LED patterns the Mediatrix 2102 may have and the states they represent 4 Mediatrix 2102 Panels Reference Manual SIP Version Rear Connectors The Mediatrix 2102 has several connections that must be properly set Figure 2 shows the back panel of the Mediatrix 2102 Figure 2 Back Panel Connectors RJ 11 connectors Analog line device Connector 1 left Connector 2 right Default Settings RJ11 Bypass RJ 45 connector for 10 RJ 45 connector for 10 External w
20. on page 191 for more details It indicates that if users have not dialed a digit for the time defined it is likely that they have finished dialing and the Mediatrix 2102 can make the call A digit map for this could be 2 9 xxxxxxT Note When making the actual call and dialing the number the Mediatrix 2102 automatically removes the LF T found at the end of a dialed number if there is one after a match This character is for indication purposes only Mediatrix 2102 189 Chapter 18 Digit Maps Setting up Digit Maps Calls Outside the Country If your users are making calls outside their country it may sometimes be hard to determine exactly the number of digits they must enter You could devise a digit map that takes this problem into account 001x T In this example the digit map looks for a number that begins with 001 and then any number of digits after that DL Example Table 122 on page 187 outlined various call types one could make All these possibilities could be covered in one digit map OT OOT 1 7 xxx 8xxxxxxx XXXXXXX 91 xxxxXXXXXX 9011x T Validating a Digit Map The Mediatrix 2102 validates the digit map as you are entering it and it forbids any invalid value Setting up Digit Maps The variables related to the digit maps are located in tables You can create edit ten digit maps for each Mediatrix 2102 Before changing a parameter value build its corresponding table with yo
21. 1 In the snmpAgentMIB select the interface where the Mediatrix 2102 can be accessed via SNMP in the snmpAgentAccess variable You have the following choices Table 29 SNMP Access Limitation Parameters Access Description lanOnly SNMP connections are only permitted on the LAN side which is usually associated with the Computer connector The LAN IP address is provisioned by the lanStaticAddress variable wanOnly SNMP connections are only permitted on the WAN side which is usually associated with the Network connector However if the WAN interface is down and the unit reverts to its LAN configuration the SNMP agent can access the Mediatrix 2102 on its LAN interface all SNMP connections are permitted on both the LAN and WAN sides Current MIB Version You can find out the version of the MIB currently in the Mediatrix 2102 1 In the sysMgmtMIB locate the sysMibVersion variable This variable displays the current version of the MIB Sending Configuration Data to the Mediatrix 2102 The configuration data can be provisioned into the Mediatrix 2102 in two ways K as a configuration file sent from the Management Server to the Mediatrix 2102 via TFTP K as a MIB sent from the Management Server to the Mediatrix 2102 via SNMP Configuration File The configuration file is the fastest way to deliver the necessary information This may be important when initializing a large number of units at the same t
22. As per the standard some bridges may not support the full range of VID 2 Set the substitution IEEE 802 10 Virtual LAN default user priority in the gqosVlanleee8021qSubstitutionUserPriority variable This value applies to all protocols for which no priority filtering is enabled e g ARP ICMP e T High priority e 0 Low priority 3 Enable the VLAN substitution by setting the qosVlanleee8021qSubstitutionEnable variable to enable The QoS 802 1q fields of the packets sent from the PC to the WAN are assigned the value defined in the gosVianleee8021qSubstitutionVianID variable 4 Restart the Mediatrix 2102 so that the changes may take effect Ethernet Frames Issue There is currently an issue with the CPU of the Mediatrix 2102 This issue prevents Ethernet frames which have a 802 1q tag to be correctly forwarded through the Computer LAN port of the Mediatrix 2102 if these frames have less than 68 bytes including FCS For example itis valid to have an Ethernet frame of 64 bytes even ifit includes a 802 1q tag However when the CPU switch forwards this packet through the Computer port it removes the 802 1q tag but does not add any padding byte The Ethernet frame is output with only 60 bytes which is invalid and dropped by most equipment A workaround would be to modify the behaviour of your router to generate 802 1q frames with at least 68 bytes Mediatrix 2102 231 Chapter 24 Quality of Service QoS VLAN
23. Off Off Off then HW On or Blink at 1 Hz 75 Normal Mode Normal state of the unit where calls can be initiated Each LED has a separate behaviour If the groupAdminState MIB variable is set to locked the Mediatrix 2102 enters the Admin Mode state See NormalMode LED Pattern Description on page 18 AdminMode Administration mode of the unit where calls are not permitted and maintenance actions can be performed When the groupAdminState MIB variable returns to unlocked the unit goes back to the NormalMode state NOTE The Ready and Power LEDs blink off phase in turns Blink 0 5 Hz 50 Off HW Blink 0 5 Hz 50 16 Mediatrix 2102 LED Indicators Reference Manual SIP Version Table 9 States and LED Patterns Continued State Description LEDs Pattern Ready In Use LAN Power Recovery Mode The IP addresses for local host image server syslog server etc are set to known values allowing configuration of the unit Calls are not allowed The known addresses are temporary non persistent Resetting the unit returns it to the NormalMode state NOTE The Ready and Power LEDs are in phase Blink 0 5 Hz 75 Off HW Blink 0 5 Hz 75 Reset Pending This is when the button is pressed and held for at least 2 seconds If the button is released within 5 seconds dat
24. Table 79 Primary Image Server DHCP Information To use a Set vendor specific code The imageDhcpPrimarySiteSpecificCode variable to 0 Set the Primary image server IP address in the DHCP server inside the vendor specific sub option 117 hexadecimal 0x75 site specific code The imageDhcpPrimarySiteSpecificCode variable to any value between 128 and 254 Set the Primary image server IP address in the DHCP server inside the site specific option you have chosen it must match the value of the imageDhcpPrimarySiteSpecificCode variable in the unit s configuration See Vendor and Site Specific DHCP Options on page 64 for more details 4 Set how you want to define the Secondary Image server information in the DHCP server Table 80 Secondary Image Server DHCP Information To use a Set vendor specific code The imageDhcpSecondarySiteSpecificCode variable to 0 Set the Secondary image server IP address in the DHCP server inside the vendor specific sub option 118 hexadecimal 0x76 126 Mediatrix 2102 Software Servers Configuration Reference Manual SIP Version Table 80 Secondary Image Server DHCP Information Continued To use a Set site specific code The imageDhcpSecondarySiteSpecificCode variable to any value between 128 and 254 Set the Secondary image server IP address in the DHCP server inside the site specific option you have chosen it mus
25. Telecommunications protocol standard that enables alternate voice and data capability over the existing analog telephone network This means that in addition to the familiar voice response audio interface where you listen to voice recordings and make menu selections using the telephone keypad you can now see the menu and information on the screen display and make selections using soft keys To use ADSI you would need an ADSI capable device as you would if you want the caller ID service Area Code The preliminary digits that a user must dial to be connected to a particular outgoing trunk group or line In North America an area code has three digits and is used with a NXX office code number For instance in the North American telephone number 561 955 1212 the numbers are defined as follows Table 183 North American Numbering Plan No Description 561 Area Code corresponding to a geographical zone in a non LNP Local Number Portability network 955 NXX office code which corresponds to a specific area such as a city region 1212 Unique number to reach a specific destination Outside North America the area code may have any number of digits depending on the national telecommunication regulation of the country In France for instance the numbering terminology is xZABPQ 12 34 where Table 184 France Numbering Plan No Description x Operator forwarding the call This prefix can be made of 4 digits
26. gt msSelectConfigSource dhcp gt msDhcpSiteSpecificCode 0 gt syslogSelectConfigSource dhcp gt syslogDhcpSiteSpecificCode 250 The following is the corresponding DHCP setup assuming the Management server is located at 10 3 2 201 and the Syslog server is located at 10 3 2 200 port 1024 K Option 43 vendor specific option contains the hexadecimal sequence 0xC80x40xA0x30x20xC9 inserted among other sequences Table 49 Hexadecimal Sequence Option 43 Hexadecimal Part Corresponding Information 0xC8 code 200 management server 0x4 size of 4 bytes Mediatrix 2102 67 Chapter 4 IP Address and Network Configuration Error Handling Table 49 Hexadecimal Sequence Option 43 Continued Hexadecimal Part Corresponding Information OxA0x30x20xC9 IP address 10 3 2 201 gt Option 250 site specific option contains the hexadecimal sequence 0xA0x30x20xC80x400 Table 50 Hexadecimal Sequence Option 250 Hexadecimal Part Corresponding Information OxA0x30x20xC8 IP address 10 3 2 200 0x400 port 1024 Error Handling In the event of a network or server failure this section describes the application behaviour and or replacement values to use Table 51 Replacement Values for Error Recovery Type Variable Replacement value IP address All variables of that type 0 0 0 0 String All variables of that type DHCP Server Failures If the Mediatrix 21
27. on page 101 for more details SOLUTION Disable the TAS feature as described in Enabling TAS on page 98 because the IP address is not an issue in private networks DESCRIPTION Setting the MIB variable voicelfAdaptativeJitterBufferEnable to disable has no effect Be POSSIBLE CAUSE You cannot disable the adaptative jitter buffer on the Mediatrix 2102 SOLUTION If you set the voicelfTargetJitterBufferLength and voicelfMaxJitterBufferLength variables to the same value you will have a non adaptative jitter buffer See Adaptative Jitter Buffer on page 152 for more details Mediatrix 2102 245 Chapter 28 Troubleshooting Calling Issues Calling Issues The following are general calling issues you may encounter DESCRIPTION Impossible to make a call If the following happens gt Dial tone present gt Power LED lit K LAN LED lit a POSSIBLE CAUSE Network communication is not working SOLUTION Check that The LAN cable is securely connected to the Mediatrix 2102 and to the network connector YOU did not connect a crossover network cable Be POSSIBLE CAUSE Configurable parameters of the Mediatrix 2102 are not set properly SOLUTION Refer to this manual for a complete description of the configurable Mediatrix 2102 parameters DESCRIPTION Cannot make or receive calls Be POSSIBLE CAUSE There may be calls that have not been properly terminated which causes a leak in
28. A voice activity detector VAD and comfort noise generator CNG algorithm in Annex B of G 729 is recommended for digital simultaneous voice and data applications they can be used in conjunction with G 729 or G 729 Annex A A G 729 or G 729 Annex A frame contains 10 octets while the G 729 Annex B comfort noise frame occupies 2 octets The Mediatrix 2102 supports G 729A and G 729AB for encoding and G 729 G 729A and G 729AB for decoding Table 96 G 729 Features Feature Description Packetization time Range of 10 ms to 100 ms with increment of 10 ms See Packetization Time on page 148 for more details Voice Activity Detection VAD The Mediatrix 2102 supports the annex B Annex B is the built in support of VAD in G 729 See G 729 VAD on page 154 for more details 146 Mediatrix 2102 Preferred Codec Reference Manual SIP Version Preferred Codec The preferred codec is the codec you want to favour during negotiation In the Unit Manager Network Administration Manual refer to chapter Ports Parameters section Port Configuration Window gt Toseta preferred codec 1 In the voicelfMIB locate the voicelfCodecPreferred variable voicelfCodecTable This variable sets the preferred codec for this line 2 Choose the codec you want to use from one of the available configurations e pemu pcma e 07223 0729 The default value is pemu Enabling Individual Codecs Enabli
29. Australa RE 272 AU aa 273 PAS AM AyD deditos 274 AUS MA nidad 275 e o o o O Aa 276 i ul CEET 277 DQM AIK EE 278 Welle EE 279 En TTT 280 E ET a dais dea 280 E aU 281 FIOM G KONG OT 282 eler TTT 283 EI RE 284 CET 285 Japan EE 286 Malaysien TA A ais 287 MEXICO EE 288 Netherlands nomean dt E E 289 New zealand BE 290 North AIST C Et ETH 291 North America WEE 291 A 292 RUSSIA E a 293 e UE 294 e E EE 295 ele En EE 296 Iall ame 297 lee 298 Mediatrix 2102 xvii Contents Appendix E CIN a THT 299 Appendix F LI One 307 Appendix G List of MIB ParaMeters rara da 309 xviii Mediatrix 2102 PREFACE About this Manual Thank you for purchasing the Mediatrix 2102 from Mediatrix The Mediatrix 2102 offers two Ethernet connectors switches enabling to establish two connections between conventional analog telephones or Group 3 fax machines and either a WAN a LAN or a personal computer It can be used to provide connectivity to broadband access equipment for a Service Provider s IP Telephony offering to residential or SME markets To ensure maximum flexibility the Mediatrix 2102 can gt dynamically detect the most commonly used IP Telephony codecs and fax protocols including T 38 be auto provisioned and remotely managed and upgraded provide a connection directly to the SCN via an automatic Bypass function in the event of an IP network failure or power outage Document Objectives The Mediatrix 2102
30. Be sure to reply to the INVITE message by a 200 OK before sending any T 38 message to the Mediatrix 2102 The following table lists the fax models tested with the Mediatrix 2102 for the T 38 protocol Each of these fax models has been emulated and tested with each other by using the FaxLab fax telephony testing tool Table 142 Tested Fax Models Make Models Brother 6650MC e Intellifax 950M 7150C e Intellifax 2500 FAX 190 MFC 4550 FAX 580MC e MFC 4600 Intellifax 600 MFC 4650 Intellifax 625 Panasonic KXF 500 e PX 5 KXF 580 e PX 150 KXF 1600 s PX 350 KXF 3000 e UF 880 KX FP270 e UF V60 KX FPC95 Sharp FO 145 e UX 117 FO 235 e UX 256 FO 445 e UX 460 FO 5400 s UX 1400 UX 104 e UX 3600M UX 108 Canon B70 e MultiPass C560 Fax 750 e MultiPass C755 Fax B340 e MultiPass C2500 L777 e MultiPass C5500 MultiPass C530 e MultiPass L6000 MultiPass C545 e MultiPass TF 301 MultiPass C555 Xerox 3004 e WorkCenter 470cx 7021 e WorkCenter 480cx 7024 s WorkCenter 7033 XE9Ofx WorkCenter 250 s WorkCenter XK50cx 248 Mediatrix 2102 Fax Issues Reference Manual SIP Version Table 142 Tested Fax Models Continued Make Models Hewlett Packard Fax 200 e OfficeJet e Fax 920 e OfficeJet 350 e LaserJet 3200 e OfficeJet 570 Issues Arising from Specific Combinations Scenarios The following are very specific issues the Mediatrix 2102 may experience with certain typ
31. Digit Maps Digit Map Examples Digit Map Example 2 PBX Emulation Let s say you are located in the 819 area code You are in an office where you dial gt 3 numbers to call one of your co workers gt 9 to get an external line The following four possibilities are considered gt You are making an internal call to one of your co workers You are making a long distance call outside the country gt gt You are making a long distance call outside your area code gt You are making a local call in the same area code Digit Map Rule 1 This digit map rule checks for internal calls Table 128 Digit Map Rules 1 Settings Variable Setting digitMapAllowedEnable Enable digitMapAllowedDigitMap 1 8 xx Digit Map Rule 2 This digit map rule checks for calls outside the country Table 129 Digit Map Rules 2 Settings Variable Setting digitMapAllowedEnable Enable digitMapAllowedDigitMap 9011x 9011x T digitMapPrefixedDigitRemovalCount 4 A valid telephone number must contain a country code an area code and a number the 9011 part is not required Digit Map Rule 3 This digit map rule checks for long distance calls outside your area code Table 130 Digit Map Rules 3 Settings Variable Setting digitMapAllowedEnable Enable digitMapAllowedDigitMap 91XXXXXXXXXX digitMapPrefixedDigitRemovalCount 2 The first digit
32. FCC Part 68 Subpart D e Industry Canada CS 03 Issue 8 Part 1 TBR 21 January 1998 e AS ACIF S002 2001 e AS ACIF S003 2001 e AS ACIF S043 e Cofetel Note The standards compliance of the Mediatrix 2102 are printed on a sticker located on the bottom of the unit Disclaimers The following are the disclaimers related to the Mediatrix 2102 Federal Communications Commission FCC Part 15 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures gt Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna gt Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver gt Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected gt Consult the dealer or an e
33. In the voicelfMIB locate the voicelfTable group 2 Define the voicelfG729VoiceActivityDetectionEnable variable The following settings are available Table 103 G 729 VAD Settings Setting Description disable G 729 uses annex A only The Mediatrix 2102 does not send G 729 Annex B comfort noise frames enable G 729 annex A is used with annex B The Mediatrix 2102 sends G 729 Annex B comfort noise frames during silence periods See Enabling Individual Codecs on page 147 for more details Echo Cancellation Echo cancellation eliminates the echo effect caused by signal reflections An echo is a signal that has been reflected or otherwise returned with enough magnitude and delay to be perceived The echo cancellation is usually an active process in which echo signals are measured and cancelled or eliminated by combining an inverted signal with the echo signal You cannot disable echo cancellation on the Mediatrix 2102 154 Mediatrix 2102 G 711 Comfort Noise Reference Manual SIP Version G 711 Comfort Noise Standards Supported Comfort Noise CN defines how the Mediatrix 2102 processes silence periods information it receives Note Comfort noise only applies to the G 711 codec G 723 and G 729 CNG is not configurable because it is part of the codec During silence periods the Mediatrix 2102 may receive CN packets containing information about background noise When enablin
34. It is printed on the label located on the bottom side of the unit gt It is located in the sysMgmtMIB under the sysMacAddress variable gt You can dial the following digits on a telephone connected to the Mediatrix 2102 1 The Mediatrix 2102 answers back with its MAC address See Special Vocal Features on page 15 for more details Before Proceeding Most computers are configured by default to automatically obtain an IP address via DHCP If the computer connected to the Mediatrix 2102 is set with a static IP address you must change the setting Please refer to your operating system s documentation to perform this task 10 100 BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 Cable When connecting an Ethernet cable to the Mediatrix 2102 use a standard telecommunication cord with a minimum of 26 AWG wire size It is possible to use either a crossover or straight Ethernet cable to connect in the Network or Computer connectors These connectors perform automatic MDI MDIX detection meaning that they adapt to the type of cable connected to them The auto MDI MDIX feature works only when the connectors are configured in auto detect mode see Ethernet Connection Speed on page 69 for more details Whenever you force the Mediatrix 2102 to use a specific Ethernet mode for example 100Mb Full Duplex the type of cable to use depends on the other peer For example a straight cable is required to connect the Mediatrix 2102 to a hub or a switch while a
35. Pacific Time Canada amp US PST8DST7 M4 1 0 02 00 00 M10 5 0 02 00 00 Mountain Time Canada amp US MST7DST6 M4 1 0 02 00 00 M10 5 0 02 00 00 Central Time Canada amp US CST6DST5 M4 1 0 02 00 00 M10 5 0 02 00 00 Eastern Time Canada 8 US EST5DST4 M4 1 0 02 00 00 M10 5 0 02 00 00 Atlantic Time Canada AST4DST3 M4 1 0 02 00 00 M10 5 0 02 00 00 GMT Standard Time GMTODMT 1 M3 5 0 01 00 00 M10 5 0 02 00 00 W Europe Standard Time WEST 1DWEST 2 M3 5 0 02 00 00 M10 5 0 03 00 00 China Standard Time CST 8 Tokyo Standard Time TST 9 Central Australia Standard Time CAUST 9 30DCAUST 10 30 M10 5 0 02 00 00 M3 5 0 02 00 00 Australia Eastern Standard Time AUSEST 10AUSDST 11 M10 5 0 02 00 00 M3 5 0 02 00 00 UTC Coordinated Universal Time UTCO 186 Mediatrix 2102 CHAPTER 18 Digit Maps This chapter describes how to use a digit map Standards Supported D oh In the Unit Manager Network Administration Manual refer to chapter Dial Map Parameters What is a Digit Map A digit map allows you to compare the number users just dialed to a string of arguments If they match users can make the call If not users cannot make the call and get an error signal It is thus essential to define very precisely a digit map before actually implementing it or your users may encounter calling problems Because the Mediatrix 2102 cannot predict how many digits it needs to accumulate before transmission you could use the digit map for inst
36. ROH Tone 1400 Hz 0 1 0 1 19 dBm 2060 Hz 19 dBm 2450 Hz 19 dBm 2600 Hz 19 dBm Message Waiting Indicator Tone 425 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 10 16 dBm Network Congestion Tone 425 Hz 0 24 0 24 16 dBm Ring AC 45 VRMS 25 Hz 1 0 4 0 DC 15 Vde Input Impedance 220 Q 820 Q 115 nF Default Caller ID BELLCORE FXS Line Attenuation Input 3 dBr FXS Line Attenuation Output 10 dBr 280 Mediatrix 2102 Germany Reference Manual SIP Version Germany2 The following parameters apply if you have selected Germany 2 as location Table 165 Germany 2 Parameters Parameter Value On Off Sequence s Elect Levels Dial Tone 425 Hz CONTINUOUS 16 dBm Busy Tone 425 Hz 0 48 0 48 16 dBm Ringback Tone 425 Hz 1 0 4 0 16 dBm Special Information Tone 900 Hz 0 33 16 dBm 1400 Hz 0 33 1800 Hz 0 33 1 0 Stutter Dial Tone 425 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 CONTINUOUS 16 dBm Confirmation Tone 425 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 End 16 dBm Receiver Off Hook ROH Tone 1400 Hz 0 1 0 1 19 dBm 2060 Hz 19 dBm 2450 Hz 19 dBm 2600 Hz 19 dBm Message Waiting Indicator Tone 425 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 10 13 dBm Network Congestion Tone 425 Hz 0 24 0 24 13 dBm Ring AC 45 VRMS 25 Hz 1 0 4 0 DC 15 Vdc Input Impedance 220 Q 820 Q 115 nF Default Caller ID BELLCORE FXS Line Attenuation Input 0 dBr FXS Line Attenuation Output 7 dBr Mediatrix 2102 281 Appendix D Count
37. Verifying the DHCP Assigned IP Addresses You can query the MIB structure to see the IP addresses that have been assigned to the Mediatrix 2102 Those IP addresses are located under the pAddressStatus folder in read only variables This assumes that you know the local host IP address There are two ways to get the local host IP address of a Mediatrix unit gt Connect a telephone into one of the FXS ports of the Mediatrix unit dial 0 and listen for the IP address that is given gt Use the autodetect feature of the Mediatrix Unit Manager Network product See Unit Manager Network Element Management System on page xxv for more details Mediatrix 2102 53 Chapter 4 IP Address and Network Configuration Services Static Configuration Using static IP addresses allows you to bypass the DHCP server or still be able to use the Mediatrix 2102 if you are not running a DHCP server In this case having one or more configuration source variable set to DHCP slows down the restart process If any information is set to come from the DHCP server for example SNTP address the restarting unit waits for a maximum period of two minutes if the DHCP server cannot be reached even if most other settings are set to static The reason for this delay is that the Mediatrix 2102 cannot function as configured if part of its configuration the DHCP information is unavailable To avoid this problem you can set all configuration so
38. When receiving TFTP error ACCESS or HTTP response 401 If the local syslog messages are enabled see Local Syslog on page 236 for more details you can view these messages on the web interface LED States When the Mediatrix 2102 initiates a software download the LEDs located on the front panel indicate the status of the process Table 85 LED States in Software Download Event LED State Image downloading and writing Each LED blinks alternately at 1 Hz with 1 4 ON duty cycle Warning Do not turn the Mediatrix 2102 off while in this state Image download failed All LEDs blink at the same time at 2 Hz with 50 ON duty cycle for 4 seconds See LED Indicators on page 15 for a detailed description of the LED patterns related to the software download process 131 Chapter 10 Software Download Download Procedure MIB Variable You can validate the result of the last software update by checking the state of the sysAdminLastDownloadSoftware MIB variable Download via TFTP The following steps explain how to download a software by using the TFTP protocol a In the Unit Manager Network Administration Manual refer to chapter Performing Actions on Mediatrix Units ad ba section Downloading a Software Version K To download a software via TFTP 1 If not already done setup the Image server used to download the software see Before Downloading on page 125
39. You can globally set the transport type for all the lines of the Mediatrix 2102 to either UDP User Datagram Protocol or TCP Transmission Control Protocol The Mediatrix 2102 will include its supported transports in its registrations K To set the transport type 1 In the groupAdminMIB set the groupAdminState variable to locked When in administrative state all lines are unregistered This solves the possible problems of registration synchronization and of an active call that uses a transport that was just disabled 2 In the sipMIB set the priority order of the transport in the sip TransportQValue variable A qvalue parameter is added to each contact This only applies if the transport specific registration is enabled The qvalue gives each transport a weight indicating the degree of preference for that transport A higher value means higher preference The format of the qvalue string must follow the RFC 3261 ABNF a floating point value between 0 000 and 1 000 If you specify an empty string no qvalue is set in the contacts Because this variable is located in a table you can have a different value for each line 3 Enable the transport by setting the sipTransportEnable variable to enable The UDP and TCP transport types are located in a table with two rows one for each type You can enable disable a type for the unit If the TCP transport type is not used Mediatrix strongly suggests to disable it 4 Enable the tr
40. could not be sent to msHost 0 0 0 0 and msTrapPort 162 Warning Dec 31 1925 SystemManager Warming Dec 31 19 48 SystemManager Warming Dec 31 19 5 8 SystemM anager Warming Dec 31 19 6 3 SystemM anager Warming Dec 31 1975 SystemManager Warming Dec 31 19 3 3 SystemManager Warning Dec 31 1995 SystemManager Warming Dec 31 19105 SystemManager EE terre Please refer to Local Syslog on page 236 for information on how to set the system log parameters 34 Mediatrix 2102 Bandwidth Management Page Reference Manual SIP Version Bandwidth Management Page The Bandwidth Management web page allows you to limit the upload bandwidth on the WAN interface See WAN Upstream Bandwidth Control on page 97 for more information H Note Applies to the Mediatrix 2102 312 322 only gt To configure the bandwidth management 1 In the web interface click the Bandwidth Management link or the Bandwidth button This links to the Bandwidth Management web page Figure 16 Bandwidth Management Web Page Bj Mediatrix 2102 Microsoft Internet Explorer Bee File Edit View Favorites Tools Help bak gt O A Gt Reach Favorite Queda G Ei 8 zi HH Address http 192 168 10 1 x Ce Mediatrix 2102 overview Admin config File Password Log Bandwidth STUN 2 Bandwidth Management Enable Disable Maximum outgoing bandwidth all
41. groupAdminDescription The description of the group groupAdminParent The parent s group This is the index groupAdminIndex taken from this table Group groupAdmin Table of the group that is the parent If there is no parent the value 1 is used ifAdmin Table The ifAdmin table is similar to the groupAdmin table except that it applies to interfaces Table 28 ifAdmin Parameters Parameter Description ifAdminSetAdmin Command to set the administrative state of the current interface ifAdminAdminState The administrative state of the current interface It indicates the current maintenance state of a gateway component Available states are unlocked shutting down locked and permanentLock ifAdminOpState The operational state of the current interface This state reflects the component s internal state Available states are enabled and disabled ifAdminUsageState The usage state of the current interface It indicates the running state of a voice component Available states are idle active busy and idle unusable ifAdminParentType The parents type of this interface ifAdminParent The index of the parent of this interface Mediatrix 2102 47 Chapter 3 MIB Structure and SNMP SNMP Access Limitation SNMP Access Limitation The SNMP access to the Mediatrix 2102 can be limited to only one of its interface or all interfaces K To limit the access to the SNMP interface
42. use the Site Specific instead of Vendor Specific information You can locate the MAC address as follows K on the label located on the bottom side of the unit K in the sysMgmtMIB under the sysMacAddress variable K You can dial the following digits on a telephone connected to the Mediatrix 2102 1 The Mediatrix 2102 answers back with its MAC address See Special Vocal Features on page 15 for more details Mediatrix recommends to reserve an IP address with an infinite lease for each Mediatrix 2102 on the network Connection to the DHCP Behaviour When the Mediatrix 2102 restarts it requests a DHCP offer to get its IP addresses and network information The Mediatrix 2102 waits four seconds before sending another request The delay between each request is increased exponentially after each request up to a maximum delay of 64 seconds and then restarts at a 4 seconds delay K first request 4 seconds delay K second request 8 seconds delay K third request 16 seconds delay K fourth request 32 seconds delay K fifth request 64 seconds delay K sixth request 4 seconds delay K seventh request 8 seconds delay K etc The Mediatrix 2102 stops broadcasting as soon as it receives at least one reply If the offer is valid the Mediatrix 2102 takes it and continues its initialization procedure L Note If the localHostSelectConfigSource variable is set to static and any other xxSelectConfigSource variable is set to dhcp the Med
43. 0 9 dBm Special Information Tone 950 Hz 0 33 0 03 0 33 0 03 0 33 1 0 9 dBm 1400 Hz 1800 Hz Stutter Dial Tone 425 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 CONTINUOUS 9 dBm Confirmation Tone 425 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 End 9 dBm Receiver Off Hook ROH Tone 1400 Hz 0 1 0 1 19 dBm 2060 Hz 19 dBm 2450 Hz 19 dBm 2600 Hz 19 dBm Message Waiting Indicator Tone 950 Hz 0 33 0 03 9 dBm Network Congestion Tone 425 Hz 0 25 0 25 9 dBm Ring AC 45 VRMS 25 Hz 1 0 4 0 DC 15 Vdc Input Impedance 600 Q Default Caller ID BELLCORE FXS Line Attenuation Input 3 dBr FXS Line Attenuation Output 3 dBr Mediatrix 2102 283 Appendix D Country Specific Parameters Israel Israel The following parameters apply if you have selected Israel as location Table 168 Israel Parameters Parameter Value On Off Sequence s Elect Levels Dial Tone 400 Hz CONTINUOUS 15 dBm Busy Tone 400 Hz 0 5 0 5 15 dBm Ringback Tone 400 Hz 1 0 3 0 15 dBm Special Information Tone 1000 Hz 0 333 15 dBm 1400 Hz 0 333 1800 Hz 0 333 1 0 Stutter Dial Tone 400 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 CONTINUOUS 15 dBm Confirmation Tone 400 Hz 0 17 0 14 0 34 15 dBm Receiver Off Hook ROH Tone 1440 Hz 0 12 0 88 20 dBm 2060 Hz 20 dBm 2452 Hz 20 dBm 2600 Hz 20 dBm Message Waiting Indicator Tone 400 Hz 0 16 0 16 x 10 CONTINUOUS 15 dBm Network Congestion Tone 400 Hz 0 25 0 25 15 dB
44. 1204 the call is automatically redirected to line 3 of the Mediatrix 2102 142 Mediatrix 2102 Line Selection Algorithm Reference Manual SIP Version Reserving an FXS Line You can reserve an FXS line for specific individuals For instance these individuals could be the management team members of a company If the telephone numbers of the management team are 221 and 222 and you want to reserve an FXS line for their exclusive use configure the Mediatrix 2102 as follows lineSelectionDigitMap FXS line 1 221 222 lineSelectionDigitMap FXS line 2 xxx The management team can thus use all FXS lines while others can only use lines 2 3 and 4 Line Selection Algorithm Upon receiving a call you can define in which way the Mediatrix 2102 selects a line to distribute the call load across all lines Before accepting to use a line the Mediatrix 2102 must check the following K The line s administrative status is idle K The line is configured to allow IP to line calls If the above three criteria are met the line can be used to place a call otherwise the IP to line call is rejected K To define how to use lines 1 In the lineGroupingMIB locate the lineGroupingGroupContfig Table group 2 Set the algorithm to select a line on an incoming IP to line call in the lineGrpConfLineSelectionAlgorithm variable Table 92 Line Selection Algorithm Algorithm Description roundRobin The unit starts from the
45. 127 Download ProCe dure accio a aa lod 128 Extracting the Zip Files iii ds 128 Setting Up the IMage Rath ccoo deie reen ER A A RARA eine Rinde renta EEN 128 Software Download Ee T 130 Download Viet TEE 132 Download via HTTP a ecos 133 Automatic Software Update sic coccion A Edge tte 134 Spanning Tree Protocol STP EE 136 Software Downgrade ET 137 Emergency Software Procedure cccccccccccsseeseaeccnteeedeccanteeseadeateesadecenasnesededabeneadaceneesaaecenaeeededeneteneccenaeeeses 138 Using the Emergency SoftWare vecinita A cece lena A aa seven ceca aaa et 138 Chapter 11 Ling CONAQUIAION susi ii 139 Lines Administrative Stale iii id ii di dd dida 139 NR nts de Tell LECH 139 Permanent Administrative State i ii add 140 Line GROUPING P 140 Unregistered Line Behaviour azasaat 44 vE 3 3440 idad cite EA cdi id 140 Flash ROOK DeteCthom iiien A A id 141 Source Line SelectiOn imita add T ida 142 Examples of Source Line Selection USE sirieni ipitie tesstecsnusdennaiaesusednensteseetinessncatene ces 142 Line Selection Algorithm sese 143 Loop CUTE ii A dota diia 144 Chapter 12 Voice EE 145 Codec Descripti nS sionis aa aa a a a a A EEE 145 G 711 PEMA and POM T 145 EE O 146 G72 teres restate E E A T E A N E eee ene ree 146 Mediatrix 2102 xi Contents Preferred Codec essere 147 Enabling Individual Codecs ccoo dai di ARRE 147 Packetization Du TEE 148 DTMF Transport Ee 149 DTME Transport Using SIP INFO sss escasos s e
46. 16 hexadecimal format 0 9 A F Prepending Ox to the value instructs the unit to interpret it as hexadecimal For instance the decimal IP address 192 168 0 9 translates to OxC0 0xA8 0x0 0x9 in hexadecimal format Octal You can enter IP addresses in base 8 octal format Prepending 0 to 0 7 the value instructs the unit to interpret it as octal For instance the decimal IP address 192 168 0 9 translates to 0300 0250 00 011 in octal format Mediatrix 2102 51 Chapter 4 IP Address and Network Configuration IP Addresses You can make combinations of the three bases in a single string because each number in the string is interpreted separately For instance 0300 0xA8 000 9 translates to the decimal IP address 192 168 0 9 There may be some confusion between the three available IP address formats In particular it is important to understand that prefixing 0 to the values makes them interpreted as octal values For instance the string 192 168 0 009 is not valid because 009 is interpreted in octal and the digit 9 does not exist in that base Provisioning Source The Mediatrix 2102 IP address information may come from a variety of sources Table 32 IP Address Provisioning Sources Source Description Static You manually enter the value and it remains the same every time the Mediatrix 2102 restarts If you do not specify a value a default static value applies DHCP The v
47. 169 ls elle EC EE 170 sipInteropReuseCredentialENable eee eee 81 178 SiplnteropRingingResponaeC Ode sees sees eee eee 180 sipInteropSdpDirectionAttributeENable sese 175 sipInteropSendUAHeaderEnablle 22 c cccccccccesscsesencceceesssesus ces dd de nea 164 SipINteropSeSSiON RE EC Le TT 165 sipInteropSymmetricUdpSourcePortEnable sss 172 SipInterop Mel Ce EE sipInteropTransmissionTimeout SipOutbound Proxy Gonnig ida SlpOufboundProsvtbcp ite peche ode 61 76 SipOutbound Proxy EE 61 75 elef tele GE 61 75 SIPOULDOUNCPLOxyStatiCHOSt ceeceececeeeseseseeeeteeeeeeeesescseseeeeeeeeeeesecacaeaeaeeeeeeececevacaeaeaeeeeeeesesacacaeaeeeeeeeeesavecaeaeesaeaeaees 76 SIpOUIDOUndProxvStancPort sees eee 76 80 ll EN Ee Ee at ira eid decease iaa dial avec aoe ane eens 174 312 Mediatrix 2102 Reference Manual SIP Version lee ENEE 81 173 SIG E OR E 163 SipbeostrartbcpfiteGpechftect ode 62 72 sipRegistrarHost sipRegistrarPort sipRegistrarStaticHost sipRegistrarStaticPort sipRegistrationCMAReTTeSH EE sipRegistrationProposedExpirationValue Sipbebegistraton Time sipServerSelectConfigSource ls Ree e EE sipTransportEnable sipTransportQValue S Sip TransponReoistrationEnable eee eee SIpUAAUTOPasSWOTdO T SsIPUAAuthi TT SIPVAA UHU nT sipUADisplayName a SIPUAMaInUSEIMMaAMG succionar itive antes Ge iaa sipUAMaximumSessionExpiration jean sipUAMinimumS
48. 232 Mediatrix 2102 CHAPTER 25 Syslog Daemon This chapter describes how to configure and use the Syslog daemon Syslog Daemon Configuration Standards Supported The Syslog daemon is a general purpose utility for monitoring applications and network devices with the TCP IP protocol With this software you can monitor useful messages coming from the Mediatrix 2102 unit If no Syslog daemon address is provided by a DHCP server or specified by the administrator no messages are sent For instance if you want to download a new software into the Mediatrix 2102 you can monitor each step of the software download phase Furthermore if the unit encounters an abnormal behaviour you may see accurate messages that will help you troubleshoot the problem E In the Unit Manager Network Administration Manual refer to chapter Administration Parameters section Syslog Daemon K To enable the Syslog daemon 1 In the syslogMIB locate the syslogMsgMaxSeverity variable This variable indicates which syslog message is processed Any syslog message with a severity value greater than the selected value is ignored by the agent e disabled e critical error warning informational debug A higher level mask includes lower level masks e g Warning includes Error and Critical The default value is informational The following are some of the messages the unit sends Table 135 Syslog Messages Examples Event Level
49. 255 mA P 6 15 W Operating Environment Table 150 Operating Environment Parameter Description Operating Temperature 0 C to 40 C Humidity Up to 85 non condensing Storage 20 C to 70 C Dimensions and Weight Table 151 Dimensions and Weight Parameter Description Dimensions 14 cm x 20 cm x 5 cm 5 5 in x 8 in x 2 in approx Weight 454 g 1 2 Ib with power supply unit Warranty All Mediatrix products carry Mediatrix Telecom Inc s standard one year hardware and software warranty An extended warranty is available Mediatrix 2102 265 Appendix B Standard Hardware Information Warranty 266 Mediatrix 2102 APPENDIX Cabling Considerations This Appendix describes the pin to pin connections for cables used with the Mediatrix 2102 Warning To reduce the risk of fire use only No 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord Straight Through RJ 45 Cable The RJ 45 connector is commonly used for network cabling and for telephony applications It is used to wire both ends identically so the signals pass straight through RJ 45 cabling is also known as Twisted pair Ethernet TPE Unshielded twisted pair UTP and 10 100 Base T Figure 41 RJ 45 Cable Table 152 RJ 45 Pinout Information Colour Coding Pin Function garna 568A EIATIA 5695 1 Transmit W
50. 261 RFC 2132 63 64 65 101 261 RFC 2347 261 RFC 2348 261 RFC 2349 261 RFC 2475 227 RFC 2516 90 RFC 2543 77 175 179 RFC 2543bis 171 RFC 2616 25 RFC 2617 33 261 RFC 2705 187 RFC 2782 79 RFC 2833 149 261 RFC 2976 150 RFC 3164 233 261 RFC 3261 77 164 166 171 174 177 179 261 RFC 3263 79 RFC 3264 175 RFC 3389 261 RFC 3489 181 sip replaces 01 draft 170 sip replaces 03 draft 170 Telecordia GR 1401 CORE Issue 1 June 2000 221 static setting DNS address as 55 static information configuration file download server 108 Image 127 management server 226 setting all configuration sources to 54 SIP outbound proxy 76 SIP proxy server 74 SIP registrar server 72 SNTP 184 syslog daemon 234 see also DHCP information statistics by syslog 238 resetting 238 RTP 237 setting how to collect 237 viewing 237 straight through cable see cabling STUN configuration via web interface 36 configuring 182 defined 181 Mediatrix 2102 323 Index subnet mask setting 30 54 subscriber services call forward on busy 207 on no answer 209 unconditional 205 call transfer attended transfer 214 blind transfer 213 call waiting 211 conference call 215 hold 203 direction attributes 175 second call 204 support services xxvi syslog daemon configuring the application 235 customizing messages local host 235 local time 235 MAC address 235 defined 233 DHCP information using 234 en
51. 76 Mediatrix 2102 Outbound Proxy Server Reference Manual SIP Version Loose Router Configuration Standards Supported You must specify the type of routing of the outbound proxy configured in sipOutboundProxyHost does H zi Note This feature is currently located under the mediatrixExperimental branch of the MIB structure See MIB Structure on page 43 for more details K To set the outbound proxy router status 1 In the sipMIB locate the sipOutboundProxyContfig variable The following values are available Table 58 Outbound Proxy Router Status Value Description looseRouter This is the most current method for SIP routing as per RFC 3261 and will become the standard behaviour once RFC 3261 compliance is achieved See SIP Outbound Proxy From RFC 3261 on page 75 for details strictRouter Pre RFC 3261 RFC 2543 compatible SIP routing The initial route for all SIP requests contains the home domain proxy address the Request URI Requests are directed to the outbound proxy In other words the Request URI is constructed as usual using the home domain proxy and the user name but is used in the route set The Request URl is filled by the outbound proxy address Loose Router A proxy is said to be loose routing if it follows the procedures defined in the RFC 3261 specification section 6 for processing of the Route header field These procedures separate the destination of
52. DESCRIPTION When the Mediatrix 2102 configuration is entirely static and change the configuration source of any server from static to DHCP the service related to the server is not accessible Be POSSIBLE CAUSE If none of the xxxConfigSource variables in the pAddressStatus folder are set to dhcp then the Mediatrix 2102 does not send a DHCP REQUEST message This is the case if e YOU set all xxxSelectConfigSource variables to something other than dhcp and you restart the Mediatrix 2102 or e YOU select the setConfigSourcesStatic option of the sysAdminCommand variable and you restart the Mediatrix 2102 Whenever the xxxSelectConfigSource variable of a specific server e g syslog server is set to dhcp then no IP address can be assigned to that server this does not trigger a DHCP request The service is therefore not functional the corresponding xxxHost variable is set to 0 0 0 0 and the corresponding xxxPort variable is not accessible the GET request result is ERROR in the pAddressStatus folder LF Note In the case of the SIP servers the corresponding xxxPort variable is accessible SOLUTION Restart the Mediatrix 2102 or set the proper xxxSelectConfigSource variable to static 250 Mediatrix 2102 Software Upgrade Issues Reference Manual SIP Version Software Upgrade Issues The following are issues you may encounter when performing a software upgrade operation DESCRIPTION An error occurs when the M
53. DNS SRV result K To enable the DNS SRV record lock feature 1 In the sipinteropMIB set the sipinteropLockDnsSrvRecordPerCallEnable variable to enable All messages during a call or registration use the same SRV record If you set this variable to disable which is the default value the Mediatrix 2102 rather follows the behaviour as described in RFC 3263 2 Restart the Mediatrix 2102 so that the changes may take effect DNS SRV Oriented Settings The following parameters have an effect on the DNS SRV behaviour Table 61 DNS SRV Oriented Settings Parameter Description sipInteropTransmissionTimeout e Has a dramatic effect should a server time out since a default 32 s delay would be introduced at every call Mediatrix recommends a maximum of 2 3 s when using DNS SRV e See Transmission Timeout on page 171 for more details sipPenaltyBoxTime If sipPenaltyBoxEnable is set to enable A timed out server is considered not responding for this amount of time Can be seen as the time it will take to retry a server that failed responding See SIP Penalty Box on page 173 for more details sipInteropReuseCredentialEnable If sipInteropReuseCredentialEnable is set to enable If there is not a shared database between servers this could lead to authentication problems because a REGISTER and an INVITE can be sent to any server not necessarily the same one
54. E Glossary Real Time Control Protocol RTCP Real Time Control Protocol RTCP RTCP is the control protocol designed to work in conjunction with RTP It is standardized in RFC 1889 and 1890 In an RTP session participants periodically send RTCP packets to convey feedback on quality of data delivery and information of membership Realtime Transport Protocol RTP An IETF standard for streaming realtime multimedia over IP in packets Supports transport of real time data like interactive voice and video over packet switched networks Registrar Server A server that accepts REGISTER requests A registrar is typically co located with a proxy or redirect server and MAY offer location services Request for Comment RFC A Request for Comments RFC is a formal document from the IIETF that is the result of committee drafting and subsequent review by interested parties Some RFCs are informational in nature Of those that are intended to become Internet standards the final version of the RFC becomes the standard and no further comments or changes are permitted Change can occur however through subsequent RFCs that supersede or elaborate on all or parts of previous RFCs Router A specialized switching device which allows customers to link different geographically dispersed local area networks and computer systems This is achieved even though it encompasses different types of traffic under different protocols creating a single more eff
55. Heartbeat For the Mediatrix 2102 a single LED represents these two link attributes If there is no link under HW control the LED is OFF When a link is established but no activity is detected the LED is ON it turns off for very short periods of time when activity is detected and blinks rapidly when the LAN is loaded Patterns and meanings of the LAN LED are described in Table 10 on page 18 Power LED The Power LED indicates whether the Mediatrix 2102 is operational at its most basic level or not It does not imply that the unit can be used only that it is capable of being used Healthy operation would be steady ON Patterns and meanings of the Power LED are shown in Table 10 on page 18 LED Patterns Table 9 describes the different states a Mediatrix unit can have and their associated LED patterns Table 9 States and LED Patterns State Description LEDs Pattern Ready In Use LAN Power Booting Follows a hardware start or a reset If a software download has to take place the unit enters the ImageDownloadInProgress state otherwise the application is started In both cases the Power LED blinks while waiting for a DHCP offer otherwise it is steady ON If a recovery is in progress the unit enters the RecoveryMode state or the RecoveryMode Pending state if the button is pressed otherwise the NormalMode state is selected NOTE The LAN LED starts as Off until the software can activate the HW control
56. If no clear channel codecs are enabled and the other endpoint is not T 38 capable the fax transmission fails peer This means that the Mediatrix 2102 cannot receive T 38 packets before receiving the 200 OK Based f Caution The Mediatrix 2102 opens the T 38 channel only after receiving the 200 OK message from the on RFC 3264 the T 38 channel should be opened as soon as the unit sends the INVITE message See Fax Issues on page 247 for more details 7 In the Unit Manager Network Administration Manual refer to chapter Ports Parameters section Port Configuration Window The following is a T 38 fax call flow Figure 37 T 38 Fax Call Flow User Agent 1 INVITE fa L J m audio 5004 RTP AVP 0 18 4 8 13 m audio 5006 RTP AVP 0 18 4 8 13 a rtpmap 0 PCMU 8000 a rtpmap 0 PCMU 8000 a rtpmap 18 G729 8000 a rtpmap 18 G729 8000 a rtpmap 4 G723 8000 a rtpmap 4 G723 8000 a rtpmap 8 PCMA 8000 a rtpmap 8 PCMA 8000 200 OK e Ringing Trying ACK Fax Tone Detected s INVITE L L m image 6006 udptl t38 m image 6006 udptl t38 a T38MaxBitRate 14400 a T38MaxBitRate 14400 a T38FaxRateManagement transferredTCF a T38FaxRateManagement transferredTCF a T38FaxFillBitRemoval 0 a T38FaxFillBitRemoval 0 a T38FaxTranscodingMMR 0 a T38FaxTranscodingMMR 0 a T38FaxTranscodingJBIG 0 a T38FaxTranscodingJBIG 0 a T38FaxVersion 0 a T38FaxVersion 0 a T38FaxUdpEC t38UDPRedundancy 200 OK a T38FaxUdpEC t38UDPRedund
57. If you have selected days in Step 6 set the time of the day when to initiate a configuration update in the configFileAutoUpdate TimeOfDay variable The time of the day is based on the snipTimeZoneString variable setting see Chapter 17 SNTP Settings on page 183 for more details You must have a time server SNTP that is accessible and properly configured or the automatic configuration update feature may not work properly It is assumed that you know how to configure your SNTP server If not refer to your SNTP server s documentation You can also refer to Chapter 17 SNTP Settings on page 183 for more details on how to configure the Mediatrix 2102 for a SNTP server The configuration files are downloaded at the first occurrence of this value and thereafter at the period defined by the configFileAutoUpdatePeriod variable Let s say for instance the automatic unit configuration update is set with the time of day at 14h00 and the update period at every 2 days e If the automatic update is enabled before 14h00 the first update will take place the same day at 14h00 then the second update two days later at the same hour and so on e Ifthe automatic update is enabled after 14h00 the first update will take place the day after at 14h00 then the second download two days later at the same hour and so on Available values are 1 and from 0 to 23 Setting the variable to 1 means that the time ofthe day at which the Mediatrix 2102
58. Management Server includes a provisioning client provisioning server and SNMP proxy server Provisioning Sequence with a Cable Modem The following describes the initial provisioning sequence of a Mediatrix 2102 that uses a cable modem Initial provisioning sequence 1 When the Mediatrix 2102 starts it broadcasts a message requesting DHCP services if the unit is configured to start in DHCP mode 2 The DHCP server responds with a set of IP addresses and network parameters one of which is the Mediatrix 2102 IP address The following are some of the network parameters assigned via DHCP e Mediatrix 2102 IP address Subnet Mask Default Router IP address Primary DNS IP address e Secondary DNS IP address Management Server IP address and port number optional e Configuration file server IP address and port number optional SIP Servers IP address and port number 3 The Mediatrix 2102 may request its configuration in two ways Dy using the IP address of the Management Server to request its configuration DV using a configuration file Mediatrix 2102 13 Chapter 1 Installation Starting the Mediatrix 2102 for the First Time Provisioning Sequence with a DSL Modem If the WAN connection type is set to PPPoE for a DSL modem see Chapter 2 Web Interface on page 25 the Mediatrix 2102 does not use a DHCP server to get its network information It rather discovers a PPP access concentrator and establishes a PPP s
59. Server defined 302 DHCP information using 225 in configuration file download 121 static information using 226 using 225 Max Forwards header in SIP 174 MDI MDIX auto 8 message waiting indicator defined 221 Notify service 223 refresh subscription 222 setting up 221 320 Mediatrix 2102 Reference Manual SIP Version MIB defined 39 in SNMP protocol 39 see also parameters MIB structure changing a parameter value 45 conformance 44 description mediatrixAdmin 43 mediatrixConfig 43 mediatrixExperimental 43 mediatrixlIpTelephonySignaling 43 mediatrixMgmt 43 mediatrixModules 43 mediatrixProducts 43 events 44 introduction 39 objects 44 OID defined 39 persistent parameters 45 SMI defined 39 SNMP messages see SNMP tables defined 46 generic 46 groupAdmin 47 ifAdmin 47 textual conventions 44 volatile parameters 45 mounting on a wall 7 MTU requirements 241 Mu y Law 145 defined 302 multicast in router service 89 N NAT in configuration file download 113 traversal setting IP address of 168 see also STUN O OID defined 39 operating temperature 6 out of band DTMF 149 overview of the product 2 D package contents 1 packetization time setting for voice codecs 148 parameters changing value of 45 using a GUI 45 penalty box in SIP 173 persistent parameters defined 45 PIN dialing defined 219 placing a call 2 port number configuration file fetching 60 configuration file server 108 port num
60. The current local host of the Mediatrix 2102 is part of the prefix for all syslog messages If you set the variable to disable the local host is not displayed in the prefix of the syslog messages Configuring the Syslog Daemon Application You shall configure the Syslog daemon to capture those messages Refer to your Syslog daemon s documentation to learn how to properly configure it to capture messages Mediatrix 2102 235 Chapter 25 Syslog Daemon Local Syslog Local Syslog The local syslog is an internal syslog server to the Mediatrix 2102 It keeps the last n syslog messages These syslog messages are displayed in the System log page of the web interface see Chapter 2 Web Interface on page 25 for more details K To set the local syslog 1 In the syslogMIB locate the syslogMsgLocalMaxSeverity variable This variable indicates which syslog message is processed by the Mediatrix 2102 Any syslog message with a severity value greater than the selected value is ignored e disabled e critical error warning informational debug A higher level mask includes lower level masks e g Warning includes Error and Critical The default value is informational The following are some of the messages the unit sends Table 138 Syslog Messages Examples Event Level Message The configuration update has been Informational The specific configuration successful configuration file fetchi
61. These files must be in a directory under the root path 3 If not already done set the configuration file path as described in Setting up the Configuration File Download on page 109 4 In the configFileFetchingMIB set the configFileTransferProtocol variable to either http or tftp If you are using the HTTP protocol to download the configuration be aware that your HTTP server may activate some caching mechanism for the file download This mechanism caches the initial file download for later processing thus preventing changes or update of the original file by the user This can cause strange problems if a user wants to edit a configuration file to modify values and upload it immediately The result will still return the original file and not the new one 5 If you are using the HTTP protocol to download the configuration and your HTTP server requires authentication set the following The user name in the configFile TransferUsername variable e The password in the configFile TransferPassword variable The Mediatrix 2102 supports basic and digest HTTP authentication as described in RFC 2617 6 Set the configFileAutoUpdateOnRestartEnable variable to enable in the configFileAutomaticUpdate group 7 In the sysConfigMIB set the sysConfigDownloadConfigFile variable to automaticinitiateFileDownload The automatic configuration update will be performed each time the Mediatrix 2102 restarts The unit configuration is only updated if a
62. UDP Protocols Group 3 Fax Clear channel G 711 or T 38 Real Time Fax Over IP protocol Stack Fax Data Compression MH Fax Transmission Up to 14 4 kbps Analog Line Interface FXS K Direct connection to a fax machine or telephone K RJ 11 connectors K DC feeding of the access line protected for over voltage K Loop current detection and hook flash detection capable K Generation of Selective Ring Table 146 Analog Line Interface Parameter Description Trunk Type Loop Start Ring Source 45 VRMS max 20 up to 50 Hz selectable sine signal Nominal Impedance BellCore compliant 600 900 ohms default setting Ring Drive Capacity Up to 4 ringer equivalents 4 RENs per port Hardware revision 7 Up to 3 ringer equivalents 3 RENs per port Hardware revision 6 Loop Current Range 15 to 32 mA factory set Default 20 mA regulated Ring Trip Detection Time 2 ring cycles max On Hook Voltage 48 VDC Frequency Response 200 Hz to 3400 Hz 3 dB Tx Rx Return Loss 600 3400 Hz 30 dB Mediatrix 2102 263 Appendix B Standard Hardware Information Audio Specifications Audio Specifications Software input and output level adjustable within the range of 30 dB to 20 dB Software adjustable dynamic and static jitter buffer protection K Programmable by country Call progress tone generation including dial tone busy tone ringback and error tones K Silence detection suppression level
63. Unit Manager Network Administration Manual refer to chapter Ports Parameters section Port afe Configuration Window K To enable G 711 VAD 1 In the voicelfMIB locate the voicelfTable group 2 Define the sensitivity of the VAD algorithm to silence periods in the voicelfG711VoiceActivityDetectionEnable variable The following settings are available Table 102 G 711 VAD Settings Setting Description Disable VAD is not used Transparent VAD is enabled It has low sensitivity to silence periods Conservative VAD is enabled It has normal sensitivity to silence periods The difference between transparent and conservative is how aggressive the algorithm considers something as an inactive voice and how fast it stops the voice stream A setting of conservative is a little bit more aggressive to react to silence compared to a setting of transparent The default value is conservative 3 Restart the Mediatrix 2102 so that the changes may take effect Mediatrix 2102 153 Chapter 12 Voice Transmissions Echo Cancellation G 729 VAD G 729 has a built in VAD in its Annex B version It is recommended for digital simultaneous voice and data applications and can be used in conjunction with G 729 or G 729 Annex A A G 729 or G 729 Annex A frame contains 10 octets while the G 729 Annex B frame occupies 2 octets The CN packets are sent in accordance with annex B of G 729 K To enable G 729 VAD 1
64. V vendor specific information DHCP setting 64 verifying the installation 24 viewing statistics and performances 237 VLAN in QoS 230 substitution values 231 vocal features special 15 IP address 15 IP address WAN 15 MAC address 15 voice activity detection 153 volatile parameters defined 45 W wall mounting the unit 7 WAN IP address in transparent address sharing 92 upstream bandwidth control 97 web interface administration 27 bandwidth management 28 configuration file upload 27 HTTP server password 27 overview 27 STUN 28 system log 27 web interface configuration access limitation 37 bandwidth management 35 choosing suitable web browser 25 configuration file upload 32 enabling 25 LAN interface 30 MAC address spoofing 31 password modify 33 web interface configuration continued password reset 34 set 30 static information 30 status 27 STUN 36 system log 34 user name modify 33 set 30 WAN connection type 30 what s new in this version xix Mediatrix 2102 325 Index W 326 Mediatrix 2102
65. a lot of jitter buffer events are received when the syslog is enabled try to increase the maximum jitter buffer value K If the delay in the voice path end to end is too long you can lower the target jitter value but ONLY if the end to end delay measured matches the target jitter value For instance if the target jitter value is 50 ms the maximum jitter is 300 ms and the delay measured is 260 ms it would serve nothing to reduce the target jitter However if the target jitter value is 100 ms and the measured delay is between 100 ms and 110 ms then you can lower the target jitter from 50 ms to 30 ms 152 Mediatrix 2102 Voice Activity Detection Reference Manual SIP Version Voice Activity Detection The Voice Activity Detection VAD defines how the Mediatrix 2102 sends information pertaining to silence This allows the unit to detect when the user talks thus avoiding to send silent RTP packets This saves on network resources However the VAD may affect packets that are not really silent for instance cut sounds that are too low The VAD can thus slightly affect the voice quality H Note You cannot disable the G 723 VAD G 711 VAD The G 711 VAD is generic when enabling VAD G 711 sends speech frames only during periods of audio activity During silence periods G 711 does not send speech frames but it may send Comfort Noise CN packets payload 13 containing information about background noise S In the
66. addresses router etc e dhcp uses the DHCP server to retrieve the configuration of the localHost MIB objects MxIpConfigSource Indicates the source used during the last restart sequence for the provisioning of the localHost MIB objects e static the user provided static values such as DNS addresses router etc e dhcp the DHCP server was used to retrieve the configuration of the localHost MIB objects Default hardcoded values for recovery mode were used MxIpDhcpSite Represents a DHCP site specific code Values can be between 128 and 254 or 0 SpecificCode You can enter this code in your DHCP server to define IP addresses Refer to Chapter 4 IP Address and Network Configuration on page 51 for more details MxFloatingPoint Represents a floating point number MxAdvancedIpPort The TCP or UDP port number range Values can be between 0 and 65535 The port number value 0 is used for special functionality defined in the variable definition MxEnableState Represents an enabled disabled state boolean value MxActivationState Represents an active inactive state boolean value MxSignalingAddress Represents a valid signalling address MxDigitMap A digit map is a sequence used to determine when the dialing of DTMFs is completed See Chapter 18 Digit Maps on page 187 fore more details Objects Conformance and Events Each MIB may have three types of data Ta
67. and solutions are designed for immediate deployment within existing network architectures delivering on the promises of VolP today Mediatrix has achieved seamless interoperability with softswitches SIP servers H 323 gatekeepers and MGCP call agents of leading VoIP vendors Analog Series Mediatrix analog series access devices and gateways connect conventional telephones fax machines legacy PBX and Key Systems to an IP network as well as provide SCN connectivity to next generation IP PBX and Key Systems Mediatrix 1102 Two Port FXS Access Device VoIP access device equipped with two FXS ports and two 10 100 BaseT Ethernet ports It serves as an ideal CPE platform for integration with an existing IP telephony architecture deployed by service providers carriers or system integrators Mediatrix 1104 Four Port FXS Access Device VoIP access device equipped with four FXS ports and one 10 100 BaseT Ethernet port It is functionally designed for desktop or wiring closet installation and is an ideal enterprise CPE platform for integration with an existing IP telephony architecture Mediatrix 1124 24 Port FXS Access Device VoIP access device equipped with a single RJ 21 TELCO connector providing twenty four FXS extensions and one 10 100 BaseT Ethernet port It is designed for multi dwelling unit multi tenant unit MDU MTU applications and is an ideal solution for legacy integration with an existing IP telephony architecture
68. base protocol is defined in RFC 2516 90 Mediatrix 2102 PPPoE Service Reference Manual SIP Version If you leave this variable empty the Mediatrix 2102 accepts the first offer that it receives 4 Set the pppoeServiceName variable with the name of the service requested to the access concentrator The variable may be set with any string of characters with a maximum of 255 characters Ifyou leave this variable empty the Mediatrix 2102 looks for any access concentrator 5 Enable the PPPoE service by setting the pppoeEnable variable to enable H zi Note When establishing a PPPoE connection the default router IP address is automatically overridden by the PPP connection s peer IP address 6 If you do not need to configure other parameters restart the Mediatrix 2102 as per Restarting the Mediatrix 2102 on page 100 Setting a User Name and Password When connecting to an access concentrator it usually requests that the Mediatrix 2102 identifies itself with a specific user name and password also called ID and secret pair This information is set in the standard PPP SEC MIB as described in RFC 1472 You can also use the web interface to enter the PPPoE user name and password See Administration Page on page 29 for more details K To configure a user name and password 1 In the PPP SEC MIB locate the pppSecuritySecretsTable This table contains the ID user name and secret password pair th
69. configuration file download may take place 7 In the sysAdminMIB initiate the configuration file download via HTTP by setting the sysConfigCommand variable to updateConfiguration The Mediatrix 2102 immediately downloads the configuration files It is the initiator of the HTTP sessions 114 Mediatrix 2102 Configuration File Download Server Reference Manual SIP Version Automatic Configuration Update You can configure the Mediatrix 2102 to automatically update its configuration This update can be done gt Every time the Mediatrix 2102 restarts gt At a specific time interval you can define Automatic Update on Restart The Mediatrix 2102 may download new configuration files each time it restarts K To set the automatic update every time the Mediatrix 2102 restarts d Set the configuration file server host and port as defined in Configuration File Server Settings on page 108 actual port assigned in the imagePrimaryPort and imageSecondaryPort read only variables in the pAddressStatus folder If you are using a DHCP server and it did not provide the proper port reconfigure it with the proper port or use a static configuration See Configuration File Server Settings on page 108 for more details f Caution When downloading via HTTP the configuration file server s port must be 80 You can query the 2 Place the configuration files to download on the computer hosting the HTTP or TFTP server
70. crossover cable is required to connect the Mediatrix 2102 to a PC See Appendix C Cabling Considerations on page 267 for more details 8 Mediatrix 2102 Hardware Connection Reference Manual SIP Version Single Computer Installation The following steps describe how to install the Mediatrix 2102 with a single computer The installation may either be performed with a cable modem or a DSL modem The resulting layout could be something similar to Figure 4 Figure 4 Single Computer Network Configuration Analog Fax Optional is h Computer Modem Mediatrix 2102 If your Internet connection requires PPPoE authentication enter a PPPoE user name and password in the Mediatrix 2102 as described in Administration Page on page 29 Ff Note Do not set the PC to use PPPoE because the Mediatrix 2102 will take care of the authentication The following figure is a global illustration of the hardware connections Figure 5 Single Computer Installation Telephone Fax i COA Connector 1 Connector 2 Power Supply Computer gt To install the Mediatrix 2102 with a single computer Mediatrix 2102 312 322 1 Before you begin be sure that all of your hardware is powered off including the PC modem and Mediatrix 2102 2 Connect analog telephones or fax machines into the Phone Fax connectors 3 Connect a 10 100 BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 cable into the Network connector of the Mediatr
71. distance toll charges for realized savings Supports 10 Mb s and 100 Mb s Ethernet networks Upgrades software easily for future enhancements v v v v Uses the latest standards in Internet Telephony e SIP protocol for call management e 7 38 for fax relay gt Supports the following Codecs s G711 p law A law e G723 1A G729Arev B e 7 38 fax over UDP or TCP K Supports Quality of Service technologies e Differentiated Services DS Field IEEE 802 1q user priority tagging gt Offers an intuitive Web based management interface to simplify operation and support Placing a Call You can place a call from a telephone or fax connected to a Mediatrix 2102 The unit automatically detects if the call originates from a voice or fax transmission and acts accordingly When placing a call the Mediatrix 2102 collects the DTMF digits dialed and sends a message to the Registrar Server The Registrar Server sends back a list of contacts where the dialed number could be located When placing an Internet telephony call from one location to another the voice signals pass through the Mediatrix 2102 The voice signals are compressed into data packets which are then diverted by the unit onto an IP data network such as a LAN a WAN or the public Internet Upon reaching its destination the data is converted back into voice signals and then fed into the corresponding endpoint The Mediatrix 2102 utilizes technology that optimizes available bandwidt
72. e See SIP Credential on page 178 for more details Mediatrix 2102 81 Chapter 6 DNS SRV Configuration DNS SRV Oriented Settings 82 Mediatrix 2102 CHAPTER 7 Country Specific Configuration This chapter describes how to set the Mediatrix 2102 with the proper country settings Caller ID Information The caller ID is a generic name for the service provided by telephone utilities that supply information such as the telephone number or the name of the calling party to the called subscriber at the start of a call In call waiting the caller ID service supplies information about a second incoming caller to a subscriber already busy with a phone call However note that caller ID on call waiting is not supported by all caller ID capable telephone displays In typical caller ID systems the coded calling number information is sent from the central exchange to the called telephone This information can be shown on a display of the subscriber telephone set In this case the caller ID information is usually displayed before the subscriber decides to answer the incoming call If the line is connected to a computer caller information can be used to search in databases and additional services can be offered The following basic caller ID features are supported K Date and Time Calling Line Identity Reason for Absence of Calling Line Identity gt gt gt Calling Party Name gt Reason for Absence of Calling Par
73. enable 30 125 conservative enable 30 125 conservative enable 30 125 conservative You can perform GET and SET operations on these parameters 46 Mediatrix 2102 Tables Reference Manual SIP Version Variables for Administrative Commands Administrative commands are built on a hierarchical structure of parents children A command applied on a parent is propagated to all of its children There are two tables used to define administrative commands to groups K groupAdmin A group may be the unit itself gateway or other instances There are no instances other than the gateway defined at this moment K ifAdmin This table applies to each interface of the unit groupAdmin Table The groupAdmin table sends administrative commands at the highest instance in a hierarchy such as the gateway Table 27 groupAdmin Parameters Parameter Description groupSetAdmin Command to set the administrative state of the system groupAdminState The administrative state of the group Indicates the current maintenance state of a group Available states are unlocked shutting down and locked groupOpState The operational state of the group It reflects the group s internal state Available states are enabled and disabled groupUsageState The usage state of the group Indicates the running state of a group Available states are idle active busy and idle unusable groupAdminType The type of resources managed by the group
74. enable disable the service on a per line basis You can find the current status of the service in the subscriberServicesBlindTransferStatus read only variable under the subscriberServicesIfStatusTable Using Blind Call Transfer The following is the procedure to use this service on the user s telephone K To transfer a current call blind 1 Perform a Flash Hook by pressing the Flash button on your analog telephone This puts the call on hold Wait for the transfer tone three beeps Dial the number to which you want to transfer the call Wait for the ringback tone then hang up your telephone The call is transferred You can also wait for the third party to answer if you want In this case the call transfer becomes attended If you want to get back to the first call the call on hold you must perform two Flash Hooks You are back with the first call and the third party is released Mediatrix 2102 213 Chapter 20 Subscriber Services Call Transfer Attended Transfer The attended call transfer service is sometimes called Transfer with Consultation It allows a user to transfer a call on hold to an active call The individual at the other extension or telephone number must answer to complete the transfer The call hold and second call services must be enabled for this service to work See Call Hold on page 203 and Second Call on page 204 Enabling Attended Call Transfer You must e
75. exceeds 15 seconds The configuration file XXX was not fetched The HTTP session with server XXX timed out Set sysAdminDownloadConfigFileStatus to fail Session closed by The HTTP server closed the Send a syslog warning message including the peer session file location name with the HTTP server address The configuration file XXX HTTP transfer session was closed by peer host XXX Set sysAdminDownloadConfigFileStatus to fail Transfer error Received an HTTP error other Send a syslog warning message including the than 401 and 404 from the file location name with the HTTP server HTTP server address and port Error in the HTTP transfer of the configuration file XXX from host XXX and port number XXX Set sysAdminDownloadConfigFileStatus to fail 120 Mediatrix 2102 Management Server Reference Manual SIP Version Management Server You can set the Mediatrix 2102 so that it asks the management server to send it a configuration file Note Downloading a configuration file from the management server can only be performed through the TFTP protocol Management Server Configuration To download a configuration file from the management server you must setup the management server information as per Chapter 23 Management Server Configuration on page 225 Downloading from the Management Server Once the management server has been properly set up yo
76. in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas Warning Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate Note The Ringer Equivalence Number REN for this terminal equipment is 0 0 The Ringer Equivalence K z Number REN assigned to each terminal device provides an indication ofthe maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Number of all the devices does not exceed 5 Note This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada Terminal Equipment Technical Specifications LF This is confirmed by the registration number The abbreviation IC before the registration number signifies that registration was performed based on a Declaration o
77. in the sysConfigComputerEthernetSpeed variable The following values are available e Auto detect e 10Mbs HalfDuplex e 100Mbs HalfDuplex e 10Mbs FullDuplex e 100Mbs FuliDuplex A half duplex connection refers to a transmission using two separate channels for transmission and reception while a full duplex connection refers to a transmission using the same channel for both transmission and reception If unknown set the variable to Auto detect so that the Mediatrix 2102 can automatically detect the network speed Caution Whenever you force a connection speed duplex mode be sure that the other device and all AN other intermediary nodes used in the communication between the two devices have the same configuration See Speed and Duplex Detection Issues on page 69 for more details Speed and Duplex Detection Issues There are two protocols for detecting the Ethernet link speed gt An older protocol called parallel detection gt A more recent protocol called auto negotiation IEEE 802 3u The auto negotiation protocol allows to detect the connection speed and duplex mode It exchanges capabilities and establishes the most efficient connection When both endpoints support the auto negotiation there are no problems However when only one endpoint supports auto negotiation the parallel detection protocol is used This protocol can only detect the connection speed the duplex mode cannot be detected In this case the co
78. line of a gateway such as the Mediatrix 1204 See Examples of Source Line Selection Use on page 142 for more details K To set the line selection 1 In the lineSelectionMIB define the list of telephone numbers that can use this line to make calls in the lineSelectionDigitMap variable Call sources that match this digit map can use this line This string must follow the syntax for digit maps see Chapter 18 Digit Maps on page 187 This digit map will not have any effect unless the feature s status is enabled Because this variable is located in a table you can define different digit maps for each line of the Mediatrix 2102 Enable the line selection feature by setting the lineSelectionEnable variable to enable The source of the call is compared to all the source line selection digit maps defined in the previous step The result of this comparison is a list of lines that can take the call but are not necessarily available to do so Once the match list has been created there are two possibilities e The list contains one or more lines The line selection algorithm selects a line If none of the lines in the list are available the call is rejected See Line Selection Algorithm on page 143 for details e The list is empty The line selection algorithm cycles through all lines that do not use source line selection If no available lines can be found the call is rejected See Line Selection Algorithm on
79. line that follows the line used for the last IP to line call For instance if line 1 was used in the last call the unit starts with line 2 Going toward the highest line the unit selects the first line available If the highest line is unavailable the search continues from the lowest line number of the group to the line used for the last IP to line Call lowToHigh Starting from the lowest line number and going toward the highest line number the unit selects the first line available high ToLow Starting from the highest line number and going toward the lowest line number the unit selects the first line available 3 If applicable enable the call forward on no resource mechanism by setting the lineGrpConfCallForwardNoRessourceEnable to enable This mechanism reroutes an incoming IP to line call in the event that all the lines are unavailable The call is rerouted to the destination specified in the lineGrpConfCallForwardNoRessourceAddress variable 4 Set the number to call when all lines are unavailable in the lineGrpConfCallForwardNoRessourceAddress variable Accepted formats are e telephone numbers 5551111 SIP URLs such as scheme user host For instance sip user foo com This string is used literally so cosmetic symbols such as the dash in 555 xxxx should not be present 5 Restart the Mediatrix 2102 so that the changes may take effect Mediatrix 2102 143 Chapter 11 Line Con
80. location Table 159 Austria Parameters Parameter Value On Off Sequence s Elect Levels Dial Tone 450 Hz CONTINUOUS 20 dBm Busy Tone 450 Hz 0 3 0 3 20 dBm Ringback Tone 450 Hz 1 0 5 0 20 dBm Special Information Tone 950 Hz 0 33 20 dBm 1400 Hz 0 33 1800 Hz 0 33 1 0 Stutter Dial Tone 450 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 CONTINUOUS 20 dBm Confirmation Tone 450 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 End 20 dBm Receiver Off Hook ROH Tone 1400 Hz 0 1 0 1 19 dBm 2060 Hz 19 dBm 2450 Hz 19 dBm 2600 Hz 19 dBm Message Waiting Indicator Tone 450 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 10 CONTINUOUS 20 dBm Network Congestion Tone 450 Hz 0 1 0 1 x10 CONTINUOUS 20 dBm Ring AC 45 VRMS 50 Hz 1 0 5 0 DC 15 Vdc Input Impedance 2700 750 Q 150 nF Default Caller ID BELLCORE FXS Line Attenuation Input 3 dBr FXS Line Attenuation Output 10 dBr Mediatrix 2102 275 Appendix D Country Specific Parameters Brazil Brazil The following parameters apply if you have selected Brazil as location Table 160 Brazil Parameters Parameter Value On Off Sequence s Elect Levels Dial Tone 425 Hz CONTINUOUS 15 dBm Busy Tone 425 Hz 0 25 0 25 10 dBm Ringback Tone 425 Hz 1 0 4 0 15 dBm Special Information Tone 950 Hz 3 x 0 3 2 x 0 03 1 0 15 dBm 1400 Hz 1800 Hz Stutter Dial Tone 425 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 CONTINUOUS 1
81. minus plus and ASCII NUL Difference between the GMT time and the local time The offset has the format h h m m s s lf no offset is supplied for DST the alternative time is assumed to be one hour ahead of standard time One or more digits can be used the value is always interpreted as a decimal number The hour value must be between 0 and 24 The minutes and seconds values if present must be between 0 and 59 If preceded by a minus sign the time zone is east of the prime meridian otherwise it is west which can be indicated by the preceding plus sign For example New York time is GMT 5 START END Indicates when to change to and return from the daylight saving time The START argument is the date when the change from the standard to the daylight save time occurs END is the date for changing back If START and END are not specified the default is the US Daylight saving time start and end dates The format for start and end must be one of the following K n where n is the number of days since the start of the year from 0 to 365 lt must contain the leap year day if the current year is a leap year With this format you are responsible to determine all the leap year details Jn where nis the Julian day number of the year from 1 to 365 Leap days are not counted That is in all years including leap years February 28 is day 59 and March 1 is day 60 It is impossible to refer to the occasional February
82. more details Configuration variables of network parameters are defined in the MIB structure under the pAddressConfig folder This folder is subdivided into groups one for each service that requires a network parameter Configuration Source The configuration your Mediatrix 2102 uses can either be K dynamically assigned network parameters assigned by a DHCP Server K static network parameters you manually defined in the MIB structure DHCP Configuration Using DHCP assigned IP addresses ensures that the Mediatrix 2102 receives the addresses that are stored in the DHCP server This assumes that you have previously set the DHCP server with the proper values See DHCP Server Configuration on page 63 for more details The Mediatrix 2102 can receive numerous information from the DHCP server including the vendor or site specific information Note that the Mediatrix 2102 does not make a DHCP request in the following cases gt If all MIB variables xxSelectConfigSource are set to static at start up gt If one of the MIB variables xxSelectConfigSource is set to dhcp after the initialization process When the Mediatrix 2102 uses a DHCP server for network parameters it must always have at least the following three valid parameters gt IP Address gt Subnet Mask gt Default Gateway If the parameters are not valid i e the default gateway is not in the same subnet as the IP address the Mediatrix 2102 will not work properly
83. of Via in SIP 179 broadcast storm behaviour when restarting 23 Bypass connection connecting 10 12 defined 161 emergency call 161 C cabling crossover 268 straight through pin name 268 pinout information 267 see also 10 BaseT see also 100 BaseT Call another access device 197 automatic 217 dialing sequence 200 emergency bypass 161 enabling 201 forced SCN 200 Index call continued forward on busy 207 on no answer 209 unconditional 205 hold 203 direction attributes 175 IP address 199 218 LAN endpoint 198 placing 2 putting on hold 203 212 restriction on direction 218 second 204 standard 200 transfer attended 214 blind 213 using an analog gateway 199 waiting 211 without SIP server 199 call forward on busy 208 on no answer 210 unconditional 206 call transfer attended 214 blind 213 call waiting disabling 212 enabling 212 using 212 caller ID ADSI 84 country specific selecting 86 DTMF signalling 83 ETSI 300 659 1 January 2001 Annex B 83 STD 220 250 713 Issue 01 November 1993 83 TDK TS 900 301 1 January 2003 84 FSK generation 84 Bellcore GR 30 CORE 84 British Telecom BT SIN227 SIN242 84 ETSI 300 659 1 84 UK CCA specification TW P amp E 312 84 generation 83 clear channel fax enabling 158 preferred codec 158 setting 157 codec data clear channel fax 157 enabling 158 preferred 158 enabling 157 T 38 159 voice defined 145 DTMF transport type 149 150 DTMF transport type over the SIP protocol 1
84. operation failed After 4 seconds the unit restarts Blink 2 Hz 50 Blink 2 Hz 50 Blink 2 Hz 50 Blink 2 Hz 50 Mediatrix 2102 17 Chapter 1 Installation LED Indicators Table 9 States and LED Patterns Continued State Description LEDs Pattern Ready In Use LAN Power InitFailed Triggered when bad initialization parameters are detected and the unit cannot start correctly For instance the unit enters the nitFailed state when it cannot be reached from the IP network because of bad network parameters However there is an exception for network parameters if the configuration is dynamic the unit stays in the Booting state and continues to query the DHCP until it receives valid values If the configuration is static the LED pattern indicates that the unit must be reset to default settings or put into recovery mode for maintenance and correction of network values Off Off Blink 4 Hz 50 Off DiagFailed This state is triggered at start time when the hardware or software diagnostic fails This is a critical error and the unit may require RMA Off Off Off Blink 4 Hz 50 NormalMode LED Pattern Description While in the NormalMode state the LEDs of the Mediatrix 2102 behave independently the following table indicates the behaviour for each LED Table 10 LED Patterns in Operation Mode
85. page 143 for details Because this variable is located in a table you can enable disable the feature on a per line basis Examples of Source Line Selection Use FXS to FXO Line Mapping You can map an FXS line to a specific FXO line of a gateway such as the Mediatrix 1204 In this case a call made from this FXS line will always use the same FXO line To achieve that the Mediatrix 2102 and Mediatrix 1204 configurations would be something similar to the following Mediatrix 2102 IP address 192 168 0 1 sipUAMainUsername 6661111 FXS line 1 sipUAMainUsername 6662222 FXS line 2 Mediatrix 1204 IP address 192 168 0 2 lineSelectionDigitMap FXO line 1 6661111 telephonyAttributesAutomaticCallEnable enable telephonyAttributesAutomaticCallTargetAddress 6661111 lineSelectionDigitMap FXO line 2 6662222 telephonyAttributesAutomaticCallEnable enable telephonyAttributesAutomaticCallTargetAddress 6662222 lineSelectionDigitMap FXO line 3 6663333 telephonyAttributesAutomaticCallEnable enable telephonyAttributesAutomaticCallTargetAddress 6662222 lineSelectionDigitMap FXO line 4 6664444 telephonyAttributesAutomaticCallEnable enable telephonyAttributesAutomaticCallTargetAddress 6662222 With such a configuration a call made from line 2 of a Mediatrix 2102 is processed on line 2 of the Mediatrix 1204 On the other hand if a caller from the SCN calls line 3 of the Mediatrix
86. password resets back to the default value when e Resetting the password by using the hitpServerResetToDefaultPwd variable see Default User Name and Password on page 33 for more details e Performing a factory reset see Factory Reset on page 22 for more details Default User Name and Password The default user name and password the web interface uses are stored in MIB variables you can modify K To modify the default user name and password 1 In the httipServerMIB set the default user name for the web interface access authentication in the httpServerUsername variable 2 Set the default password for the web interface access authentication in the httpServerDefaultPassword variable Both changes are immediate and take effect on all new web accesses Mediatrix 2102 33 Chapter 2 Web Interface System Log Page K To reset the web authentication password to the default value 1 In the httpServerMIB set the httpServerResetToDefaultPwd variable to reset The web password is reset to the default value specified by the httpServerDefaultPassword variable The change is immediate and takes effect on all new web accesses System Log Page The System log page allows you to peruse the last n system log syslog messages sent by the Mediatrix 2102 since it last restarted K To access the System log page 1 In the web interface click the System log link or the Log button of the Menu frame The following opens
87. ports The dynamic ports are not under the authority of the IANA Most TCP IP implementations use the range 1025 to 65535 for dynamic ports instead of the range defined by the IANA Mediatrix 2102 99 Chapter 8 Transparent Address Sharing Restarting the Mediatrix 2102 RTP RTCP Base Port Range The RTP RTCP ports are allocated starting from the base port The Mediatrix 2102 may use two or four RTP RTCP ports for each FXS interface It uses two ports in case of a standard call while it uses four ports in other types of calls such as a conference call a call transfer etc K To define a RTP RTCP base port 1 In the r pMIB set the r pConfigBasePort variable with the port number you want to use as RTP RTCP base port The default RTP RTCP base port is 5004 In the case of the base port defined on 5004 e If there is currently no ongoing call and FXS connector 1 has an incoming or outgoing call it uses the RTP RTCP ports 5004 and 5005 e Ifthere is currently a standard call on FXS connector 1 and FXS connector 2 has a conference call then FXS connector 2 uses the RTP RTCP ports 5006 5007 5008 and 5009 which are the next available ports 2 If you do not need to configure other parameters restart the Mediatrix 2102 as per Restarting the Mediatrix 2102 on page 100 Restarting the Mediatrix 2102 Once all the mandatory and optional changes are done you must restart the Mediatrix 2102 so that the changes may t
88. priority Thus the SNMP and HTTP accesses performed from the WAN would be answered in lower priority See IEEE 802 1q on page 229 for more details on 802 1q priorities Set the value of the follolwing variables to enable e qosVoiceleees021qEnable e qosT38Faxleee8021qEnable The corresponding user priority configuration is enabled Restart the Mediatrix 2102 so that the changes may take effect 106 Mediatrix 2102 CHAPTER a Configuration File Download The configuration file download feature allows to update the Mediatrix 2102 configuration by transferring a configuration file via TFTP or HTTP The configuration file can either be transferred from the management server or from the configuration file download server The main difference is the session initiator which is respectively the management server and the Mediatrix 2102 The advantage of having the Mediatrix 2102 as the session initiator is to allow NAT traversal You can also manually upload a configuration file to the Mediatrix 2102 by using the web interface See Configuration File Upload Page on page 32 for more details Configuration File Download Server The service allows to download a unique file for each Mediatrix 2102 and or a file shared among many units These configuration files may be encrypted or not You have the choice to perform the configuration file download by using the TFTP protocol or the HTTP protocol You can also configure the Med
89. set call direction restriction 1 In the telephonyAttributesMIB locate the telephonyAttributesifFeatures Table group 2 Define the restriction on the direction of traffic in the telephonyAttributesCallDirectionRestriction variable Table 132 Call Direction Restrictions Restriction Description noRestriction Allows incoming and outgoing calls scnTolpOnly The Mediatrix 2102 allows to make calls but cannot receive calls ipToScnOnly The Mediatrix 2102 allows to receive calls but does not allow to make calls Because this variable is located in a table you can define a different call direction for each line of the Mediatrix 2102 IP Address Call Service The IP address call service allows a user to dial an IP address without the help of a SIP server Using this method bypasses any server configuration of your unit The user can dial an IP address and enter an optional telephone number Note that the optional telephone number is matched by using the same digit maps as a normal call Enabling IP Address Calls K To enable the IP address call service 1 In the telephonyAttributesMIB locate the telephonyAttributes pAddressCallCustomization group 2 Enable the IP address call service by setting the telephonyAttributesIpAddressCallEnable variable to enable Dialing an IP Address K To make an IP address call 1 Dial IP address prefix 2 Dial the numerical digits of the IP address and use the
90. state sequence goes as follows Figure 9 LED Patterns at Run Time OpModes ResetPending Button Held RecoveryMode Booting Button Released This leads to the following LED patterns Table 12 LED Patterns at Run Time RecoveryModePending After 5 sec LEDs Pattern State Ready In Use LAN Power ResetPending Off Off Off Blink 1 Hz 50 RecoveryModePending Blink 1 Hz 50 Blink 1 Hz 50 Blink 1 Hz 50 Blink 1 Hz 50 Booting Off Off HW On RecoveryMode Blink 0 5 Hz 75 Off HW Blink 0 5 Hz 75 Mediatrix 2102 19 Chapter 1 Installation Default Settings Switch Default Settings Switch The Default Settings switch allows you to gt Cancel an action that was started gt Revert to known factory settings if the Mediatrix 2102 refuses to work properly for any reason or the connection to the network is lost gt Reconfigure a unit At Run Time The Default Settings switch can be used at run time you can press the switch while the Mediatrix 2102 is running without powering the unit off Table 13 describes the actions you can perform in this case Table 13 Default Settings Switch Interaction Default Settings LEDs Pattern Switch Pressed Action Comments for Ready In Use LAN Power 2 to 5 seconds Restarts the No changes are made to Off Off Off Blink Mediatrix 2102 the Mediatrix 2102 settings 5 to 10 seconds Restarts the Sets t
91. that the selection file name is in lower case Some web servers are case sensitive This is useful if you are using automatic updates with multiple units If you want the units to download a new version you only have to change the path once in the mediatrix2102targetimage inf file If you were to use the imageLocation variable you would have to change the path in every unit Let s consider the following example K The directory that contains the files required for download is called SIP_v5 0 1 1_MX S5001 01 K This directory is under C Root Download Table 83 Path Configurations Example TFTP HTTP Root Path Corresponding Path Name c root download SIP_v5 0 1 1_MX S5001 01 c root download SIP_v5 0 1 1_MX S5001 01 c root download SIP_v5 0 1 1_MX S5001 01 The following are some tips to help your download process K If available use the Browse button or equivalent of the TFTP HTTP server to select the directory eliminating typographical errors gt Use the T character when defining the path to indicate sub directories For instance root download If you are using the TFTP protocol to download the software note that some TFTP servers on Windows do not recognize the character and produce an error In this case use the character I K Use basic directory names without spaces or special characters such as etc which may cause problems gt Cut and paste t
92. the REGISTER message See SIP Transport Type on page 171 for details on how to include transport parameters in the REGISTER message If enabled then the Mediatrix 2102 will send SIP messages with the transport parameter in the Contact header set to the currently supported transport type K To include the supported transport in the contact header 1 In the sipMIB indicate if the unit must include its suported transport in the Contact header in the sip TransportContactEnable variable Availables values are enable and disable If you set the variable to enable the transport parameter is either set to e transport tcp when TCP is enabled and UDP is disabled e transport udp when UDP is enabled and TCP disabled nO transport parameter when both TCP and UDP are enabled UDP Source Port Behaviour You can configure if the Mediatrix 2102 always uses the same local port the port on which it is listening for incoming packets when sending SIP traffic over UDP This is called symmetric UDP source port Symmetric UDP ports are sometimes needed to traverse NAT Firewall devices When changing this setting all destinations are automatically sent out of the penalty box when applicable This feature is currently located under the mediatrixExperimental branch of the MIB structure See MIB Structure on page 43 for more details K To set the UDP source port behaviour 1 In the groupAdminMIB set the groupAdminState variable to lo
93. the download duration gt The software download procedure does not use any DHCP and DNS services gt The primary image server is down or not properly configured gt The secondary image server is up and running well 136 Mediatrix 2102 Software Downgrade Reference Manual SIP Version In this case the Mediatrix 2102 tries to contact the primary image server As it is not available the Mediatrix 2102 retries for two minutes It contacts the secondary server after that period and starts the software download H zi Note When using the Mediatrix 2102 Mediatrix recommends to disable the Spanning Tree Protocol on the network to which the unit is connected Software Downgrade It is possible to downgrade a Mediatrix 2102 from the current version for instance v5 0rx x to an older version for instance v4 4rx x H zi Note If you perform a default reset on the Mediatrix 2102 you must download the current version into the unit before performing the software downgrade procedure K To perform a software downgrade 1 Create in a common folder under the TFTP root path the current for instance v5 0 and older for instance v4 4 applications folders 2 Re update the Mediatrix 2102 with the current application The Mediatrix 2102 runs the current software version v5 0rx x 3 Perform the software downgrade to the older application v4 4rx x as described in Download Procedure on page 128 Mediat
94. the internal host had previously sent a packet to IP address X e Port Restricted Cone Similar to a restricted cone NAT but the restriction includes port numbers Specifically an external host can send a packet with source IP address X and source port P to the internal host only if the internal host had previously sent a packet to IP address X and port P e Symmetric All requests from the same internal IP address and port to a specific destination IP address and port are mapped to the same external IP address and port If the same host sends a packet with the same source address and port but to a different destination a different mapping is used Furthermore only the external host that receives a packet can send a UDP packet back to the internal host For more details on NAT treatments refer to RFC 3489 Mediatrix 2102 113 Chapter 9 Configuration File Download Configuration File Download Server Configuration Download via HTTP The following steps explain how to download the configuration files by using the HTTP protocol K To download the configuration files via HTTP 1 Set the configuration file server host and port as defined in Configuration File Server Settings on page 108 A Caution When downloading via HTTP the configuration file server s port must be 80 You can query the actual port assigned in the imagePrimaryPort and imageSecondaryPort read only variables in the ipAddressStatus f
95. the packets When the outbound proxy is enabled the proxy is still used to create the To and the From headers but the packets are physically sent to the outbound proxy The outbound proxy is enabled if the IP address is valid i e not 0 0 0 0 The default static value in the MIB is 0 0 0 0 Configuration Source The Mediatrix 2102 must know the IP address and port number of the outbound proxy You can assign these information to the Mediatrix 2102 through a DHCP server or manually enter them yourself with the static variables Note When defining whether the Mediatrix 2102 must get its SIP server configuration through a DHCP LF server or not this is set for all the SIP servers You cannot define a different configuration for each type of server DHCP Configuration Using the DHCP configuration assumes that you have properly set your DHCP server with the relevant information See Chapter 4 IP Address and Network Configuration on page 51 for more details To use DHCP assigned information 1 In the ipAddressConfig folder locate the sipServerSelectConfigSource variable under the ipAddressConfigSipServer group This variable defines whether the Mediatrix 2102 must ask for its outbound proxy settings through a DHCP server or not 2 Set the sipServerSelectConfigSource variable to dhcp You can query the outbound proxy s IP address and port number assigned by the DHCP server in the following read only variables unde
96. the sub tree is re attached under a permanent branch Please note that Mediatrix configuration tool the Unit Manager Network does not support MIBs that are located under the mediatrixExperimental branch of the MIB structure The Unit Manager Network does not have specific tasks to manage variables in experimental MIBs Even though the Unit Manager Network can view experimental MIBs SNMP operations may not work properly on them All parameters in the MIBs have been configured by default upon start up However if you need to modify some of these parameters for example parameters related to the country in which you are use a MIB browser Mediatrix 2102 43 Chapter 3 MIB Structure and SNMP MIB Structure Textual Conventions Textual conventions are defined in a module to ensure that all variables throughout the MIB structure use the same syntax and types The type of each variable is defined in the Composed syntax line Table 23 Textual Conventions Type Definition MxlpHostName Represents an IP address or a domain name MxlpAddress Represents an IP address MxlpPort The TCP or UDP port number range Values can be between 1 and 65535 MxIpSubnetMask Represents an Internet subnet mask MxIpSelect Indicates the source to use during the next restart sequence for the provisioning ConfigSource of the localHost MIB objects e static uses static values provided by the user such as DNS
97. the system SOLUTION You can enable the SIP Context Snapshot time feature This feature is used to find if there are improperly terminated calls This could help to debug the system a Inthe syslogMIB set the syslogMsgMaxSeverity variable to debug b Configure and enable the syslog feature c Inthe sipDebugMIB set the time in minutes between snapshots in the sipDebugContextSnapshotTime variable The list of contexts currently in use are periodically output as debug level syslog messages Note that enabling this feature will also trigger an instant snapshot To disable the feature set this variable to zero 0 Note that this feature will generate more syslog traffic about 20 messages at each x minutes H zi Note This feature is currently located under the mediatrixExperimental branch of the MIB structure See MIB Structure on page 43 for more details Be POSSIBLE CAUSE It is possible that the unit is refreshing its registration and has entered a race condition between the refresh and the SIP timeouts Normally the Mediatrix 2102 cannot make or receive calls until the REGISTER request has completed successfully Because the timeout for a SIP transaction in UDP is 32 seconds it is possible to have an ongoing re REGISTER transaction at the same moment that the registration itself expires This could happen if the sipReRegistrationTime variable is set to a value lower than 32 In that case the user agent becomes unregistere
98. the user picks up the first line Note The message waiting state does not affect the Second Line feature When in an active call performing a flash hook to get access to the second line plays the usual dial tone Standard MWI Methods The Mediatrix 2102 supports two MWI methods MWI Method 1 Standards Supported The Mediatrix 2102 sends SUBSCRIBE requests to the server for each line unless there is no subscription address defined The Mediatrix 2102 then waits for NOTIFY requests containing the relevant message waiting information K To configure the MWI 1 In the mwiMIB set the notification mechanism server address to which the Mediatrix 2102 subscribes in the mwiConfigUserSubscriptionAddress variable This mechanism notifies the Mediatrix 2102 when new messages are available The address is a SIP URL such as scheme user host For instance sip user foo com Because this variable is located in a table you can define a different address for each line of the Mediatrix 2102 Mediatrix 2102 221 Chapter 22 Message Waiting Indicator Standard MWI Methods 2 Define the digits that users must dial to retrieve messages in the mwiFetchDigitMap variable Dialing these digits initiates a call to the voice messaging system For instance you could decide to put 50 as the sequence a user must dial to retrieve voice messages This sequence must be unique and follow the syntax for digit maps see Chapte
99. this variable to either static or dhcp vendor site specific option Table 42 Configuration File Fetching Source Variable Default Static Value DHCP Source configFileFetching N A Use option specified in variable Host configFileFetchingDhcpSiteSpecificCode bytes 0 3 If not specified 0 use option 43 sub option 201 bytes 0 3 configFileFetching N A Use option specified in variable Port configFileFetchingDhcpSiteSpecificCode bytes 4 5 If not specified 0 use option 43 sub option 201 bytes 4 5 If bytes 4 5 are not present use the default static value configFileF etching 192 168 0 10 N A StaticHost configFileFetching 69 N A Static Port 3 Restart the Mediatrix 2102 so that the changes may take effect The pAddressConfigSyslog group provides the configuration necessary for contacting a Syslog server S In the Unit Manager Network Administration Manual refer to chapter Administration Parameters section afe Syslog Daemon K To select the Syslog configuration source 1 In the ipAddressConfig folder locate the syslogSelectConfigSource variable under the ipAddressConfigSyslog group 2 Set this variable to either static or dhcp Table 43 Syslog Source Variable Default Static Value DHCP Source syslogHost 192 168 0 10 Use option specified in variable syslogDhcpSiteSpecificCode bytes 0 3 If not specified 0 use option 43 sub option 110 bytes 0 3
100. to the STUN server failure 6 Define the interval in seconds at which the Mediatrix 2102 sends blank keepalive messages to keep a firewall hole opened in the stunKeepAlivelnterval variable Keepalive messages are used by both the signalling protocol socket and the RTP socket to keep those connections opened through a firewall Available values range from 0 s to 120 s The default value is 30 s When set to 0 no keepalive packet is sent LF Note Keepalive messages are not supported on the T 38 socket 7 Enable the STUN client by setting the stunEnable variable to enable This enables the STUN client for all sockets VoIP signalling RTP and T 38 altogether The following behaviour also applies e Ifa unitis unable to re register and there are no ongoing calls it tries to rediscover its NAT binding for the signalling protocol socket e Ifa STUN server is unresponsive it is put in a penalty box for 60 seconds See SIP Penalty Box on page 173 for more details 8 Restart the Mediatrix 2102 so that the changes may take effect 182 Mediatrix 2102 CHAPTER 17 SNTP Settings The Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP enables the notion of time date month time into the Mediatrix 2102 It updates the internal clock of the unit which is the client of a SNTP server It is required when dealing with features such as the caller ID SNTP is used to synchronize a SNTP client with a SNTP or NTP server by using U
101. tone in the datalfClearChannelCodecPreferred variable This variable is used to decide which of PCMU or PCMA is preferred even for voice transmissions It has an impact only if a codec other than PCMU or PCMA is chosen in the voicelfCodecPreferred variable see Preferred Codec on page 147 For instance if G 723 is the preferred voice codec then PCMU and PCMA are ordered following the datalfCleaChannelCodecPreferred setting Clear channel faxes use the negotiated codec regardless of the setting applied to datalfCleaChannelCodecPreferred Mediatrix suggests to use pcma if you are located in Europe and pcmu anywhere else However you should check first which codec is supported in your telephone network 158 Mediatrix 2102 T 38 Fax Reference Manual SIP Version T 38 Fax Standards Supported T 38 fax relay is a real time fax transmission that is two fax machines communicating with each other as if there were a direct phone line between the two T 38 is called a fax relay which means that instead of sending inband fax signals which implies a loss of signal quality it sends those fax signals out of band in a T 38 payload so that the remote end can reproduce the signal locally The Mediatrix 2102 can send faxes in T 38 mode over UDP or TCP T 38 is used for fax if both units are T 38 capable otherwise transmission in clear channel over G 711 as defined is used if G 717 u law and or G 711 A law are enabled
102. variable under the ipAddressConfigSipServer group This variable defines whether the Mediatrix 2102 must get its proxy server configuration through a DHCP server or not 2 Set the sipServerSelectConfigSource variable to dhcp You can query the proxy Servers IP address and port number assigned by the DHCP server in the following read only variables under the joAddressStatusSipServer group of the pAddressStatus folder e sipHomeDomainProxyHost e sipHomeDomainProxyPort 3 Set how you want to define the proxy server information in the DHCP server Table 54 Proxy Server DHCP Information To use a Set vendor specific code The sipHomeDomainProxyDhcpSiteSpecific Code variable under the pAddressConfigSip Server group to 0 Set the proxy server IP address in the DHCP server inside the vendor specific sub option 204 hexadecimal 0xCC site specific code The sipHomeDomainProxyDhcpSiteSpecificCode variable under the ipAddressConfigSip Server group to any value between 128 and 254 Set the proxy server IP address in the DHCP server inside the site specific option you have chosen it must match the value of the sipHomeDomainProxyDhcpSiteSpecificCode variable in the unit s configuration Mediatrix 2102 73 Chapter 5 SIP Servers Proxy Server Static Configuration Use the static configuration if you are not using a DHCP server or if you want to bypass it K To use static information 1 I
103. variables set request Set the value of one or more variables messages sent from the agent to the manager get response Return the value of one or more variables This is the message returned by the agent to the manager in response to the get request get next request and set request operators trap Notify the manager when something happens on the agent SNMPv2c Messages There are a few flavours of SNMPv2 SNMPv2c being the most common The following message is specific to SNMPv2 Table 21 SNMPv2 Message Type Operator Description get bulk Uses BULK Requests to query for a tree of information about a network entity A variable put in command line specifies which portion of the object identifier space will be searched using BULK Requests All variables in the subtree below the given variable are queried as a single request and their values presented to the user This message is sent from the manager to the agent 40 Mediatrix 2102 SNMP Overview Reference Manual SIP Version SNMPv3 Messages To correct the security deficiencies of SNMPv1 v2 SNMPv3 was defined with an overall SNMP architecture and a set of security capabilities SNMPv3 includes three important services authentication privacy and access control Figure 18 To deliver these services in a flexible and efficient manner SNMPv3 introduces the concept of a principal which is the entity on w
104. work Table 110 Call Transfer Versions Supported Version Description transfer02 The Mediatrix 2102 executes transfers by using the methods described in the now expired draft ietf sip cc transfer 02 txt This draft was obsoleted Its use is deprecated and you should use this setting for backward compatibility issues only transferO5UsingRefer02 The Mediatrix 2102 executes transfers by using the methods described in the more recent draft ietf sip cc transfer 05 txt This draft version contains several enhancements over the previous ones Among others it is possible to use the Replaces header to provide a more seamless attended transfer to the user This method also uses draft ietf sip refer 02 txt Use this setting if you do not need to interop with transfer02 enabled parties See Replaces Configuration Setting on page 169 for more details This feature is currently located under the mediatrixExperimental branch of the MIB structure See MIB Structure on page 43 for more details K To set the version of transfer supported 1 In the sipinteropMIB set the sipinteropTransferVersion variable with the proper version e transfer02 e transferO5UsingRefer02 Replaces Configuration Setting You can configure how to use the Replaces header mechanism used in a transfer When supported by the target of the transfer the Replaces header mechanism ensures a more seamless transfer by permitting the initiating pa
105. xxvi D default router setting 30 54 Default Settings factory reset procedure 22 disabling 23 in recovery mode 21 DHCP information configuration file download server 108 Image 126 management server 225 SIP outbound proxy 75 SIP proxy server 73 SIP registrar server 71 SNTP 184 syslog daemon 234 see also static information DHCP server configuring 63 defined 300 IP address of setting 54 IP addresses entering 66 network configuration 64 requirement 1 site specific option 65 vendor class ID 64 vendor specific option 64 Dial Map see digit map dialing forced SCN call 200 IP address call 199 218 sequence 200 settings DTMF duration value 151 inter digit dial delay 151 standard call 200 telephone number 200 Differentiated Services DS Field in QoS 227 substituting configured value 94 digit map and characters 189 combining two expressions 189 definition 187 examples PBX emulation 194 standard calls 192 refused 191 rules 190 special characters 188 timeouts 191 timer 189 using 189 validating 190 digital series products xxiv direction attributes in SIP 175 disabling lines 139 distinctive ring 270 DNS defined 300 primary 30 54 static 55 requirement 1 secondary 30 54 static 55 318 Mediatrix 2102 Reference Manual SIP Version DNS SRV call flow 80 defined 79 enabling 80 record lock in SIP 81 downgrading software procedure 137 downloading software automatic update 134 configuration sou
106. 00 48 viii Mediatrix 2102 Reference Manual SIP Version Configuration e UE 48 Management Information Base MIR 48 Chapter 4 IP Address and Network Configuration ooccoccccccccconnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncncnnconcnnnnnnnnenenonnnnnnn 51 IP AddrOS 30S iii iia 51 IP Addresses Formats in the DHCP Server sss sese eee eee 51 PrOVISIONIN Beie 52 ele 53 Configuration Source 53 Eole EE 54 ue EE 58 Management See EE 59 Configuration e Fetching ici da ta da a A a a ai 60 ee O 60 T Teal OPI CO HESE EENEG EE ged EE Ee 61 INN 62 DHCP Server Configuration s sese ee eee 63 Connection to the DHCP Behaviour wo eee eee eee eee ee 63 Network COnfIgUL ION sciinta a A A REA dd ria 64 Vendor and Site Specific DHCP Options sse eee eee eee 64 Vendor Specific een 64 Site Specific Ee 65 Option ees T 66 Entering PAddreSSes ci E E 66 Settings Example cerrados tradi lesa 67 Eror Handing bd tl Ai id 68 DHCP Server FailireS tri ra 68 Vendor Site Specific Option MISSING tion ai bacan ds 68 El ERT 68 SS AA NN 69 speediand Duplex Detection EE 69 Chapter 5 SIP SOVET ici dl 71 E E Ee 71 Configuration SOURCE viv voii A A AA A Aaa 71 RST AT ac iaiae 73 Configuration eT vice iii ii A A data 73 Outbound Proxy ET 75 Configuration Ee 75 LOOSE HT Re els e 1 77 Chapter 6 DNS SRV Te TRT E 79 Whatisa DNS SRV TTT 79 Priority vs Weight ai 79 DNS SRV Call ROW srs sear O ON 80 Enabling DNS SRV on the Mediatrix 21072 80 DNS SRV Record Lock ci
107. 02 cannot contact the DHCP server it performs one of the following actions 1 Retries contacting the DHCP server until it answers The Mediatrix 2102 does not restart 2 Uses the replacement value from Table 51 on page 68 for all variables that depend on the DHCP This assumes that the Mediatrix 2102 is set to get its IP information via a DHCP server Vendor Site Specific Option Missing If a vendor specific or site specific option is missing from the DHCP server answer the Mediatrix 2102 uses the replacement value from Table 51 on page 68 for each variable that depends on missing vendor site specific options DNS Failures If the DNS cannot be contacted the Mediatrix 2102 performs the following steps 1 The Mediatrix 2102 sends a first request to the primary DNS server 2 If the DNS server cannot be contacted within two seconds the Mediatrix 2102 sends a request to the secondary DNS server 3 If the secondary DNS server cannot be contacted the Mediatrix 2102 uses the replacement value from Table 51 on page 68 for all variables that depend on the DNS 68 Mediatrix 2102 Ethernet Connection Speed Reference Manual SIP Version Ethernet Connection Speed You can set the speed of the Ethernet connection of the Mediatrix 2102 K To set the Ethernet connection speed 1 In the sysConfigMIB set the Ethernet connection speed of the e Network connector in the sysConfigNetworkEthernetSpeed variable Computer connector
108. 102 Chapter 22 Message Waiting Indicator on page 221 Explains how to set the Mediatrix 2102 to use the Message Waiting Indicator service Chapter 23 Management Server Configuration on page 225 Describes how to configure the Mediatrix 2102 to connect to a module or software that is used to remotely set up Mediatrix units Chapter 24 Quality of Service QoS on page 227 Defines the QoS Quality of Service features available on the Mediatrix 2102 Chapter 25 Syslog Daemon on page 233 Describes how to configure and use the Syslog daemon Chapter 26 Statistics on page 237 Defines the statistics the Mediatrix 2102 can collect Chapter 27 Maximum Transmission Unit MTU on page 241 Describes the MTU Maximum Transmission Unit requirements of the Mediatrix 2102 Mediatrix 2102 xxi Preface About this Manual Document Conventions Table 2 Mediatrix 2102 Reference Manual Chapter Appendices Continued Title Summary Chapter 28 Troubleshooting on page 243 Examines some of the problems you may experience when connecting the Mediatrix 2102 to the network and provides possible solutions Appendix A Standards Compliance and Safety Lists the various standards compliance of the Information on page 255 Mediatrix 2102 Appendix B Standard Hardware Information Lists the technical hardware information of the on
109. 102 91 Chapter 8 Transparent Address Sharing WAN Information Configuration Source WAN Information Configuration Source The Wide Area Network WAN address is the public IP address attributed to the Mediatrix 2102 This address is used for incoming signalling media and management traffic You can assign this information to the Mediatrix 2102 through an access concentrator DSL modem or DHCP server cable modem K To set the WAN IP address configuration source 1 In the pAddressContfig folder locate the localHostWanAddressSelectConfigSource variable under the pAddressConfigLocalHost group This variable indicates the source to be used for the provisioning of the WAN address It offers the following choices Table 64 WAN IP Address Source Settings Option Description localAddress The Mediatrix 2102 is not part of a WAN or the public address is the same as the localHostAddress static The Mediatrix 2102 has a static WAN address The address is configured in the localHostStaticWanAddress variable Note that this setting allows a limited NAT traversal scheme pppoe The Mediatrix 2102 uses the PPP interface s address as the WAN address Note The PPPoE service must be enabled for the WAN address to be configured automatic If the PPPoE service is enabled the Mediatrix 2102 uses pppoe as the configuration source Otherwise it uses localAddress Set the localHostWanAddressSelectConfigSour
110. 102 can be integrated with existing telephone fax and data equipment such as PCs and routers Table 144 Industry Standard Protocols Protocols Parameter Description Vocoders G 711 a law u law with optional VAD support G 723 1a G 729a G 729ab IP Telephony Protocols SIP RFC 3261 Real Time Transport Protocols RTP RTCP RFC 1889 RFC 1890 RFC 2833 RFC 3389 Network Management SNMPv3 DHCP RFC 2131 RFC 2132 TFTP RFC 1350 RFC 2347 RFC 2348 RFC 2349 Syslog RFC 3164 HTTP 1 0 RFC 1945 Basic and digest HTTP authentication RFC 2617 Data Features PPPoE client RFC 1332 RFC 1661 RFC 1334 RFC 1994 RFC 2516 RFC 1471 RFC 1472 RFC 1473 RFC 1877 Note some PPPoE RFCs are implemented partially TFTP or HTTP auto provisioning Transparent IP address sharing Mediatrix patent pending technology allowing the same IP address to be shared between both Ethernet ports and distinguishing voice traffic from data traffic DHCP server STUN client QoS ToS DiffServ 802 1p 802 1Q Mediatrix 2102 261 Appendix B Standard Hardware Information Hardware Features Hardware Features Display vv v v Connectors Power Power LED LAN activity LED Activity In Use LED indication on FXS ports Ready LED 2 RJ 11 connectors analog phone fax FXS interface 1 RJ 11 connector PSTN bypass 1 RJ 45 WAN connector 10 100 BaseT Ethernet access with auto MDI MDI
111. 102 is in this maintenance mode 2 In the sipinteropMIB set the sipInteropMaxForwardsValue variable to the value you want Any positive value means that the Max Forwards header is inserted into sent requests The default value is 70 K To disable inclusion of this header in SIP requests 1 In the groupAdmin MIB set the groupAdminState variable to locked 2 In the sipinteropMIB set the sipInteropMaxForwardsValue variable to 1 Referred By Field The SIP REFER method allows the referrer to provide information about the reference to the refer target by using the referree as an intermediary The mechanism for carrying the referrer s identity expressed as a SIP URI is the Referred By header You can configure the Referred By field used in a SIP REFER request to decide whether it contains the permanent URL provided by the SIP stack or the address of record used when the unit registered K To configure the Referred By field 1 In the sipinteropMIB set the sipinteropReferredByContfig variable to the value you want Table 113 Referred By Field Parameters Parameter Description useSipStackDefault The SIP stack populates the Referred By header field useLocalUrl Uses the local URL to populate the Referred By header field 174 Mediatrix 2102 Direction Attributes in a Media Stream Reference Manual SIP Version Direction Attributes in a Media Stream The Mediatrix 2102 allows you to define various
112. 16 keys telephones using DTMF usually have 12 keys Each key corresponds to a different pair of frequencies Each pair of frequencies corresponds to one of the ten decimal digits or to the symbol or the being reserved for special purposes Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP TCP IP protocol that enables PCs and workstations to get temporary or permanent IP addresses out of a pool from centrally administered servers 300 Mediatrix 2102 Echo Cancellation Reference Manual SIP Version Echo Cancellation Technique that allows for the isolation and filtering of unwanted signals caused by echoes from the main transmitted signal Far End Disconnect Refers to methods for detecting that a remote party has hung up This is also known as Hangup Supervision There are several methods that may be used by a PBX ACD CO to signal that the remote party has hung up including cleardown tone or a wink Federal Communications Commission FCC U S government regulatory body for radio television interstate telecommunications services and international services originating in the United States Foreign Exchange Service Station FXS A network provided service in which a telephone in a given local exchange area is connected via a private line to a central office in another i e foreign exchange rather than the local exchange area s central office This is the station telephone end of an FX ci
113. 168 0 10 configFileFetchingStaticPort Static configuration file server IP port number to use when downloading a configuration file Default Value 69 The default port value complies to RFC 1340 on the well known ports assigned numbers This value applies to a TFTP server It may be different for other servers If you are using an HTTP server to perform the configuration file download you must change the port value to 80 Setting up the Configuration File Download When performing a configuration file download you can download two different files K A generic configuration file that should be used to update a large number of units with the same configuration K A specific configuration file that contains the configuration for a single unit for instance the telephone numbers of its lines When both the generic and specific configuration files are downloaded settings from the specific configuration file always override the settings from the generic configuration file These files must be located in the same directory K To setup the configuration file download 1 In the configFileFetchingMIB set the configFileFetchingFileLocation variable with the path on the remote server of the directory where the configuration files are located The path is case sensitive hence it must be entered properly The path is relative to the root path of the transfer server configFileFetchingHost Use the character when defining t
114. 1769 183 RFC 1877 90 RFC 1889 261 RFC 1890 150 261 RFC 1945 261 RFC 1994 90 RFC 2131 63 101 261 RFC 2132 63 64 65 101 261 RFC 2347 261 RFC 2348 261 RFC 2349 261 RFC 2475 227 RFC 2516 90 RFC 2543 77 175 179 RFC 2543bis 171 RFC 2616 25 RFC 2617 33 261 RFC 2705 187 RFC 2782 79 RFC 2833 149 261 RFC 2976 150 RFC 3164 233 261 RFC 3261 77 164 166 171 174 177 179 261 RFC 3263 79 RFC 3264 175 RFC 3389 261 RFC 3489 181 ring distinctive 270 ringing response code in SIP 180 RJ 45 see cabling router installing with a 11 router service IGMP 89 multicast 89 RTCP 227 base port range 100 RTP base port range 100 S safety recommendations 1 260 warnings Circuit Breaker 20A 259 LAN Connector 259 No 26 AWG 259 Product Disposal 259 Socket Outlet 259 TN Power 259 second call service 204 secondary DNS setting 30 selection algorithm of lines 143 session timer enabling 164 session expiration delay maximum 164 minimum 164 version supported setting 165 signalling protocol SIP see SIP setting SIP setting branch matching method 179 configuration 163 credential 178 direction attributes 175 direction attributes present 175 DNS SRV record lock 81 local ring behaviour 178 Max Forwards header 174 NAT traversal 168 outbound proxy DHCP information using 75 loose router status 77 static information using 76 penalty box 173 proxy server DHCP information using 73 static information using 74 Referr
115. 2 dimension 4 When entering IP addresses in the DHCP server there is a difference between the vendor specific option and the site specific option The vendor specific options must be encapsulated because more than one information can be stored in this option code length 4 6 bytes address another code another length another address 66 Mediatrix 2102 Vendor and Site Specific DHCP Options Reference Manual SIP Version The site specific options can have only one information per option 4 6 bytes address The DHCP server adds the proper code and length in the packet it sends out Example The following example shows how to enter the Syslog code 110 IP address 192 168 0 10 with the default port used and the same address at port 2545 in hexadecimal format Figure 24 Example Short Address String Vendor or Site Specific Code Size IP Address Ox6E 0x4 0xC0 0xA8 0x0 OxA Figure 25 Example Long Address String Vendor or Site Specific Code Size IP Address Port E Ox6E 0x6 OxCO OxA8 0x0 OxA 0x9 OxF1 Settings Example Let s say for instance you want gt the Image server at 10 3 2 154 static gt the Management Server via DHCP in the vendor specific options gt the Syslog server via DHCP in the site specific option 250 The following are the corresponding MIB values gt imageSelectConfigSource static gt imageStaticPrimaryHost 10 3 2 154
116. 2 dBm Receiver Off Hook ROH Tone 1400 Hz 0 1 0 1 19 dBm 2060 Hz 19 dBm 2450 Hz 19 dBm 2600 Hz 19 dBm Message Waiting Indicator Tone 350 440 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 10 CONTINUOUS 22 dBm Network Congestion Tone 400 Hz 0 4 0 35 0 225 0 525 19 dBm Ring AC 45 VRMS 25 Hz 0 4 0 2 0 4 2 0 DC 15 Vdc Input Impedance 300 Q 1000 Q 220 nF Default Caller ID UK BRITISH_TELECOM UK_BELLCORE BELLCORE UK_CCA CCA UK_ETSI_FSK ETSI_FSK FXS Line Attenuation Input 3 dBr FXS Line Attenuation Output 9 dBr 298 Mediatrix 2102 APPENDIX E Glossary 10 BaseT An Ethernet local area network that works on twisted pair wiring 100 BaseT A newer version of Ethernet that operates at 10 times the speed of a 10 BaseT Ethernet Access Device Device capable of sending or receiving data over a data communications channel A Law The ITU T companding standard used in the conversion between analog and digital signals in PCM Pulse Code Modulation systems A law is used primarily in European telephone networks and contrasts with the North American mu u law standard See also mu 1 law Access Concentrator A device that merges many data transmission signals onto a single shared channel in such a way that all the data channels can be active at the same time The access concentrator supports dial up modem calls ISDN connections frame relay traffic and multiprotocol routing Analog Display Services Interface ADSI
117. 25 0 25 21 dBm Ring AC 45 VRMS 20 Hz 2 0 4 0 DC 15 Vdc Input Impedance 600 Q Tbrl Impedance 600 Q Default Caller ID BELLCORE FXS Line Attenuation Input 3 dBr FXS Line Attenuation Output 3 dBr a TBRL Impedance for on premise or short loop ports Mediatrix 2102 291 Appendix D Country Specific Parameters North America North America 2 The following parameters apply if you have selected North America 2 as location Table 176 North America 2 Parameters Parameter Value On Off Sequence s Elect Levels Dial Tone 350 440 Hz CONTINUOUS 17 dBm Busy Tone 480 620 Hz 0 5 0 5 21 dBm Ringback Tone 440 480 Hz 2 0 4 0 19 dBm Special Information Tone 950 Hz 0 33 14 dBm 1400 Hz 0 33 1800 Hz 0 33 1 0 Stutter Dial Tone 350 440 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 CONTINUOUS 17 dBm Confirmation Tone 350 440 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 End 17 dBm Receiver Off Hook ROH Tone 1400 Hz 0 1 0 1 19 dBm 2060 Hz 19 dBm 2450 Hz 19 dBm 2600 Hz 19 dBm Message Waiting Indicator Tone 350 440 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 10 CONTINUOUS 17 dBm Network Congestion Tone 480 620 Hz 0 25 0 25 21 dBm Ring AC 45 VRMS 20 Hz 2 0 4 0 DC 15 Vdc Input Impedance 600 Q Tbrl Impedance 350 Q 1000 Q 210 nF Default Caller ID BELLCORE FXS Line Attenuation Input 0 dBr FXS Line Attenuation Output 0 dBr a TBRL Impedance for off premise or long loop ports
118. 25 Hz 0 25 0 75 12 5 dBm Ring AC 45 VRMS 25 Hz 1 0 5 0 DC 15 Vdc Input Impedance 200 Q 1000 Q 100 nF Default Caller ID BELLCORE FXS Line Attenuation Input 0 dBr FXS Line Attenuation Output 5 dBr Mediatrix 2102 295 Appendix D Country Specific Parameters Switzerland Switzerland The following parameters apply if you have selected Switzerland as location Table 180 Switzerland Parameters Parameter Value On Off Sequence s Elect Levels Dial Tone 425 Hz CONTINUOUS 8 dBm Busy Tone 425 Hz 0 5 0 5 13 dBm Ringback Tone 425 Hz 1 0 4 0 13 dBm Special Information Tone 950 Hz 0 333 13 dBm 1400 Hz 0 333 1800 Hz 0 333 1 0 Stutter Dial Tone 425 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 CONTINUOUS 8 dBm Confirmation Tone 425 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 End 8 dBm Receiver Off Hook ROH Tone 1400 Hz 0 1 0 1 19 dBm 2060 Hz 19 dBm 2450 Hz 19 dBm 2600 Hz 19 dBm Message Waiting Indicator Tone 425 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 10 CONTINUOUS 8 dBm Network Congestion Tone 425 Hz 0 2 0 2 13 dBm Ring AC 45 VRMS 25 Hz 1 0 4 0 DC 15 Vdc Input Impedance 220 Q 820 Q 115 nF Default Caller ID BELLCORE FXS Line Attenuation Input 0 dBr FXS Line Attenuation Output 6 5 dBr 296 Mediatrix 2102 Thailand Reference Manual SIP Version Thailand The following parameters apply if you have selected Thailand as location Table 181 Thailand Parameters
119. 27 for more details on how to set the Mediatrix 2102 QoS Differentiated Services fields K To configure a substitution value 1 In the pRoutingMIB set the substitution value in the pRoutingQosDiffServSubstitution variable This substitution value is used for the Differentiated Services fields of all packets This value supersedes the TOS byte of the packets coming from the PC The default value is 0 Set the pRoutingQosDiffServSubstitutionEnable variable to enable When enabled the QoS Differentiated Services fields of all packets are overwritten If the variable is disabled the QoS Differentiated Services fields of the packets are not modified If you do not need to configure other parameters restart the Mediatrix 2102 as per Restarting the Mediatrix 2102 on page 100 94 Mediatrix 2102 Configuring TAS Reference Manual SIP Version LAN Interface The Mediatrix 2102 s two Ethernet connectors are used as follows gt Network connector WAN interface of the Mediatrix 2102 where you can connect your modem gt Computer connector LAN interface where you connect the PC or other IP equipment The LAN interface is usually used to connect a PC that will have access to the WAN by sharing the Mediatrix 2102 WAN address LF Note The LAN interface configuration settings are valid only when TAS is enabled You can also use the web interface to configure the LAN interface parameters See Administration Pag
120. 29 explicitly The T ME parameter has the same format as OFFSET but there can be no leading minus or plus sign If TIME is not specified the default is 02 00 00 K Mx x y z where x is the month y is a week count in which the z day exists and z is the day of the week starting at 0 Sunday As an example M10 4 0 is the fourth Sunday of October It does not matter if the Sunday is in the 4th or 5th week M10 5 0 Mediatrix 2102 185 Chapter 17 SNTP Settings Defining a Custom Time Zone is the last Sunday of October 5 indicates the last z day It does not matter if the Sunday is in the 4th or 5th week M10 1 6 is the first week with a Saturday thus the first Saturday It does not matter if the Saturday is in the first or second week The TIME parameter has the same format as OFFSET but there can be no leading minus or plus sign If TIME is not specified the default is 02 00 00 Example The following is an example of a proper POSIX string Standard Offset Month Week and Day Month Week and Day time zone to start the Daylight to stop the Daylight Saving Time Saving Time BE Ke ec EST5DST4 M4 0 0 02 00 00 M10 5 0 02 00 00 TT Daylight Offset Time to start the Time to stop Saving Time Daylight Saving the Daylight time zone Time Saving Time The following are some valid POSIX strings Table 121 Valid POSIX Strings Time Zone POSIX String
121. 3 Penalty Box VS Transport Types connnicccnncnnncnconnnnnnnononn nn 173 Penalty Box Configurations icono add 173 Max Forwards Header a tad ai E ea ear 174 Retferred By FlOld ccoo A ti lacada pede 174 Direction Attributes in a Media Stream ooiicccnnniicicnnniccciccc cena 175 When Putting a Call On Hold ocio cruces 175 Direction de in A A A ad a cd eet 175 Registration Parametros a A ai edd peed Att peat 176 Refreshinigi Registration dl e ala 176 Registration EXpir e ic a Cegedel de vuveneatives 177 Default Registration Evpitabon inian arenaene a aleteo 177 Local Ring Behaviour on Provisional Response eee e eee enen 178 SIP esn T H 178 Branch Parameter Seuings iii cd di a deed ened daiiees 179 Branch Matching Method WEE 179 Transaction Matching See s Soria tia 179 Ringing Response Code 180 Chapter 16 STUN CFG AON siii aa eraa iaa asiaa 181 Whatis STUN KEE 181 SIP OUTDOUNG inst TT 181 Restrictions on the Mediatrix STUN Implementation sese eee eee eee eee 181 STUN Client Configuration coin dd ad 182 Chapter 17 A nn PP P ee ee eee eee meee errr eer 183 Enabling the SNIP Clint coa aid tna A 183 CONTIQUIPATION SQUICS srta dlrs 184 DHCP GOnmniQui tent EE 184 Static COMUN ii aaa c 184 Defining a CUStOM TIMO ZOMG T 185 A A iii ieee Week Ge eet ei hie ee ee ee 185 OERSE TTT 185 START IST 185 Sa O E IO 186 Chapter 18 Digit ET 187 Whatis a Digit daria 187 A T 187 Special Characters erat iia li
122. 425 Hz 25 0 4 0 2 0 4 2 0 17 dBm Special Information Tone 950 Hz 0 333 20 dBm 1400 Hz 0 333 1800 Hz 0 333 1 0 Stutter Dial Tone 425 Hz CONTINUOUS 18 dBm Confirmation Tone 450 Hz 0 15 0 15 0 15 x 2 End 18 dBm Receiver Off Hook ROH Tone 1400 Hz 0 1 0 1 21 dBm 2067 Hz 21 dBm 2467 Hz 21 dBm 2600 Hz 21 dBm Message Waiting Indicator Tone 425 Hz 25 0 1 0 04 x72 18 dBm Network Congestion Tone 400 Hz 0 375 0 375 18 dBm Ring AC 45 VRMS 25 Hz 0 4 0 2 0 4 2 0 DC 15 Vde Input Impedance 600 Q Default Caller ID BELLCORE FXS Line Attenuation Input 0 dBr FXS Line Attenuation Output 6 dBr 272 Mediatrix 2102 Australia Reference Manual SIP Version Australia 2 The following parameters apply if you have selected Australia2 as location Table 157 Australia 2 Parameters Parameter Value On Off Sequence s Elect Levels Dial Tone 425 Hz 25 CONTINUOUS 18 dBm Busy Tone 425 Hz 0 375 0 375 18 dBm Ringback Tone 425 Hz 25 0 4 0 2 04 20 17 dBm Special Information Tone 950 Hz 0 333 20 dBm 1400 Hz 0 333 1800 Hz 0 333 1 0 Stutter Dial Tone 425 Hz CONTINUOUS 18 dBm Confirmation Tone 450 Hz 0 15 0 15 0 15 x 2 End 18 dBm Receiver Off Hook ROH Tone 1400 Hz 0 1 0 1 21 dBm 2067 Hz 21 dBm 2467 Hz 21 dBm 2600 Hz 21 dBm Message Waiting Indicator Tone 425 Hz 25 0 1 0 04 x72 18 dBm Network
123. 5 dBm Confirmation Tone 425 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 End 15 dBm Receiver Off Hook ROH Tone 425 Hz 0 25 0 25 10 dBm Message Waiting Indicator Tone 425 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 10 CONTINUOUS 15 dBm Reorder Tone 425 Hz 0 75 0 25 0 25 0 25 10 dBm Network Congestion Tone 450 Hz 0 2 0 2 10 dBm Ring AC 45 VRMS 25 Hz 1 0 4 0 DC 15 Vdc Input Impedance 900 Q Default Caller ID TELEBRAS_DTMF FXS Line Attenuation Input 0 dBr FXS Line Attenuation Output 7 dBr 276 Mediatrix 2102 China Reference Manual SIP Version China The following parameters apply if you have selected China as location Table 161 China Parameters Parameter Value On Off Sequence s Elect Levels Dial Tone 450 Hz CONTINUOUS 10 dBm Busy Tone 450 Hz 0 35 0 35 10 dBm Ringback Tone 450 Hz 1 0 4 0 10 dBm Special Information Tone 950 Hz 0 33 10 dBm 1400 Hz 0 33 1800 Hz 0 33 1 0 Stutter Dial Tone 450 Hz 0 4 0 04 10 dBm Confirmation Tone 450 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 End 10 dBm Receiver Off Hook ROH Tone 950 Hz 15 0 15 0 15 0 25 dBm 950 Hz 15 0 15 0 15 0 16 dBm 950 Hz 15 0 15 0 15 0 8 dBm 950 Hz 15 0 15 0 15 0 CONTINUOUS 6 dBm Message Waiting Indicator Tone 450 Hz 0 4 0 04 10 dBm Network Congestion Tone 450 Hz 0 7 0 7 10 dBm Ring AC 45 VRMS 20 Hz 1 0 4 0 DC 15 Vdc Input Impedance 600 Q Default Caller ID BELLCORE FXS L
124. 51 enabling 147 packetization time 148 preferred 147 comfort noise 155 Mediatrix 2102 317 Index compliance to standards see standards compliance configuration file 48 using a GUI 45 web interface access limitation 37 bandwidth management 35 choosing suitable web browser 25 configuration file upload 32 enabling 25 LAN interface 30 MAC address spoofing 31 password modify 33 reset 34 set 30 static information 30 status 27 STUN 36 system log 34 user name modify 33 set 30 WAN connection type 30 configuration file automatic update 115 download server 107 configuration source 108 DHCP information using 108 HTTP server configuring 107 IP address 108 SNTP server configuring 107 static information using 108 TFTP server configuring 107 download setting 109 encryption decrypting generic 112 decrypting specific 112 defined 112 example 124 HTTP downloading via 114 management server downloading from 121 syslog messages 111 TFTP downloading via 113 uploading via web interface 32 configuration sources setting all to static 54 configuring the software configuration file 48 DHCP dynamic using 53 MIB see SNMP static setting configuration sources to 54 using 54 connecting the unit 8 connectors Computer 5 Default Settings 5 Network 5 Phone Fax 5 power 5 PSTN 5 country specific parameters 269 caller ID selecting 86 setting 85 credential in SIP 178 crossover cable see cabling customer services
125. 7 g 9 OF T 0x8100 Pri In VID E For both signalling and media packets the VLAN priority section is configurable independently 230 Mediatrix 2102 VLAN Reference Manual SIP Version VLAN Substitution The Mediatrix 2102 can tag the packets relayed from the Computer LAN port to the Network WAN port with a VLAN ID different from the standard value defined in VLAN on page 230 L Note This feature only works when TAS is disabled See Chapter 8 Transparent Address Sharing on page 87 for more details In this case the packets coming from the LAN usually a router or a PC are tagged with a substitution VLAN ID before sending the packets to the WAN In the opposite direction the Mediatrix 2102 removes the VLAN tags and then send the packets to the LAN The packets generated by the Mediatrix 2102 for VoIP Signaling Management can also be tagged with a different VLAN ID This can be used to prioritize VolP in a network K To configure the VLAN substitution 1 In the gosleee8021qSubstitution group of the qosMIB define the substitution IEEE 802 10 Virtual LAN ID in the gosVlanleee8021qSubstitutionVlanID variable The value 1 is the default Port VID PVID for bridge port The 4095 VID OxFFF is reserved for implementation use and it must not be used in the tag header
126. 9 in the digit map indicates a user wants to make an external call while the second digit 1 indicates a user wants to call outside his or her own area code in North America The two digits must be removed because they do not need to be expressed to the SIP Server The SIP Server needs only to know the complete number of the called party CC AC directory number 194 Mediatrix 2102 Digit Map Examples Reference Manual SIP Version Table 130 Digit Map Rules 3 Settings Continued Variable Setting digitMapPrependedString 1 country code A valid telephone number must contain a country code an area code and a number The country code is missing in this number and must be added Note that in this scenario the country code is the same as the code used when the user wants to indicate a communication outside of his or her own area code It is still good practice to have this number removed and to add the country code even if these two numbers are the same Digit Map Rule 4 This digit map rule checks for local calls in the same area code Table 131 Digit Map Rules 4 Settings Variable Setting digitMapAllowedEnable Enable digitMapAllowedDigitMap 9 2 8 xxxxxx digitMapPrefixedDigit RemovalCount 1 The first digit 9 in the digit map indicates a user wants to make an external call It has to be removed because it does not need to be express
127. AC address matches the ISP s database and the connection will be granted However the spoof is only performed on the WAN side of the Mediatrix 2102 The LAN or private side of the Mediatrix 2102 remains unchanged For example DHCP requests sent by the Mediatrix 2102 on the WAN side would contain the spoofed MAC address but DHCP offers returned by the Mediatrix 2102 to the device networked on the Computer connector will contain the real MAC address of the Mediatrix 2102 Figure 31 MAC Address Spoofing DHCP REQUEST SPOOFED MAC 00 90 F8 00 71 28 S 2 gl 00 90 F8 00 71 28 Mediatrix 2102 Modem Cable or DSL REAL MAC 00 90 F8 00 0A 2D SPOOFED MAC 00 90 F8 00 71 28 q DHCP OFFERS REAL MAC 00 90 F8 00 0A 2D Mediatrix 2102 95 Chapter 8 Transparent Address Sharing Configuring TAS You can also use the web interface to enter the MAC address spoofing information See Administration Page on page 29 for more details K To spoof the MAC address 1 In the pRoutingMIB set the MAC address used to spoof the unit s actual MAC address in the pRoutingMacSpoofAddress variable A valid MAC address is a continuous series of 12 alphanumeric characters i e without colons An empty character string means that the spoofing is considered disabled even though the pRoutingMacSpoofEnable variable is set to enable iF Note The following MAC addresses are not allowed e 000000000000 e FFFFFFFFFFFF e 01XxX
128. CP If the router connected to the Mediatrix 2102 is set with a static IP address you must change the setting Please refer to your router s documentation to perform this task P To install the Mediatrix 2102 with a router 1 Before you begin be sure that all of your hardware is powered off including the PC router modem and Mediatrix 2102 2 Connect analog telephones or fax machines into the Phone Fax connectors 3 Connect a 10 100 BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 cable into the Network connector of the Mediatrix 2102 Connect the other end to the cable or DSL modem See 10 100 BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 Cable on page 8 for more details on this cable Mediatrix 2102 11 Chapter 1 Installation Hardware Connection Connect a 10 100 BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 cable into the Computer connector of the Mediatrix 2102 Connect the other end to the WAN Uplink connector of the router See 10 100 BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 Cable on page 8 for more details on this cable Connect a 10 100 BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 cable into the LAN connector of the router Connect the other end to the network card of your PC See 10 100 BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 Cable on page 8 for more details on this cable Connect a SCN line into the Bypass connector of the Mediatrix 2102 optional Use a standard telecommunication cord with a minimum of 26 AWG wire size Power on the cable or DSL modem Depending on your modem you may have to wait a few minutes befor
129. Code E 59 226 ul ata needa teen arene elie plea Aye a ia eta MSH OS E msSelectConfigSource msStaticHost MSStaticPO Estancia Rea msStatic rapP sl a aa msTrapConfigInformation MS TRAPP OM sac genee a ai anaes msTrapRetranSmissi n Period tege ENEE A NEA APELA EA aT TEE 225 msTr pRetransmissionRetryCou nt nono nn nn orar crono 225 Ie S a e Le e EE 222 mwiConfigFetchAddress sel mwiConfigUserSubscriptiONAAATESS ococnccicicicicicicininooonocnnncnnonnnnn nn cnn nono arar 221 MWIEXPIFAION TIME ssia A a AAA da A aes mwiFetchDigitMap mwiSubscriptionCmdRefresh P pinDialingDelay pinDialingEnable D DIDIER ai PPPDOCACNAMMG cocino ns pppoeEnable pppoeServiceName pppSecuritySecretsldentity PPpSEcUNI Secre EE Mediatrix 2102 311 Appendix G List of MIB Parameters Q qossignalldgD SE dd es 228 qosSignalinglese8021qEnable conto a AA ad 229 qosSignalingleee8021qUserPriority see eee eee 229 EE AR ET 228 00ST38BEaxleee 0 21 0Enable ee 106 229 WEIT AEN Uu de ies 105 229 ss sle lR EV at gosVbdleee802 lela e ccoo E anna dh pa qosVbdleee8021qUserPriority qosVlanleee8021qDefaultUserPriority siiis a 230 qosVlanleee8021qSubstitutionEnable oo ee eeceeeeesesseeseseseneeeesereececseeeseneeeeeeeeeceesvacaeaeeseeeeeeeesevacaeaeeeerseeesenecaeatates 231 oOosVlanleeep 21oSubettuton
130. Congestion Tone 400 Hz 0 375 0 375 18 dBm Ring AC 45 VRMS 25 Hz 0 4 0 2 0 4 2 0 DC 15 Vdc Input Impedance 600 Q Default Caller ID BELLCORE FXS Line Attenuation Input 3 dBr FXS Line Attenuation Output 6 dBr Mediatrix 2102 273 Appendix D Country Specific Parameters Australia Australia 3 The following parameters apply if you have selected Australia3 as location Table 158 Australia 3 Parameters Parameter Value On Off Sequence s Elect Levels Dial Tone 425 Hz 25 CONTINUOUS 18 dBm Busy Tone 425 Hz 0 375 0 375 18 dBm Ringback Tone 425 Hz 25 0 4 0 2 04 20 17 dBm Special Information Tone 950 Hz 0 333 20 dBm 1400 Hz 0 333 1800 Hz 0 333 1 0 Stutter Dial Tone 425 Hz CONTINUOUS 18 dBm Confirmation Tone 450 Hz 0 15 0 15 0 15 x 2 End 18 dBm Receiver Off Hook ROH Tone 1400 Hz 0 1 0 1 21 dBm 2067 Hz 21 dBm 2467 Hz 21 dBm 2600 Hz 21 dBm Message Waiting Indicator Tone 425 Hz 25 0 1 0 04 x72 18 dBm Network Congestion Tone 400 Hz 0 375 0 375 18 dBm Ring AC 45 VRMS 25 Hz 0 4 0 2 0 4 2 0 DC 15 Vdc Input Impedance 220 Q 820 Q 115 nF Default Caller ID BELLCORE FXS Line Attenuation Input 3 dBr FXS Line Attenuation Output 9 dBr 274 Mediatrix 2102 Austria Reference Manual SIP Version Austria The following parameters apply if you have selected Austria as
131. DP as transport Enabling the SNTP Client Standards Supported You must enable the SNTP client of the Mediatrix 2102 to properly connect to aa SNTP or NTP server K To enable the SNTP feature 1 In the sntpMIB set the sntpEnable variable to enable 2 Set the following synchronization information Table 119 SNTP Synchronization Information Variable Description sntpSynchronizationPeriod Time interval in minutes between requests made to the SNTP server The result is used to synchronize the unit with the time server The maximum value is set to 1440 minutes 24 hours Default Value 1440 sntpSynchronizationPeriodOnError Time interval in minutes between retries after an unsuccessful attempt to reach the SNTP server The maximum value is set to 1440 24 hours Default Value 60 Mediatrix 2102 183 Chapter 17 SNTP Settings Configuration Source Configuration Source The Mediatrix 2102 must know the IP address and port number of the SNTP server You can assign these information to the Mediatrix 2102 through a DHCP server or manually enter them yourself with the static variables SNTP T In the Unit Manager Network Administration Manual refer to chapter Administration Parameters section DHCP Configuration Using the DHCP configuration assumes that you have properly set your DHCP server with the relevant information See Chapter 4 IP Address and Networ
132. Differentiated Services avoids simple priority tagging and depends on more complex policy or rule statements to determine how to forward a given network packet An analogy is made to travel services in which a person can choose among different modes of travel train bus airplane degree of comfort the number of stops on the route standby status the time of day or period of year for the trip and so forth For a given set of packet travel rules a packet is given one of 64 possible forwarding behaviors known as per hop behaviors PHBs A six bit field known as the Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP in the Internet Protocol header specifies the per hop behavior for a given flow of packets The DS field structure is presented below NI 2 3 A amp G6 F DSc cu MSB LSB e DSCP Differentiated Services CodePoint e CU Currently Unused The CU bits should always be set to 0 For both signalling and media packets the DSCP field is configurable independently The entire DS field TOS byte is currently configurable Mediatrix 2102 227 Chapter 24 Quality of Service QoS Differentiated Services DS Field K To enable the DS field configuration 1 In the gosDiffServ group of the qosMIB locate the following variables e qosSignalingDif Serv qosVoiceDif Serv e qosT38FaxDiffServ e qosVbdDiffServ These variables are 1 o
133. EEE 802 10 Reference Manual SIP Version IEEE 802 1q The 802 1q standard recommends the use of the 802 1q VLAN tags for Ethernet frames traffic prioritization VLAN tags are 4 byte headers in which three bits are reserved for priority indication The values of the priority bits shall be provisioned The 802 1q standard comprises the 802 1p standard It is the network administrator s responsibility to provision the Mediatrix 2102 with standard and correct values K To enable the IEEE 802 1q user priority configuration 1 In the gosleee8021q group of the qosMIB locate the following variables e qosSignalingleee8021qEnable e qosVoiceleee8021qEnable e qosT38Faxleee8021qEnable e qosVbdleee8021qEnable 2 Set the value of these variables to enable The corresponding user priority configuration is enabled 3 In the qgosleee8021q group of the qosMIB locate the following variables e qosSignalingleee8021qUserPriority e qosVoiceleee8021qUserPriority qosT38Faxleee8021qUserPriority e qosVbdleee8021qUserPriority These variables are 1 octet scalar ranging from 0 to 7 The 802 1q default priority value should be 6 for both signalling and media packets 4 Set the value you want to use For more information please refer to the MIB Reference manual Mediatrix 2102 229 Chapter 24 Quality of Service QoS VLAN VLAN You can set various VLAN parameters to control user priority K To enable the VLAN configuratio
134. ENEE OE E Aer denedar iiei xxiii Documentation Feedback icon iii daa xxiii Mediatrix svete lier OM Analog TEE xxiv Digital TT xxiv SoftWare Applications EE XXV End H Zc vaT Ee lele xxvi Chapter 1 I T de 1 Requirements koi dd gengen Adee a eed agate 1 Safety RECOMMENAAIONS viii eacevstuvle nen ced dd deed SES dee 1 Package Contents esst sd ge ek East iaa pelaccddes la ebducvyaetnmbded ast qnazsuantadeddudstendeaytets 1 EE dat AA couse aceadeedawnsnadedagndhachdeduaaadachanneedaddenwaea E ia 2 About the Mediatrix e AAA A 2 PIAGING b Call H T 2 Management e ele 3 slal NN ON 4 Front II CALONS EE 4 Rear ConnecClor Se eneen EE 5 Choosing a Suitable Installation Gute eee eee eee e 6 Localia lcd 6 Wall Mounting iii A a eii 7 Free Standing Un EE 7 CONGOEMS ATION EE 7 El BET 7 Hardware Connection see eee ee eee 8 Reserving an lge 8 Before ProCeed NO a a aar ii ads 8 Single Computer Installation ssssssssesssessssssscses sss essscssss es sse sss ssessesssese ssent egs enog nern en aneo g nenen aeeoo n erone ee 9 Multiple Computer InstallatiON ooommeiciiocnnri ds a di 11 Starting the Mediatrix 2102 for the First Time 13 InitiallProvisionihg Sequence tra 13 special Vocal FSatures iii ai di acen 15 Mediatrix 2102 vii Contents LED Behaviour in Starting Mode omciiain ii A sabes ds 15 RT e EC 15 Ready LED cuina cada ri cases o RO E a a o e cda 15 Wr WSO LED EE 15 DIN CED EE E 16 Power LED ix A A a t
135. IB locate the subscriberServices fCallForwardActivation Table group Set the status of the service in the subscriberServicesCallForwardUnconditionalActivation variable to inactive or active To let the user activate or deactivate this service with his or her handset proceed to steps 3 and 4 In that case the variable is automatically updated to reflect the activation status Define the digits that users must dial to start the service in the subscriberServicesCallForwardUnconditionalEnableDigitMap variable under the subscriberServicesActivationDigitmaps group For instance you could decide to put 70 as the sequence to activate the service This sequence must be unique and follow the syntax for digit maps see Chapter 18 Digit Maps on page 187 Dialing this digit map does not have any effect unless the service s status is enabled The activating sequence is set for all the lines of the Mediatrix 2102 You cannot have a different sequence for each line Define the digits that users must dial to stop the service in the subscriberServicesCallForwardUnconditionalDisableDigitMap variable under the subscriberServicesActivationDigitmaps group For instance you could decide to put 71 as the sequence to deactivate the service This sequence must be unique and follow the syntax for digit maps see Chapter 18 Digit Maps on page 187 Dialing this digit map does not have any effect unless the service s status is enable
136. Impedance Impedance is the apparent resistance in an electric circuit to the flow of an alternating current analogous to the actual electrical resistance to a direct current being the ratio of electromotive force to the current When representing an impedance the following applies K Symbol means parallel K Symbol means serial Mediatrix 2102 269 Appendix D Country Specific Parameters Definitions Furthermore there are two types of impedances K Input Impedance gt Terminal Balance Return Loss TBRL Impedance Input Impedance Impedance of the Mediatrix 2102 at the Tip and Ring wires Terminal Balance Return Loss TBRL Impedance Balance return loss attributable to transmission loss between two points It is used to characterize an impedance balancing property of the 2 wire analog equipment port Each country has its own definition of the TBRL value For instance in North America TIA EIA 464 and TIA EIA 912 define two TBRL values gt 600 Q for on premise or short loop ports K 350 Q 1000 Q 21 nF for off premise or long loop ports A wire length above 2 5 km is considered long loop according to TIA EIA 912 section 6 4 7 b In Europe ETSI 300 439 also mentions a TBRL value However most European countries have different requirements regarding the TBRL Impedance This is also true for other countries around the world Each one of them has different requirements
137. LED that turns on every two seconds and stays on for one second would be described as blink 0 5 Hz 50 The hardware HW behaviour is not defined It is usually the standard state for the LAN LED Ready LED The Ready LED provides an at a glance view of the Mediatrix 2102 operational status It is an aid for installation and on site support This LED is K ON when all elements of the ifAdminOpState column are enabled gt OFF when all elements of the ifAdminOpState column are disabled gt Blinking when at least one element of the ifAdminOp State column is enabled and at least one element is disabled Patterns and meanings of the Ready LED are described in Table 10 on page 18 Refer to the MIB Reference Manual for more details on the ifAdminOpState variable In Use LED The n Use LED provides feedback of the activity on the line If a line is ringing off hook or displaying information ADSI then this LED is ON The n Use LED is ON when at least one element in the ifAdminUsageState column is busy Patterns and meanings of the In Use LED are described in Table 10 on page 18 Refer to the MIB Reference Manual for more details on the ifAdminState variable Mediatrix 2102 15 Chapter 1 Installation LED Indicators LAN LED The LAN LED provides the status of the network connected to the Ethernet connector Typically Ethernet connectors are characterized by using two status LEDs Link and
138. Line Attenuation Values are given in dBr deciBel relative K A for input means that the digital side is attenuated by x decibels relative to the analog side K A for output means that the analog side is amplified by x decibels relative to the digital side K A for input means that the digital side is amplified by x decibels relative to the analog side gt A gt for output means that the analog side is attenuated by x decibels relative to the digital side On Off Sequences Values in bold are on cycles where tones are audible Values in normal style are off cycles where tones are not audible When not otherwise specified sequences repeat forever A x symbol means that the sequences between parenthesis is repeated x times The next cycle s repeat forever unless otherwise specified Values are in seconds For instance 3 0 1 0 1 then 0 6 1 0 0 2 0 2 means that the 0 1s on and 0 1s off sequence is repeated 3 times afterwards the 0 6s on 1 0s off 0 2s on and 0 2s off sequence repeats forever Distinctive Ring The distinctive ring service allows you to have three different numbers with each their own ring The numbers ring through a single line coming into the business or residence and each number can be distinguished by the pattern of the ring These ring patterns are made up of various combinations of ring bursts This feature uses the Alert Info header from the initial INVITE
139. Location or imageSelectionFileLocation variable of the imageMIB See Setting up the Image Path on page 128 for more details Mediatrix suggests that a folder named identically to the software build be available and used for the files related to that build only Each folder should include only one delivery to ensure accuracy This directory must be located under the root path as defined in the TFTP HTTP server or the software download will not proceed Setting up the Image Path When performing a software download you must configure the path on the remote image server of the directory where you extracted the files required forthe download This applies to both the manual or automatic download procedure using the HTTP or TFTP protocol The directory must be located under the root path as defined in the TFTP or HTTP server or the software download will not proceed See Before Downloading on page 125 for more details The Mediatrix 2102 first downloads a file called setup inf This file contains the list of all the other files to download depending on the product The setup inf file and all the other files must be in the same directory If any of the files is missing the procedure will not work properly K To setup the Image path 1 In the imageMIB select where to get the image location in the imageLocationProvisionSource variable You have the following choices Table 82 Image Location Parameters Par
140. Mediatrix 1204 Four Port FXO Analog Gateway Analog VoIP gateway equipped with four FXO ports and one 10 100 BaseT Ethernet port It can connect analog SCN lines and legacy PBX Systems to an IP telephony network It is a cost effective gateway suitable for small and medium size enterprises Mediatrix 2102 Two Port FXS Access Device VoIP Adapter that connects up to two analog phones or fax machines to a broadband access equipment allowing Service Providers to offer IP telephony services to residential users Digital Series Mediatrix digital series gateways and routers connect ISDN BRI Basic Rate Interface and ISDN T1 E1 PRI Primary Rate Interface interfaces of the SCN and of legacy PBX and Key Systems to an IP network The routers can connect a local LAN to provide a comprehensive voice and data solution in one box Mediatrix 1400 BRI VoIP Gateways The Mediatrix 1400 series BRI VoIP gateways provide four Mediatrix 1402 or eight Mediatrix 1404 VoIP channels to allow enterprises to lower communications costs over any IP link They constitute an ideal solution for LAN based voice applications or for connecting to a service provider s network Mediatrix 1500 T1 PRI VoIP Gateways The Mediatrix 1500 series T1 PRI VoIP gateways provide 23 Mediatrix 1531 or 46 Mediatrix 1532 VoIP channels to allow enterprises to lower communications costs over any IP link They constitute an ideal solution for enterprise voice applicati
141. Mediatrix 2102 requires K To set administration parameters 1 In the web interface click the Administration link or the Admin button This links to the Administration web page Figure 12 Administration Web Page El Mediatrix 2102 Microsoft Internet Explorer Fie Edt View Favorites Tools Help Peak OB A Qseach Ggravortes Breda G Br as Sh Address http 192 168 10 1 Ges Mediatrix 2102 overview admin config File Password Log Bandwidth Overview Administration Configuration file HTTP server password System log Bandwidth Management STUN Administration CP Static C PPPoE WAN IP address 192 168 0 99 Network mask 255 255 255 0 gateway fi92168 0 10 Primary DNS IEEE Secondary DNS 192 168 0 10 d e DefaultChapUserz A Fo ic IP address fi92 168 10 1 LAN Static Network Mask 255 255 255 0 MAC Address Spoofing able MAC Address Spoofing AC address MAC address of i port Cancel Restart z FETO meme Mediatrix 2102 29 Chapter 2 Web Interface Administration Page 2 Set the WAN connection type You have the following choices Table 16 WAN Connection Type Connection Type Description DHCP Connection to use with a cable modem This is the most common connection type with a cable modem In this connection type the PPPoE service pppoeEnable variable is disabled and the configuration source localHostSelectConfigSource variable is s
142. Message The configuration update with the Informational The specific configuration specific configuration file has been update succeeded successful configuration file fetching The configuration update with the Error The specific configuration specific configuration file experienced an update failed error and has not been completed configuration file fetching The software update has been Informational The software update succeeded successful The software update experienced an Error The software update failed error and has not been completed Mediatrix 2102 233 Chapter 25 Syslog Daemon Syslog Daemon Configuration Configuration Source The Mediatrix 2102 must know the IP address and port number of the Syslog server You can assign these information to the Mediatrix 2102 through a DHCP server or manually enter them yourself with the static variables DHCP Configuration Using the DHCP configuration assumes that you have properly set your DHCP server with the relevant information See Chapter 4 IP Address and Network Configuration on page 51 for more details K To use DHCP assigned information 1 In the ipAddressConfig folder locate the syslogSelectConfig Source variable This variable defines whether the Mediatrix 2102 shall ask for its Syslog daemon settings through a DHCP server or not 2 Set the syslogSelectConfigSource variable to dhcp You can query the Syslog daemon s IP ad
143. Method Description draftChoudhuriSipinfoDigit00 Transmits DTMFs by using the method defined in draft choudhuri sip info digit 00 Only the unsolicited digit part is supported infoDtmfRelay Transmits DTMFs by using a custom method This custom method requires no SDP negotiation and assumes that the other peer uses the same method It uses a SIP INFO message with a content of type application dimf relay The body of the message contains the DTMF transmitted and the duration of the DTMF Signal 1 Duration 160 When transmitting the duration is the one set in the sipinteropDimfTransportDuration variable see Step 3 below When receiving the duration of the DTMF received is not used The value is the one set in the analogScnGwDtmfDuration variable see Step 4 below DTMFs are transmitted one at a time It is thus not compatible with the PIN dialing feature see PIN Dialing on page 219 for more details Available digits are 0123456789ABCD The Mediatrix 2102 also supports the p characters when receiving DTMFs Set the DTMF duration sent in the INFO message when using the infoDtmfRelay method to transmit DTMFs in the sip nteropDimfTransportDuration variable This value is expressed in milliseconds ms The default value is 100 ms In the analogScnGwMIB set the DTMF duration when using the infoDtmfRelay method to receive DTMFs in the analogScnGwDimfDuration variable This is the duration in mi
144. Mounting The Mediatrix 2102 has two screw holes on its bottom surface allowing a single unit to be wall mounted K To wall mount the Mediatrix 2102 1 Disconnect all of the cables from the Mediatrix 2102 before mounting 2 Ensure that the wall you are using is smooth flat dry and sturdy Attach a piece of plywood approximately 250 mm x 200 mm x 12 mm 10 inches x 8 inches x 0 5 inches securely to the wall if necessary 3 Position the Mediatrix 2102 against the wall or plywood as illustrated in Figure 3 Figure 3 Bottom View Wall Mounting Screw Holes Rear O 2 Kg Screw holes J Front You can position the Mediatrix 2102 any way you want However Mediatrix recommends that you do not position the unit with its front up because it may fall down 4 Mark the position of the screw holes on the wall Drill the two holes and install two screws 5 Place the screw holes of the Mediatrix 2102 over the screws installed in the previous step 6 Proceed to Hardware Connection on page 8 Free Standing Unit When installing the Mediatrix 2102 on a desk or table it should be located at least 20 cm from your monitor computer casing or other peripherals including speakers Never put books or paper on the Mediatrix 2102 Condensation When bringing the unit into a warm environment from the cold condensation may result that might be harmful to the unit If this occurs allow the unit to acclimatize for an hour befor
145. N are limited in bandwidth You can determine the maximum bandwidth Excess packets coming from the LAN interface are dropped The Mediatrix 2102 uses the priorities set in IEEE 802 1q on page 229 to determine which packets to drop first even when 802 1q tagging is disabled Figure 32 Bandwidth Management VoIP SIP Packets E All Other IP Packets Output Bandwidth Level Before Bandwidth Management Delayed Packets Re Wat uk 2 2102 Modem With Bandwidth Management Se ne Modem You can also use the web interface to configure the bandwidth management feature See Bandwidth Management Page on page 35 for more details d A A K To configure the WAN upstream bandwidth control 1 In the pRoutingMIB set the maximum outgoing amount of data transferred throughput to the WAN interface in the pRoutingWanUpstreamBandwidth variable Outgoing traffic includes both traffic generated by voice calls from the Mediatrix 2102 and traffic coming from the PC or IP equipment on the LAN side The value is expressed in kilobits per seconds It applies only when the pRoutingBandwidthControlEnable variable is set to enable The default value is 512 kbps Mediatrix 2102 97 Chapter 8 Transparent Address Sharing Configuring TAS 2 Enable the WAN upstream bandwidth control by setting the pRoutingBandwidthControlEnable variable to enable The Mediatrix 2102 will limit the outgoing t
146. NY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The licence and distribution terms for any publicly available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence including the GNU Public Licence Mediatrix Telecom Inc Reference Manual Reference Manual SIP Version Contents Preface About this Manual da an AA ORAR xix Document e Ee xix NA scsiscacctscasesncedeecaastecapssaaadeca pestacuSed E E A bstadta tote snesedecdsneabatend needs xix Intended Audi TTT XX Related Documentation iii XX Rec HI lZ en Pa TTT XX DOCUMENT CONVENTIONS ssscci2dchs ces cess nadaidaticnscn dechaohenedcesbaoda tadend ins xxii Warming DET TEE xxii Where to find Translated Warning Definition eee sosscecsscezsseczss socs essvcsosresosesoe egs neuan ereas noon neose xxii Other el En VE xxii A WEE xxiii STandards SUPPOME WEE xxiii Obtaining DOCUMENTATION ccoo ici E dada add edna ates xxiii World Wide WD EE xxiii Documentation CD ROM eet eaaaeee oni amanea E r Eee brain eE EE
147. OUS 17 dBm Confirmation Tone 400 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 End 17 dBm Receiver Off Hook ROH Tone 1400 Hz 0 1 0 1 19 dBm 2060 Hz 19 dBm 2450 Hz 19 dBm 2600 Hz 19 dBm Message Waiting Indicator Tone 400 Hz 0 1 0 1 x12 CONTINUOUS 17 dBm Network Congestion Tone 400 Hz 0 25 0 25 17 dBm Ring AC 45 VRMS 25 Hz 0 4 0 2 0 4 2 0 DC 15 Vdc Input Impedance 300 Q 1000 Q 220 nF Default Caller ID BELLCORE FXS Line Attenuation Input 3 dBr FXS Line Attenuation Output 9 dBr 290 Mediatrix 2102 North America Reference Manual SIP Version North America The following parameters apply if you have selected North America as location North America 1 The following parameters apply if you have selected North America 1 as location Table 175 North America 1 Parameters Parameter Value On Off Sequence s Elect Levels Dial Tone 350 440 Hz CONTINUOUS 17 dBm Busy Tone 480 620 Hz 0 5 0 5 21 dBm Ringback Tone 440 480 Hz 2 0 4 0 19 dBm Special Information Tone 950 Hz 0 33 14 dBm 1400 Hz 0 33 1800 Hz 0 33 1 0 Stutter Dial Tone 350 440 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 CONTINUOUS 17 dBm Confirmation Tone 350 440 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 End 17 dBm Receiver Off Hook ROH Tone 1400 Hz 0 1 0 1 19 dBm 2060 Hz 19 dBm 2450 Hz 19 dBm 2600 Hz 19 dBm Message Waiting Indicator Tone 350 440 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 10 CONTINUOUS 17 dBm Network Congestion Tone 480 620 Hz 0
148. Object Prefix 1 3 6 1 4 1 4935 15 3 1 30 3 Suffix 0 Value ConfigFile xml gt lt Object Prefilx 1 3 6 1 4 1 4935 115 15 1 5 Suffix 0 Vallue 0 gt lt Object Prefix 1 3 6 1 4 1 4935 15 35 1 20 1 1 Suffix 3 Value 0 gt lt Object Prefix 1 3 6 1 4 1 4935 15 35 1 20 1 1 Suffix 4 Value 0 gt lt MX_Config File gt LF Note When creating and or editing a configuration file the following ASCII codes are supported e 10 LF e 13 CR e 32 to 126 All other ASCII codes will result in an invalid configuration file 124 Mediatrix 2102 CHAPTER Software Download This chapter describes how to download a software version available on the designated software server into the Mediatrix 2102 You have the choice to perform the software download by using the TFTP protocol or the HTTP protocol You can also configure the Mediatrix 2102 to automatically update its software version Note You can only perform a software download from the WAN interface of the Mediatrix 2102 Software downloads from the LAN side are not supported Before Downloading To download a software you may need to setup the following applications on your computer K TFTP server with proper root path K MIB browser with the current Mediatrix 2102 MIB tree You can use the MIB browser built in the Mediatrix s Unit Manager Network See Unit Manager Network Element Management System on page xxv for more details Softwa
149. P address When the PPP connection is established the access concentrator assigns an IP address to the Mediatrix 2102 This IP address may be used as the WAN IP address See WAN Information Configuration Source on page 92 for details Primary and secondary DNS servers may be supplied by the access concentrator If this is the case the new DNS servers supersede the servers defined locally Configuration of DNS Servers When the PPP connection is active the DNS servers supplied by the access concentrator supersede the locally defined servers as follows K If the localHostDnsOverrideEnable variable is set to enable the servers supplied by the access concentrator do not replace the localHostPrimaryDns or localHostSecondaryDns variables See Static DNS on page 55 for more details K If the localHostDnsOverrideEnable variable is set to disable If no server is supplied by the access concentrator the value of the localHostPrimaryDns and localHost SecondaryDns variables applies If one server is supplied by the access concentrator it replaces the server defined in the localHostPrimaryDns variable e Iftwo servers are supplied by the access concentrator they replace both the localHostPrimaryDns and localHostSecondaryDns variables 102 Mediatrix 2102 DSL Modem Specific Information Reference Manual SIP Version Error Handling The following describes the Mediatrix 2102 behaviour in case of error Table 66 Error Han
150. P server s documentation to learn how to create vendor specific information See Entering IP Addresses on page 66 for more details on the syntax to use Site Specific Options Standards Supported Site specific options are non standard DHCP options specific to the network where the Mediatrix 2102 is used You are responsible to allocate an option number between 128 and 254 for each information element to be stored Mediatrix units store one type of information in site specific options IP addresses with optional port number The layout for storing IP addresses is explained in section Entering IP Addresses on page 66 Figure 23 is an example of site specific option 146 containing address 192 168 0 1 Figure 23 Site Specific Option Example w CO e e CS When using the site specific option you can place the values in the site specific options of your choice in the DHCP server You must then enter the values in the proper MIB variables Please refer to your DHCP server s documentation to learn how to create site specific information See Entering IP Addresses on page 66 for more details on the syntax to use Mediatrix 2102 65 Chapter 4 IP Address and Network Configuration Vendor and Site Specific DHCP Options Option Codes This table summarises all vendor specific sub option codes Table 47 Sub Option Codes Code Description Decimal Hexadec 117 0x75 Image Primary Server host addres
151. PSTN Calling Line Identification presentation CLIP supplementary service Specification of the NTP FSK Generation Different countries use different standards to send caller ID information The Mediatrix 2102 is compatible with the following widely used standards gt Bellcore GR 30 CORE gt British Telecom BT SIN227 SIN242 gt UK Cable Communications Association CCA specification TW P amp E 312 gt ETSI 300 659 1 LF Note The compatibility of the Mediatrix 2102 is not limited to the above caller ID standards Continuous phase binary FSK modulation is used for coding which is compatible with gt BELL 202 gt ITU T V 23 the most common standard ADSI ADSI Analog Display Service Interface is a telecommunications protocol standard that enables alternate voice and data capability over the existing analog telephone network It is an extension to basic caller ID To use ADSI you would need an ADSI capable device ADSI can display the basic caller ID parameters and the following additional parameters gt Call Type First Called Line Identity Number of Messages MWI Type of Forwarded Call Type of Calling User Redirecting Number Charge Duration of the Call Network Provider Identity v vv v v v v v LF Note Currently very few ADSI capable devices support these additional information 84 Mediatrix 2102 Setting the Location Country Reference Manual SIP Version Setting the Locati
152. R 32 to 126 and 191 to 255 Send a syslog warning message including the file name the TFTP client address and the invalid character ASCII code The configuration file XXX pushed to the unit by the TFTP client XXX has an invalid character ASCII code XXX No recorded settings applied Invalid file format Committing a file with an invalid format Send a syslog warning message including the file name and the TFTP client address The configuration file XXX pushed to the unit by the TFTP client XXX has an invalid format No recorded settings applied 122 Mediatrix 2102 Management Server Reference Manual SIP Version Table 77 Configuration File Error Handling with the Management Server Continued Error Type Cause Behaviour File size too big Downloading a file with a size exceeding 512000 bytes Send a syslog warning message including the file name the TFTP client address the file size and the maximum allowed size The configuration file XXX from the TFTP client XXX is not downloaded because its size XXX bytes exceeds the maximum allowed size XXX bytes Send error code 3 disk full or allocation exceeded to the TFTP client Set sysAdminDownloadConfigFileStatus to fail and send msTrapStatusConfigFile TFTP transfer error Received a TFTP error from the TFTP client Send a syslog warning message including t
153. Reference Manual provides technical information for the Mediatrix 2102 Use the Mediatrix 2102 Reference Manual in conjunction with the appropriate publications listed in Related Documentation on page xx New Documentation This new version of the Mediatrix 2102 introduces changes to the documentation The information formerly in the User s Manual has now been included in this Reference Manual If you are an end user who is looking for information on how to use the features on your telephone refer to the following chapters Table 1 End User Information Information Where to get it Call processes how to make calls and emergency calls Chapter 19 Telephony Features on page 197 How to use the subscriber services such as call forward Chapter 20 Subscriber Services on call transfer etc page 203 How to use the telephony attributes such as an automatic Chapter 21 Telephony Attributes on call IP address call service etc page 217 What s New in this Version e Possibility to define a substitute VLAN tagging See VLAN Substitution on page 231 for details Mediatrix 2102 xix Preface About this Manual Intended Audience Intended Audience This manual provides all the technical information needed to install and manage the Mediatrix 2102 It is intended for network administrators and system managers who install and set up network equipment con
154. Ringback Tone 440 Hz 1 5 3 5 19 9 dBm Special Information Tone 950 Hz 3 x 0 3 2 x 0 03 1 0 19 9 dBm 1400 Hz 1800 Hz Stutter Dial Tone 440 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 CONTINUOUS 16 9 dBm Confirmation Tone 440 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 End 16 9 dBm Receiver Off Hook ROH Tone 1400 Hz 0 1 0 1 19 dBm 2060 Hz 19 dBm 2450 Hz 19 dBm 2600 Hz 19 dBm Message Waiting Indicator Tone 440 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 10 16 9 dBm Network Congestion Tone 440 Hz 0 25 0 25 19 9 dBm Ring AC 45 VRMS 50 Hz 1 5 3 5 DC 15 Vdc Input Impedance 215 Q 1000 Q 137 nF Default Caller ID FRANCE BELLCORE FRANCE_ETSI_FSK ETSI_FSK FRANCE_ETSI_DTMF ETSI_DTM F FXS Line Attenuation Input 1 9 dBr FXS Line Attenuation Output 8 9 dBr Mediatrix 2102 279 Appendix D Country Specific Parameters Germany Germany The following parameters apply if you have selected Germany as location Germany 1 The following parameters apply if you have selected Germany 1 as location Table 164 Germany 1 Parameters Parameter Value On Off Sequence s Elect Levels Dial Tone 425 Hz CONTINUOUS 16 dBm Busy Tone 425 Hz 0 48 0 48 16 dBm Ringback Tone 425 Hz 1 0 4 0 16 dBm Special Information Tone 900 Hz 0 33 16 dBm 1400 Hz 0 33 1800 Hz 0 33 1 0 Stutter Dial Tone 425 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 CONTINUOUS 16 dBm Confirmation Tone 425 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 End 16 dBm Receiver Off Hook
155. SE The variable may be in a MIB that is located under the mediatrixExperimental branch of the MIB structure Mediatrix configuration tool the Unit Manager Network does not support MIBs that are located under the mediatrixExperimental branch of the MIB structure The Unit Manager Network does not have specific tasks to manage variables in experimental MIBs The mediatrixExperimental branch is the area where objects and events in MIBs under development can be placed without fear of conflicting with other MIBs When the items rooted under an experimental sub tree are ready for release they will be under a permanent branch Even though the Unit Manager Network can view experimental MIBs SNMP operations may not work properly on them DESCRIPTION When viewing a table the unit does not respond Be POSSIBLE CAUSE It may take time to fill completely a table from 1 to 5 seconds This is normal because the unit is an embedded device with limited processing power DESCRIPTION Is it possible for a hacker to change the content of SNMPv3 variables once the Mediatrix 2102 is in secure mode management Be POSSIBLE CAUSE In secure management mode the Mediatrix 2102 works in SNMPv1 read only SNMPv2c read only and SNMPv3 read write SNMP requests using the first two protocols are read only and tables used for setting up SNMPv3 users hide the passwords they carry Because hackers do not know what password to use in SNMPv3 reque
156. SessionExpirationDelay variable This is the suggested maximum time in seconds for the periodical session refreshes It must be equal to or greater than the minimum value This value is reflected in the Session Expires header 2 Set the session timer minimum expiration delay in the sipUAMinimumSessionExpirationDelay variable This is the minimum value in seconds for the periodical session refreshes It must be equal to or smaller than the maximum value This value is reflected in the Min SE header The Min SE value is a threshold under which proxies and user agents on the signalling path are not allowed to go P To disable the Session Timer service 1 Set the sipUAMaximumSessionExpirationDelay variable to 0 Increasing the maximum helps to reduce network traffic but also makes dead calls longer to detect 164 Mediatrix 2102 Session Timers Reference Manual SIP Version Session Timer Version Standards Supported You can select the version of the session timer draft that the Mediatrix 2102 uses Session timer versions other than those provisioned may not work because of backward compatibility issues between the versions This feature is currently located under the mediatrixExperimental branch of the MIB structure See MIB Structure on page 43 for more details The Mediatrix 2102 supports the following session timer versions Table 106 Session Timer Versions Supported Version Description sess
157. Set the following SNMP related variable to properly use the protocol Table 39 SNMP Configuration Variables Variable Description localHostStaticSnmpPort Default SNMP agent port which is the port number to use to reach the local host via SNMP protocol Restart the unit to update this parameter Default Value 161 Note If you change the SNMP agent port change the port used in the management server or MIB Browser Not doing so will prevent you from contacting the unit The Management Server could be the Mediatrix Unit Manager Network See Unit Manager Network Element Management System on page xxv for more details You can query the SNMP information assigned by the DHCP server in the following variables in the ipAddressStatus folder gt localHostSnmpPort gt msTrapPort Mediatrix 2102 57 Chapter 4 IP Address and Network Configuration Services Image The pAddressConfiglmage group provides the configuration necessary to download applications into the Mediatrix 2102 This includes emergency downloads in case of repetitive failure to start the main application E In the Unit Manager Network Administration Manual refer to chapter Administration Parameters section ja Software and Emergency Download K To select the Image configuration source 1 In the ipAddressConfig folder locate the imageSelectConfigSource variable under the ipAddressConfiglmage group 2
158. Set this variable to either static or dhcp vendor site specific option Table 40 Image Information Source Variable Default Static Value DHCP Source imagePrimaryHost 192 168 0 10 Use option specified in variable imageDhcpPrimarySiteSpecificCode bytes 0 3 If not specified 0 use option 43 sub option 117 bytes 0 3 imagePrimaryPort 69 Use option specified in variable imageDhcpPrimarySiteSpecificCode bytes 4 5 If not specified 0 use option 43 sub option 117 bytes 4 5 If bytes 4 5 are not present use the default static value imageSecondaryHost 192 168 0 10 Use option specified in variable imageDhcpSecondarySiteSpecificCode bytes 0 3 If not specified 0 use option 43 sub option 118 bytes 0 3 imageSecondaryPort 698 Use option specified in variable imageDhcpSecondarySiteSpecificCode bytes 4 5 If not specified 0 use option 43 sub option 118 bytes 4 5 If bytes 4 5 are not present use the default static value a This is the well known TFTP port number as per RFC 1340 58 Mediatrix 2102 Services Reference Manual SIP Version Management Server The pAddressConfigMs group provides the configuration necessary for contacting a SNMP management server such as the Mediatrix Unit Manager Network S In the Unit Manager Network Administration Manual refer to chapter Administration Parameters section Unit ja Manager Server K To select the Managem
159. Siaddr field a If you do not want to use a DNS set the variable to 0 b If you are not using a default router set the variable to 0 0 0 0 Setting the default router IP address to 0 0 0 0 may lead to software download problems See the troubleshooting section Software Upgrade Issues on page 251 for more details zi Note If the localHostDnsOverrideEnable or telephonyDnsOverrideEnable variable is enabled the primary and secondary DNS addresses are set with static values See Static DNS on page 55 for more details In the table above the only variables that allow an empty string are localHostPrimaryDns LocalHostSecondaryDns and LocalHostDefaultRouter 3 Restart the Mediatrix 2102 so that the changes may take effect 54 Mediatrix 2102 Services Reference Manual SIP Version Static DNS By default the Mediatrix 2102 and the networked PC linked in a LAN with the unit receives DNS IP addresses according to the configuration source you have defined in the localHostSelectConfigSource variable In general these addresses are provided by an ISP Internet Service Provider via PPPoE or DHCP However you may require that the Mediatrix 2102 and the networked PC use different DNS addresses If that is the case you can set static values for the primary and secondary DNS IP addresses even when the Mediatrix 2102 is set by DHCP These static values can thus override PPPoE and DHCP provisioni
160. The address is configured in the localHostStaticWanAddress variable Note that this setting allows a limited NAT traversal scheme pppoe The Mediatrix 2102 uses the PPP interface s address as the WAN address The PPPoE service must be enabled for the WAN address to be configured automatic If the PPPoE service is enabled the Mediatrix 2102 uses pppoe as the configuration source Otherwise it uses localAddress Table 36 WAN IP Address Source Variable Default Static Value DHCP Source LocalHostWanAddress 192 168 0 1 Option IP Address Restart the Mediatrix 2102 so that the changes may take effect LAN Interface Configuration No DHCP value is available you can define LAN information with only static values Table 37 LAN Interface Source Variable Default Static Value DHCP Source lanStaticAddress 192 168 10 1 N A lanStaticNetworkMask 255 255 255 0 N A 56 Mediatrix 2102 Services Reference Manual SIP Version SNMP Configuration No DHCP value is available you can define SNMP information with only static values Table 38 SNMP Source Variable Default Static Value DHCP Source LocalHostSnmpPort 161 N A g In the Unit Manager Network Administration Manual refer to chapter Working with SNMP section Setting Unit afa SNMP Preferences The Mediatrix 2102 uses the SNMP protocol for software configuration
161. The string format is validated upon entry Invalid entries are refused 2 Enable the refused digit map by setting the digitMapRefusedEnable variable to enable When enabled this digit map is recognised and refused only if it is also valid Digit Maps Timeouts You can define timeouts that apply to the whole unit when dialing a digit map gt To configure digit map timeouts 1 In the digitMapMIB digitMap Timeouts group define the total time the user has to dial the DTMF sequence in the digitMap TimeoutCompletion variable The timer starts when the dial tone is played When the timer expires the receiver off hook tone is played This value is expressed in milliseconds ms Values range from 1000 ms to 180000 ms The default value is 60000 ms 2 Define the time between the start of the dial tone and the receiver off hook tone if no DTMF is detected in the digitMap TimeoutFirstDigit variable This value is expressed in milliseconds ms Values range from 1000 ms to 180000 ms The default value is 20000 ms 3 Define the value of the T digit in the digitMap TimeoutInterDigit variable The T digit is used to express a time lapse between the detection of two DTMFs This value is expressed in milliseconds ms Values range from 500 ms to 10000 ms The default value is 4000 ms Mediatrix 2102 191 Chapter 18 Digit Maps Digit Map Examples Digit Map Examples Digit Map Example 1 Standard Calls Let s s
162. This mechanism caches the initial software download for later processing thus preventing changes or update of the original download by the user This can cause problems if a user wants to modify the software download and perform it again immediately The result will still return the original download and not the new one 5 If your HTTP server requires authentication set the following The user name in the image TransferUsername variable s The password in the imageTransferPassword variable 6 Set the groupSetAdmin variable in the groupAdminMIB to ForceLock All activities in progress on the Mediatrix 2102 are terminated immediately and the unit enters the maintenance mode the value of the groupAdminState variable is locked The software upgrade may take place The Mediatrix 2102 lines will be unlocked after successfully downloading the software and restarting If for any reason the software download is not successful you must manually unlock the lines as per Lines Administrative State on page 139 7 Initiate the download by setting the sysAdminCommand variable in the sysAdminMIB to downloadSoftware This starts the download process Caution Never shutdown the Mediatrix 2102 manually while in the download process because the image may be partially written and the Mediatrix 2102 is unable to restart The software download may take several minutes depending on your Internet connection network conditions an
163. Type DTMF Transport Using SIP INFO Standards Supported You can use the SIP INFO method to collect and transport DTMFs The collection process is regarded as being an unsolicited one character timer less digit collection When the feature is enabled K The Mediatrix 2102 sends a separate SIP INFO method every time a digitis entered during the call K The Mediatrix 2102 plays each DTMF sent in a separate message upon receiving a valid SIP INFO message To enable the DTMF transport using the SIP INFO feature 1 In the voicelfMIB set the DTMF transport type in the voicelfDimfTransport variable voicelfDtmfTransportTable group according to the transport type you want to use There are three methods to transport DTMF events e in band e out of band using RTP RFC 2833 out of band using SIP INFO Table 100 Transport Type Setting To Set the variable to Transport DTMF events in band inBand Transport DTMF events out of band by exclusively using outOfBandUsingRtp RTP RFC 2833 Transport DTMF events out of band by exclusively using outOfBandUsingSignalingProtocol the SIP INFO method Offer the choice to transport DTMF events out of band by signalingProtocolDependent using either RTP or the SIP INFO method If you set the voicelfDtmfTransport variable to signalingProtocolDependent the remote party must select one of the two transport types Transporting DTMF by using RTP has prio
164. X cross over Ethernet cable not required 1 RJ 45 LAN connector 10 100 BaseT Ethernet access with auto MDI MDIX cross over Ethernet cable not required External wall plug power supply The voltage differs depending on the hardware revision of your unit Mediatrix 2102 with hardware revision 7 12 Vdc at 8 W e Mediatrix 2102 with hardware revision 6 24 Vdc at 13 2 W Seamless switch over period if the client UPS detects a power loss and activates within 8 ms Country specific models Casing Installation Casing Desktop Plastic ABS UL94 VO Installation The Mediatrix 2102 is designed for the desktop or can be wall mountable Product Architecture Details v v vV v v Supports two concurrent communications using any vocoders DSP based DTMF detection and generation DSP based fax relay Embedded operating system with 32 bit real time multitasking Kernel Embedded IPv4 TCP IP stack with configurable QoS implemented by s ToS byte at Network layer 3 e 802 1p at Data Link layer 2 Network parameters assigned via DHCP 262 Mediatrix 2102 Real Time Fax Router Technical Specifications Reference Manual SIP Version Real Time Fax Router Technical Specifications Automatic selection between voice and fax Table 145 Fax Technical Specifications Parameter Description Ethernet 10 100 BaseT Ethernet Data Link Ethernet II Network IP Internet Protocol Transport TCP
165. Y OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Original SSLeay License Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA Ihash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tj h cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual
166. a is stored and the unit is reset otherwise the unit triggers the RecoveryModePending state Off Off Off Blink 1 Hz 50 Recovery Mode Pending Triggered when the button is held at start time or for at least 7 seconds If the button is released within 5 seconds after the LED pattern has started and the button was pressed while restarting the unit enters the RecoveryMode state If the button was pressed at run time the unit resets before going to the RecoveryMode state If the button is released after 5 seconds or more the unit falls into the DefaultSettingsPending state Blink 1 Hz 50 Blink 1 Hz 50 Blink 1 Hz 50 Blink 1 Hz 50 Default Settings Pending This is when the button is not released while in RecoveryModePending state At run time if the button is released within 5 seconds the unit applies default settings otherwise the action is cancelled and the unit goes back to the Operation Modes state or it resets At start time the unit stays in this state until the button is released When the button is released the unit applies the default settings and restarts On On Image DownloadIn Progress A software image is downloaded into the unit and written to persistent storage All LEDs are blinking at 1 Hz one ata time from left to right Image Download Error Triggered after a failure of an image download operation to indicate that the
167. a known static and minimal state lt is used to recover from a basic configuration error that prevents you to reach the unit through the network lt may serve as a last resort before the Factory reset command You must perform it in a closed network and on only one Mediatrix 2102 at a time because the default IP address is the same on every unit The recovery mode is not intended to address configuration and or software problems For those types of problems you must use the Factory reset LF Note The procedure below assumes that you are performing it at run time K To trigger the Recovery Mode 1 With a 10 100 Hub and two 10 100 BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 straight cables connect both cables to the hub one of them is connected into the Network connector of the Mediatrix 2102 and the other one links the computer to the hub Alternatively you can connect a 10 100 BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 crossover cable into the Network connector of the Mediatrix 2102 and connect the other end to your computer 2 Reconfigure the IP address of your computer to 192 168 0 10 and enter the Subnet Mask of 255 255 255 0 Restart the computer 3 Insert a small unbent paper clip into the Default Settings switch hole located at the of the Mediatrix 2102 4 Hold the Default Settings switch between 5 and 10 seconds until the LEDs start blinking 5 Release the paper clip Only the Power and Ready LEDs should go on blinking to inform you that the recovery re
168. able variable to disable If you set this variable to enable which is the default value the Mediatrix 2102 reuses the credential negotiated in previous transactions 178 Mediatrix 2102 Branch Parameter Settings Reference Manual SIP Version Branch Parameter Settings The following are settings related to the Branch parameter Branch Matching Method Standards Supported You can configure the method used to match incoming SIP packets with a branch A branch could be described as a link that allows to match a response to a request K To configure the branch matching method 1 In the sipinteropMIB set the sipInteropBranchMatchingMethod variable with the proper method to use Table 116 Branch Matching Method Method Description rf c2543 Follows the method described in RFC 2543 section 10 1 2 Responses are mapped to requests by the matching To From Call ID and CSeq headers and the branch parameter of the first V a header rfc3261 Follows the method described in RFC 3261 section 8 1 1 7 A Via is inserted into the request and the Via header field value must contain a branch parameter This parameter is used to identify the transaction created by that request It is used by both the client and the server The branch ID is used to facilitate its use as a transaction ID It must always begin with the characters z9hG4bK If this is not the case the Mediatrix 2102 uses the branching method as descr
169. abling 233 messages examples 233 requirement 1 static information using 234 statistics 238 local 236 messages examples 236 messages configuration file 111 examples 233 236 software download 130 T 38 base port range 99 defined 305 enabling 160 not supported by other endpoint 247 number of redundancy packets 160 protection level 160 tables defined 46 generic 46 groupAdmin 47 ifAdmin 47 TCP port range 99 transport type 171 technical support for end user xxvi telephone number dialing 200 telephony attributes automatic call 217 call direction restriction 218 IP address call 218 temperature operating 6 textual conventions in MIB structure 44 TFTP configuration file download 113 server configuring 107 125 TFTP continued server defined 305 requirement 1 software donwload via 132 time zone defining custom 185 TPE see cabling transfer version supported setting 169 transferring a call attended transfer 214 blind 213 translated warning definition 258 transmission timeout setting 171 transparent address sharing defined 87 enabling 93 LAN interface 95 PPPoE service connection 102 enabling 90 error handling 103 password setting 30 91 RFCs supported 90 setting 90 user name setting 30 91 QoS substitution value 94 routing mechanism 104 RTCP base port range 100 RTP base port range 100 T 38 base port range 99 TCP port range 99 UDP port range 99 WAN IP address 92 WAN upstream bandwidth control 97 troubles
170. ading via HTTP the image server s port must be 80 You can query the actual port 4 In the imageMIB set the imageTransferProtocol variable to either http or tftp If you are using the HTTP protocol to download the software be aware that your HTTP server may activate some caching mechanism for the software download This mechanism caches the initial software download for later processing thus preventing changes or update of the original download by the user This can cause problems if a user wants to modify the software download and perform it again immediately The result will still return the original download and not the new one 5 If you are using the HTTP protocol and your HTTP server requires authentication set the following The user name in the image TransferUsername variable s The password in the imageTransferPassword variable 6 Set the imageAutoUpdateOnRestartEnable variable to enable 7 Set the imageAutoUpdateEnable variable to enable The automatic software update will be performed each time the Mediatrix 2102 restarts 134 Mediatrix 2102 Download Procedure Reference Manual SIP Version Automatic Update at a Specific Time Interval You can configure the Mediatrix 2102 to download a software version at a specific day and or time K To set the automatic update at a specific time interval 1 If not already done setup the Image server used to download the software see Before Downloading on pag
171. ady LED will remain off until this setting has been changed For more informations refer to Chapter 2 Web Interface on page 25 Power on the PC Your computer does not have to be turned on for the telephone or fax services Mediatrix suggests to access the unit s web interface to configure its basic uplinks parameters See Chapter 2 Web Interface on page 25 for more details 10 Mediatrix 2102 Hardware Connection Reference Manual SIP Version Multiple Computer Installation You can use a router with the Mediatrix 2102 to provide Internet connectivity to more than one PC or other device The following steps describe how to install the Mediatrix 2102 with a router The installation may either be performed with a cable modem or a DSL modem The resulting layout could be something similar to Figure 6 Figure 6 Router Network Configuration Computer Analog Fax Optional emma Modem Router Computer Optional Mediatrix 2102 The following figure is a global illustration of the hardware connections Figure 7 Router Installation Telephone Fax Connector 1 Connector 2 Power Supply If your Internet connection requires PPPoE authentication enter a PPPoE user name and password in the Mediatrix 2102 as described in Administration Page on page 29 Note Most home routers are configured by default to automatically obtain an IP address via DH
172. ails Configuration file Links to the Configuration file upload web page which allows you to upload a configuration file from a computer to the Mediatrix 2102 See Configuration File Upload Page on page 32 for more details HTTP server password Links to the HTTP server password web page which allows you to change the password See HTTP Server Password Page on page 33 for more details System log Links to the System log page which displays in read only format the syslog messages the Mediatrix 2102 sends See System Log Page on page 34 for more details Mediatrix 2102 27 Chapter 2 Web Interface Using the Web Interface Table 15 Menu Frame Links Continued Link Description Bandwidth Links to the Bandwidth Management page which allows you to limit the upload Management bandwidth on the WAN interface See Bandwidth Management Page on page 35 for more details STUN Links to the STUN page which allows you to configure the STUN client of the Mediatrix 2102 See STUN Page on page 36 for more details Content Frame The Content frame is displayed in the lower part of the browser window It contains the various web pages that allow you to manage the Mediatrix 2102 28 Mediatrix 2102 Administration Page Reference Manual SIP Version Administration Page The Administration web page allows you to set the uplink connection and IP information the
173. aiting subscriptions All enabled endpoints unsubscribe themselves from the service and re subscribe by using the current provisioning MWI Method 2 Standards Supported This method does not require any special settings or configuration 222 Mediatrix 2102 MWI Notify Service Reference Manual SIP Version MWI Notify Service The Mediatrix 2102 offers the possibility to extend some key features to remote extensions located in Branch or Home Offices across the SCN This service is available only when using the IP Communication Server v3 1 product as a SIP Redirect server For instance a designated analog voice mail system at a main site can provide voice mail for the home or branch office The home office user is notified of the message waiting via a message waiting LED on the telephone or a special tone when picking up the telephone How does the Service Work The MWI Notify service is a proprietary feature In this solution the analog voice mail system is configured to seize a designated outgoing line and dial a pre defined string such as 72xxx to notify the server it must give a message waiting indication to extension xxx Once voice messages have been retrieved the analog voice mail system seizes the designated outgoing line and dials a pre defined string such as 73xxx to notify the server to turn off the message waiting indicator for extension xxx The service uses the Route Manager currently
174. ake effect If you are using a DSL modem the Mediatrix 2102 tries to establish a PPP connection to the access concentrator and service defined in the above steps When the router is in public state the IP address of the PC is set to be the exact same as the unit s WAN address The DHCP server provides the IP address to the PC Figure 33 Network Layout with Addresses Example WAN LAN WAN IP address 200 100 33 4 200 100 33 4 gt SH D a PE Kr eeng Access lt gt Mediatrix 2102 Concentrator PC Router 100 Mediatrix 2102 DHCP Server Reference Manual SIP Version DHCP Server Enabling the TAS service also enables a DHCP server that allocates IP addresses to the PC located on the LAN DHCP Server Compliance Standards Supported The DHCP server is compliant to RFC 2131 RFC 2132 with the following limitations The pool of assignable IP addresses contains only one address This means that only one DHCP client at a time can lease an address All other lease requests are ignored The DHCP server never accepts the IP address requested by the client option 50 unless by coincidence The DHCP server never accepts the lease time that is proposed by the client option 51 unless by coincidence The DHCP server returns only the options specified in Supported DHCP Options on page 101 all other parameter requests as part of option 55 are ignored Supported DHCP Options T
175. al users Figure 27 Mediatrix 2102 Residential Application Scenario PC or NAT Router gt IE gt Mediatrix 2102 Modem Analog Fax In a residential VoIP deployment the WAN interface of the Mediatrix 2102 gets assigned a public IPv4 address by the ISP either by a DHCP negotiation or by establishing a point to point link PPPoE or by some other mechanism depending on the type of link The device on the LAN e g the PC gets assigned the same public IPv4 address as the Mediatrix 2102 by using the DHCP The subnet mask given is the same as the one assigned by the ISP or if it is not available such as for a PPPoE connection it uses the predefined subnet classes Mediatrix 2102 87 Chapter 8 Transparent Address Sharing What is Transparent Address Sharing Figure 28 Transparent Address Sharing LAN WAN analog Phone WAN Interface Public Address LAN Interface 200 100 50 120 Private Address WI 192 168 10 1 onsorltos a Mediatrix 210 DSL or Cable PG Modem 200 100 50 120 gt a VolP Management Packets All other IPv4 Packets Incoming Traffic Packets sent to private address All other IPv4 Packets Outgoing Traffic The LAN interface of the Mediatrix 2102 is configured with a private IPv4 address This address allows the device on the LAN to communicate with the Mediatrix 2102 as this would be otherwise impossible because both devic
176. all plug Connector with 100 BaseT Ethernet 100 BaseT Ethernet power supply Port 1 access to a computer access Table 6 describes the back panel connections Table 6 Back Connections of the Mediatrix 2102 Connection Description Network A 10 100 BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 connector for access to a LAN WAN or computer Computer A 10 100 BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 connector that can be connected into the network card of a computer Bypass Allows its users to make emergency calls and maintain telephone services in the event of a power outage or network failure Note This connector is not available on all Mediatrix 2102 units Phone Fax Two RJ 11 connectors to attach a conventional telephone or G3 fax machine Connector 1 is the leftmost connector These analog devices feed the signal either voice or data to be converted and transmitted to the network Power connector External wall plug power supply The voltage differs depending on the hardware revision of your unit e Mediatrix 2102 with hardware revision 7 12 Vdc at 8 W e Mediatrix 2102 with hardware revision 6 24 Vdc at 13 2 W Default Settings switch Resets configuration parameters of the Mediatrix 2102 to default known values It can be used to reconfigure the unit Warning Read Section Default Settings Switch on page 20 before attempting to reset the unit Mediatrix 2102 5 Chapter 1 Installation Choosing a Suitable Installation Site
177. alue is obtained at start time by querying a DHCP server and using standard DHCP fields or options See RFC 2131 section 2 and RFC 2132 DHCP Site specific options The value is obtained at start time by querying a DHCP server and using a non standard option specific to the site where the Mediatrix 2102 is used See Site Specific Options on page 65 for more details DHCP Vendor specific The value is obtained at start time by querying a DHCP server and options using a standard option that is reserved for storing vendor specific information See Vendor Specific Options on page 64 for more details DNS The value is obtained at start time by querying a DNS server None The value is not provisioned The application provides an acceptable default Automatic The configuration source is selected by the Mediatrix 2102 following a preference order and the availability of some services PPP IPCP The value is obtained during the PPP network layer protocol phase from the IPCP configuration options a See RFC 1332 The PPP Internet Protocol Control Protocol IPCP for more details 52 Mediatrix 2102 Services Reference Manual SIP Version Services This section describes the services the Mediatrix 2102 uses and their settings Most of these services require that you define their IP address and if required port number See DHCP Server Configuration on page 63 for
178. ameter Description static Uses the directory specified in the imageLocation variable see Step 2 remoteFile The image location is defined in a file called mediatrix2102targetimage inf The location of this file is defined in the imageSelectionFileLocation variable This is useful if you are using automatic updates with multiple units see Step 3 128 Mediatrix 2102 Download Procedure Reference Manual SIP Version 2 If you have set the imageLocationProvisionSource variable to static see Step 1 configure the path in the imageLocation variable This is the location of the setup inf file that contains the list of the files to download into the Mediatrix 2102 The setup inf file and all the other files must be in the same directory In other words this is the path from the root TFTP HTTP folder down to the files extracted from the zip file 3 If you have set the imageLocationProvisionSource variable to remoteFile see Step 1 a Create a text file and write the path and or name of the directory that contains the files required for download Save this file as mediatrix2102targetimage inf under the server root path LF Note If you leave the file empty the Mediatrix 2102 will look for the software download information in the root directory of the image server b Configure the path of the mediatrix2102targetimage inf file in the imageSelectionFileLocation variable Note
179. ance to determine exactly when there are enough digits entered from the user to place a call Syntax The permitted digit map syntax is taken from the core MGCP specification RFC 2705 section 3 4 DigitMap DigitString DigitStringlist DigitStringList DigitString 0 DigitString DigitString 1 DigitStringElement DigitStringElement DigitPosition DigitPosition DigitMapLetter DigitMapRange DigitMapLetter DIGIT A B C D rm DigitMapRange x 1 DigitLetter DigitLetter DIGIT DIGIT DigitMapLetter Where x means any digit and means any number of For instance using the telephone on your desk you can dial the following numbers Table 122 Number Examples Number Description 0 Local operator 00 Long distance operator XXXX Local extension number BXXXXXXX Local number XXXXXXX Shortcut to local number at other corporate sites 91XXXXXXXXXX Long distance numbers 9011 up to 15 digits International number The solution to this problem is to load the Mediatrix 2102 with a digit map that corresponds to the dial plan Mediatrix 2102 187 Chapter 18 Digit Maps Special Characters A Mediatrix 2102 that detects digits or timers applies the current dial string to the digit map attempting a match to each regular expression in the digit map in lexical order K If the result is under q
180. ancy t trying d ACK gt Fax is terminated INVITE E Ll m audio 5004 RTP AVP 0 18 4 8 13 L 5006 RTP AVP 0 18 4 8 13 a rtpmap 0 PCMU 8000 a rtpmap 0 PCMU 8000 a rtpmap 18 G729 8000 a rtpmap 18 G729 8000 a rtpmap 4 G723 8000 a rtpmap 4 G723 8000 a rtpmap 8 PCMA 8000 a rtpmap 8 PCMA 8000 li 2000K TE R ri9 E ir d e A BYE i e 200 OK User Agent 2 Mediatrix 2102 159 Chapter 13 Fax Transmission T 38 Fax K To set T 38 fax transmission 1 2 Enable T 38 by setting the datalfCodecT38Enable variable to enable Set the number of redundancy packets sent with the current packet in the datalfCodecT38ProtectionLevel variable This is the standard redundancy offered by T 38 Please see step 3 for additional reliability options for T 38 Available values range from 1 to 5 3 being the default value For additional reliability define the number of times T 38 packets are retransmitted in the datalfT38FinalFramesRedundancy variable This only applies to the T 38 packets where the PrimaryUDPTL contains the following T 38 data type HDLC_SIG_END s HDLC ECS OK SIG END e HDLC ECS BAD SIG END and s TA NON ECM SIG END Restart the Mediatrix 2102 so that the changes may take effect 160 Mediatrix 2102 CHAPTER 14 Bypass Configuration The Mediatrix 2102 may have an optional RJ 11 connector used to connect to a standard SCN line called Bypass lt allows its users t
181. andwidth Connection sss sese eee ee eee eee 105 What is Considered a Low Bandwidth Connection sss sese eee eee eee eee 105 Configuration for a Low Bandwidth Connection sss sss esse eee eee eee eee eee 105 Chapter 9 Contiguration File Download cscs acca ce cece ate cs a cecesinsiccieainiinsidnninentencaacecantmewencaccteeenens 107 Configuration File Download Server sss eee ee eee eee 107 Configuringthe TFTP WEE 107 Configuring the SNTP Servet EE 107 Configuring the e MR NEE 107 Configuration File Server Settnge cescszr2cs cgo eg cs e ie 108 Setting up the Configuration File Download 109 Configuration Update Status cocos ida a dde dad id dt dida 111 Configuration Files Encryption E 112 x Mediatrix 2102 Reference Manual SIP Version Configuration Download via NH ei EE 113 Configuration Download via HTTP sse eee 114 Automatic Configuration Update e ea 115 Error HANIA Gis TT 118 Management Server TTT 121 Management Server Configuration ccecccecccceedeceeseceedeseedeseeteeesdanendeceedusentensedeesecedeedandedessadeseeeae e 121 Downloading from the Management Genera 121 Error Handling siii a es Rael 122 ee EE 123 Configuration File Exvample eee eee eee 124 Chapter 10 Software DOWAlO9d nora 125 Before DOWNIOAGING TTT 125 Configuring the TFTP Seref EE 125 Configuring the SNTP Seyef EE 125 Configuring the HTTP e aaa a dede 125 Software Servers Confguraton eee ee eee ee 126 Elo Geelen E 126 AICC UN radic
182. ansport registration by setting the sipTransportRegistrationEnable variable to enable The Mediatrix 2102 includes its supported transports in its registrations It registers with one contact for each transport that is currently enabled Each of these contacts contains a transport parameter Mediatrix 2102 171 Chapter 15 SIP Protocol Features SIP Transport Type This is especially useful for a system where there are no SRV records configured to use a predefined transport order for receiving requests When sending a request the unit either follows the SRV configuration or if not available any transport parameter received from a redirection or from a configured SIP URL See Chapter 6 DNS SRV Configuration on page 79 for more details iF Note If the Mediatrix 2102 has the following configuration e the sipTransportRegistrationEnable variable is set to disable e the UDP transport type is disabled e the TCP transport type is enabled The Mediatrix 2102 will not work properly unless the SIP server uses the TCP transport type by default This is also true if the Mediatrix 2102 has the TCP transport disabled and the UDP transport enabled In this case the Mediatrix 2102 will not work properly unless the SIP server uses the UDP transport protocol by default Transport Parameter You can define whether the Mediatrix 2102 must include its supported transport in all SIP messages that have the Contact header except for
183. arameters F TS STT iia pito pd ad ta id has 162 fxsEmergencyBypassDialDelay 162 fxsEmergencyBypassDialMap 161 ixsEmergencyBypassEnable iococoincricii saeta adas eri dado aii nacido 162 fxsEmergencyBypassTiMeQUt eee 161 fxsFlashHookDetectionDelayMax fxsFlashHookDetectionDelayMin S Eeler 144 G groupAdminState sees eee 114 132 133 171 172 174 geit dd ais 23 COU PSO ean 23 113 114 132 133 H ua ett e 37 httpServerEnable Add o es lfAdminnitialAdMIin State il Al ted de 140 ifAdminSetAdmin imageAutoUpdateEnable viii Added imageAutoUpdateOnRestartEnable eee imageAutoUpdatePeriod sese imageAutoUpdateTimeOfDay imageAutoUpdateTimeUnit IMAGeCONFIGSOUNCE wi asd ads Image Dbecpbmarv Gite peche ode imageDhcpSecondarySiteSpecificCode Ee Ee EE le Ree ll Ee Ee IMAaGePriMaryHOSt EE 21 58 126 Iie PriMany POr niesna aa data 21 58 126 imageSecondaryHost 21 58 126 IMAGESECONMALYPOSK oes cece ccceceseeeeeeseeceseseseeaeeeeecsesaeaesecscseseeseseesesesacseseeseeassesesseaeesaeeesaeeesetseeesaeeeseteeteeseaeees 21 58 126 le Dee tee 58 126 imageSelectionFileLocati0N eee eee 128 129 imagestaticPrimaryHOst EE 127 imageStaticPrimaryPort le Ee eine TE 127 IMageStatic5ECON la Poit TT 127 imageTransferPassword imageTransferProtocol imageTransferUsername IpAddressContigl anInte mace 0000 e 95 ipRoutingBandwidthControlEnable AA 98 105 ipRoutingDhcpServerLeaseTi
184. ariable Secondary DNS Value of the localHostSecondaryDns MIB variable MAC Address MAC address of the Mediatrix 2102 Software version Software version of the Mediatrix 2102 Hardware version Version of the analog circuit board of the Mediatrix 2102 System description A textual description of the Mediatrix 2102 It usually includes the full name and version identification of its hardware type software operating system and networking software System uptime The time in hundredths of a second since the network management portion of the system was last re initialized Registration status port1 May have one of the following Ready if the operational state of the current interface is enabled Registration status port2 Not ready if the component is operationally non functional because of an internal condition that would not allow it to participate in a normal VoIP call Menu Frame The Menu frame is displayed at the top right side of the browser window It contains management icons that allow you to display web pages in the Content frame Table 15 Menu Frame Links Link Description Overview Links to the Overview web page which displays in read only format the parameters and IP addresses used by the Mediatrix 2102 Administration Links to the Administration web page which allows you to set the uplink information used by the Mediatrix 2102 See Administration Page on page 29 for more det
185. arts to apply all the new settings If the Mediatrix 2102 does not restart this could mean the download failed In this case you can query the status of the last configuration file download in the sysAdminDownloadConfigFile Status variable e idle No configuration file download has been performed yet e fail The last configuration file download failed e success The last configuration file download succeeded e inProgress A configuration file download is in progress e listening The unit is listening and waiting for a configuration file to be sent by the management server Mediatrix 2102 121 Chapter 9 Configuration File Download Management Server Figure 34 Configuration Sequence Update Using the Management Server Mediatrix Unit Error Handling Restarting Restarting Management Server The following are possible error sources when updating the unit configuration using the management server The error cause and the unit behaviour are also described Table 77 Configuration File Error Handling with the Management Server Error Type Cause Behaviour Empty file Committing an empty file Send a syslog warning message including the file name and the TFTP client address The configuration file XXX pushed to the unit by the TFTP client XXX is empty Invalid file content Committing a file that contains invalid characters Allowed characters are ASCII codes 10 LF 13 C
186. ary Lock Settings Setting Description unlock Registers the line to the SIP server lock Cancels the line registration to the SIP server Active calls in progress remain established until normal call termination No new calls may be initiated forcelock Cancels the line registration to the SIP server All active calls in progress are terminated immediately No new calls may be initiated Mediatrix 2102 139 Chapter 11 Line Configuration Line Grouping Permanent Administrative State The permanent administrative state is applied every time the Mediatrix 2102 restarts K Toseta permanent administrative state 1 In the ifAdminMIB locate the ifAdminInitialAdminState variable This variable indicates the administrative state the current analog line will have after the Mediatrix 2102 restarts It offers the following settings Table 89 Permanent Lock Settings Setting Description unlocked Registers the line to the SIP server locked The analog line is unavailable for normal operation It cannot be used to make and or receive calls Line Grouping A group is a collection of analog lines that when called from the IP network behave as if they were only one line It s the same principle as calling a call centre where there is only one telephone number but there are several telephones on the call centre side An algorithm allows to choose the telephone that will ring upon a new in
187. as the dash in 555 xxxx should not be present Because this variable is located in a table you can have a different string for each line Define the time in milliseconds the telephone keeps ringing before the call forwarding activates in the subscriberServicesCallForwardOnNoAnswerTimeout variable The default value is 5000 Enable the Call Forward On No Answer by setting the subscriberServicesCallForwardOnNoAnswerEnable variable to enable under the subscriberServicesIfEnablingTable group Because this variable is located in a table you can enable disable the service on a per line basis Mediatrix 2102 209 Chapter 20 Subscriber Services Call Forward Using Call Forward on No Answer The following is the procedure to use this service on the user s telephone K To forward calls 1 Take the receiver off hook 2 Wait for the dial tone 3 Dial the sequence the system administrator has implemented to activate the call forward on no answer service This sequence could be something like 74 4 Wait for the transfer tone three beeps followed by the dial tone 5 Dial the number to which you want to forward your calls Dial any access code if required 6 Wait for three beeps followed by a silent pause The call forward is established 7 Hang up your telephone The calls are checked against the digit maps set up by the system administrator K To cancel the call forward 1 Take the receiver of
188. assword protection directory capability or allow transmission of multiple files with one command User Datagram Protocol UDP An efficient but unreliable connectionless protocol that is layered over IP as is TCP Application programs are needed to supplement the protocol to provide error processing and retransmission of data UDP is an OSI layer 4 protocol Voice Over IP VoIP The technology used to transmit voice conversations over a data network using the Internet Protocol Such data network may be the Internet or a corporate Intranet Wide Area Network WAN A large geographically dispersed network usually constructed with serial lines that covers a large geographic area A WAN connects LANs using transmission lines provided by a common carrier Mediatrix 2102 305 Appendix E Glossary Wide Area Network WAN 306 Mediatrix 2102 APPENDIX AC ADSI CE CHAP CNG CS ACELP dB DHCP DNS DS DSCP DSL DTMF FCC FSK GMT HTML HTTP Hz IANA IEEE IETF IGMP IP IPCP ISP ITSP kbps LAN LCD LED MAC Mb s MIB MTU MWI NAT List of Acronyms Access Concentrator Analog Display Services Interface Cummunaut europ enne French Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol Comfort Noise Generator Conjugate Structure Algebraic Code Excited Linear Prediction Decibel Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Domain Name Server Differentiated Services Differentiated Services C
189. at the Mediatrix 2102 advertises to the access concentrator Caution When you are in a specific row and you set the pppSecuritySecretStatus variable of this row to AN invalid the row is deleted and you cannot add it back When the last remaining row is deleted two rows are re created with default passwords and user names 2 Set the Identity user name of the ID Secret pair in the pppSecuritySecretsidentity variable You can set an identity for both security protocols CHAP and PAP supported The table contains one row for each protocol The CHAP security protocol is described in RFC 1994 while the PAP security protocol is described in RFC 1334 If you want to exclusively use one of the security protocols you can disable the other row 3 Set the secret password of the ID Secret pair in the pppSecuritySecretsSecret variable You can set an identity for both security protocols CHAP and PAP supported The table contains one row for each protocol The CHAP security protocol is described in RFC 1994 while the PAP security protocol is described in RFC 1334 If you want to exclusively use one of the security protocols you can disable the other row For other standard settings please refer to the MIBs described in RFC 1471 with the exception of the LAR MIB RFC 1472 and RFC 1473 4 If you do not need to configure other parameters restart the Mediatrix 2102 as per Restarting the Mediatrix 2102 on page 100 Mediatrix 2
190. atabase between servers since a REGISTER and an INVITE can be sent to any server not necessarily the same one DNS SRV applies to both TCP and UDP transport types Priority vs Weight A DNS SRV uses the priority and weight concepts to distribute the requests Table 59 Priority vs Weight Parameter Description Priority A client must attempt to contact the target host with the lowest numbered priority it can reach Weight Specifies a relative weight for entries with the same priority Larger weights should be given a proportionately higher probability of being selected Mediatrix 2102 79 Chapter 6 DNS SRV Configuration Enabling DNS SRV on the Mediatrix 2102 DNS SRV Call Flow The following is a standard DNS SRV call flow Figure 26 DNS SRV Call Flow DNS Query SRV Who is _sip _udp abc com lt _ _ DNS Query Response SRV DNS Server sip _udp abc com Priority 0 Weigth 1 srv1 abc com Priority 1 Weigth 1 srv2 abc com Priority 1 Weigth 1 srv3 abc com User Register port 1 amp port 2 __ gt Agent No Answer TD Register port 1 gt 200 OK Register port 2 _ gt Jd 200 OK Enabling DNS SRV on the Mediatrix 2102 If the address of a service corresponds to a domain name that is bound to a SRV record the port this service uses
191. ate All LEDs are OFF POSSIBLE CAUSE Power is not fed to the unit SOLUTION Check that The power cord is connected to the electrical outlet The power cord is fully inserted into the Mediatrix 2102 power socket DESCRIPTION There is a long delay when starting the Mediatrix 2102 POSSIBLE CAUSE If any information is set to come from the DHCP server for example SNTP address the restarting unit waits for a maximum period of two minutes if the DHCP server cannot be reached even if most other settings are set to static This delay is caused by the Mediatrix 2102 that cannot function as configured if part of its configuration the DHCP information is unavailable The two minutes waiting period is an issue with switches that use the Spanning Tree Protocol When this protocol is enabled the restarting Mediatrix 2102 may be denied from the network for a certain time about two minutes The unit must not ignore transmission errors e timeouts because these errors might be caused by the Spanning Tree Protocol SOLUTION Mediatrix recommends to set up all information to use a static value or have a DHCP server answer the requests See Static Configuration on page 54 for more details Mediatrix 2102 243 Chapter 28 Troubleshooting General Operation Issues DESCRIPTION changed the IP address of my unit but can t reach the DHCP server anymore a POSSIBLE CAUSE A subnet mask i
192. ated in section Default Settings Switch on page 20 DESCRIPTION There is no response when trying to access the Mediatrix 2102 Be POSSIBLE CAUSE The Mediatrix 2102 speaks the three most common SNMP protocols SNMPv1 SNMPv2c and SNMPv3 If you try to access it by using any other protocol it stays silent DESCRIPTION The SNMP network manager does not receive Traps Be POSSIBLE CAUSE The IP information is not correct SOLUTION Check that the IP information IP address IP port of the SNMP network manager software is correctly recorded by the Mediatrix 2102 DESCRIPTION When trying to set a variable the Mediatrix 2102 does no respond nor sends an error message a POSSIBLE CAUSE In secure management mode the Mediatrix 2102 does not accept SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c SET requests However the MIB variables are viewable in any management mode secure and not secure DESCRIPTION When entering a value such as 23 in a MIB variable for instance sipTransportQValue the Mediatrix 2102 returns a Wrong value error message Be POSSIBLE CAUSE The Mediatrix 2102 does not support a value such as 23 SOLUTION Enter a value such as 0 23 instead Mediatrix 2102 253 Chapter 28 Troubleshooting SNMP Management Software Issues DESCRIPTION When try to set a variable with a MIB configuration tool such as Mediatrix Unit Manager Network nothing happens Be POSSIBLE CAU
193. ation Reference Manual SIP Version 6 Set the static STUN server IP address or Fully Qualified Domain Name FQDN in the STUN server IP host field 7 Set the static STUN server IP port number in the STUN server IP port field The default value is 3478 8 Click Apply changes The Mediatrix 2102 automatically restarts to apply all the new settings Web Interface Access Limitation Access to the web interface can be limited to only one of the Mediatrix 2102 s interface or all its interfaces This can be modified only by using the proper MIB variable K To limit the access to the web interface 1 In the httpServerMIB configure the interface where the web pages can be accessed in the httpServerAccess variable You have the following choices Table 19 Web Access Limitation Parameters Access Description lanOnly You can access the web interface from the LAN side which is usually associated with the Computer connector wanOnly You can access the web interface from the WAN side which is usually associated with the Network connector all You can access the web interface from both the LAN and WAN sides The change is immediate and takes effect on all new web accesses H zi Note This variable is modified to all if Transparent Address Sharing is disabled See Configuring TAS on page 93 for more details Mediatrix 2102 37 Chapter 2 Web Interface Web Interface Access Limitation
194. available in the IP Communication Server v3 1 to send a special command to the Mediatrix unit The following is the basic sequence of operations for the MWI Notify service 1 The analog voice mail system dials the following digits 72101 where 72 is a prefix and 101 the user extension 2 The Mediatrix unit sends a standard INVITE to the IP Communication Server v3 1 containing the complete dialed string 72101 a The IP Communication Server looks for the registered user 72101 in the Registrar database b The IP Communication Server cannot find the user so it asks the Route Manager to process the request c Provided that the Route Manager is properly configured it recognizes the 72 prefix and associates it to the proper route conditions 3 The IP Communication Server answers the request with a Moved Temporarily It contains information about the target s in the Contact header plus a proprietary p MxBlindMWINotify yes no field a The Mediatrix unit retrieves the location from the IP Communication Server s answer and the p MxBlindMWINotify field b The Mediatrix unit parses the answer from the IP Communication Server and recognizes p MxBlindMWINotify as a special command 4 The Mediatrix unit sends a NOTIFY to the location received from the IP Communication Server by using the proper yes or no value 72 yes 73 no specified by the route condition 5 The unit receiving the NOTIFY enables or disables
195. ay you are located in Seattle Washington and you want to define digit map rules for your users You must consider at least four possibilities You are making a long distance call outside the country You are making a local call outside your area code in the 425 area code K gt You are making a long distance call outside your area code gt gt You are making a local call in the same area code Digit Map Rule 1 This digit map rule checks for calls outside the country Table 124 Digit Map Rules 1 Settings Variable Setting digitMapAllowedEnable Enable digitMapAllowedDigitMap 011x 001x T digitMapPrefixedDigitRemovalCount 3 A valid telephone number must contain a country code an area code and a number the 011 part is not required Digit Map Rule 2 This digit map rule checks for long distance calls outside your area code Table 125 Digit Map Rules 2 Settings Variable Setting digitMapAllowedEnable Enable digitMapAllowedDigitMap 1XXXXXXXXXX digitMapPrefixedDigitRemovalCount 1 The first digit 1 in the digit map indicates a user wants to call outside his or her own area code It must be removed because it does not need to be expressed to the SIP Server The SIP Server needs only to know the complete number of the called party CC AC directory number digitMapPrependedString 1 country code A valid telephone number must contain a coun
196. below the field A valid MAC address is a series of 12 alphanumeric characters without colons See MAC Address Spoofing on page 95 for more details The following MAC addresses are not allowed e 000000000000 e FFFFFFFFFFFF e O1XXxXxxxxxxx where x can be any digit or letter Click Apply changes The Mediatrix 2102 validates the changes and a feedback message displays the applied value The display format of the values is based on the validation results Table 18 Display Formats in Web Page Format Meaning Normal text format The new value is the same as the previous value entered via the web page Bold text format The new value is valid and different from the previous value entered via the web page Text in an editable box The new value is invalid Depending on validation results some messages are displayed in addition to the configuration values e If atleast one modified value is valid a message informs you that new values are applied If one or more non dynamic value was changed a message informs you that the Mediatrix 2102 must be restarted e If atleast one modified value is invalid a message informs you that some values are invalid Most changes are not dynamic and require to restart the Mediatrix 2102 Click Restart This restarts the Mediatrix 2102 If the unit is in use when you click Restart all calls are terminated Mediatrix 2102 31 Chapter 2 Web Interface Confi
197. ber continued DHCP setting 66 image server 58 126 management server 59 225 RTCP setting range of 100 RTP setting range of 100 SIP 163 SIP outbound proxy 61 75 SIP proxy 61 73 SIP registrar 61 71 SNMP agent 57 SNMP trap 57 syslog 60 234 T 38 setting range of 99 TCP setting range of 99 UDP setting range of 99 PPPoE service connection authentication phase 102 discovery phase 102 network layer protocol phase 102 defined 90 enabling 90 error handling 103 identity 91 password setting 30 91 RFCs supported 90 secret 91 setting 90 user name setting 30 91 primary DNS setting 30 product overview 2 products xxiv analog series xxiv digital series xxiv software applications xxv provisioning configuration file 48 MIB files 48 Q Qos 802 1q 229 defined 303 Differentiated Services DS Field 227 substituting configured value 94 VLAN 230 substitution values 231 R rear connections 5 recovery mode LED patterns 19 resetting in 21 see also factory reset Referred By field in SIP 174 registration expiration default in SIP 177 registration expiration in SIP 177 registration refresh in SIP 176 related documentation xx Replaces header in SIP configuration 169 version 170 requirements 1 Mediatrix 2102 321 Index restart behaviour in case of broadcast storm 23 software initiated 23 unit 31 RFC RFC 1332 90 RFC 1334 90 RFC 1350 261 RFC 1471 90 RFC 1472 90 RFC 1473 90 RFC 1661 90 RFC
198. ble 24 MIB Data Types Type Description Object Represents the actual variables that can be set Conformance Describes one or more groups to which the product may conform This allows to have an exact idea of what a unit supports by glancing at the conformance information Event An event is sent to tell what type of data will be received but not the data itself This is used to warn in advance what is coming 44 Mediatrix 2102 MIB Structure Reference Manual SIP Version IP Addresses The MIB structure contains many IP addresses that can be set or viewed See Chapter 4 IP Address and Network Configuration on page 51 for more details Persistence A variable may either be persistent or volatile Table 25 Storage Clauses Clause Definition Persistent Persistent parameters are saved into the units memory and restored when it restarts All the variables with the Access Read Write attribute are persistent except the variables representing commands such as sysAdminCommana Volatile Volatile parameters are lost every time the unit restarts This type of parameter includes toggling parameters such as requesting a configuration file or a software download Statistics are also volatile parameters that are lost every time the unit restarts Changing a Parameter Value The Mediatrix 2102 software parameters are fully programmable by using the SNMP protocol There are two
199. by the Mediatrix 2102 A router is a device that connects any number of LANs Primary DNS Primary Domain Name Server IP address used by the Mediatrix 2102 A DNS is an Internet service that translates domain names into IP addresses Secondary DNS Secondary Domain Name Server IP address used by the Mediatrix 2102 4 If the WAN connection type is PPPoE as set in Step 2 set the PPPoE user name and password When connecting to an access concentrator it may request that the Mediatrix 2102 identifies itself with a specific user name and password There are no restrictions you can use any combination of characters 5 Set the static IP address and network mask of the LAN interface This is the IP information of the Computer connector where you connect the PC or other IP equipment The LAN interface is normally used to connect a PC that will have access to the WAN by sharing the Mediatrix 2102 WAN address See LAN Interface on page 95 for more details 30 Mediatrix 2102 Administration Page Reference Manual SIP Version If applicable enable the MAC Address Spoofing feature Spoofing the MAC address is useful in the case of ISPs that use the MAC address of the device connected to the Computer interface of the Mediatrix 2102 e g a PC to identify the connection Enter the proper MAC address in the Spoof MAC address field The current MAC address of the online device in the Computer connector is displayed
200. c code The sipRegistrarDhcpSiteSpecificCode variable to any value between 128 and 254 Set the registrar server IP address in the DHCP server inside the site specific option you have chosen it must match the value of the sipRegistrarDhcpSiteSpecificCode variable in the unit s configuration Static Configuration Use the static configuration if you are not using a DHCP server or if you want to bypass it gt To use static information 1 In the pAddressContfig folder locate the sipServerSelectConfigSource variable under the ipAddressConfigSipServer group This variable defines whether the Mediatrix 2102 must get its registrar server configuration through a DHCP server or not 2 Set the sipServerSelectConfigSource variable to static 3 Set the following variables Table 53 Registrar Server Static Information Variable Description sipRegistrarStaticHost Registrar server static IP address or domain name Default Value 192 168 0 10 sipRegistrarStaticPort Registrar server static IP port number Note If this variable corresponds to a domain name that is bound to a SRV record the port must be set to 0 for the unit to perform DNS requests of type SRV as per RFC 3263 Otherwise the unit will not use DNS SRV requests but will rather use only requests of type A because it does not need to be specified which port to use Default Value 0 72 Mediatrix 2102 Proxy Server Reference Manua
201. ce variable to automatic You can query the actual configuration source used in the localHostWanAddressConfigSource read only variable in the pAddressStatus folder You can query the actual WAN IP address attributed to the Mediatrix 2102 in the localHostWanAddress read only variable in the pAddressStatus folder If you do not need to configure other parameters restart the Mediatrix 2102 as per Restarting the Mediatrix 2102 on page 100 92 Mediatrix 2102 Configuring TAS Reference Manual SIP Version Configuring TAS The following steps describe how to properly setup and enable the Mediatrix 2102 in TAS mode By enabling TAS you also implicitely enable the Mediatrix 2102 in router mode See Router Mode on page 88 for more details When the TAS service is enabled it adds a network interface to the Mediatrix 2102 This means that two IP addresses may be attributed to the unit the Computer and Network connectors of the Mediatrix 2102 each have an IP address Note When you dial the 0 digits on a telephone connected to the Mediatrix 2102 the LAN IP address LF is returned When you dial the 2 digits on a telephone connected to the Mediatrix 2102 the WAN IP address is returned See Special Vocal Features on page 15 for more details The Computer and Network connectors of the Mediatrix 2102 are allocated IP addresses differently depending on the scenario involved K TAS disabled The Compu
202. ces03 When initiating a blind transfer the Transferor first CANCEL s its call with the Target and then issues a REFER without Replaces to the Transferee Note A side effect of using replacesO3 is that the phone will stop ringing and start again K To set the version of Replaces supported 1 In the sipinteropMIB set the sipinteropReplacesVersion variable with the proper version e replacesO1 e replaces03 170 Mediatrix 2102 Transmission Timeout Reference Manual SIP Version Transmission Timeout Standards Supported Ifa DNS SRV answer contains more than one entry the Mediatrix 2102 will try these entries if the entry initially selected does not work You can configure the maximum time in seconds to spend waiting for answers to messages from a single source Retransmissions still follow the algorithm proposed in RFC 2543bis but the total wait time can be overridden by using this feature For example if you are using DNS SRV and more than one entry are present this timeout is the time it takes before trying the second entry This feature is currently located under the mediatrixExperimental branch of the MIB structure See MIB Structure on page 43 for more details K To set the transmission timeout 1 In the sipinteropMIB locate the sipinterop Transmission Timeout variable 2 Set the timeout value Available values are from 1 to 32 seconds SIP Transport Type Standards Supported
203. chingHOSt is italia ed asias 60 108 configFileFetchingPort eee 60 108 configFileF etchingSelectConfigSOurce eee eee eee 60 108 configFileFetchingSpecificFileNaMe cococcicicicincocnccncncncinncnnononnnnnnn nono crono 110 ele Leg tens Eine e 60 109 configFileFetchingotaticPO ici iaa a A Mani aay 60 109 configFilePnivacyENable EE 112 ConfigFilePrivacyGeneriCSecret icono a iaaii a NE a aa 112 c nfigFilePrivacySpecific Secretas a lp A a a a 112 configFileTransferPassword osiinsa aratairaa aeaaaee aiaa Sanaa Eea Erai EEEE 114 115 116 configFileTransferProtocol sese 113 114 115 116 CopnfotileTroanstierllsermame sees eee 114 115 116 D datalfClearChannelCodecPreferred P 158 dataliCodecl 38 Enables iii AA Ai Tana 160 dotaltCodecT 2 brotechonl vele 160 GataliT IBAS CP Ocio 99 datalfT38FinalFramesRedundaney sese eee 160 digitMapAllowed DigtMap E 190 dig anpAllowedEnabie see 191 digi a pnmrerx ed DIaRemovalCoOunt sese 190 digitMapPrependedString op 190 STs OI Ee lo Tn Te 191 ele EI EE EE 191 digitMapSuthixStringTORG MOVE ici A 190 digitMap TIME COMPONER ici 191 digitMapTimeoutEirstDiglt EE 191 digitMap RR Ee ul E e UE 191 E emergencvt all lroentGatewavtotMan ttrt n tatn tarat ttn Etnrn atanta rnat teana nn neren ra tt 201 emergencyCallUrgentGatewayEnable ococicicciciciciciciccinniconnnnnncncnnn conan on coronar 201 emergencyCallUrgentGatewayTargetAddresS sese 201 Mediatrix 2102 309 Appendix G List of MIB P
204. cked You can only change the UDP source port behaviour while the Mediatrix 2102 is in this maintenance mode 2 In the sipinteropMIB set the sipinteropSymmetricUdpSourcePortEnable variable to enable The SIP signalling sent over UDP originates from the same port as the port on which the user agent is listening see User Agents on page 163 for details ICMP messages are not processed which means that unreachable targets will take longer to detect If you set the variable to disable the SIP signalling over UDP uses a randomly generated originating port ICMP errors are processed correctly 172 Mediatrix 2102 SIP Penalty Box Reference Manual SIP Version SIP Penalty Box The penalty box feature is used to quarantine a given host which address times out During that time the address is considered as non responding for all requests This feature is most useful when using multiple servers and some of them are down It ensures that users wait a minimal period of time before trying a secondary host Penalty Box vs Transport Types Mediatrix recommends to use this feature with care when supporting multiple transports see SIP Transport Type on page 171 for more details or you may experience unwanted behaviours When the Mediatrix 2102 must send a packet it retrieves the destination from the packet If the destination address does not specify a transport to use and does not have a DNS SRV entry that con
205. coming call Currently the Mediatrix 2102 does not use groups and the FXS lines are not part of any group Future versions of the Mediatrix 2102 will allow you to define additional groups Unregistered Line Behaviour You can specify whether a line should remain enabled or not when not registered This is useful if you want your users to be able to make calls even if the line is not registered with the SIP server This feature is currently located under the mediatrixExperimental branch of the MIB structure See MIB Structure on page 43 for more details K To specify unregistered line behaviour 1 In the sipExperimentalMIB locate the sipUnregisteredPortBehavior variable The following values are available Table 90 Unregistered Line Behaviour Value Description disablePort When the line is not registered it is disabled The user cannot make or receive calls Picking up the handset yields a fast busy tone and incoming INVITEs receive a 403 Forbidden response enablePort When the line is not registered it is still enabled The user can receive and initiate outgoing calls Note that because the line is not registered to a registrar its public address is not available to the outside world the line will most likely be unreachable except through direct IP calling 140 Mediatrix 2102 Flash Hook Detection Reference Manual SIP Version Flash Hook Detection The flash hook can be describe
206. cs see Chapter 12 Voice Transmissions on page 145 For information on data codecs see Chapter 13 Fax Transmission on page 157 Lines Administrative State You can independently set the administrative state of each analog line of your Mediatrix 2102 This state determines how the Mediatrix 2102 processes calls For instance you must properly unlock the two analog lines of the Mediatrix 2102 to properly make and receive calls on all of them The administrative states may be applied in two ways K Temporary The administrative state is applied immediately but it is not kept after the Mediatrix 2102 restarts K Permanent When the Mediatrix 2102 restarts it reads a MIB variable to determine the administrative state defined for each analog line Temporary Administrative State You can set the administrative state of a line that will be kept until the Mediatrix 2102 restarts Once the unit restarts it uses the permanent state defined for each line See Permanent Administrative State on page 140 for more details S In the Unit Manager Network Administration Manual refer to chapter Ports Parameters section Port ja Configuration Window K To set a temporary administrative state 1 In the ifAdminMIB locate the ifAdminSetAdmin variable This variable temporary locks unlocks the selected line of the Mediatrix 2102 This state is kept until the unit restarts It offers the following settings Table 88 Tempor
207. ct gt Do not get this product wet or pour liquids into it gt Do not perform any action that creates a potential hazard to people or makes the equipment unsafe risk of fire electric shock and injury to persons including the following Do not use this product near water for example near a bath tub wash bowl kitchen sink or laundry tub in a wet basement or near a swimming pool e Avoid using a telephone other than a cordless type during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning f Caution When using this equipment basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the s Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak 260 Mediatrix 2102 APPENDIX ES Standard Hardware Information The specifications and information regarding this product are subject to change without notice Every effort is made to ensure the accuracy of this document Because of ongoing product improvements and revisions Mediatrix cannot guarantee its accuracy nor can be responsible for errors or omissions Please contact your Mediatrix sales representative to obtain the latest version of the technical specifications Industry Standard Protocols The Mediatrix 2102 has been designed to support all major industry standards used today as well as those that will eventually be implemented at a later date Because of this specific design characteristic the Mediatrix 2
208. ctet scalar ranging from 0 to 255 The DSCP default value should be 101110 This results in the DS field value of 10111000 184d This default value would result in a value of 101 precedence bits low delay high throughput and normal reliability in the legacy IP networks RFC 791 RFC 1812 Network managers of legacy IP networks could use the above mentioned values to define filters on their routers to take advantage of priority queuing The default value is based on the Expedited Forwarding PHB RFC 2598 recommendation Note RFC 3168 now defines the state in which to set the two least significant bits in the TOS byte On the LF other hand this RFC only applies to TCP transmissions and the bits are thus set to 0 in the Mediatrix 2102 This has the following effects e The TOS values for UDP packets are the same as in the MIB e The TOS values for TCP packets are equal to the closest multiple of 4 value that is not greater than the value in the MIB 2 Set the value you want to use You can find references on DS field under the IETF working group DiffServ For more information please refer to the following RFC documents and the MIB Reference manual e Definition of the Differentiated Services Field DS Field in the IPv4 and IPv6 Headers RFC 2474 e An Architecture for Differentiated Services RFC 2475 e Assured Forwarding PHB Group RFC 2597 e An Expedited Forwarding PHB RFC 2598 228 Mediatrix 2102 I
209. d The deactivating sequence is set for all the lines of the Mediatrix 2102 You cannot have a different sequence for each line Define the address to which forward incoming calls in the subscriberServicesCallForwardUnconditionalForwardingAddress variable Accepted formats are e telephone numbers 5551111 SIP URLs such as scheme userfhost For instance sip user MWfoo com This string is used literally so cosmetic symbols such as the dash in 555 xxxx should not be present Because this variable is located in a table you can have a different string for each line Enable the Call Forward Unconditional by setting the subscriberServicesCallForwardUnconditionalEnable variable to enable under the subscriberServicesIfEnablingTable group Because this variable is located in a table you can enable disable the service on a per line basis Mediatrix 2102 205 Chapter 20 Subscriber Services Call Forward Using Call Forward Unconditional When forwarding calls outside the system a brief ring is heard on the telephone to remind the user that the call forward service is active The user can still make calls from the telephone gt To forward calls 1 Take the receiver off hook 2 Wait for the dial tone 3 Dial the sequence the system administrator has implemented to activate the call forward unconditional service This sequence could be something like 70 4 Wait for the transfer tone three b
210. d and will become registered again only when the re REGISTER request is answered with a positive response from the server SOLUTION Set the sipUnregisteredPortBehavior variable to enablePort This way when an endpoint is not registered it is still enabled The user can receive and initiate calls See Unregistered Line Behaviour on page 154 for more details See also Refreshing Registration on page 176 for more details on the re registration feature 246 Mediatrix 2102 Fax Issues Reference Manual SIP Version DESCRIPTION When making a 3 way conference part of the conversation is lost resulting in a choppy voice Be POSSIBLE CAUSE The packetization period ptime is not the same for all the participants of the conference which causes the choppy voice issue SOLUTION For better results Mediatrix recommends to set the packetization period of all participants of a 3 way conference to 30 milliseconds See Packetization Time on page 148 for more information on how to set the packetization period of the Mediatrix 2102 DESCRIPTION Unable to establish a call from the Mediatrix 2102 to a user agent such as an IP phone a gateway or another access device Fax Issues Be POSSIBLE CAUSE When the Mediatrix 2102 with its T 38 capability enabled tries to establish a call with a user agent that does not support T 38 this user agent rejects the call instead of ignoring the capability it does n
211. d 81 DNS SRV Oriented SettingS cc cece ee sees seene 81 Mediatrix 2102 ix Contents Chapter 7 Country Specific Configuration anccccccncinnnncniinn cie raiaaci 83 Caller ID Intonation ia E 83 Caller D Generation A ia ini 83 RTE 84 Seting ihe Location COUNTY ii lt AA A rad 85 Caller ee 86 Chapter 8 Transparent Address SAA sees eenn neee 87 What is Transparent Address Sharing seisseen sarii indii sannana EAEE ana nnnn oE n ENRETA KENEAN AEAEE 87 ROUTE Mode TT 88 Cable vS DSE MOdeM EE 89 Multicast and HE ON 89 Configuration TEE 89 PPPOE Servi aa hla ii 90 Enabling the RPPOE te 90 setting a User Name and Password mcr aa iaa adaa 91 WAN Information Configuration Source 92 CGonfoung TAS sarccenrianae nt eien EEEE EEE EEEE EEEE E SE EOE EEEN TA EEE EAA AKA 93 QoS Differentiated Services e tenor eroa aaa a eee 94 EACH n e 95 MAC Address Spoofing ooooonccconnccinnninonocncnnornncnnrrn ron 95 WAN Upstream Bandwidth Contra 97 Enabling TAS TEE 98 Ports Settings E 99 UDP and TCP POTS T 99 T3938 Base Port RAMGC oxic ii eee 99 RTP RICP Base Port als L 100 Restarting the Med iatrix 2102 ooo laa Ee ati ended eleanor 100 DACP EE 101 DHCP Server COM planes ironia idad ias pases 101 supported DA er R i LEE 101 DSL Modem Specific Informatio siiis aaaea apada aae iaaa aai aaaeaii 102 Establishing a COME TEE 102 Error Handling EE 103 Routing Mechanisme 104 BlOCKBd ME CEET 104 Using the Mediatrix 2102 with a Low B
212. d as quickly depressing and releasing the plunger in or the actual handset cradle to create a signal indicating a change in the current telephone session Services such as picking up a call waiting second call call on hold and conference are triggered by the use of the flash hook A flash hook is detected when the hook switch is pressed for a shorter time than would be required to be interpreted as a hang up Using the flash button that is present on many standard telephone handsets can also trigger a flash hook The Mediatrix 2102 allows you to set the minimum and maximum time within which pressing and releasing the plunger is actually considered a flash hook K To set flash hook parameters 1 In the fxsMIB set the following variables Table 91 Flash Hook Parameters Variable Description fxsFlashHookDetectionDelayMin Minimum time in ms the hook switch must remain pressed to perform a flash hook Default Value 100 fxsFlashHookDetectionDelayMax Maximum time in ms the hook switch can remain pressed to perform a flash hook Default Value 1200 2 Restart the Mediatrix 2102 so that the changes may take effect Mediatrix 2102 141 Chapter 11 Line Configuration Source Line Selection Source Line Selection The source line selection feature defines a list of callers that have the right to use a specific FXS line to make a call This feature can be used to map an FXS line to a specific FXO
213. d of 130 50 total octets transmitted in the sixth 5 minutes period The previous statistics are transferred to the corresponding cumulated statistics variable The statistics for the second 5 minutes period are dropped for a cumulated total octets transmitted of 200 Mediatrix 2102 239 Chapter 26 Statistics RTP Statistics 240 Mediatrix 2102 CHAPTER 27 Maximum Transmission Unit MTU This chapter describes the MTU Maximum Transmission Unit requirements of the Mediatrix 2102 What is MTU The Maximum Transmission Unit MTU is a parameter that determines the largest packet than can be transmitted by an IP interface without it needing to be broken down into smaller units Each interface used by TCP IP may have a different MTU value specified The MTU should be larger than or equal to the largest packet you wish to transmit unfragmented Note that this only prevents fragmentation locally Some other link in the path may have a smaller MTU the packet will be fragmented at that point although some routers may refuse packets larger than their MTU Mediatrix 2102 MTU The Mediatrix 2102 MTU is 1500 bytes which is the Ethernet typical value Possible Hardware Problem The implementation of the IEEE Standard 802 1q in the Mediatrix 2102 may have a minor problem because of hardware limitations 802 1q increases the Ethernet frame header by 4 bytes adding a Virtual LAN ID and a user_priority This is
214. d servers conditions If Transparent Address Sharing is enabled during the software download the PC connected to the Mediatrix 2102 may experience momentary loss of Internet connectivity 8 Update the MIB browser with the MIB version coming with the software version Mediatrix 2102 133 Chapter 10 Software Download Download Procedure Automatic Software Update You can configure the Mediatrix 2102 to automatically update its software version This update can be done gt Every time the Mediatrix 2102 restarts gt At a specific time interval you can define Automatic Update on Restart The Mediatrix 2102 may download a new software version each time it restarts K To set the automatic update every time the Mediatrix 2102 restarts 1 If not already done setup the Image server used to download the software see Before Downloading on page 125 2 If not already done configure the Image path as described in Setting up the Image Path on page 128 3 If not already done configure the image hosts and ports as defined in Software Servers Configuration on page 126 assigned in the imagePrimaryPort and imageSecondaryPort read only variables in the pAddressStatus folder If you are using a DHCP server and it did not provide the proper port reconfigure it with the proper port or use a static configuration See Software Servers Configuration on page 126 for more details t Caution When downlo
215. dBm 2600 Hz 19 dBm Message Waiting Indicator Tone 425 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 10 CONTINUOUS 14 dBm Network Congestion Tone 425 Hz 0 0 25 18 dBm Ring AC 45 VRMS 20 Hz 0 4 0 2 0 4 2 0 DC 15 Vde Input Impedance 600 Q Default Caller ID BELLCORE FXS Line Attenuation Input 0 d r FXS Line Attenuation Output 9 dBr Mediatrix 2102 287 Appendix D Country Specific Parameters Mexico Mexico The following parameters apply if you have selected Mexico as location Table 172 Mexico Parameters Parameter Value On Off Sequence s Elect Levels Dial Tone 425 Hz CONTINUOUS 14 dBm Busy Tone 425 Hz 0 25 0 25 18 dBm Ringback Tone 425 Hz 1 0 4 0 16 dBm Special Information Tone 900 Hz 1 0 14 dBm 1400 Hz 1 0 1800 Hz 1 0 1 0 Stutter Dial Tone 425 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 CONTINUOUS 14 dBm Confirmation Tone 425 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 End 14 dBm Receiver Off Hook ROH Tone 1400 Hz 0 1 0 1 19 dBm 2060 Hz 19 dBm 2450 Hz 19 dBm 2600 Hz 19 dBm Message Waiting Indicator Tone 425 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 10 CONTINUOUS 14 dBm Network Congestion Tone 425 Hz 0 25 0 25 18 dBm Ring AC 45 VRMS 25 Hz 1 0 4 0 DC 15 Vdc Input Impedance 600 Q Default Caller ID BELLCORE FXS Line Attenuation Input 3 dBr FXS Line Attenuation Output 3 dBr 288 Mediatrix 2102 Netherlands Reference Manual SIP Version Netherlands The following parameters apply if
216. da ci o eg aia 257 CE Mark DT 257 Translated Warming Definitlon sassis iensen til de tada 258 Salety WarnlnGS TEE 259 Circuit Breaker 20A Warming iii a e dla ca 259 TN Power WAITING EE 259 Product Disposal Warning EE 259 No 26 AWG Wamihg DEE 259 LAN Connector Warning sico EAE AAEE iE NE E Ea EEE a Eai 259 Socket Outlet Warning oooooconnncccnnonocnnnonaniccnnnnnnc cnn anno r none 259 Safety HRecommendatons eee eee 260 Appendix B Standard Hardware Informatica dani 261 Industry Standard Protocols sse eee 261 Hardware ESTOS viii ENEE EES ia 262 DN a aci 262 elle 262 PO WEB vinilos ceras rante N l o dr e ad E E a id ida dde pb ri di 262 Casing Installati n ET 262 Product Architecture 6121 262 Real Time Fax Router Technical Specifications eee eee eee 263 Analog Line Interface FAS E 263 AUGIO Specifications TTT 264 DTMF Tone Detection sgrin aE E EE gas icesa vesaad cap eandceaentenagederawinare 264 DIME Tone Generation ice scsccs casas fee tii TTT 264 MTBF Valle oo caudeccsvanchdcchsansade ee EE ESA See eege sde 264 Power CONSUMPTION TTT 265 Measurements atthe DO DE iii aia 265 Operating Environment ia aaa 265 DIMENSIONS NA e UE 265 El ET ET 265 xvi Mediatrix 2102 Reference Manual SIP Version Appendix C e nn 267 Straight Through RJ 45 Cable sseni nnie irc 267 NS A 268 Olot o EE 268 Appendix D Country Specific Parameters oi nece 269 DENMIUONS ii ada 269 AAA PA 269 Neue DEE 270 Australa iia a EEN 272
217. ddress sharing 95 via web interface 30 LEDs behaviour in download mode 131 in starting mode 15 defined 302 In Use 15 LAN 16 patterns AdminMode 16 Booting 16 DefaultSettings ending 17 DiagFailed 18 ImageDownloadError 17 ImageDownloadInProgress 17 InitFailed 18 NormalMode 16 18 recovery mode 19 RecoveryMode 17 RecoveryModePending 17 ResetPending 17 Power 16 Ready 15 LEDs continued states 15 line mapping 142 lines comfort noise 155 data codecs 157 clear channel fax 157 clear channel enabling 158 clear channel preferred 158 enabling 157 T 38 159 echo cancellation 154 far end disconnect signalling 144 grouping 140 jitter buffer protection 152 locking unlocking 139 selection algorithm 143 source selection 142 FXS to FXO line mapping 142 reserving FXO line 143 unregistered behaviour when 140 user gain 156 voice activity detection 153 voice codecs defined 145 DTMF transport type 149 150 151 enabling 147 packetization time 148 preferred codec 147 local host in customized syslog messages 235 local IP address setting 30 54 local ring behaviour in SIP 178 local time in customized syslog messages 235 location caller ID selecting 86 country setting 85 locking lines 139 loop current setting 144 MAC address 8 defined 302 in customized syslog messages 235 spoofing 95 via web interface 31 vocal identification of 15 making forced SCN call 200 IP address call 199 218 standard call 200 Management
218. direction attributes pertaining to the media stream When Putting a Call on Hold Standards Supported The Mediatrix 2102 can provide the direction attribute and the meaning of the connection address 0 0 0 0 sent in the SDP when an endpoint is put on hold See Call Hold on page 203 for more details on holding calls K To define the direction attribute when putting a call on hold 1 In the sipinteropMIB set the sipInteropOnHoldSdpStreamDirection variable to the proper value Table 114 Direction Attributes Parameter Description inactive The stream is put on hold by marking it as inactive This is the default value This setting should be used for backward compatibility issues sendonly The stream is put on hold by marking it as sendonly This method allows the Mediatrix 2102 to be in conformance with RFC 3264 Direction Attribute Standards Supported You can define if the SDP direction attribute is present in the initial INVITE sent by the Mediatrix 2102 and if the direction attribute present in the SDP received from the peer is ignored or not K To define if the direction attribute is present 1 In the sipinteropMIB set the sipInteropSdpDirectionAttributeEnable variable to the proper value Table 115 SDP Direction Attribute Parameter Description disable No direction attribute is present in the SDP sent by the Mediatrix 2102 The Mediatrix 2102 ignores any direction attribute fo
219. dling On this error The Mediatrix 2102 Authentication failure 1 Waits for 10 seconds 2 Retries to establish the connection as in Establishing a Connection on page 102 PPPOE failure 1 Waits for 10 seconds 2 Retries to establish the connection as in Establishing a Connection on page 102 Peer not responding 1 Retries to establish the connection as in Establishing a Connection on page 102 Connection Unsuccessful When the Mediatrix 2102 restarts it tries to connect to an access concentrator If the connection does not work for any reason the unit continues its restart cycle then retries to connect to an access concentrator indefinitely If the connection is successful at the first attempt the Mediatrix 2102 goes on with its usual restart cycle If the connection is successful only after the restart cycle is done the Mediatrix 2102 restarts upon connecting because it does not support dynamic IP address change PPP Connection Loss A network connection may abruptly shutdown for many reasons One of the most common reasons is the maintenance of the network and its environment When the Mediatrix 2102 detects it has lost the PPP connection it tries to re establish the connection as in Establishing a Connection on page 102 It is possible that the IP address assigned by the access concentrator changes after re establishing a connection In this case the Mediatrix 2102 restarts beca
220. dress and port number assigned by the DHCP server in the syslogHost and syslogPort read only variables under the jpAddressStatus Syslog group of the ipAddressStatus folder 3 Set how you want to define the Syslog information in the DHCP server Table 136 Syslog DHCP Information To use a Set vendor specific code The syslogDhcpSiteSpecificCode variable under the ipAddressConfigSyslogDhcp group to 0 Set the Syslog server IP address in the DHCP server inside the vendor specific sub option 110 hexadecimal Ox6E site specific code The syslogDhcpSiteSpecificCode variable under the ipAddressConfigSyslogDhcp group to any value between 128 and 254 Set the Syslog server IP address in the DHCP server inside the site specific option you have chosen it must match the value of the syslogDhcpSiteSpecific Code variable in the unit s configuration See Vendor and Site Specific DHCP Options on page 64 for more details Static Configuration Use the static configuration if you are not using a DHCP server or if you want to bypass it K To use static information 1 In the ipAddressConfig folder locate the syslogSelectConfig Source variable This variable defines whether the Mediatrix 2102 shall ask for its Syslog daemon settings through a DHCP server or not 2 Set the syslogSelectConfigSource variable to static 3 Set the following variables Table 137 Syslog Daemon Static Address Variable De
221. e on page 29 for more details gt To configure the LAN interface settings 1 In the ipAddressConfig folder locate the pAddressConfigLanInterface group 2 Set the LAN IP address of the Computer connector in the lanStaticAddress variable IFTAS is disabled the Computer connector rather uses the same address as the Network connector as set in the localHostAddress variable See Local Host on page 54 for more details 3 Set the LAN subnet mask of the Computer connector in the lanStaticNetworkMask variable If TAS is disabled the Computer connector rather uses the same network mask as the Network connector as set in the localHostNetworkMask variable See Local Host on page 54 for more details 4 If you do not need to configure other parameters restart the Mediatrix 2102 as per Restarting the Mediatrix 2102 on page 100 MAC Address Spoofing A number of ISPs control connections to their servers by monitoring the MAC address of the connecting device If the MAC address does not match its database it refuses the connection Consider the typical scenario in which a user of a Mediatrix 2102 is already subscribed to an ISP for a WAN access i e the Internet If the ISP monitors the MAC address the user will not be able to connect to the WAN when using the Mediatrix 2102 in front of the usual device The workaround is to have the Mediatrix 2102 spoof its MAC address in messages destined to the WAN The spoofed M
222. e K Set a user name and password Enabling the PPPoE Service You must configure and enable the service to properly connect to an access concentrator You can also use the web interface to enable the PPPoE service See Administration Page on page 29 for more details To configure the PPPoE service 1 In the ipAddressConfig folder set the localHostSelectConfigSource variable under the ipAdressConfigLocalHost group to static This is required to avoid conflicts with the PPPoE interface See Local Host on page 54 for more details on the local host settings 2 Set the localHostStaticDefaultRouter variable under the pAddressConfigL ocalHostStatic group to 0 0 0 0 3 In the pppoeMIB set the pppoeAcName variable with the name of the access concentrator to which connect The variable may be set with any string of characters with a maximum of 255 characters PPPoE PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet is a proposal specifying how a host personal computer interacts with a DSL broadband modem to access the growing number of Highspeed data networks Relying on two widely accepted standards Ethernet and the point to point protocol PPP the PPPoE implementation requires virtually no more knowledge on the part of the end user other than that required for standard Dialup Internet access In addition PPPoE requires no major changes in the operational model for Internet Service Providers ISPs and carriers The
223. e 125 If not already done configure the Image path as described in Setting up the Image Path on page 128 If not already done configure the image hosts and ports as defined in Software Servers Configuration on page 126 assigned in the imagePrimaryPort and imageSecondaryPort read only variables in the pAddressStatus f Caution When downloading via HTTP the image server s port must be 80 You can query the actual port folder If you are using a DHCP server and it did not provide the proper port reconfigure it with the proper port or use a static configuration See Software Servers Configuration on page 126 for more details In the imageMIB set the image TransferProtocol variable to either http or tftp If you are using the HTTP protocol to download the software be aware that your HTTP server may activate some caching mechanism for the software download This mechanism caches the initial software download for later processing thus preventing changes or update of the original download by the user This can cause problems if a user wants to modify the software download and perform it again immediately The result will still return the original download and not the new one If you are using the HTTP protocol and your HTTP server requires authentication set the following The user name in the image TransferUsername variable e The password in the image TransferPassword variable Define the time base
224. e 128 see also downgrading software applications products xxv source line selection 142 FXS to FXO line mapping 142 reserving FXO line 143 Spanning Tree Protocol 136 special vocal features 15 IP address 15 IP address WAN 15 MAC address 15 standards compliance agency approvals 255 CE marking 257 emissions 255 FCC Part 15 disclaimer 256 FCC Part 68 disclaimer 256 immunity 255 Industry Canada disclaimer 257 safety standards 255 telecom 256 standards supported xxiii caller ID Bellcore GR 30 CORE 84 British Telecom BT SIN227 SIN242 84 ETSI 300 659 1 84 ETSI 300 659 1 January 2001 Annex B 83 STD 220 250 713 Issue 01 November 1993 83 TDK TS 900 301 1 January 2003 84 UK CCA specification TW P amp E 312 84 draft choudhuri sip info digit 00 txt 149 150 151 219 draft ietf avt rtp cn 05 txt 155 draft ietf sip cc transfer 02 txt 169 draft ietf sip cc transfer 05 txt 169 draft ietf sipping mwi 01 txt 221 draft ietf sipping realtimefax 01 txt 159 draft ietf sip refer 02 txt 169 draft ietf sip session timer 04 txt 165 standards supported xxiii continued draft ietf sip session timer 08 txt 165 draft mahy sip message waiting 02 txt 222 GR 506 CORE Issue 1 with Revision 1 November 1996 221 Recommendation ITU T 38 version 0 159 RFC 1332 90 RFC 1334 90 RFC 1350 261 RFC 1471 90 RFC 1472 90 RFC 1473 90 RFC 1661 90 RFC 1769 183 RFC 1877 90 RFC 1889 261 RFC 1890 150 261 RFC 1945 261 RFC 1994 90 RFC 2131 63 101
225. e DHCP server inside the vendor specific sub option 200 hexadecimal 0xC8 site specific code The msDhcpSiteSpecificCode variable to any value between 128 and 254 Set the management server IP address in the DHCP server inside the site specific option you have chosen it must match the value of the msDhcpSiteSpecificCode variable in the unit s configuration See Vendor and Site Specific DHCP Options on page 64 for more details Static Configuration Use the static configuration if you are not using a DHCP server or if you want to bypass it gt To use static information 1 In the ipAddressConfig folder locate the msSelectConfig Source variable This variable defines whether the Mediatrix 2102 shall get its Management Server configuration through a DHCP server or not 2 Set the msSelectConfigSource variable to static 3 Set the following variables Table 134 Management Server Static Address Variable Description msStaticHost Static management server IP address or domain name Default Value 192 168 0 10 msStaticTrapPort Static management server IP port number Restart the unit to update this parameter Default Value 162 Note Change the port used in the management server Not doing so will prevent you from viewing the received traps from the unit The management server could be a product such as the Unit Manager Network 226 Mediatrix 2102 CHAPTER 24 Quality o
226. e Fax A user makes a call with the phone fax connected to a Mediatrix 2102 which in turn contacts another Mediatrix 2102 then reaches the corresponding phone fax IP phone Soft Phone SE Mediatrix 2102 Telephone lt gt Mediatrix 2102 Mediatrix 2102 197 Chapter 19 Telephony Features Call Processes Calls Involving a Mediatrix 2102 and a LAN Endpoint The following examples illustrate how a phone fax connected to a Mediatrix 2102 can communicate with a LAN Endpoint on the IP network K Phone Fax gt Mediatrix 2102 gt LAN Endpoint A user makes a call with the phone fax connected to a Mediatrix 2102 which reaches the corresponding LAN Endpoint on the IP network LAN Endpoint gt Ge Mediatrix 2102 gt Mediatrix 2102 K LAN Endpoint gt Mediatrix 2102 gt Phone Fax ALAN Endpoint contacts the Mediatrix 2102 which reaches the corresponding phone fax connected to the Mediatrix 2102 IP phone Soft Phone Mediatrix 2102 9 SS Mediatrix 2102 198 Mediatrix 2102 Call Processes Reference Manual SIP Version Calls Involving an Analog Gateway The following example illustrates how a telephone fax connected to a Mediatrix 2102 and a SCN phone can communicate via an analog gateway K Phone Fax gt Mediatrix 2102 gt Mediatrix 1204 Gateway gt SCN A user makes a call with the phone fax connected to a Mediatrix 2102 which in turn contacts a Med
227. e Mediatrix 2102 returns a 183 Session Progress packet with SDP needed if the endpoint is required to generate ringback on connection In this case the RTP channel is opened earlier to allow the callee s unit to generate the ringback and send it to the caller 180 Mediatrix 2102 CHAPTER 16 STUN Configuration This chapter describes how to configure the STUN client of the Mediatrix 2102 What is STUN Standards Supported STUN Simple Traversal of UDP through NATs is a simple client server protocol that uses UDP packets to discover the configuration information of NATs and firewalls between a device and the public Internet K NAT type K NAT binding public address K NAT binding time to live NAT Network Address Translator is a device that translates the IP address used within a private network to a different IP address known in another public network See NAT Traversal on page 168 for more details STUN supports a variety of existing NAT devices and does not require any additional hardware or software upgrades on the NAT device The Mediatrix 2102 uses the STUN protocol to discover its NAT binding for the following three IP addresses ports sockets K Signalling protocol SIP IP address port K RTP IP address port K T 38 IP address port SIP Outbound Proxy For a unit to work properly behind a firewall it must keep a pinhole opened by sending keepalive packets through
228. e fetched configuration file XXX from server XXX is empty Invalid file content The file contains invalid characters Allowed characters are ASCII codes 10 LF 13 CR 32 to 126 and 191 to 255 Send a syslog warning message including the file location name the transfer server address and the invalid character ASCII code The fetched configuration file XXX from server XXX has an invalid character ASCII code XXX No recorded settings applied Invalid transfer server address The server address is not valid Send a syslog warning message including the transfer server address No configuration file is fetched because the server host XXX is invalid Set sysAdminDownloadConfigFileStatus to fail File size too big Downloading a file with a size exceeding 512000 bytes Send a syslog warning message including the file location name the transfer server address the file size and the maximum allowed size The fetched configuration file XXX from server XXX has a size XXX bytes that exceeds the maximum allowed size XXX bytes Set sysAdminDownloadConfigFileStatus to fail Invalid encryption The configuration file cannot be decrypted A badly encrypted file is detected if the header or the padding is invalid Send a syslog warning message including the file location name and the transfer server address The fetched configura
229. e is opened Figure 11 Overview Web Page Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back gt A A Qsearch Gagravortes Gredos A Er 3 F HN Address T http 192 168 10 1 ze Mediatrix 2102 Overview Admin config File Bandwidth T STUN Overview Administration Configuration file HTTP server password System log Bandwidth Management STUN Overview WAN IP address 10 2 118 244 WAN Network Mask 255 255 0 0 Default gateway 10 2 0 1 Primary DNS 66 129 134 9 Secondary DNS 192 168 111 100 MAC Address 0090f800546c Software version HT Hardware version 3 AOA E v5 0 1 9 SIP MIB 1 5 2 17 Profile System uptime 0 00 18 11 Registration status port 1 Ready Registration status port 2 Ready 1 TI 69 internet A 26 Mediatrix 2102 Using the Web Interface Reference Manual SIP Version Status of the Mediatrix 2102 The Overview page displays the current status of the Mediatrix 2102 Table 14 Status Page IP Information Description WAN IP Address Value of the localHostWanAddress MIB variable which is the public IP address of the Mediatrix 2102 WAN Network Mask If the PPPoE service is enabled displays an empty string because there is no concept of network mask in PPP links Otherwise displays the value of the localHostSubnetMask MIB variable Default gateway Value of the localHostDefaultRouter MIB variable Primary DNS Value of the localHostPrimaryDns MIB v
230. e it properly establishes the Internet connection Refer to your modem s documentation for more details Once the modem is ready connect the power cord to the Mediatrix 2102 and then connect the other end to an electrical outlet Warning The electrical outlet must be installed near the Mediatrix 2102 so that it is easily accessible 10 This turns the Mediatrix 2102 on You should not unplug it when not in use s Ifthe Power LED is steady on proceed with the next step e Ifthe Power LED is blinking wait until the n Use LED blinks before proceeding with the next step This may take up to three minutes before the Mediatrix 2102 is ready Power on the router Depending on your router you may have to wait a few minutes before it is ready Refer to your router s documentation for more details Most DSL users will need to enable PPPoE after they have installed the Mediatrix 2102 The Ready LED will remain off until this setting has been changed For more informations refer to Chapter 2 Web Interface on page 25 Power on the PC Your computer does not have to be turned on for the telephone or fax services Mediatrix suggests to access the unit s web interface to configure its basic uplinks parameters See Chapter 2 Web Interface on page 25 for more details 12 Mediatrix 2102 Starting the Mediatrix 2102 for the First Time Reference Manual SIP Version Starting the Mediatrix 2102 for the First Time
231. e powering it on Cleaning To clean the Mediatrix 2102 wipe with a soft dry cloth Do not use volatile liquids such as benzine and thinner that are harmful to the unit casing For resistant markings wet a cloth with a mild detergent wring well and then wipe off Use a dry cloth to dry the surface Mediatrix 2102 Chapter 1 Installation Hardware Connection Hardware Connection The Mediatrix 2102 may be installed in various ways This section describes two of these installations in a single computer configuration without a router and multi computer configuration with a router Warning Do not connect the Mediatrix 2102 directly to Analog Telephone Systems See Appendix C Cabling Considerations on page 267 for more details on the cables the Mediatrix 2102 uses Reserving an IP Address H Note Perform this step only for a cable modem installation Before connecting the Mediatrix 2102 to the network Mediatrix strongly recommends that you reserve an IP address in your DHCP server if you are using one for the unit you are about to connect This way you know the IP address associated with a particular unit DHCP servers generally allocate a range of IP addresses for use on a network and reserve IP addresses for specific devices using a unique identifier for each device The Mediatrix 2102 unique identifier is its media access control MAC address You can locate the MAC address as follows gt
232. e something like 70 4 Wait for the transfer tone three beeps followed by the dial tone The call waiting tone is disabled K To re enable the call waiting tone 1 Take the receiver off hook 2 Replace the receiver on hook The call waiting tone is re enabled 212 Mediatrix 2102 Call Transfer Reference Manual SIP Version Call Transfer The Call Transfer service offers various ways to transfer calls gt gt Blind Transfer Attended Transfer The SIP protocol also offers to set transfer related parameters See Call Transfer Capacity on page 169 and Referred By Field on page 174 for more details Blind Transfer The blind call transfer service is sometimes called Transfer without Consultation or Unattended Transfer It allows a user to transfer a call on hold to a still ringing unanswered call The individual at the other extension or telephone number does not need to answer to complete the transfer The call hold and second call services must be enabled for this service to work See Call Hold on page 203 and Second Call on page 204 Enabling Blind Call Transfer You must enable this service before your users can use it K To enable the blind transfer service 1 2 In the subscriberServicesMIB locate the subscriberServices fEnablingTable group Set the subscriberServicesBlindTransferEnable variable to enable Because this variable is located in a table you can
233. e that your HTTP server may activate some caching mechanism for the file download This mechanism caches the initial file download for later processing thus preventing changes or update of the original file by the user This can cause strange problems if a user wants to edit a configuration file to modify values and upload it immediately The result will still return the original file and not the new one If you are using the HTTP protocol to download the configuration and your HTTP server requires authentication set the following The user name in the configFile TransferUsername variable The password in the configFile TransferPassword variable The Mediatrix 2102 supports basic and digest HTTP authentication as described in RFC 2617 Define the time base for automatic configuration updates in the configFileAutoUpdate Time Unit variable in the configFileAutomaticUpdate group You have the following choices Table 74 Time Unit Parameters Parameter Description seconds Updates the unit s configuration every x seconds You can specify the x value in the variable configFileAutoUpdatePeriod see Step 7 minutes Updates the unit s configuration every x minutes You can specify the x value in the variable configFileAutoUpdatePeriod see Step 7 hours Updates the unit s configuration every x hours You can specify the x value in the variable configFileAutoUpdatePeriod see Step 7 days Updates the unit s configura
234. e user can then answer that call by using the flash button The user can switch between the two active calls by using the flash button The call hold service must be enabled for this service to work See Call Hold on page 203 If the user is exclusively using faxes put the variable to disable to permanently disable the call waiting tone Because this variable is located in a table you can enable disable the service on a per line basis You can find the current status of the service in the subscriberServicesCallWaitingStatus read only variable under the subscriberServices fStatus Table Define the digits that users must dial to disable the Call Waiting tone in the subscriberServicesCallWaitingCancelDigitMap variable This allows a user who has call waiting enabled to disable that service on the next call only If for any reason the user wishes to undo the cancel simply unhook and re hook the telephone to reset the service For instance you could decide to put 76 as the sequence to disable the call waiting tone This sequence must be unique and follow the syntax for digit maps see Chapter 18 Digit Maps on page 187 Dialing this digit map does not have any effect unless the services status is enabled The deactivating sequence is set for all the lines of the Mediatrix 2102 You cannot have a different sequence for each line Mediatrix 2102 211 Chapter 20 Subscriber Services Call Waiting
235. eates a potential hazard to people or makes the equipment unsafe Package Contents The Mediatrix 2102 package contains the following items gt the Mediatrix 2102 unit gt a power cord for the country in which you are using the Mediatrix 2102 K a universal power supply K a 10 100 BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 cable Mediatrix 2102 1 Chapter 1 Installation Overview Overview K a Quick Start booklet You may also need additional 10 100 BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 cables The Mediatrix 2102 is a standalone Internet telephony access device that connects to virtually any business telephone system supporting standard analog lines The Mediatrix 2102 can be used to connect up to two analog phones or fax machines to a broadband access equipment for a Service Provider s IP Telephony offering to residential users This version of the Mediatrix 2102 uses the Session Initiation Protocol SIP which is a protocol for transporting call setup routing authentication and other feature messages to endpoints within the IP domain About the Mediatrix 2102 The Mediatrix 2102 K Merges voice and data traffic onto a single unified network Carrying telephone traffic over data networks uses less bandwidth as compared to telephone trunks resulting in a more cost effective network solution K Easily integrates with existing telephone equipment It converts any conventional analog telephone or fax machine into an Internet device Bypasses long
236. ed By field 174 registrar server DHCP information using 71 static information using 72 registration expiration 177 registration expiration default 177 registration refresh 176 replaces configuration 169 version 170 ringing response code 180 session timer 164 session expiration delay maximum 164 session expiration delay minimum 164 version supported 165 transmission timeout 171 transport type TCP 171 UDP 171 UDP source port behaviour 172 user agents authentification information 166 167 display name 163 header enabling to send 164 main user name 163 other accepted user names 163 setting information 163 Via branch behaviour 179 site specific information DHCP setting 65 site selecting for unit 6 SMI defined 39 SNMP access limitation 48 behaviour 41 non secure management mode 42 secure management mode 42 configuring 57 messages 40 MIB 39 322 Mediatrix 2102 Reference Manual SIP Version SNMP continued versions 40 SNTP defined 304 DHCP information using 184 enabling 183 server configuring 107 125 static information using 184 time zone defining custom 185 software downgrading procedure 137 downloading automatic update 134 configuration source 126 emergency procedure 138 HTTP server configuring 125 HTTP via 133 Image path 128 LED states 131 SNTP server configuring 125 Spanning Tree Protocol 136 syslog messages 130 TFTP server configuring 125 TFTP via 132 troubleshooting 251 zip fil
237. ed to the SIP Server The SIP Server needs only to know the complete number of the called party CC AC directory number digitMapPrependedString 1819 country code and area code A valid telephone number must contain a country code an area code and a number The country code and area code are missing in this number and must be added Mediatrix 2102 195 Chapter 18 Digit Maps Digit Map Examples 196 Mediatrix 2102 CHAPTER 19 Telephony Features This chapter explains how to set the telephony variables of the Mediatrix 2102 to define the way the unit handles calls Call Processes The following examples illustrate some of the various calling processes the Mediatrix 2102 supports These processes can be adapted at will to suit your needs and requirements The Mediatrix 2102 can communicate with the following devices K Another telephone or fax connected to the same Mediatrix 2102 K Another access device on the IP network such as the Mediatrix 1104 or Mediatrix 1124 gt Any LAN Endpoint on the IP network such as a Soft Phone an IP phone directly connected to the IP network gt A SCN phone or fax However the Mediatrix 2102 would need to contact an analog gateway such as the Mediatrix 1204 Calls Involving Another Mediatrix 2102 The following example illustrates how to reach a phone or fax on another Mediatrix 2102 K Phone Fax gt Mediatrix 2102 A gt Mediatrix 2102 B gt Phon
238. ediatrix 2102 attempts to communicate with the image server Be POSSIBLE CAUSE The directory specified in the upgrade command does not exist or does not contain the files required for the software download process SOLUTION e Check the directory name Be sure that the directory contains files If not extract them from the zip file again See Download Procedure on page 128 for more details Be sure that the software server is running and properly configured a POSSIBLE CAUSE The IP address of the software server is not the correct one SOLUTION e Check the given IP address e Check the IP port DESCRIPTION An error occurs when the Mediatrix 2102 attempts to transfer the software upgrade a POSSIBLE CAUSE The Ethernet cable has become disconnected from the Mediatrix 2102 or the PC running the file transfer SOLUTION Reconnect the cable and start again Be POSSIBLE CAUSE Power to the Mediatrix 2102 has been disrupted during the file transfer SOLUTION Check the power connection to the Mediatrix 2102 and start again DESCRIPTION When downgrading the Mediatrix 2102 to a previous version of the application software the unit does not restart the LAN LED is blinking and all other LEDs are off Be POSSIBLE CAUSE The default router IP address is set to 0 0 0 0 which is not supported by the version to which you downgraded SOLUTION Perform a recovery mode or a factory reset procedure after proceeding wi
239. eeps followed by the dial tone 5 Dial the number to which you want to forward your calls Dial any access code if required 6 Wait for three beeps followed by a silent pause The call forward is established 7 Hang up your telephone The calls are checked against the digit maps set up by the system administrator K To check if the call forward has been properly established 1 Take the receiver off hook 2 Wait for the dial tone 3 Dial your extension or telephone number The call is forwarded to the desired telephone number 4 Hang up your telephone K To cancel the call forward 1 Take the receiver off hook 2 Wait for the dial tone 3 Dial the sequence the system administrator has implemented to deactivate the call forward unconditional service This sequence could be something like 71 4 Wait for the transfer tone three beeps followed by the dial tone The call forward is cancelled 5 Hang up your telephone 206 Mediatrix 2102 Call Forward Reference Manual SIP Version On Busy You can automatically forward the incoming calls of your users to a pre determined target if they are already on the line The user does not have any feedback that a call was forwarded Setting up Call Forward On Busy You must configure and enable this service before your users can use it K To set the Call Forward On Busy feature 1 2 In the subscriberServicesMIB locate the subscriberSer
240. egistration expires minus the value set in the sipReRegistration Time variable See Refreshing Registration on page 176 for more details Setting the variable to 0 disables the expiration suggestion Default Registration Expiration Standards Supported RFC 3261 specifies that when the expires parameter or the Expires header are missing or not properly formatted for a contact of the 200 OK in response to a REGISTER request the unit must use a default registration expiration value of 3600 s You can configure the value of the default registration expiration K To configure the default registration expiration 1 In the sipinteropMIB set the sipinteropDefaultRegistrationExpiration variable with the default registration expiration The delay before a re REGISTER is the value set in the sip nteropDefaultRegistrationExpiration variable minus the value set in the sipReRegistrationTime variable See Refreshing Registration on page 176 for more details The recommended value in RFC 3261 section 10 2 is 3600 seconds 2 Restart the Mediatrix 2102 so that the changes may take effect Mediatrix 2102 177 Chapter 15 SIP Protocol Features Local Ring Behaviour on Provisional Response Local Ring Behaviour on Provisional Response You can set the Mediatrix 2102 so that it starts or not the local ring upon receiving a 18x Provisional response without SDP This setting does not affect the behavio
241. egistrationTime is set to a value lower than 32 In that case the user agent becomes unregistered and will become registered again only when the re REGISTER request is answered with a positive response from the server See Unregistered Line Behaviour on page 140 for a workaround if the unit cannot make calls during that period Registration Expiration The SIP protocol allows an entity to specify the expires parameter of a contact ina REGISTER request The server can return this expires parameter in the 200 OK response or select another expires In the REGISTER request the expires is a suggestion the entity makes The expires parameter indicates how long in seconds the user agent would like the binding to be valid You can configure the expires parameter the Mediatrix 2102 sends To configure the registration expiration 1 In the sipMIB set the sipRegistrationProposedExpirationValue variable with the suggested expiration delay in seconds of a contact in the REGISTER request Available values are from 1 s to 86 400 s one day This value does not modify the time before a re REGISTER The time is the expires of the contact in the 200 OK response to the REGISTER request minus the value set in the sipReRegistrationTime variable e If the expires of the contact in the 200 OK response to the REGISTER is not present or not properly formatted then the time is the default r
242. elephone lines and access to the public switched network Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet PPPoE A proposal specifying how a host personal computer interacts with a broadband modem i e DSL cable wireless etc to access the growing number of Highspeed data networks Relying on two widely accepted standards Ethernet and the point to point protocol PPP the PPPoE implementation requires virtually no more knowledge on the part of the end user other than that required for standard Dialup Internet access In addition PPPoE requires no major changes in the operational model for Internet Service Providers ISPs and carriers The base protocol is defined in RFC 2516 Port Network access point the identifier used to distinguish among multiple simultaneous connections to a host Portable Operating System Interface POSIX POSIX is a set of standard operating system interfaces based on the UNIX operating system The need for standardization arose because enterprises using computers wanted to be able to develop programs that could be moved among different manufacturer s computer systems without having to be recoded POST The POST method is used to request that the origin server accept the entity enclosed in the request as a new subordinate of the resource identified by the Request URI in the Request Line Private Branch Exchange PBX A small to medium sized telephone system and switch that provides communications between onsite
243. ement Server Includes a web based provisioning client provisioning server and SNMP proxy server used to manage all agents connected to the system The Management Server provides Gateway provisioning Monitoring and Numbering Plan Media Access Control MAC Address A layer 2 address 6 bytes long associated with a particular network device used to identify devices in a network also called hardware or physical address Mu p Law The PCM Pulse Code Modulation voice coding and companding standard used in Japan and North America See also A Law Network A group of computers terminals and other devices and the hardware and software that enable them to exchange data and share resources over short or long distances A network can consist of any combination of local area networks LAN or wide area networks WAN Off hook A line condition caused when a telephone handset is removed from its cradle On hook A line condition caused when a telephone handset is resting in its cradle Packet Includes three principal elements control information such as destination origin length of packet data to be transmitted and error detection The structure of a packet depends on the protocol 302 Mediatrix 2102 Plain Old Telephone System POTS Reference Manual SIP Version Plain Old Telephone System POTS Standard telephone service used by most residential locations basic service supplying standard single line telephones t
244. ent Server configuration source 1 In the jpAddressConfig folder locate the msSelectConfigSource variable under the ipAddressConfigMs group 2 Set this variable to either static or dhcp vendor site specific option Table 41 Management Server Source Variable Default Static Value DHCP Source msHost N A Use option specified in variable msDhcpSiteSpecificCode bytes 0 3 If not specified 0 use option 43 sub option 200 bytes 0 3 msStaticHost 192 168 0 10 N A msTrapPort N A Use option specified in variable msDhcpSiteSpecificCode bytes 4 5 If not specified 0 use option 43 sub option 200 bytes 4 5 If bytes 4 5 are not present use the default static value msStaticPort 162 N A msStaticTrapPort 162 N A L Note If you change the value of the msStaticTrapPort variable change the port used in the management server Not doing so will prevent you from viewing the received traps from the unit Mediatrix 2102 59 Chapter 4 IP Address and Network Configuration Services Configuration File Fetching The pAddressConfigFileFetching group provides the configuration necessary to contact the configuration file server when fetching a configuration file K To select the configuration file fetching server configuration source 1 In the ipAddressConfig folder locate the configFileFetchingSelectConfigSource variable under the ipAddressConfigFileFetching group 2 Set
245. er agent You can set information for each user agent such as its telephone number and friendly name This information is used to dynamically create the To From and Contact headers used in the request the user agent sends These headers make up the caller ID information that is displayed on telephones faxes equipped with a proper LCD display See Caller ID Information on page 83 for more details Most of the variables related to the user agents are located in tables You can display and define the information for all lines You can also use these tables to create edit five user names and passwords per line This means that gt Rows 1 5 of the table are reserved for line 1 gt Rows 6 10 of the table are reserved for line 2 gt etc If you want to enter a user name for the second line you must do so in the sixth row of the table If you want to enter a user name for the third line you must do so in the eleventh row of the table and so on Before changing a parameter value build its corresponding table with your MIB browsers table functionality Depending on the MIB browser you are using the tables may not appear the same way In the Unit Manager Network Administration Manual refer to chapter Signalling Protocols Parameters section SIP Configuration Window K To set basic user agent information 1 In the sipMIB set the user agent port number in the sipPort variable The default value is 0 If sipPort is set to 0 the default SIP
246. er name is a telephone number 555 1111 Variations could be to prefix the local area or country code such as 819 555 1111 To include more than one user name separate them with a character such as user1 user2 5552222 18195552222 You can now define the session timers parameters See Session Timers on page 164 for more details SIP User Agent Header Standards Supported The User Agent header field contains information about the user agent client originating the request For instance the information of the User Agent header could be something like the following User Agent Softphone Betal 5 You can specify if the Mediatrix 2102 sends this information or not when establishing a communication K To enable sending the SIP User Agent header 1 In the sipinteropMIB set the sipinteropSendUAHeaderEnable variable to enable Session Timers The session timer extension allows to detect the premature end of a call caused by a network problem or a peer s failure by resending an INVITE at every n seconds A successful response 200 OK to this INVITE indicates that the peer is still alive and reachable A timeout to this INVITE may mean that there are problems in the signalling path or that the peer is not available anymore In that case the call is shut down by using normal SIP means K To set Session Timer information 1 In the sipUAlfTable group set the session timer maximum expiration delay in the sip UAMaximum
247. es of faxes DESCRIPTION Fax from Brother to HP Laser Jet may fail more than 50 of the time a ISSUE Faxes from Brother models to Hewlett Packard LaserJet 3200 may fail half of the time when sent from a 2102 to a Mediatrix 1104 by way of two Mediatrix 1204s The following settings were tested a Pair 1 tested e Brother 6650MC Originating TX 3 Pg ECM best encoding V 17 14400 bps best resolution Hewlett Packard LaserJet 3200 Answering RX 3 Pg best ECM best encoding V 17 9600 bps best resolution b Pair 2 tested e Brother Fax 580MC Originating TX 3 Pg ECM best encoding V 17 14400 bps best resolution Hewlett Packard LaserJet 3200 Answering RX 3 Pg best ECM best encoding V 17 9600 bps best resolution c Pair 3 tested e Brother Fax 190 Originating TX 3 Pg non ECM best encoding V 29 9600 bps best resolution Hewlett Packard LaserJet 3200 Answering RX 3 Pg best ECM best encoding V 17 9600 bps best resolution DESCRIPTION Canon B320 fax limitations Be IssuE The Mediatrix 2102 may not be compatible with the Canon B320 fax machine The problem is in a T 38 transmission only and when the Canon B320 is the local fax attached to the Mediatrix 2102 and is the document receiver Mediatrix 2102 249 Chapter 28 Troubleshooting Configuration Issues Configuration Issues The following are issues you may encounter when changing the Mediatrix 2102 configuration
248. es on the building s installation for short circuit overcurrent protection Ensure phase conductors all current carrying conductors TN Power Warning Warning The device is designed to work with TN power systems Product Disposal Warning Warning Ultimate disposal of this product should be handled according to all national laws and regulations No 26 AWG Warning Warning To reduce the risk of fire use only No 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord LAN Connector Warning to an off premise application an out of plant application any exposed plant application or to any equipment other than the intended application connection may result in a safety hazard and or defective operation and or equipment damage Warning Do not connect the LAN connector directly to the Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN Exposed plant means where any portion of the circuit is subject to accidental contact with electric lighting or power conductors operating at a voltage exceeding 300V between conductors or is subject to lightning strikes Socket Outlet Warning Warning The socket outlet if used shall be located near the equipment and shall be easily accessible by the user Mediatrix 2102 259 Appendix A Standards Compliance and Safety Information Safety Recommendations Safety Recommendations To insure general safety follow these guidelines gt Do not open or disassemble this produ
249. es share the same public IPv4 address The Mediatrix 2102 performs transparent routing by forwarding to the WAN any packet sent to any IPv4 address that is included in the public subnet Each packet received from the WAN is forwarded directly to the device on the LAN except if it belongs to the hosted application in this case VoIP In the other direction each IPv4 packet received from the LAN is forwarded to the WAN except for packets sent explicitly to the private address assigned to the Mediatrix 2102 The Mediatrix 2102 itself can initiate a communication with the device on the LAN by using its private IPv4 address as the source address Router Mode The router mode separates the two external interfaces of the Mediatrix 2102 the Computer and Network connectors The Mediatrix 2102 has two distinct network interfaces with one IP address for each of them These interfaces are called LAN Computer connector and WAN Network connector At the internal level the interfaces are called bcm0 and bcm1 and the Mediatrix 2102 performs IP routing both ways The router mode is a requirement for the TAS to properly work When enabling TAS you also enable the Mediatrix 2102 in router mode The router mode is also a requirement for the Bandwidth Control feature WAN Upstream Bandwidth Control on page 97 In non router mode the interfaces are switched and the Mediatrix 2102 only has one network interface called pcm0 Bot
250. ess of the Computer connector is 192 168 10 0 or 192 168 10 2 Mediatrix 2102 93 Chapter 8 Transparent Address Sharing Configuring TAS TAS enabled DSL modem PPPoE enabled The Network connector receives an IP address to access the WAN This IP address is coming from the access concentrator and is stored in the localHostWanAddress variable In this case the IP address in the localHostAddress variable is not used The IP address of the Computer connector LAN interface is configured statically as described in LAN Interface on page 95 Figure 30 DSL Modem IP Addresses PPPoE omman PPPoE i WAN IP address provided i by access concentrator D 1 f Network Connector Computer Connector WAN IP address set in ipAddressConfigLocalHost group is not used Mediatrix 2102 LAN IP address set in ipAddressConfigLaninterface group QoS Differentiated Services Fields If you want to differentiate the packets sent by the PC from the packets sent by the Mediatrix 2102 you must substitute a configured value for the QoS Differentiated Services fields of the packets sent from the PC The goal is to prioritise the Mediatrix 2102 s packets over the PC s packets This allows to offer a quicker response time for the voice for instance However the ISP s network must support QoS routing It must be configured accordingly and route according to the DiffServ it encounters See Differentiated Services DS Field on page 2
251. ession with it This access concentrator sends the following information to the unit gt WAN IP address gt Default Router IP address 0 0 0 0 The access concentrator may also supply primary and secondary DNS servers If this is the case the new DNS servers supersede the servers defined locally Refer to Chapter 8 Transparent Address Sharing on page 87 for more details This implies that you may have to enter static values for additional network parameters K To set static information 1 In the ipAddressConfig folder locate the localHostSelectConfigSource variable under the ipAdressConfigLocalHost group 2 Set this variable to static 3 Set a static value for the following network parameters Table 7 Network Parameters Static Variables Variable Default Static Value localHostPrimaryDns 192 168 0 10 localHostSecondaryDns 192 168 0 10 local HostSubnetMask 255 255 255 0 a If you do not want to use a DNS set the variable to 0 S In the Unit Manager Network Administration Manual refer to chapter Administration Parameters section IP Configuration Caution These variables are vital to the proper operation of the Mediatrix 2102 If a variable of this group is not set properly the unit may not be able to start or be contacted after it has started 4 Set other static information as required See Services on page 53 for more details The next step wou
252. essionExpirationDelay sipUAOtherAcceptedUsernames sipUnitAuthPasswotd cee VE SIpUNItAUTORealM sic cane a arse a eA eed ened clear area eae sipUnitAuthUsernaMe sese eee eee ee sipUnregisteredPortBehavior SNMpAgentAccesS ee sntpConfigSource MI OS le EE AU ele sntpPort SNIPSelECICONfGSOUICE dvi adn da td aa E See OS TT Ea een POM EE sntpSynchronizationPeriod l sntpSynchronizationPeriodOnError Smtp TimeZone s di 185 SUE NAD EE 182 stunKeepAlivelnterval 182 stunQueryCacheDuration 182 stunQueryTimeout 2 182 SUN ati v Le dido 182 SEIS CACC POT al ld da A tt Atala daa eae 182 subscriberServicesAttendedTransferEnable 0 214 subscriberServicesAttendedTransferStatus lt 214 subscriberServicesBlindTransferEnable 0 213 subscriberServicesBlindTransferStatus eee 213 SUubsacriberaervicesCallEonwardOnBusvAcnv alion sees eee 207 subscriberServicesCallForwardOnBusyDisableDigitMap 2 207 SUubscriberaervicesCallEonwardOnBusvEnable eee eee eee 207 SubscrlberGericesCallFonwardCnbBusvEnabletuotMan sse eee eee 207 subscriberServicesCallForwardOnBusyForwardingAddTFESS sss 207 SUubscriberaervicesCallEonwardOnNoAnswerA cnv ation sese eee eee ee 209 subscriberServicesCallF orwardOnNoAnswerDisableDigitMap 209 subscriberServicesCallForwardOnNoAnswerEnable sssissisiesisiesieriersiertsrisiesisstertntsttsrtnrenten
253. et to DHCP However some locations may require to manually enter static IP information instead If this is the case select the Static connection type and proceed to Step 3 Static This connection type may be used for locations where cable modems cannot use the DHCP connection type You are thus required to manually provide the IP information See Step 3 In this connection type the PPPoE service pppoeEnable variable is disabled and the configuration source localHostSelectConfigSource variable is set to static PPPoE Connection to use with a DSL modem This is the most common connection type with a DSL modem In this connection type the PPPoE service pppoeEnable variable is enabled and the configuration source localHostSelectConfigSource variable is set to static However some DSL modems may require that you use the DHCP connection type instead 3 If the WAN connection type is Static as set in Step 2 enter the following static IP information Table 17 IP Addresses Parameters Parameter Definition WAN IP Address Public IP address of the Mediatrix 2102 This address is used for incoming signalling media and management traffic WAN Network Mask Subnet mask IP address used by the Mediatrix 2102 The subnet mask enables the network administrator to further divide the host part of the address into two or more subnets Default gateway Default router IP address used
254. et its SIP server configuration through a DHCP LF server or not this is set for all the SIP servers You cannot define a different configuration for each type of server DHCP Configuration Using the DHCP configuration assumes that you have properly set your DHCP server with the relevant information See Chapter 4 IP Address and Network Configuration on page 51 for more details K To use DHCP assigned information 1 In the pAddressContfig folder locate the sipServerSelectConfigSource variable under the ipAddressConfigSipServer group This variable defines whether the Mediatrix 2102 must get its registrar server configuration through a DHCP server or not 2 Set the sipServerSelectConfigSource variable to dhcp You can query the registrar server s IP address and port number assigned by the DHCP server in the following read only variables under the pAddressStatusSipServer group of the ipAddressStatus folder e sipRegistrarHost e sipRegistrarPort Mediatrix 2102 71 Chapter 5 SIP Servers Registrar Server 3 Set how you want to define the registrar server information in the DHCP server Table 52 Registrar Server DHCP Information To use a Set vendor specific code The sipRegistrarDhcpSiteSpecificCode variable under the ipAddressConfigSipServer group to 0 Set the registrar server IP address in the DHCP server inside the vendor specific sub option 203 hexadecimal OxCB site specifi
255. etails the DHCP server already has options that can be set to provide time server addresses and the order in which clients use them to attempt to discover servers The Mediatrix 2102 uses Option 42 to specify the IP address corresponding to the server that provides NTP SNTP RFC 1769 7 SNTP K To select the SNTP configuration source In the Unit Manager Network Administration Manual refer to chapter Administration Parameters section 1 In the jpAddressConfig folder locate the sntpSelectConfigSource variable under the ipAddressConfigSntp group 2 Set this variable to either static or dhcp Table 45 SNTP Source Variable Default Static Value DHCP Source sntpHost 192 168 0 10 Option 42 first of the list sntpPort 123 Not provided by the DHCP use the default static value 62 Mediatrix 2102 DHCP Server Configuration Reference Manual SIP Version DHCP Server Configuration Standards Supported LF Note This section applies only if you are using the DHCP connection type DHCP servers generally allocate a range of IP addresses for use on a network and reserve IP addresses for specific devices using a unique identifier for each device The Mediatrix 2102 unique identifier is its media access control MAC address LF Note Mediatrix recommends to use a Windows 2000 or Unix based DHCP server If you run Windows NT 4 0 and use the built in Microsoft DHCP Server
256. f Conformity indicating that Industry Canada technical specifications were met It does not imply that Industry Canada approved the equipment CE Marking DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY C We Mediatrix Telecom Inc located at 4229 Garlock st Sherbrooke Qu bec Canada J1L 2C8 declare that for the hereinafter mentioned product the presumption of conformity with the applicable essential requirements of DIRECTIVE 1999 5 EC OF THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT RTTE DIRECTIVE is given Any unauthorized modification of the product voids this declaration For a copy of the original signed Declaration Of Conformity please contact Mediatrix at the above address Mediatrix 2102 257 Appendix A Standards Compliance and Safety Information Translated Warning Definition Translated Warning Definition The following information provides an explanation of the symbols which appear on the Mediatrix 2102 and in the documentation for the product equipment you must be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and familiar with standard Warning Means danger You are in a situation that could cause bodily injury Before you work on any practices for preventing accidents Waarschuwing Dit waarschuwingssymbool betekent gevaar U overtreat in een situatie die lichamelijk letsel kan veroorzaken Voordat u aan enige apparatuur gaat werken dient u zich bewust te zijn van de bij elektrische schakelingen betrokken risico s en dient u
257. f Service QoS QoS Quality of Service features enable network managers to decide on packet priority queuing The Mediatrix 2102 supports the Differentiated Services DS field and 802 1q taggings There are four variables one variable for signalling SIP and one variable for each of voice T 38 and VBD Voice Band Data media The Mediatrix 2102 supports the Real Time Control Protocol RTCP which is used to send packets to convey feedback on quality of data delivery The Mediatrix 2102 does not support RSVP Resource Reservation Protocol Differentiated Services DS Field Standards Supported Differentiated Services DiffServ or DS is a protocol for specifying and controlling network traffic by class so that certain types of traffic for example voice traffic which requires a relatively uninterrupted flow of data might get precedence over other kinds of traffic DiffServ replaces the first bits in the ToS byte with a differentiated services code point DSCP It uses the existing IPv4 Type of Service octet It is the network administrator s responsibility to provision the Mediatrix 2102 with standard and correct values the PC from the packets sent by the Mediatrix 2102 In this case you must use a substitution value as V Note If you are using the Mediatrix 2102 in router mode you may want to differentiate the packets sent by described in Configuring TAS on page 93 What are Differentiated Services
258. f hook 2 Wait for the dial tone 3 Dial the sequence the system administrator has implemented to deactivate the call forward on no answer service This sequence could be something like 75 4 Wait for the transfer tone three beeps followed by the dial tone The call forward is cancelled 5 Hang up your telephone 210 Mediatrix 2102 Call Waiting Reference Manual SIP Version Call Waiting The call waiting tone indicates to an already active call that a new call is waiting on the second line Your users can activate deactivate the call waiting tone for their current call This is especially useful when transmitting faxes The user that is about to send a fax can thus deactivate the call waiting tone to ensure that the fax transmission will not be disrupted by an unwanted second call When the fax transmission is completed and the line is on hook the call waiting tone is automatically reactivated Setting up Call Waiting You must configure and enable this service before your users can use it K To set the Call Waiting service 1 2 In the subscriberServicesMIB locate the subscriberServices fEnablingTable group Enable the Call Waiting feature by setting the subscriberServicesCallWaitingEnable variable to enable This permanently activates the call waiting tone When receiving new calls during an already active call a special tone is heard to indicate that a call is waiting on the second line Th
259. fig folder set the telephonyDnsOverrideEnable variable under the ipAddressConfigTelephonyDns group to enable The primary DNS and secondary DNS addresses are set with the static values you define in the next step 3 Set the telephonyDnsStaticPrimaryDns and telephonyDnsStaticSecondaryDns variables with the proper static DNS IP addresses of your ITSP If you set the telephonyDnsOverrideEnable variable to disable the primary DNS and secondary DNS addresses provisioning depends on the setting of the localHostDnsOverrideEnable variable 4 Restart the Mediatrix 2102 so that the changes may take effect Mediatrix 2102 55 Chapter 4 IP Address and Network Configuration Services WAN Address Configuration Source The Wide Area Network WAN address is the public IP address attributed to the Mediatrix 2102 This address is used for incoming signalling media and management traffic K To set the WAN IP address configuration source 1 2 In the pAddressContfig folder locate the localHostWanAddressSelectConfigSource variable under the jpAddressConfigLocalHost group This variable indicates the source to be used for the provisioning of the WAN address It offers the following choices Table 35 WAN IP Address Source Settings Option Description localAddress The Mediatrix 2102 is not part of a WAN The public address is the same as the localHostAddress static The Mediatrix 2102 has a static WAN address
260. figuration Loop Current Loop Current When one of its analog lines goes off hook the Mediatrix 2102 controls the line in a fixed loop current mode The value of the loop current can be modified through the MIB Note that the actual measured current may be different than the value you set because it varies depending on the DC impedance This is illustrated in Figure 35 for a loop current of 32 mA Figure 35 Loop Current vs Impedance 32 mA 40 20 Loop Current mA 20 10 T T 7 T T 0 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 DC Impedance Vdc K To set the loop current 1 In the fxsMIB set the fxsLoopCurrent variable to the value you want to use The loop current is in mA The range of available values is from 20 mA to 32 mA 2 Restart the Mediatrix 2102 so that the changes may take effect When a remote end user goes on hook the Mediatrix 2102 signals the far end disconnect by performing a current loop drop lt 1 mA on the analog line This current loop drop also referred to as Power Denial mode is typically used for disconnect supervision on analog lines The Mediatrix 2102 maintains a current drop for one second this value cannot be configured then a busy tone is generated to indicate the user to hang up 144 Mediatrix 2102 CHAPTER 1 2 Voice Transmissions This chapter describes the various codecs the Mediatrix 2102 supports for transmitting audio signals Codec Descrip
261. figuration file has been successful Error The specific configuration update failed The configuration update with the specific configuration file experienced an error and has not been completed Informational The configuration file XXX was successfully fetched A configuration file was successfully fetched Informational The unit configuration is not updated The parameter values defined in the fetched configuration files are identical to the actual unit configuration The parameter values defined in the fetched configuration files are identical to the actual unit configuration Informational The generic file Ra parameter values are not applied They are either identical to the unit configuration or overwritten by the specific file The generic configuration file parameter values are either identical to the unit configuration or overwritten by the specific configuration file Warning None of the parameter values defined in the configuration file s was successfully applied No parameter value from a fetched configuration file was successfully applied e g because of bad OIDs Informational Parameter values defined in the configuration file s were successfully applied A fetched configuration file was successfully applied Informational The unit is restarting to complete the configuration update All necessary fetched configuration
262. figures which transport to use then the Mediatrix 2102 tries all transports it supports starting with UDP If this fails it tries with TCP The unit begins with UDP because all SIP implementations must support this transport while the mandatory support of TCP was only introduced in RFC 3261 An important fact is that it is not the destination itself that is placed in the penalty box but the combination of address port and transport When a host is in the penalty box it is never used to try to connect to a remote host unless it is the last choice for the Mediatrix 2102 and there are no more options to try after this host Let s say for instance that the Mediatrix 2102 supports both the UDP and TCP transports It tries to reach endpoint B for which the destination address does not specify a transport and there is no DNS SRV entry to specify which transports to use in which order It turns out that this endpoint B is also down In this case the Mediatrix 2102 first tries to contact endpoint B via UDP After a timeout period UDP is placed in the penalty box and the unit then tries to contact endpoint B via TCP This fails as well and TCP is also placed in the penalty box Now let s assume endpoint B comes back to life and the Mediatrix 2102 tries again to contact it before UDP and TCP are released from the penalty box First the unit tries UDP but it is currently in the penalty box and there is another transport le
263. files were successfully applied You can view these messages in the web interface See System Log Page on page 34 for more details Mediatrix 2102 111 Chapter 9 Configuration File Download Configuration File Download Server Configuration Files Encryption You can secure the exchange of configuration files between the server and the Mediatrix 2102 A privacy key allows the unit to decrypt a previously encrypted configuration file This applies to files downloaded via TFTP or HTTP but NOT on updates performed from the web interface To encrypt a configuration file generic or specific you must use the MxCryptFile application MxCryptFile is a command line tool that encrypts files before sending them to the Mediatrix 2102 unit Contact yoyr sales representative for more details Configuration File Decryption on the Mediatrix 2102 The following describes how to decrypt a previously encrypted generic or specific configuration file You must have one key for the generic configuration file and another key for the specific configuration file K To decrypt a configuration file 1 In the configFileFetchingMIB set the proper decryption variable with the secret key used to decrypt the configuration file Table 73 Decryption Variables Configuration File Variable Generic configFilePrivacyGenericSecret Specific configFilePrivacySpecificSecret The key is encoded in hexadecimal notation You ca
264. first downloads the configuration files is randomly selected 9 Set the configFileAutoUpdatePeriodicEnable variable to enable 10 In the sysConfigMIB set the sysConfigDownloadConfigFile variable to automaticinitiateFileDownload The unit configuration is only updated if at least one parameter value defined in the downloaded configuration files is different from the actual unit configuration If one of the telephones faxes is off hook the Mediatrix 2102 will perform the update 5 minutes after both ports are detected on hook Mediatrix 2102 117 Chapter 9 Configuration File Download Configuration File Download Server Error Handling The following configuration file fetching service error sources are divided in three types depending on the transfer protocol common errors Table 35 TFTP errors Table 36 and HTTP errors Table 37 The error cause and the unit behaviour are also described Table 76 Configuration File Fetching Error Handling Error Type Cause Behaviour Common Error Handling Invalid file format The file format is not valid Send a syslog warning message including the file location name with the transfer server address The fetched configuration file XXX from server XXX has an invalid format No recorded settings applied Empty file Committing an empty file Send a syslog warning message including the file location name with the transfer server address Th
265. for automatic software updates in the imageAutoUpdate TimeUnit variable in the image AutomaticUpdate group You have the following choices Table 86 Time Unit Parameters Parameter Description seconds Updates the software every x seconds You can specify the x value in the variable imageAutoUpdatePeriod see Step 7 minutes Updates the software every x minutes You can specify the x value in the variable imageAutoUpdatePeriod see Step 7 hours Updates the software every x hours You can specify the x value in the variable imageAutoUpdatePeriod see Step 7 days Updates the software every x days You can specify the x value in the variable imageAutoUpdatePeriod see Step 7 You can also define the time of day when to perform the update in the imageAutoUpdate TimeOfDay variable see Step 8 Set the waiting period between each software update in the imageAutoUpdatePeriod variable The time unit for the period is specified by the image AutoUpdate TimeUnit variable see Step 6 Available values are from 1 to 48 It may be possible that the Mediatrix 2102 skips a scheduled periodic update if the previous periodic update has not finished yet This may happen with periods of a few seconds Mediatrix 2102 135 Chapter 10 Software Download Download Procedure Let s say for instance that you set the period to two seconds and the automatic update mechanism takes five seconds to complete The foll
266. formation Tone 950 Hz 0 33 20 dBm 1400 Hz 0 33 1800 Hz 0 33 1 0 Stutter Dial Tone 425 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 CONTINUOUS 10 dBm Confirmation Tone 425 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 End 10 dBm Receiver Off Hook ROH Tone 1400 Hz 0 1 0 1 19 dBm 2060 Hz 19 dBm 2450 Hz 19 dBm 2600 Hz 19 dBm Message Waiting Indicator Tone 425 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 10 CONTINUOUS 10 dBm Network Congestion Tone 425 Hz 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 6 13 dBm Ring AC 45 VRMS 25 Hz 1 5 3 0 DC 15 Vdc Input Impedance 220 Q 820 Q 120 nF Default Caller ID BELLCORE FXS Line Attenuation Input 0 dBr FXS Line Attenuation Output 7 dBr 294 Mediatrix 2102 Sweden Reference Manual SIP Version Sweden The following parameters apply if you have selected Sweden as location Table 179 Sweden Parameters Parameter Value On Off Sequence s Elect Levels Dial Tone 425 Hz CONTINUOUS 12 5 dBm Busy Tone 425 Hz 0 25 0 25 12 5 dBm Ringback Tone 425 Hz 1 0 5 0 12 5 dBm Special Information Tone 950 Hz 0 33 22 dBm 1400 Hz 0 33 1800 Hz 0 33 1 0 Stutter Dial Tone 425 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 CONTINUOUS 12 5 dBm Confirmation Tone 425 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 End 12 5 dBm Receiver Off Hook ROH Tone 1400 Hz 0 1 0 1 19 dBm 2060 Hz 19 dBm 2450 Hz 19 dBm 2600 Hz 19 dBm Message Waiting Indicator Tone 425 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 10 CONTINUOUS 12 5 dBm Network Congestion Tone 4
267. ft to try The Mediatrix 2102 skips over UDP and tries the next target which is TCP Again TCP is still in the penalty box but this time it is the last target the Mediatrix 2102 can try so penalty box or not TCP is used all the same to try to contact endpoint B There is a problem if endpoint B only supports UDP RFC 2543 based implementation Endpoint B is up but the Mediatrix 2102 still cannot contact it with UDP and TCP in the penalty box the unit only tries to contact endpoint B via its last choice which is TCP The same scenario would not have any problems if the penalty box feature was disabled Another option is to disable TCP in the Mediatrix 2102 which makes UDP the only possible choice for the unit and forces to use UDP even if it is in the penalty box You must fully understand the above problem before configuring this feature Mixing endpoints that do not support the same set of transports with this feature enabled can lead to the above problems so it is suggested to either properly configure SRV records for the hosts that can be reached or be sure that all hosts on the network support the same transport set before enabling this feature Penalty Box Configuration The following steps describe how to configure the penalty box feature K To set the penalty box feature 1 In the sipMIB locate the sipPenaltyBox group 2 Set the amount of time in seconds that a host spends in the penalty box in the si
268. g it over IP If you experience any timeout add some seconds to the timeout period of your MIB browser and then try to reach the unit again K Suppose that the Mediatrix 2102 accepts requests with authentication only If you perform requests by using encryption and authentication assuming that the authentication password is valid the SNMP agent still responds as if the requests were only authenticated K If you clone an SNMPv3 user and then remove authentication or privacy for it ensure that a row in vacmGroupName matches its new constraints If not the unit is not accessible by using the new clone parameters SNMPv3 Special Behaviour Mediatrix units coming out of factory are set so that you can use all MIB variables by using SNMPv1 SNMPv2c or SNMPv3 However you can decide to accept only SNMPv3 access by using passwords known by administrators only for enhanced security In this case you should manually disable SNMPv1 SNMPv2 so that SNMPv3 works properly The Mediatrix 2102 thus refuses any SNMPv1 or SNMPv2 requestit receives You can disable enable SNMPv1 SNMPv2 by using the MIB Browser included in the Mediatrix Unit Manager Network or any other MIB Browser to modify the permissions related to SNMPv1 SNMPv2 security model These permissions are located in the VacmAccessTable of the SNMP VIEW BASED ACM MIB RFC 2575 When using exclusively SNMPv3 a row from one of the following tables gt usmUserTable gt vacmSecurit
269. g Comfort Noise Generation CNG those packets are used to generate local comfort noise K To enable Comfort Noise 1 In the voicelfMIB locate the voicelfTable group 2 Define the type of comfort noise in the voicelfG711ComfortNoiseGenerationEnable variable The following settings are available Table 104 Comfort Noise Settings Setting Description disable CNG disabled whiteNoise CNG enabled white noise customNoise CNG enabled custom noise More elaborated background noise that sounds better than white comfort noise 3 Restart the Mediatrix 2102 so that the changes may take effect Mediatrix 2102 155 Chapter 12 Voice Transmissions User Gain User Gain The user gain allows you to modify the input and output sound level of the Mediatrix 2102 Caution Use these settings with great care Mediatrix recommends not to modify the user gain variables AN unless absolutely necessary because default calibrations may not be valid anymore Modifying user gains may cause problems with DTMF detection and voice quality using a high user gain may cause sound saturation the sound is distorted Furthermore some fax or modem tones may not be recognized anymore The user gains directly affect the fax communication quality and may even prevent a fax to be sent You can compensate with the user gain if there is no available configuration for the country in which t
270. guration File Upload Page Configuration File Upload Page The Configuration file upload web page allows you to upload a configuration file from the computer connected to the Computer connector of the Mediatrix 2102 into the unit The configuration file is transferred by using the HTTP POST method See Chapter 9 Configuration File Download on page 107 for more information on configuration files K To upload a configuration file 1 In the web interface click the Configuration link or the Config File button This links to the Configuration file upload web page Figure 13 Configuration file upload Web Page A Mediatrix 2102 Microsoft Internet Explorer Loix Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help bak gt A A Reach Favorites Queda G Er SE 9 Address http 192 168 10 1 Ge Mediatrix 2102 Overview Admin TO Passwora TT Bandwidth ST Overview Administration Configuration file HTTP server password System log Bandwidth Management STUN Configuration file upload Select configuration file to upload Browse Upload to unit e T T Internet a 2 Select the configuration file you want to upload to the Mediatrix 2102 in the Select configuration file to upload field You can click the Browse button to select a file This button may not be available depending on the web browser you are using 3 Click the Upload to unit button If a valid configuration file is successf
271. guration files to download on the computer hosting the TFTP server These files must be in a directory under the TFTP root path 3 If not already done set the configuration file path as described in Setting up the Configuration File Download on page 109 4 In the configFileFetchingMIB set the configFileTransferProtocol variable to tftp In the groupAdminMIB set the groupSetAdmin variable to ForceLock All activities in progress on the Mediatrix 2102 are terminated immediately and the unit enters the maintenance mode the value of the groupAdminState variable is locked The configuration file download may take place 6 In the sysAdminMIB initiate the configuration file download via TFTP by setting the sysConfigCommand variable to updateConfiguration The Mediatrix 2102 immediately downloads the configuration files It is the initiator of the TFTP sessions NAT Variations NAT treatment of UDP varies among implementations The four treatments are Full Cone All requests from the same internal IP address and port are mapped to the same external IP address and port Furthermore any external host can send a packet to the internal host by sending a packet to the mapped external address s Restricted Cone All requests from the same internal IP address and port are mapped to the same external IP address and port Unlike a full cone NAT an external host with IP address X can send a packet to the internal host only if
272. h so users do not hear echoes stops and starts or annoying clicks and pops When traffic congestion is properly managed Mediatrix 2102 customers cannot tell that their conversation is being carried over a packet network rather than the traditional SCN Mediatrix 2102 Overview Reference Manual SIP Version You can dial on a telephone fax machine connected to the Mediatrix 2102 as you normally do Please refer to Chapter 19 Telephony Features on page 197 for more information and call processes examples Management Choices The Mediatrix 2102 offers various management options to configure the unit Table 4 Management Options Management Choice Description Web Interface The Mediatrix 2102 web interface offers the following options e Password protected access via basic HTTP authentication as described in RFC 2617 e User friendly GUI Refer to Chapter 2 Web Interface on page 25 for more details SNMPv1 2 3 The Mediatrix 2102 SNMP feature offers the following options e Password protected access Remote management e Simultaneous management Refer to Chapter 3 MIB Structure and SNMP on page 39 for more details Auto Update The Mediatrix 2102 auto update options are as follows e Frequent polling e Automatic software and configuration files downloads e Configuration file encryption Refer to Chapter 10 Software Download on page 125 and Chapter 9 Configuration File Download
273. h Hook This puts B on hold and the second line is automatically connected A hears a dial tone 2 A dials C s number A and C are now connected 3 A performs another Flash Hook The call on hold B is reactivated A is now conferencing with B and C K A wants to transfer B to C during the conference 1 A hangs up The conference is terminated B and C are now connected gt A wants to terminate the call with C and get back to the call with B during the conference 1 A performs a Flash Hook The conference is terminated and the call with C is disconnected A and B are still connected and can go on with their conversation gt B or C hangs up during the conference 1 B or C hangs up during the conference The conference is terminated but the call between A and C or B is not affected and they are still connected 216 Mediatrix 2102 CHAPTER 21 Automatic Call Telephony Attributes The telephony attributes are used to configure the characteristics of the telephony system being implemented The automatic call feature allows you to define a telephone number that is automatically dialed when taking the handset off hook El In the Unit Manager Network Administration Manual refer to chapter Telephony Attributes Paramete
274. h a low bandwidth connection without any visible performance issues This is true for both DHCP and PPPoE connections with either a DSL or cable modem However you must configure the Mediatrix 2102 accordingly What is Considered a Low Bandwidth Connection Mediatrix considers that when the transmission of one or more large Ethernet packet takes more time than the time it takes for packetization the process is not optimal For instance a 1518 bytes packet takes the following transmission time according to the bandwidth Table 68 Transmission Time vs Bandwidth Bandwidth kbps Transmission Time ms 64 190 128 95 256 47 512 24 1024 12 2048 6 4096 3 One can see that from 128 kbps or less the delay becomes significant considering this is for one packet only Mediatrix thus recommends to follow the configuration in the next section for a bandwith lower than 4096 kbps This will ensure the best voice quality possible Configuration for a Low Bandwidth Connection The following steps should allow you to use a low bandwidth connection K To use the Mediatrix 2102 with a low bandwidth connection 1 Configure the Bandwidth Management feature as described in WAN Upstream Bandwidth Control on page 97 a Set the maximum bandwidth in kilobits per seconds kbps in the pRoutingWanUpstreamBandwidth variable This value should be implemented or provided by your ISP It must be bet
275. h external network interfaces generally have the same behaviour 88 Mediatrix 2102 What is Transparent Address Sharing Reference Manual SIP Version Cable vs DSL Modem Most of the Mediatrix 2102 settings are the same no matter what the modem you are using However there are a few differences Table 63 Cable vs DSL Modem Cable Modem DSL Modem You must configure the Mediatrix 2102 to use a DHCP server to get its IP information as per DHCP Server Configuration on page 63 However some locations may require to manually enter static IP information instead The easiest way to do so is to use the web interface See Chapter 2 Web Interface on page 25 for more details You must configure the PPPoE service as per PPPoE Service on page 90 However some DSL modems may require that you configure the Mediatrix 2102 to use a DHCP server to get its IP information as per DHCP Server Configuration on page 63 Multicast and IGMP The Mediatrix 2102 does not support the IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol protocol i e the PC connected to the Computer connector of the Mediatrix 2102 cannot register to IGMP services Multicast is communication between a single sender and multiple receivers on a network IGMP is an Internet protocol that provides a way for an Internet computer to report its multicast group membership to adjacent routers Multicasting allows one computer on the I
276. hcpSiteSpecificCode variable to 0 Set the configuration file server IP address in the DHCP server inside the vendor specific sub option 201 hexadecimal 0xD2 site specific code The configFileFetchingDhcpSiteSpecificCode variable to any value between 128 and 254 Set the configuration file server IP address in the DHCP server inside the site specific option you have chosen it must match the value of the configFileFetchingDhcpSiteSpecificCode variable in the unit s configuration See Vendor and Site Specific DHCP Options on page 64 for more details Static Configuration Use the static configuration if you are not using a DHCP server or if you want to bypass it K To use static information 1 In the ipAddressConfig folder locate the configFileFetchingSelectConfigSource variable This variable defines whether the Mediatrix 2102 must ask for its configuration file server settings through a DHCP server or not 2 Set the configFileFetchingSelectConfigSource variable to static 108 Mediatrix 2102 Configuration File Download Server Reference Manual SIP Version 3 Set the following variables Table 70 Configuration File Server Static Information Variable Description configFileFetchingStaticHost Static configuration file server IP address or domain name to use when downloading a configuration file This is the current address of the PC that hosts the configuration files Default Value 192
277. he Mediatrix 2102 is located Because the user gain is in dB you can easily adjust the loss plan e g if you need an additional 1 dB for analog to digital simply put 1 for user gain input S In the Unit Manager Network Administration Manual refer to chapter Ports Parameters section Port sj Configuration Window K To set user gain variables 1 In the voicelfMIB locate the voicelfTable group 2 Define the following variables e voicelfUserInputGainOffset User input gain offset in dB from analog to digital voicelfUserOutputGainOffset User output gain offset in dB from digital to analog Values range from 30 dB to 20 dB However going above 6 dB may introduce clipping distortion depending on the country selected Under 24 dB you will not have much signal either 3 Restart the Mediatrix 2102 so that the changes may take effect 156 Mediatrix 2102 CHAPTER 1 3 Fax Transmission This chapter describes how to perform fax transmissions in clear channel and T 38 with the Mediatrix 2102 Introduction The Mediatrix 2102 handles G3 and Super G3 fax transmissions at speeds up to 14 4 kbps Automatic fax mode detection is standard on all lines Real Time Fax Over UDP with the T 38 protocol stack is also available The quality of T 38 fax transmissions depends upon the system configuration type of call control system used type of Mediatrix units deployed as well as the model of fax machines used Should some of the
278. he file name and the TFTP client address Error in the TFTP transfer of the configuration file XXX from the TFTP client XXX Set sysAdminDownloadConfigFileStatus to fail and send msTrapStatusConfigFile TFTP transfer aborted The transfer was aborted while in progress by changing the value of sysConfigDownload ConfigMode or sysConfigDownloadContfigFile Send a syslog warning message including the file name and the TFTP client address The TFTP transfer of the configuration file XXX from the TFTP client XXX was aborted Set sysAdminDownloadConfigFileStatus to fail and send msTrapStatusConfigFile File pulling not allowed A TFTP client is trying to read a file from the unit Send a syslog informational message including the file name and the TFTP client address The TFTP client XXX is trying to pull the file XXX from the unit This is not allowed Send error code 2 access violation to the TFTP client Syslog Messages A syslog message is sent whenever it is impossible for the management server to download a configuration file or when it is impossible to apply the new settings to the unit Table 78 Syslog Messages Using the Management Server Level Message Event Warning The notification XXX could not be sent to msHost XXX and msTrapPort XXX A SNMP trap could not be sent to the management server The syslog warning message includes
279. he DHCP server embedded in the Mediatrix 2102 supports the following options Table 65 Supported DHCP Option Code Description Network Mask When the router state is public returns a subnet mask that depends on the class of the WAN address see RFC 791 section 3 2 When the router state is private returns the network mask as configured in the MIB Router Option When the router state is public returns the first address in the subnet If this address correspond to the Mediatrix 2102 address the default router s address is the last address in the subnet When the router state is private does not return a router IP address Domain Name Server Option Returns the list of DNS addresses as configured in the MIB 42 Network Time Server Option Returns the SNTP server address as configured in the MIB If the MIB contains a FQDN option 42 contains the resolved IP address 51 Lease Time Returns 20 seconds 52 Option Overload Always set to 3 53 DHCP Message Type 53 Server Identifier Returns the unit s LAN IP address Mediatrix 2102 101 Chapter 8 Transparent Address Sharing DSL Modem Specific Information DSL Modem Specific Information The following sections apply only if you are using a DSL modem Establishing a Connection When the Mediatrix 2102 restarts it establishes the connection to the access concentrator in conformance with the RFCs
280. he Mediatrix 2102 Blink Blink Blink Blink Mediatrix 2102 in IP address to its default Recovery Mode value in the MIB and restarts the unit 10 to 15 seconds Restarts the Deletes the persistent On On On On Mediatrix 2102 in MIB values creates a Factory Reset new configuration file with the default factory values and then restarts the unit a Synchronized blinking at 2 Hz 50 duty cycle b You can disable the Factory reset procedure to avoid users deleting the existing configuration See Disabling the Factory Re set on page 23 for more details At Start Time The Default Settings switch can be used at start time you power the unit off and then depress the Default Settings switch and power the unit back on In this case the following explains the reset behaviour K Pressing the Default Settings switch at startup until all the LEDs start blinking restarts the Mediatrix 2102 in Recovery Mode K Pressing the Default Settings switch at startup until all the LEDs stop blinking and remain ON applies the Factory Reset procedure This feature reverts the Mediatrix 2102 back to its default factory settings See LED Indicators on page 15 for a detailed description of the LED patterns related to the Default Settings switch 20 Mediatrix 2102 Default Settings Switch Reference Manual SIP Version Recovery Mode The recovery mode provides a way to restart the Mediatrix 2102 in
281. he jitter buffer adds to the system The target jitter buffer length is in ms and must be equal to or smaller than the maximum jitter buffer Values range from O ms to 125 ms The default value is 30 ms You can change values by increments of 1 ms but Mediatrix recommends to use multiple of 5 ms It is best not to set target jitter values below the default value Setting a target jitter buffer below 5 ms could cause an error Jitter buffer adaptation behaviour varies from one codec to another See About Changing Jitter Buffer Values on page 152 for more details 3 Define the maximum jitter buffer length in the voicelfMaxJitterBufferLength variable This is the maximum jitter the adaptive jitter buffer can handle The jitter buffer length is in ms and must be equal to or greater than the target jitter buffer Values range from O ms to 125 ms The default value is 125 ms You can change values by increments of 1 ms but Mediatrix recommends to use multiple of 5 ms See About Changing Jitter Buffer Values on page 152 for more details 4 Enable the jitter buffer protection by setting the voicelfAdaptativeJitterBufferEnable variable to enable 5 Restart the Mediatrix 2102 so that the changes may take effect About Changing Jitter Buffer Values Mediatrix recommends to avoid changing the target and maximum jitter buffer values unless experiencing or strongly expecting one of the following symptoms K If the voice is scattered and
282. he path and or name of the directory that contains the extracted files into the image path of the Mediatrix 2102 you may have to convert V into to eliminate typographical errors Note that you can define the C Root Download part as you want The file names may also differ from the example shown above Mediatrix 2102 129 Chapter 10 Software Download Download Procedure Software Download Status You can validate the status of the software download in various ways Syslog Messages If you are using a Syslog daemon you will receive messages that inform you of the software update status The following are the syslog messages the Mediatrix 2102 sends Table 84 Software Update Syslog Messages Level Message Event General Messages Informational The software update succeeded The software update has been successful Error The software update failed The software update experienced an error and has not been completed Warning Primary image server not specified cannot download file XXX This error occurs when an image download is initiated and no domain name or address is specified for the primary image server Warning Secondary image server not specified cannot download file XXX When a request involving the primary server fails the secondary server is tried This error occurs when there is no address or domain name specified for the secondary image
283. he path to indicate sub directories Let s consider the following example e The directory that contains the configuration file is called Config_File e This directory is under C Root Download Table 71 Path Configurations Example TFTP HTTP Root Path Corresponding Path Name c root download Config_File c root download Config_File c root download Config_File The following are some tips to help your download process If available use the Browse button or equivalent of the TFTP HTTP server to select the directory eliminating typographical errors Use the T character when defining the path to indicate sub directories For instance root download e Ifyou are using the TFTP protocol to download the software note that some TFTP servers on Windows do not recognize the T character and produce an error In this case use the Y character Mediatrix 2102 109 Chapter 9 Configuration File Download Configuration File Download Server Use basic directory names without spaces or special characters such as etc which may cause problems CUL and paste the path and or name of the directory that contains the extracted files into the image path of the Mediatrix 2102 you may have to convert Y into to eliminate typographical errors Note that you can define the C Root Download part as you want The file names may also differ from the example shown above Set
284. he same for all the participants of the conference If this is not the case then part of the conversation may be lost resulting in a choppy voice For better results Mediatrix recommends to set the packetization period of all participants of a 3 way conference to 30 milliseconds See Packetization Time on page 148 for more information on how to set the packetization period of the Mediatrix 2102 Mediatrix 2102 215 Chapter 20 Subscriber Services Conference Call Enabling the Conference Call Feature You must enable this service before your users can use it K To enable the conference call service 1 In the subscriberServicesMIB locate the subscriberServices fEnablingTable group 2 Set the subscriberServicesConferenceEnable variable to enable Because this variable is located in a table you can enable disable the service on a per line basis You can find the current status of the service in the subscriberServicesConferenceStatus read only variable under the subscriberServices fStatus Table Managing a Conference Call If you are on the telephone with one person and want to conference with a third one you can do so In the following examples let s assume that K A is the conference initiator gt B is the person called on the first line gt C is the person called on the second line K To initiate a three way conference A and B already connected 1 A performs a Flas
285. he time of day at 14h00 and the update period at every 2 days e If the automatic download is enabled before 14h00 the first download will take place the same day at 14h00 then the second download two days later at the same hour and so on If the automatic download is enabled after 14h00 the first download will take place the day after at 14h00 then the second download two days later at the same hour and so on Available values are 1 and from 0 to 23 Setting the variable to 1 means that the time of the day at which the Mediatrix 2102 first initiates a software download is randomly selected 9 Set the imageAutoUpdateEnable variable to enable If one of the telephones faxes is off hook the Mediatrix 2102 will perform the download five minutes after both ports are detected on hook Spanning Tree Protocol STP Many network switches use the Spanning Tree Protocol STP to manage Ethernet ports activity When a software download occurs the Computer and Network connectors of the Mediatrix 2102 may switch off This shutdown may trigger these network switches to shutdown the matching Ethernet port for at least one minute This shutdown on the switch side can prevent software download To prevent this the Mediatrix 2102 supports the STP However this management has a potential time cost It may appear from time to time that software downloads take more time This is normal The following is an example where the STP management impacts
286. he two units If Unit A finds one it uses this common clear channel codec and the fax should be transmitted properly If there are no common clear channel codecs between the units the fax transmission fails SOLUTION To avoid fax transmission problems configure both units with the same T 38 and clear channel settings and the fax should be sent properly Mediatrix 2102 247 Chapter 28 Troubleshooting Fax Issues DESCRIPTION The T 38 fax transmission fails Be POSSIBLE CAUSE The Mediatrix 2102 opens the T 38 channel only after receiving the 200 OK Tested Fax Models message from the peer This means that the Mediatrix 2102 cannot receive T 38 packets before receiving the 200 OK Based on RFC 3264 the T 38 channel should be opened as soon as the unit sends the INVITE message Information from RFC 3264 An Offer Answer Model with Session Description Protocol SDP section 5 1 Once the offerer has sent the offer it must be prepared to receive media for any recvonly streams described by that offer It must be prepared to send and receive media for any sendrecv streams in the offer and send media for any sendonly streams in the offer of course it cannot actually send until the peer provides an answer with the needed address and port information In the case of RTP even though it may receive media before the answer arrives it cannot send RTCP receiver reports until the answer arrives SOLUTION
287. hite with green stripe White with orange stripe 2 Transmit Green with white stripe or solid green Orange with white stripe or solid orange 3 Receive White with orange stripe White with green stripe 4 N A Blue with white stripe or solid blue Blue with white stripe or solid blue 5 N A White with blue stripe White with blue stripe 6 Receive Orange with white stripe or solid orange Green with white stripe or solid green 7 N A White with brown stripe or solid brown White with brown stripe or solid brown 8 N A Brown with white stripe or solid brown Brown with white stripe or solid brown The RJ 45 cable uses two pairs of wires one pair for transmission and the second pair for reception It is wired so that pins 1 amp 2 are on one twisted pair and pins 3 amp 6 are on a second pair according to common wiring standards which meet the EIA TIA T568A and T568B requirements Mediatrix 2102 267 Appendix C Cabling Considerations Crossover Cable Figure 42 Straight Through Connectivity Pint ii Pini Pin 2 lt _ gt Pin2 Pin3 lt q __ gt Pin3 Pin pG lt gt Pin6 Pin Name And Function The following is the meaning of each pin in a RJ 45 cable Table 153 Pin Name and Function Pin Name Function 1 Transmit Data Plus The positive signal for the TD differential pair This signal contains the serial output data stream transmitted onto the network 2 T
288. hnical support are encouraged to contact their vendor directly xxvi Mediatrix 2102 CHAPTER 1 Installation This chapter describes the installation and the initial provisioning of the Mediatrix 2102 Requirements The Mediatrix 2102 requires the following items to work properly Table 3 Mediatrix 2102 Required Items Item Description Access Concentrator Supplies PPP settings for the PPPoE connection type DHCP Server optional Supplies all network parameters to the Mediatrix 2102 such as the IP address and subnet mask lt is used for automatic configuration This applies to the DHCP connection type usually with a cable modem installation DNS Server optional Translates domain names into 1P addresses SIP Server Manages the active calls of the Mediatrix 2102 Management Server Module or software used to remotely manage and configure the Mediatrix 2102 optional Such software could be the Mediatrix Unit Manager Network See Unit Manager Network Element Management System on page xxv for more details TFTP Server or HTTP Necessary for software updates Server Syslog Daemon Receives all status messages coming from the Mediatrix 2102 optional Safety Recommendations To ensure general safety follow these guidelines K Do nat open or disassemble the Mediatrix 2102 K Do not get the Mediatrix 2102 wet or pour liquids into it K Do nat perform any action that cr
289. hooting bypass feature does not activate 244 call 3 way conference lost conversation 247 cannot establish to endpoint 247 cannot make 246 cannot make or receive 246 cannot disable adaptative jitter buffer 245 cannot register to IGMP services 244 configuration configuration source does not work 250 DHCP unreachable 244 fax poor line condition during transmission 247 specific issues 249 T 38 transmission fails 248 tested fax models 248 unable to send in clear channel 247 unable to send in T 38 247 LEDs all off 243 long delay when starting unit 243 PC has limited web access in time 244 SNMP cannot set a variable 253 254 network manager cannot access unit 253 no response when trying to access unit 253 SNMPv3 variables contents 254 traps not received by network manager 253 when viewing table unit does not respond 254 324 Mediatrix 2102 Reference Manual SIP Version troubleshooting continued SNMP wrong value error message 253 software download cannot communicate with image server 251 downgrade fails 251 long time to perform 252 path not recognized 252 transfer problems 251 unable to reach unit after changing Ethernet speed 244 WINS server not forwarded to the PC 245 U UDP port range 99 source port behaviour 172 transport type 171 unit restarting 31 Unit Manager Network product as management server 1 57 59 225 defined xxv using 45 51 125 unlocking lines 139 using this manual xxii UTP see cabling
290. hose behalf services are provided or processing takes place Figure 18 SNMPv3 Services Transmission from manager to agent may be authenticated to guarantee identity of sender and timeliness of message A LES Manager SNMPv3 messages may be encrypted to ensure privacy Agent may enforce access control policy to restrict each principal to certain actions on certain portions of its data Manager SNMP Behaviour When using SNMP the following rules apply K Mediatrix recommends to copy the SNMPv3 user attributes only twice K The administrator may edit the SNMPv3 user attributes e Authentication algorithm none MD5 or SHA e Authentication password e Encryption algorithm NULL or DES e Encryption password All SNMPv3 passwords encryption and authentication must be at least 8 characters long You should use the Unit Manager Network product to perform SNMPv3 setup Whatever the MIB browser you use the unit follows the SNMPv3 standard RFCs SNMP can be used in a non secure or secure management mode Warning The SNMPv3 method for changing the password or encryption key contains a flaw which may result in setting the incorrect password This problem can happen if you use an incorrect oldpassword when changing your password Always exercise great caution when changing your password or encryption key Note that you can u
291. hroughput on the WAN interface The unit must be in router mode to properly use the bandwidth control See Router Mode on page 88 for more details H zi Note If TAS is not enabled the Mediatrix 2102 will still prioritize voice over the signalling and SNMP HTTP information on a low bandwidth connection If you set the variable to disable the bandwidth from the PC or IP equipment to the WAN is not limited Enabling TAS Enabling TAS is essential to use a broadband connection By enabling TAS you also implicitely enable the Mediatrix 2102 in router mode See Router Mode on page 88 for more details K To configure TAS 1 In the pRoutingMIB set the duration in seconds of the lease offered by the DHCP server in the ipRoutingDhcpServerLeaseTime variable in the pRoutingDhcp group The TAS service of the Mediatrix 2102 contains a DHCP server Enabling TAS also enables this DHCP server which allocates IP addresses to the PC or IP equipment located on the LAN Hz Note The DHCP server embedded in the Mediatrix 2102 allocates only one address To connect more PCs to the Mediatrix 2102 use a router The pRoutingDhcpServerLeaseTime variable is the lease time given to the PC connected to the Mediatrix 2102 e If the lease time is short the PC will react faster to address changes but it will have to renew its lease often Ifthe lease time is long the PC will react more slowly to address changes 2 Enable TAS b
292. iatrix 1204 gateway then reaches the corresponding SCN phone A SCN user can also contact the Mediatrix 1204 gateway which in turn contacts the Mediatrix 2102 then reaches the corresponding phone fax SCN 4 telephone lines connected to the SCN SCN Telephone II T p Mediatrix 2102 Mediatrix 1204 Gateway Calls Without a SIP Server You can dial another unit gateway or access device without the help of a SIP Server by entering its IP address IP phone Soft Phone N p p T Mediatrix 2102 Mediatrix 2102 Note This type of dialing is only possible when the Mediatrix 2102 is configured to allow it See IP Address Call Service on page 218 for more details Mediatrix 2102 199 Chapter 19 Telephony Features Making Calls Making Calls Users with telephones or faxes connected to a Mediatrix 2102 dial as if they were on a standard telephony system Complete Dialing Sequence There are three ways to indicate the dialed number sequence is complete and the Mediatrix 2102 can dial the number K The administrator has set up the dialing process so that you must end the telephone number with a particular character to indicate it is complete e g a ff The administrator has set up the dialing process with a timer This timer checks the dialing process and when no further digits have been dialed for the time set by the administrator it assumes the n
293. iatrix 2102 makes its DHCP request that will be released immediately Mediatrix 2102 63 Chapter 4 IP Address and Network Configuration Vendor and Site Specific DHCP Options Network Configuration Table 46 lists some of the network options to configure in the DHCP server Table 46 Network Configuration Information Description Option Data Format Example Subnet Specifies subnet configuration 001 XXX XXX XXX XXX 255 255 255 0 Mask Routers List of routers on your network 003 Array of IP Addresses 192 168 10 1 192 168 10 2 DNS List of DNS servers on your network 006 Array of IP Addresses 192 168 10 11 Servers 192 168 10 12 Vendor and Site Specific DHCP Options H Note This section applies only H you are using the DHCP connection type This section briefly describes vendor and site specific DHCP options Most of the MIB variables described in Services on page 53 require that you define their IP address and if required port number When defining these variables you can do so in two ways via vendor specific options or site specific options The default value is to use the vendor specific codes In this case the xxSiteSpecificCode MIB variables are set to 0 If you want to use site specific codes instead change the value of the xxSiteSpecificCode MIB variables from the default value 0 to the value you select in the DHCP server See Settings Example on page 67 fo
294. iatrix 2102 to automatically update its configuration To download a configuration file you may need to setup the following applications on your computer gt TFTP server with proper root path gt SNTP server properly configured gt HTTP server with proper root path K Configuration source K Configuration file name and location Configuring the TFTP Server If you are to perform a configuration file download by using the TFTP protocol you must install a TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol server running on the PC designated as the TFTP server host It is assumed that you know how to set the TFTP root path If not refer to your TFTP Servers documentation Configuring the SNTP Server If you are to use the automatic configuration file update feature see Automatic Configuration Update on page 115 for more details you need to have a time server SNTP that is accessible and properly configured It is assumed that you know how to configure your SNTP server If not refer to your SNTP server s documentation You can also refer to Chapter 17 SNTP Settings on page 183 for more details on how to configure the Mediatrix 2102 for a SNTP server Configuring the HTTP Server If you are to perform a configuration file download by using the HTTP protocol you must install a HTTP server running on the PC designated as the server host It is assumed that you know how to set the root path If not refer to your HTTP server s documentation
295. ibed in RFC 3261 section 17 2 3 Transaction Matching Procedure You can configure the use of the Via branch behaviour for incoming CANCEL requests You can specify whether the SIP stack s transaction matching procedure ignores the branch parameter of the Via header field in CANCEL requests with no To tag K To configure the use of the Via branch behaviour for CANCEL requests 1 In the sipinteropMIB set the sipInteroplgnoreViaBranchldInCancelEnable variable with the proper behaviour Table 117 Via Branch Behaviour Method Description disable The transaction matching procedure behaves according to section 17 2 3 of RFC 3261 This is the default value enable The branch parameter is not used as a transaction matching criterion for CANCEL requests with no To tag Mediatrix 2102 179 Chapter 15 SIP Protocol Features Ringing Response Code Ringing Response Code You can configure the response code sent back when the line starts ringing gt To configure the response code sent back 1 In the sip nteropMIB set the sipinteropRingingResponseCode variable with the proper code to send back Table 118 Ringing Response Code Method Description send180Ringing The Mediatrix 2102 sends out a 180 Ringing response without a body In this case the ringback the caller hears is generated by his own unit upon receiving the message This is the default value send183WithSdp Th
296. ice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution e Neither the name of the NAI Labs nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Cambridge Broadband Ltd copyright notice BSD Portions of this code are copyright c 2001 Cambridge Broadband Ltd All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met e Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the foll
297. icient enterprise wide network Switched Circuit Network SCN A communication network such as the public switched telephone network PSTN in which any user may be connected to any other user through the use of message circuit or packet switching and control devices Server A computer or device on a network that works in conjunction with a client to perform some operation Session Description Protocol SDP Describes multimedia sessions for the purpose of session announcement session invitation and other forms of multimedia session initiation SDP communicates the existence of a session and conveys sufficient information to enable participation in the session SDP is described in RFC 2327 Session Initiation Protocol SIP A protocol for transporting call setup routing authentication and other feature messages to endpoints within the IP domain whether those messages originate from outside the IP cloud over SCN resources or within the cloud Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP A standard of network management that uses a common software agent to manage local and wide area network equipment from different vendors part of the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP suite and defined in RFC 1157 Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP SNTP which is an adaptation of the Network Time Protocol NTP is widely used to synchronize computer clocks in the global Internet It provides comprehensive mechanism
298. ies equipment operations or procedures that could affect the proper functioning of your equipment If they do you will be notified in advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted telephone service If you experience trouble with this telephone equipment please contact Mediatrix Telecom Inc for information on how to obtain service or repairs The telephone company may ask that you disconnect this equipment from the network until the problem has been corrected or until you are sure that the equipment is not malfunctioning This equipment may not be used on coin service provided by the telephone company Connection to party lines is subject to state tariffs INSTALLATION This device is equipped with an USOC RJ 11C connector Industry Canada The Industry Canada Label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document s The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service
299. ies to a TFTP server It may be different for other servers If you are using an HTTP server you must change the port value to 80 Mediatrix 2102 127 Chapter 10 Software Download Download Procedure Download Procedure The following describes how to download a software version into the Mediatrix 2102 V Note Configuration settings are not lost when upgrading the software to a newer version However configuration settings may be lost if you upload an older firmware to the device See Software Downgrade on page 137 for more details You have the choice to perform the software download by using the TFTP protocol or the HTTP protocol You can also configure the Mediatrix 2102 to automatically update its software version a In the Unit Manager Network Administration Manual refer to chapter Administration Parameters section ad ba Software and Emergency Download Note You can only perform a software download from the WAN interface of the Mediatrix 2102 Software downloads from the LAN side are not supported Extracting the Zip File The zip file contains the software information required for the download Extract the contents of the zip file on the PC designated as the software file server Be sure to use the defined folder name This creates a directory that contains the files required for the Mediatrix 2102 to properly update its software The directory name must be the same as the name defined in the image
300. ime The configuration file is mostly used for the initial provisioning sequence see Initial Provisioning Sequence on page 13 for more details For more information on how to use a configuration file for updating the Mediatrix 2102 see Chapter 9 Configuration File Download on page 107 Management Information Base MIB Sending information via SNMP means that individual variables can be changed without sending the whole MIB You could use a dual system where a configuration file is sent for initial configuration and a MIB browser SNMP browser is used to implement minor changes 48 Mediatrix 2102 Sending Configuration Data to the Mediatrix 2102 Reference Manual SIP Version The Mediatrix 2102 has several configurable MIBs All variables in these MIBs have been configured by default upon start up However if you need to modify some of these variables use a MIB browser Mediatrix 2102 49 Chapter 3 MIB Structure and SNMP Sending Configuration Data to the Mediatrix 2102 50 Mediatrix 2102 CHAPTER 4 IP Address and Network Configuration The Mediatrix 2102 must be provisioned with various IP addresses and network parameters to be fully functional This occurs each time the Mediatrix 2102 is started or when an IP address value is changed in the MIB The Mediatrix 2102 can use static network parameters as well as parameters provided by a DHCP server an access concentrator or even a DNS This chap
301. ine Attenuation Input 0 dBr FXS Line Attenuation Output 9 dBr Mediatrix 2102 277 Appendix D Country Specific Parameters Denmark Denmark The following parameters apply if you have selected Denmark as location Table 162 Denmark Parameters Parameter Value On Off Sequence s Elect Levels Dial Tone 425 Hz CONTINUOUS 15 dBm Busy Tone 425 Hz 0 5 0 5 10 dBm Ringback Tone 425 Hz 1 0 4 0 15 dBm Special Information Tone 950 Hz 0 33 15 dBm 1400 Hz 0 33 1800 Hz 0 33 1 0 Stutter Dial Tone 425 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 CONTINUOUS 15 dBm Confirmation Tone 425 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 End 15 dBm Receiver Off Hook ROH Tone 1400 Hz 0 1 0 1 19 dBm 2450 He baka 2600 Hz RE Sa Message Waiting Indicator Tone 425 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 10 CONTINUOUS 15 dBm Network Congestion Tone 425 Hz 0 2 0 2 10 dBm Ring AC 45 VRMS 25 Hz 1 0 4 0 DC 15 Vdc Input Impedance 300 Q 1000 Q 220 nF Default Caller ID TDK_DTMF FXS Line Attenuation Input 0 dBr FXS Line Attenuation Output 6 dBr 278 Mediatrix 2102 France Reference Manual SIP Version France The following parameters apply if you have selected France as location Table 163 France Parameters Parameter Value On Off Sequence s Elect Levels Dial Tone 440 Hz CONTINUOUS 16 9 dBm Busy Tone 440 Hz 0 5 0 5 19 9 dBm
302. ing messages and recognizes incoming messages Jitter A distortion caused by the variation of a signal from its references which can cause data transmission errors particularly at high speeds Mediatrix 2102 301 Appendix E Glossary Layer 2 Layer 2 Layer 2 refers to the Data Link Layer of the commonly referenced multilayered communication model Open Systems Interconnection OSI The Data Link Layer is concerned with moving data across the physical links in the network The Data Link Layer contains two sublayers that are described in the IEEE 802 LAN standards gt Media Access Control MAC gt Logical Link Control LLC Layer 3 Layer 3 refers to the Network layer of the commonly referenced multilayered communication model Open Systems Interconnection OSI The Network Layer is concerned with knowing the address of the neighbouring nodes in the network selecting routes and quality of service and recognizing and forwarding to the transport layer incoming messages for local host domains Light Emitting Diode LED A semiconductor diode that emits light when a current is passed through it Local Area Network LAN Data only communications network confined to a limited geographic area with moderate to high data rates See also WAN Management Information Base MIB Specifications containing definitions of management information so that networked systems can be remotely monitored configured and controlled Manag
303. int instead of an INVITE The sent NOTIFY is compliant with lt draft mahy sip message waiting 02 txt gt 224 Mediatrix 2102 CHAPTER 23 Management Server Configuration The Management Server is a generic name for a module or software that is used to remotely set up Mediatrix 2102 units For instance the Management Server could be the Mediatrix s Unit Manager Network product See Unit Manager Network Element Management System on page xxv for more details E In the Unit Manager Network Administration Manual refer to chapter Administration Parameters section Unit Manager Server Using the Management Server You have the choice of setting up Mediatrix 2102 units directly with a SNMP browser or with the Management Server If you want to use the Management Server to setup the units you shall tell these units how to reach the Management Server K To use the Management Server 1 In the msMIB locate the msEnable variable This variable enables the Management Server to remotely manage the Mediatrix 2102 2 Set the msEnable variable to enable 3 Set the Trap retransmission period msTrapRetransmissionPeriod variable to the desired value The available values range from 10 ms to 604 800 000 ms 1 week The default value is 60 000 ms 4 Set the Trap retransmission retry count msTrapRetransmissionRetryCount variable to the desired value When the retry count is elapsed the Mediatrix 2102 stops the provisioning
304. ion Defining a Custom Time Zone STD DST OFFSET Standards Supported When starting the Mediatrix 2102 queries a NTP or SNTP server to receive time information It receives the information in Greenwich Mean Time GMT format also known as Universal Time Coordinated UTC so it needs to convert this GMT time into the proper time zone To do this the Mediatrix 2102 offers time zone configuration with daylight saving settings To define a custom time zone 1 In the sntpMIB enter a valid POSIX Portable Operating System Interface string in the sntp TimeZoneString variable as defined in the lt bootp dhcp option 88 txt gt Internet draft The format of the string is validated upon entry Invalid entries are refused The default value is EST5DST4 M4 1 0 02 00 00 M10 5 0 02 00 00 A POSIX string is a set of standard operating system interfaces based on the UNIX operating system The format of the IEEE 1003 1 POSIX string is defined in the lt bootp dhcp option 88 txt gt Internet draft as STDOFFSET DST OFFSET START TIME END TIME Refer to the following sub sections for explanations on each part of the string Three or more characters for the standard STD or alternative daylight saving time DST time zone Only STD is mandatory If DST is not supplied the daylight saving time does not apply Lower and upper case letters are allowed All characters are allowed except digits leading colon comma
305. ion specified in variable ProxyPort sipHomeDomainProxyDhcpSiteSpecificCode bytes 4 5 If not specified 0 use option 43 sub option 204 bytes 4 5 If bytes 4 5 are not present use the default static value sipOutboundProxy 0 0 0 0 Use option specified in variable Host sipOutboundProxyDhcpSiteSpecificCode bytes 0 3 If not specified 0 use option 43 sub option 205 bytes 0 3 sipOutboundProxy 0 Use option specified in variable Port sipOutboundProxyDhcpSiteSpecificCode bytes 4 5 If not specified 0 use option 43 sub option 205 bytes 4 5 If bytes 4 5 are not present use the default static value Mediatrix 2102 61 Chapter 4 IP Address and Network Configuration Services Table 44 SIP Servers Source Continued Variable Default Static Value DHCP Source sipRegistrarHost 192 168 0 10 Use option specified in variable sipRegistrarDhcpSiteSpecificCode bytes 0 3 If not specified 0 use option 43 sub option 203 bytes 0 3 sipRegistrarPort 0 Use option specified in variable sipRegistrarDhcpSiteSpecificCode bytes 4 5 If not specified 0 use option 43 sub option 203 bytes 4 5 If bytes 4 5 are not present use the default static value SNTP The pAddressConfigSntp group provides the configuration necessary for contacting a NTP SNTP server If you are using a NTP or SNTP server see Chapter 17 SNTP Settings on page 183 for more d
306. ionTimer04 The Mediatrix 2102 uses the session timer extension as described in the now expired draft ietf sip session timer 04 txt This draft was obsoleted lts use is deprecated and use this setting for backward compatibility issues only sessionTimer08 The Mediatrix 2102 uses the session timer extension as described in the more recent draft ietf sip session timer 08 txt This draft version contains several enhancements over the previous ones including the use of the Min SE header Use this setting if you do not need to interoperate with session timer v4 enabled parties K To set the version of session timers supported 1 In the sipinteropMIB set the sipinteropSessionTimersVersion variable with the proper version e sessionTimer04 e sessionTimer08 Background Information The following explains how the session timers are used SDP in Session Timer relNVITEs The relNVITE is sent with the last SDP that was negotiated Receiving a session timer relNVITE should not modify the connection characteristics Relation Between Minimum and Maximum Values A user agent that receives a Session Expires header whose value is smaller than the minimum it is willing to accept replies a 422 Timer too low to the INVITE and terminates the call The phone does nat ring It is up to the caller to decide what to do when it receives a 422 to its INVITE Mediatrix units will automatically retry the INVITE with a Session Expires value e
307. ious codecs the Mediatrix 2102 supports for transmitting audio signals Chapter 13 Fax Transmission on page 157 Describes how to perform fax transmissions in clear channel and T 38 with the Mediatrix 2102 Chapter 14 Bypass Configuration on page 161 Describes the Bypass feature that can be used in the event of a power failure or network failure Chapter 15 SIP Protocol Features on page 163 Describes the SIP specific feature to set up to properly use the SIP signalling programs and information defined in the Mediatrix SIP stack Chapter 16 STUN Configuration on page 181 Describes how to configure the STUN client of the Mediatrix 2102 Chapter 17 SNTP Settings on page 183 Describes how to configure the Mediatrix 2102 to enable the notion of time date month time into it Chapter 18 Digit Maps on page 187 Describes how to use a Digit Map to compare the number users dialed to a string of arguments Chapter 19 Telephony Features on page 197 Explains how to perform basic calls with the Mediatrix 2102 and set the telephony variables of the unit to define the way it handles calls Chapter 20 Subscriber Services on page 203 Describes how to set and use the subscriber services available on the user s telephone Chapter 21 Telephony Attributes on page 217 Describes the telephony attributes available on the Mediatrix 2
308. ise Structure of Management Information Spanning Tree Protocol Simple Traversal of User Datagram Protocol UDP through Network Address Transla tion NAT Transparent Address Sharing Terminal Balance Return Loss Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol Twisted Pair Ethernet User Datagram Protocol Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated Universal Time Coordinated Unshielded Twisted pair Voice Activity Detection Voice Band Data Volts Direct Current Virtual Local Area Network Voice over Internet Protocol Wide Area Network eXtensible Markup Language 308 Mediatrix 2102 APPENDIX List of MIB Parameters A analog Sena Et Ree E 83 151 analog ScntGwlntertont ualielay cnc 83 151 C CheckT cplpStackForSuccessfulBoot eee 23 configFileAutoUpdateOnRestartEnable ce csecesesessseseseseneeeesereeseescseaeseeeeeeeeeceeeeacacaeeseeeeeesesavasacaeeeeeeesetenacaeatates 115 configFileAutoU pdatePe nod WEE 116 configFileAutoUpdatePeriodicEnable we eceeecsseseseseseseseseeneeeeeeseeceeseseaeseeeeeeseeceseeaeaeaeeseeeseecessvasaeaeeeeeeetesenecaeaeates 117 configFileAutoUpdate Time ODay ccc cscseccsccsesseeesesausecuscsesssesenashunencestessesssnsnutendesnsesdusesasbanendesecesoesdseendanseteatanvesess 117 ConfigFileAuto Update Time BT 116 elle e elle le le Ee 21 ConfotietetchingotbcpG tte peche ode 60 108 configFileFetchingFile le EE 109 configFileFetchingFileNaMe sese eee eee 110 configFileFet
309. it This gives time to the software to update configuration data in flash memory Mediatrix 2102 45 Chapter 3 MIB Structure and SNMP Tables Tables There are two types of tables used in the MIB structure They contain gt Generic variables that apply to each line of a unit This avoids to repeat each set of variables for each line it has gt The administrative commands and status related to a managed object Generic Variables All tables used to set variables for one or more lines such as the voicelfTable are based on the ifTable or interface table The ifTable lists the interfaces of a unit In other words it basically defines the lines that are used by the unit It contains an iflndex which defines the interfaces It may also contain interfaces such as gt the LoopBack o and Ethernet eth0 interfaces gt the actual voice interfaces lines of the unit Table 26 gives an example of the ifTable Table 26 ifTable Example iflndex Type Description 1 LoopBack lo 2 Ethernet 0 ethO 3 Voice FXS 0 4 Voice FXS 1 5 Voice FXS 2 26 Voice FXS 24 Figure 19 shows a table built in the Unit Manager Network from the voiceifTable parameters Figure 19 voicelftable Example naticGET ei By E di X Settarget units 2 voicelfAdaptativeJitterBu voicelfTargetJitterBufferL voicelfMaxJitterBufferLen voi 30 125 conservative
310. ix 2102 Connect the other end to the cable or DSL modem See 10 100 BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 Cable on page 8 for more details on this cable d Connect a 10 100 BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 cable into the Computer connector of the Mediatrix 2102 Connect the other end to the network card of your computer See 10 100 BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 Cable on page 8 for more details on this cable Mediatrix 2102 9 Chapter 1 Installation Hardware Connection Connect a SCN line into the Bypass connector of the Mediatrix 2102 optional Use a standard telecommunication cord with a minimum of 26 AWG wire size Power on the cable or DSL modem Depending on your modem you may have to wait a few minutes before it properly establishes the Internet connection Refer to your modem s documentation for more details Once the modem is ready connect the power cord to the Mediatrix 2102 and then connect the other end to an electrical outlet Warning The electrical outlet must be installed near the Mediatrix 2102 so that it is easily accessible This turns the Mediatrix 2102 on You should not unplug it when not in use e lF the Power LED is steady on proceed with the next step e Ifthe Power LED is blinking wait until the n Use LED blinks before proceeding with the next step This may take up to three minutes before the Mediatrix 2102 is ready Most DSL users will need to enable PPPoE after they have installed the Mediatrix 2102 The Re
311. k Configuration on page 51 for more details To use DHCP assigned information 1 In the ipAddressConfig folder locate the sntpSelectConfig Source variable under the ipAddressConfigSntp group This variable defines whether the Mediatrix 2102 must ask for its SNTP server settings through a DHCP server or not Set the sntpSelectConfigSource variable to dhcp You can query the SNTP server s IP address and port number assigned by the DHCP server in the sntpHost and sntpPort read only variables under the pAddressStatusSntp group Set the DHCP Vendor Specific code of the SNTP feature in your DHCP server See SNTP on page 62 for more details Static Configuration Use the static configuration if you are not using a DHCP server or if you want to bypass it gt To use static information 1 In the ipAddressConfig folder locate the sntpSelectConfig Source variable under the ipAddressConfigSntp group This variable defines whether the Mediatrix 2102 must ask for its SNTP server settings through a DHCP server or not Set the sntpSelectConfigSource variable to static Set the following variables Table 120 SNTP Static Address Variable Description sntpStaticHost Static SNTP server IP address or domain name Default Value 192 168 0 10 sntpStaticPort Static SNTP server IP port number Default Value 123 184 Mediatrix 2102 Defining a Custom Time Zone Reference Manual SIP Vers
312. l SIP Version Proxy Server The proxy server is an intermediary program that acts as both a server and a client for the purpose of making requests on behalf of other clients A proxy server primarily plays the role of routing which means its job is to ensure that a request is passed on to another entity that can further process the request Proxies are also useful for enforcing policy and for firewall traversal A proxy interprets and if necessary rewrites parts of a request message before forwarding it a In the Unit Manager Network Administration Manual refer to chapter Signalling Protocols Parameters section ad ba SIP Configuration Window Configuration Source The Mediatrix 2102 must know the IP address and port number of the proxy server You can assign these information to the Mediatrix 2102 through a DHCP server or manually enter them yourself with the static variables Note When defining whether the Mediatrix 2102 must get its SIP server configuration through a DHCP LF server or not this is set for all the SIP servers You cannot define a different configuration for each type of server DHCP Configuration Using the DHCP configuration assumes that you have properly set your DHCP server with the relevant information See Chapter 4 IP Address and Network Configuration on page 51 for more details K Touse DHCP assigned information 1 In the pAddressContfig folder locate the sipServerSelectConfigSource
313. l forward is established 7 Hang up your telephone The calls are checked against the digit maps set up by the system administrator K To cancel the call forward 1 Take the receiver off hook 2 Wait for the dial tone 3 Dial the sequence the system administrator has implemented to deactivate the call forward on busy service This sequence could be something like 73 4 Wait for the transfer tone three beeps followed by the dial tone The call forward is cancelled 5 Hang up your telephone 208 Mediatrix 2102 Call Forward Reference Manual SIP Version On No Answer You can forward the incoming calls of your users to a pre determined target if they do not answer their telephone before a specific amount of time The user does not have any feedback that a call was forwarded Setting up Call Forward On No Answer You must configure and enable this service before your users can use it K To set the Call Forward On No Answer feature 1 2 In the subscriberServicesMIB locate the subscriberServices fCallForwardActivationTable group Set the status of the service in the subscriberServicesCallForwardOnNoAnswerActivation variable to inactive or active To let the user activate or deactivate this service with his or her handset proceed to steps 3 and 4 In that case the variable is automatically updated to reflect the activation status Define the digits that users must dial to start the service in the sub
314. l restart e ForceLock restarts immediately This is called an abrupt restart Unlock the command is discarded 3 Set the groupReset variable to SoftReset The Mediatrix 2102 restarts Restart Behaviour This feature affects the behaviour of the Mediatrix 2102 when it restarts You can instruct the Mediatrix 2102 to check its TCP IP stack before declaring the restart successful This could be useful when the unit is subjected to a broadcast storm such as a TCP IP flood while it is restarting In this case and when the TCP IP stack check is enabled the unit enters into the rescue mode and cannot be contacted through SNMP You thus need to restart the Mediatrix 2102 manually However when the TCP IP stack check is disabled a broadcast storm during a restart will cause the unit to continuously restart until the storm subsides K To define the restart behaviour 1 In the bootBehaviorMIB enable the checkTcplpStackForSuccessfulBoot variable When the variable is enabled the TCP IP stack must initialize properly to consider the restart a success In a flood scenario the unit may end up in the rescue mode When the feature is disabled even if the TCP IP stack fails to initialize during a TCP IP flood the restart is considered successful and the unit does not enter into the rescue mode Mediatrix 2102 23 Chapter 1 Installation Verifying the Installation Verifying the Installation There are two ways to verify that
315. ld be to configure the IP routing information of the Mediatrix 2102 as described in Chapter 8 Transparent Address Sharing on page 87 14 Mediatrix 2102 LED Indicators Reference Manual SIP Version Special Vocal Features When entering special characters on your telephone pad the Mediatrix 2102 talks back to you with relevant information K To access special vocal features 1 Take one of the telephones connected to the Mediatrix 2102 2 Dial one of the digits sequence on the keypad Table 8 Special Vocal Features Digits to Dial Information Vocally Sent by the Mediatrix 2102 40 Current IP address of the Mediatrix 2102 static or DHCP Note If you are using the Mediatrix 2102 in TAS mode the LAN IP address is returned 1 MAC address of the Mediatrix 2102 KR Current WAN IP address of the Mediatrix 2102 LED Behaviour in Starting Mode When the Mediatrix 2102 starts and it is not configured to use a DHCP server it uses static IP addresses If the static information is not valid the Power and Ready LEDs blink at 1 Hz with 75 duty cycle This lets you know that you must perform a Factory reset or Recovery mode operation See Default Settings Switch on page 20 for more details LED Indicators A LED can be ON OFF BLINKING or controlled by hardware HW The blinking behaviour is described in terms of rate in Hertz Hz and duty cycle in percentage For instance a
316. le from host xxx was closed due to unsupported or malformed response from the host XXX Inthe HTTP response one of the following error occurred s The protocol version is not 1 0 or 1 1 e Some field or line is not properly formatted The trailing lt crlf gt is not present at the end of the header e Unsupported kind of response Warning HTTP image transfer of file from host xxx was refused because of a malformed or incompatible request XXX When receiving HTTP response 400 or 403 Warning HTTP image transfer of file from host xxx was refused because of a server error XXX When receiving HTTP response 500 or 501 Warning HTTP image transfer of file from host xxx was refused because service is unavailable XXX When receiving HTTP response 503 TFTP Specific M essages Warning Image transfer of file xxx from host xxx and port xxx was closed due to unexpected error Unexpected error either internal or on a TFTP or HTTP connection Warning Image transfer of file xxx from host xxx port xxx was closed after timeout When not receiving TFTP packets for 32 seconds or not receiving a HTTP packet for 15 seconds Warning File XXX Image transfer xxx not found on host When receiving TFTP error NOT FOUND or HTTP response 404 Warning Image transfer Access to file xxx on host xxx is unauthorized
317. lfGodecGT23MinP in 148 Kuele ue ee EE 147 V icelfC d cGT29MaxP TIME T 148 voiceliCodecG 7 29MIN A in coi te diia 148 ele e ELE 147 314 Mediatrix 2102 Reference Manual SIP Version voicelfCodecPcmaMaxPTime voicelfCodecPcmaMinPTime elle ele Deel EE voicelfCodecPcmuMaxPTime voicelfCodecPcmuMinPTime voicelfCodecPreferred voicelfDtmfPayloadType VOICEIIDimtTitanSpOrt EE voicelfG7 11ComfortNoiseGenerationEnable voicelfG711VoiceActivityDetectionEnable voicelfG729VoiceActivityDetectionEnable volceltMax Jtier utftert engt voicelfTargetJitterBufferLength voicelfUserlnputGainOffset voicelfUserOutputGainOffset Mediatrix 2102 315 Appendix G List of MIB Parameters 316 Mediatrix 2102 Numerics 10 BaseT 5 8 9 11 12 69 defined 299 see also cabling 100 BaseT 5 8 9 11 12 69 defined 299 see also cabling 802 1q in QoS 229 A access concentrator defined 299 requirement 1 acronyms 307 ADSI caller ID 84 defined 299 A Law 145 defined 299 analog gateway using for placing a call 199 analog modem feature 145 analog series products xxiv area code defined 299 audience intended xx authentication information 166 request protection 167 auto MDI MDIX 8 automatic call 217 configuration update 115 software update 134 B bandwidth management configuration via web interface 35 WAN upstream control 97 branch matching method in SIP 179 branch behaviour
318. listed in PPPoE Service on page 90 When establishing a PPP connection the Mediatrix 2102 goes through three distinct phases K Discovery phase gt Authentication phase gt Network layer protocol phase Discovery Phase The Mediatrix 2102 broadcasts the value of the pppoeServiceName MIB variable see Enabling the PPPoE Service on page 90 for more details The access concentrator with a matching service name answers the Mediatrix 2102 gt If no access concentrator answers this creates a PPPoE failure error The Mediatrix 2102 handles it as described in Table 66 on page 103 K If more than one access concentrators respond to the discovery the Mediatrix 2102 tries to establish the PPP connection with the first one that supports the requested service name Authentication Phase If the access concentrator requests authentication the Mediatrix 2102 sends the ID secret pair configured in the pppSecuritySecrets Table see Setting a User Name and Password on page 91 for details If the access concentrator rejects the authentication this creates an authentication failure error The Mediatrix 2102 handles it as described in Table 66 on page 103 Network Layer Protocol Phase The Mediatrix 2102 negotiates an IP address The requested IP address is the one from the last successful PPPoE connection If the Mediatrix 2102 never connected by using PPPoE or after a factory reset it does not request any specific I
319. ll the lines of the Mediatrix 2102 You cannot have a different sequence for each line Define the address to which forward incoming calls in the subscriberServicesCallForwardOnBusyForwardingAddress variable Accepted formats are s telephone numbers 5551111 SIP URLs such as scheme user host For instance sip user foo com This string is used literally so cosmetic symbols such as the dash in 555 xxxx should not be present Because this variable is located in a table you can have a different string for each line Enable the Call Forward On Busy by setting the subscriberServicesCallForwardOnBusyEnable variable to enable under the subscriberServicesIfEnabling Table group Because this variable is located in a table you can enable disable the service on a per line basis Mediatrix 2102 207 Chapter 20 Subscriber Services Call Forward Using Call Forward on Busy The following is the procedure to use this service on the user s telephone K To forward calls 1 Take the receiver off hook 2 Wait for the dial tone 3 Dial the sequence the system administrator has implemented to activate the call forward on busy service This sequence could be something like 72 4 Wait for the transfer tone three beeps followed by the dial tone 5 Dial the number to which you want to forward your calls Dial any access code if required 6 Wait for three beeps followed by a silent pause The cal
320. lliseconds ms a DTMF is played when dialing the destination phone number Set an inter digit dial delay in the analogScnGwinterDigitDial Delay variable This is the delay in milliseconds ms between two DTMFs when dialing the destination phone number This is useful when the Mediatrix 2102 receives DTMFs out of band faster than it can signal them Restart the Mediatrix 2102 so that the changes may take effect Mediatrix 2102 151 Chapter 12 Voice Transmissions Adaptative Jitter Buffer Adaptative Jitter Buffer The jitter buffer allows better protection against packet loss but increases the voice delay If the network to which the Mediatrix 2102 is connected suffers from a high level of congestion the jitter buffer protection level should be higher If the network to which the Mediatrix 2102 is connected suffers from a low level of congestion the jitter buffer protection level should be lower Note You cannot disable the adaptative jitter buffer on the Mediatrix 2102 However if you set the LF voicelfTargetJitterBufferLength and voicelfMaxJitterBufferLength variables to the same value you will have a non adaptative jitter buffer K To set Jitter Buffer variables 1 In the voicelfMIB locate the voicelfTable group 2 Define the jitter buffer length in the voicelfTargetJitterBufferLength variable The adaptive jitter buffer attempts to hold packets to the target holding time This is the minimum delay t
321. llserbrtortv 231 oOosVlanleeepO21oSubettutonlanlD cn cnronornrnrn conca 231 qosVlanleee8021gTaggingEnable o cocino ii dle 230 oOosVlanleeep21oVirtuall an 230 OS Voice fen 228 GosVoiceleee802 1qEnable sirenos naianei tana EENEG 106 229 qosVoiceleee8021qUserPriority sese eee eee 105 229 R iere eier 100 S sipDebugContextSnapshot Lime s is dada 246 Sipometomainbrosvvt hcnf ite peche ode 61 73 SIPHOmMeDOMAaINProxy HOSE di ii pb iia 61 73 SipHomeDomainProxy Poca a faa Altera aati cies 61 73 Sipormgtomainbirooeatertchloef aenwaavnvaras RR 74 SipometomainbrosvvGtatchort carne 74 80 SiplnteropAutihenticationOQOoOp eee eee eee 167 sipInteropBranchMatchingMethog sese 179 sipInteropDefaultRegistratioNEXpiration eee eee eee 177 SipinteropDtmf Transportt uration sesira eiiaa eai nennnainainnni aiena aeina Seniai eadeni aai anoe aa KERA aeaa aeeai E aSa 151 siplnteropDtmfTransportMethod sese 151 SiplnteroplgnoreViabranchldlnCancelEnable eee eee 179 sipInteropLocalRingOnProvisionalResponse sese eee eee eee 178 sipInteropLockDnsSrvRecordPerCallEnable see eee 81 SipInteropMaxForwardsValUue scccsssessecesescessetenssensecesessenseseseubussnecencesenecsenbicsnessceeenecuenbiceseanteeneneeseuaneseaneeasenses 174 sipInteropOnHoldSdpStreamDirectiON es eceeceeseeceseceseeeseeeseneeeeeeeeeeecseseaeeeeeeeeeeceesvaeaeaeeeeeeseeceseeaeaeaeeeeeeeseseeeeaeeeates 175 siplnteropReferredBy Tu DEE 174 siplnteropReplacesConfig ee eee eee
322. lts include the localHostSelectConfigSource variable set to dhcp When the Mediatrix 2102 has finished its provisioning sequence itis ready to be used with a DHCP provided IP address and MIB parameters H Note The Factory reset alters any persistent configuration data of the Mediatrix 2102 22 Mediatrix 2102 Software Restart Reference Manual SIP Version Disabling the Factory Reset The Mediatrix 2102 offers the possibility to disable its factory reset procedure even if users depress the Default Settings switch Disabling the factory reset means that users will not be able to revert the Mediatrix 2102 back to its factory settings if there are configuration problems gt To change the factory reset behaviour 1 In the sysAdminMIB set the sysAdminDefaultSettingsEnable variable to disable In this case users can only perform a Recovery Mode procedure See Default Settings Switch on page 20 for more details Software Restart You can initiate a software restart of the Mediatrix 2102 by using MIB parameters E In the Unit Manager Network Administration Manual refer to chapter Performing Actions on Mediatrix Units section Restarting a Unit K To perform a software restart 1 In the groupAdminMIB locate the groupAdminMIBObjects group 2 Set the groupSetAdmin variable to the appropriate type of restart e Locked waits for the state of all lines to be locked and then restarts This is called a gracefu
323. m Ring AC 45 VRMS 25 Hz 1 0 3 0 DC 15 Vde Input Impedance 600 Q Default Caller ID BELLCORE FXS Line Attenuation Input 0 dBr FXS Line Attenuation Output 9 dBr 284 Mediatrix 2102 Italy Reference Manual SIP Version Italy The following parameters apply if you have selected Italy as location Table 169 Italy Parameters Parameter Value On Off Sequence s Elect Levels Dial Tone 425 Hz 0 2 0 2 0 6 1 0 13 dBm Busy Tone 425 Hz 0 5 0 5 13 dBm Ringback Tone 425 Hz 1 0 4 0 13 dBm Special Information Tone 950 Hz 0 33 20 dBm 1400 Hz 0 33 1800 Hz 0 33 1 0 Stutter Dial Tone 425 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 0 2 0 2 0 6 1 0 13 dBm Confirmation Tone 425 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 End 13 dBm Receiver Off Hook ROH Tone 1400 Hz 0 1 0 1 19 dBm 2060 Hz 19 dBm 2450 Hz 19 dBm 2600 Hz 19 dBm Message Waiting Indicator Tone 425 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 10 0 2 0 2 0 6 1 0 13 dBm Network Congestion Tone 425 Hz 0 2 0 2 13 dBm Ring AC 45 VRMS 25 Hz 1 0 4 0 DC 15 Vdc Input Impedance 180 Q 630 Q 60 nF Default Caller ID BELLCORE FXS Line Attenuation Input 0 dBr FXS Line Attenuation Output 7 dBr Mediatrix 2102 285 Appendix D Country Specific Parameters Japan Japan The following parameters apply if you have selected Japan as location Table 170 Japan Parameters
324. me ele tele Eu EE leir s e Ee TEE IPROUtINGMACSPOOFACIESS sss sese Ke latine Eelere EE ipRoutingQosDiffServSubstitution ipRoutingQosDiffServSubstitutionENAb Ie 0 ee eee 94 ipRoutingWanUpstreaMBandwidth cececccececeseeeeneesereeeseeeseseeeeeeseeeececaeneeeeeeeeeeeevevacaeaeeeeeeseesevevaeeneeeeeeseneces 97 105 310 Mediatrix 2102 Reference Manual SIP Version L lanStaticA ddr Sui td lt tia 56 Tense ve eT a 0 innn a a iiis 56 95 IIneGrpCoOnTCallFEOnWardNoRessourceA ddress sss 143 lineGrpConfCallForwardNoRessourceEnable sese eee 143 IIneGrpConrLineselecnionAlaonhrm sese eee eee eee eee 143 lineSelectionDigitMap lineSelectionEnable localHostAddress localHostConfigSource localloOStDETauIROUTET coup ad A nad native Hind diene dd Ges 21 54 localHostDhcpServer localhostDnsOvermideEnable tc cence dae ad ii 55 local ge DEn UE ee e STTS 1 localhHostSecondaryDOS i coccion SEENEN Guan ENEE SEENEN EENS localHostSecondaryDnsa localHostSelectConfigSOurce ocoocociccccccconicnocccocncncncnnnn conan non 14 54 90 LOCalHOSISMIMPPOM co ocio a Dada localHostSnhmpPort localHostStaticDefaultRouter localHostStaticSnmpPort elei Ee Eine el eelere E EE LocalHostWanAddress localHostWanAddress localHostWanAddressSelectConfigSource IMSCONTIGS OUNCE iata 21 msDhepsite Speciic
325. me variable with a value greater than 30 seconds for instance 3600 seconds 1 hour See Enabling TAS on page 98 for more details However note that the downtime will be greater when the ISP gives another IP address Try several values and find out what is the smallest setting for your NAT firewall device DESCRIPTION The Bypass feature does not activate if the SIP proxy times out when a call is initiated Be POSSIBLE CAUSE In SIP there is no direct correlation between the user agent and the proxy The user agent may be able to complete outgoing calls without the help of the server and may also receive calls as well The problem is thus normal The SIP proxy going down is rather a network setup problem SOLUTION To avoid those types of failures the network should use redundant servers when possible DESCRIPTION The PC connected to the Computer connector of the Mediatrix 2102 cannot register to IGMP services Be POSSIBLE CAUSE The Mediatrix 2102 does not support the IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol protocol SOLUTION There are no solutions 244 Mediatrix 2102 General Operation Issues Reference Manual SIP Version DESCRIPTION When install a Mediatrix 2102 in an enterprise network and there is a PC connected to the Computer port the PC will not receive the WINS Server Be POSSIBLE CAUSE The embedded DHCP server of the Mediatrix 2102 does not support the WINS Server See DHCP Server
326. message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement e This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptographic related 4 If you include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tihOcryptsoft com Mediatrix Telecom Inc Reference Manual THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR A
327. must be set to 0 for the unit to perform DNS requests of type SRV as per RFC 3263 Otherwise the unit will not use DNS SRV requests but will rather use only requests of type A because it does not need to be specified which port to use See Chapter 5 SIP Servers on page 71 for more details K To enable DNS SRV 1 In the ipAddressConfig folder locate the sipServerSelectConfigSource variable under the ipAddressConfigSipServer group This variable defines whether the Mediatrix 2102 must get its proxy server configuration through a DHCP server or not 2 Set the sipServerSelectConfigSource variable to static 3 Set one or more of the following variables to 0 Table 60 Variables to Enable DNS SRV Server Variable to enable SIP Registrar server sipRegistrarStaticPort SIP Proxy server sipHomeDomainProxyStaticPort SIP Outbound Proxy server sipOutboundProxyStaticPort L Note Any SRV enabled service must have a host name recognized by the DNS SRV server _sip _udp or _sip _tcp depending on the transport type is automatically added to the host name 80 Mediatrix 2102 DNS SRV Record Lock Reference Manual SIP Version DNS SRV Record Lock You can configure the Mediatrix 2102 to always use the same DNS SRV record for a SIP call ID As a result a call or registration always uses the same destination until the destination is unreachable or the unit receives a different
328. n 1 In the gosVlanleee8021q group of the gosMIB locate the qosVlanleee8021qTaggingEnable variable 2 Set the value of this parameter to enable The VLAN configuration is enabled 3 Locate the following variables e qosVlanleee8021qVirtualLanID e qosVlanleee8021qDefaultUserPriority 4 Set the value of these variables 5 Restart the Mediatrix 2102 so that the changes may take effect For more information please refer to the MIB Reference manual VLANs VLANs are created with standard Layer 2 Ethernet A VLAN Identifier VID is associated with each VLAN VLANs offer the following benefits VLANs are supported over all IEEE 802 LAN MAC protocols and over shared media LANs as well as point to point LANs VLANs facilitate easy administration of logical groups of stations that can communicate as if they were on the same LAN They also facilitate easier administration of moves adds and changes in members of these groups s Traffic between VLANs is restricted Bridges forward unicast multicast and broadcast traffic only on LAN segments that serve the VLAN to which the traffic belongs The VLAN field in the Ethernet file is located after both destination and source addresses 0 il 012314506 789012345607 byte SE EE E E E E EE Dest Addr Src Addr VLAN Type Length The VLAN field is separated as follows OOTES iL 2 3 01 234567 O 234567 E OF 12 8 AS 6G
329. n E 16 LED Patterns ciouaus di aaa ade 16 NormalMode LED Pattern Description ii cs ccc de epecieskese rica tao teca ciedad datada dies ej detail daban 18 Recovery Mode LED Patterns cacon corintios rta ra eane Aa e aaea arapen aide in Aii 19 Default Settings Switch eee eee 20 AAU RUIN Hl EE 20 At Starta HT 20 RECOVERY le 21 Factory E EE 22 SoftWare ROS T EE 23 Restart BehaViQUr lt ci ia 23 Verifying the Installation cooioiiin tactil drid ilatina 24 Chapter 2 WED Ts e sosa A 25 INToOduUciON eiii ii 25 Using the Web Interface AA 25 Status of the Mediatrix 27107 27 Mens aT T 27 gt 28 Administration Page 29 Configuration File Upload Page sitios aia 32 HTTP Server Password Page cian tdi 33 Default User Name and Password 33 SYSTEM LOG Page iii ii iaa 34 Bandwidth Management Page icoiounia iaa ita lila iii dali 35 AR Cl EE 36 Web Interface ee RT le 37 Chapter 3 MIB TE TT 39 SNMP OVervieW cata O a a 39 RIT lt T 39 SNMP Tele 40 SNMPUBehaVIQUE EE 41 NAAA LE 42 MIB Shu Gture E 43 Textual en te 44 NTRA ES test tn tetett EES EEEEEEEESE EEES EESEEEE ESEE EEEE ESEE EEEn Ene nEn nennen 44 P elel 45 Persistence isona ernea ear oara iaee dida 45 Changing a Parameter Value ri o a ee ei cal olaa d e et de 45 A O 46 Generic EE e 46 Variables for Administrative Commandes sss sese ee eee e e e 47 SNMP Access Limitation sse eee eee 48 Current MIB Versi n ee ee A A a 48 Sending Configuration Data to the Mediatrix 21
330. n the ipAddressConfig folder locate the sipServerSelectConfigSource variable under the ipAddressConfigSipServer group This variable defines whether the Mediatrix 2102 must get its proxy server configuration through a DHCP server or not 2 Set the sipServerSelectConfigSource variable to static 3 Set the following variables Table 55 Proxy Server Static Information Variable Description sipHomeDomainProxyStatic Host Proxy server static IP address or domain name Default Value 192 168 0 10 sipHomeDomainProxyStatic Port Proxy server static IP port number Note If this variable corresponds to a domain name that is bound to a SRV record the port must be set to 0 for the unit to perform DNS requests of type SRV as per RFC 3263 Otherwise the unit will not use DNS SRV requests but will rather use only requests of type A because it does not need to be specified which port to use Default Value 0 74 Mediatrix 2102 Outbound Proxy Server Reference Manual SIP Version Outbound Proxy Server An outbound proxy is an intermediary entity that acts as both a server and a client for the purpose of making requests on behalf of other clients The outbound proxy receives all outbound traffic and forwards it Incoming traffic may or may not go through the outbound proxy The outbound proxy s address is never used in the SIP packets it is only used as a physical network destination for
331. n thus use characters in the range 0 9 A F All other characters are not supported Each character encodes 4 bits of the key For instance a 32 bit key requires 8 characters If you enter too many bits the key is truncated to the first 448 bits Ifyou do not enter enough bits the key is padded with zeros For instance a 32 bit key could look like the following A36CB299 This key must match the key used for the encryption of the relevant configuration file If the variable is empty the configuration file is not decrypted Set the configFilePrivacyEnable variable to enable The Mediatrix 2102 will be able to decrypt the next encrypted generic or specific configuration file If this variable is set to disable the configuration file is not decrypted by the unit and the configuration update fails 112 Mediatrix 2102 Configuration File Download Server Reference Manual SIP Version Configuration Download via TFTP The following steps explain how to download configuration files by using the TFTP protocol Note The configuration download via TFTP can only traverse NATs of types Full Cone or Restricted Cone If the NAT you are using is of type Port Restricted Cone or Symmetric the file transfer will not work To download configuration files via TFTP 1 Set the configuration file server host and port as defined in Configuration File Server Settings on page 108 2 Place the confi
332. nable this service before your users can use it K To enable the attended transfer service 1 In the subscriberServicesMIB locate the subscriberServices fEnablingTable group 2 Set the subscriberServicesAttendedTransferEnable variable to enable Because this variable is located in a table you can enable disable the service on a per line basis You can find the current status of the service in the subscriberServicesAttendedTransferStatus read only variable under the subscriberServicesifStatus Table Using Attended Call Transfer The following is the procedure to use this service on the user s telephone K To transfer a current call attended 1 Perform a Flash Hook by pressing the Flash button on your analog telephone This puts the call on hold 2 Wait for the transfer tone three beeps 3 Dial the number to which you want to transfer the call The third party answers 4 Hang up your telephone The call is transferred 5 If you want to get back to the first call the call on hold you must perform two Flash Hooks You are back with the first call and the third party is released Note If the number to which you want to transfer the call is busy or does not answer quickly perform a Flash Hook The busy tone or ring tone is cancelled and you are back with the first call 214 Mediatrix 2102 Conference Call Reference Manual SIP Version Conference Call The Conference Call service all
333. nce manual for more details Statistics Buffers Each statistics has three different buffers in which they are collected Table 139 Statistics Buffers Statistic Description Last connection These are the statistics of the last completed connection Current These are the statistics of the current connection If using the Cumulated buffer they are added to the cumulated statistics buffer and then reset Cumulated These are the cumulated statistics of all the connections Define a period of time and maximum number of periods you want to keep For instance you could define to keep the statistics for the last 24 periods of 1 hour How are Statistics Collected When collecting statistics you can do so in two ways gt Continuous collection of statistics In this case the cumulated statistics are not used disabled and the current statistics are constantly updated gt Collection of statistics for a defined period of time with a user defined accuracy For instance you could define to keep the statistics for the last 24 periods of 1 hour To set statistics collection 1 In the sysConfigMIB locate the sysConfigStats group 2 Set the period length you want to keep in the sysConfigStatsPeriodLength variable The length of a period may vary from 5 minutes to 24 hours by 5 minutes sections At expiration the current statistics are added to the cumulated statistics buffer and then reset Note that modifyi
334. nd succeeding digits if any designate the country Custom Local Area Signalling Services CLASS One of an identified group of network provided enhanced services ACLASS group for a given network usually includes several enhanced service offerings such as incoming call identification call trace call blocking automatic return of the most recent incoming call call redial and selective forwarding and programming to permit distinctive ringing for incoming calls Digital Signal Processor DSP Specialized computer chip designed to perform speedy and complex operations on digitized waveforms Useful in processing sound like voice phone calls and video Digital Subscriber Lines DSL A technology for bringing high bandwidth information to homes and small businesses over ordinary copper telephone lines xDSL refers to different variations of DSL such as ADSL HDSL and RADSL Domain Name Server DNS Internet service that translates domain names into IP addresses To use a domain name a DNS service must translate the name into the corresponding IP address For instance the domain name www example com might translate to 198 105 232 4 Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF In telephone systems multi frequency signalling in which a standard set combinations of two specific voice band frequencies one from a group of four low frequencies and the other from a group of four higher frequencies are used Although some military telephones have
335. nding on the country in which you are Definitions The following are some useful definitions Table 154 Definitions Term Description Dial Tone Indicates the line is ready to receive dialing Busy Tone Indicates the line or equipment is in use engaged or occupied Ringback Tone Indicates the called line is ringing out Special Information Tone Identifies network provided announcements Stutter Dial Tone Notifies the user that they have a voice mail message when the phone does not or cannot have a message waiting light Confirmation Tone Confirms a command performed by the user such as activate a service Receiver Off Hook ROH Tone Indicates that the telephone is not hung up correctly Message Waiting Indicator Tone Indicates there is a message waiting somewhere for the owner of the phone Network Congestion Tone Indicates that all switching paths are busy all toll trunks are busy or there are equipment blockages Conventions The following conventions apply to this Appendix Frequencies Symbol means modulated For instance 425 Hz 25 means 425 Hz modulated at 25 Hz K Symbol means added For instance 425 Hz 330 Hz means that both 425 Hz and 330 Hz sines are played at the same time K When a tone is composed of more than one frequency if not otherwise specified the given electrical level applies to each frequency taken separately
336. ndor Specific Option AS Mediatrix units store one type of information in vendor specific options IP addresses with optional port number The layout for storing IP addresses is explained in section Entering IP Addresses on page 66 Vendor Class ID When using the vendor specific option first define a Vendor Class ID for the Mediatrix 2102 not supported in Windows NT servers A Vendor Class ID can be used by DHCP clients to identify their vendor type and configuration When using this option vendors can define their own specific identifier values to convey a particular hardware or operating system configuration or other identifying information Where vendor classes are used the DHCP server responds to identifying clients by using option code 43 the reserved option type for returning vendor specific information to the client DHCP servers that do not interpret this option type are expected to ignore it when it is specified by clients Please refer to your DHCP server s documentation to learn how to create a new vendor class L 77 Note The class to add is Mediatrix 2102 Creating Vendor Specific Information Once the Vendor ID Class is created place the proper values in the 43 option of the DHCP server The 43 option contains sub options that are encapsulated according to the format described in RFC 2132 If the option is not in the DHCP server the Mediatrix 2102 uses an invalid value 0 0 0 0 0 Please refer to your DHC
337. nfiguration SOU EE 234 Customizing Syslog Messages ocoonoccccinnccnnocccononnccnon cnn nn nn cnn nr nn 235 Configuring the Syslog Daemon Application sss sese eee eee eee eee 235 Local Sylvia dia ii ida 236 Chapter 26 SCR NS conosca 237 EAR GEET 237 Statistics Buerg ias 237 How are Statistics Collected KEE 237 Statistics by SY ii its 238 Ts iii A tad td Caza 239 Chapter 27 Maximum Transmission Unit MTU cscni ncioninsiincnnnincnciicriscicicic caida ii 241 What isi R RT 241 Mediatrix 2102 MTU ET 241 Possible Hardware Problem s ciccccctestaasssranasancdsacseaansitbes santas denn EENEG SEENEN 241 Mediatrix 2102 xv Contents Chapter 28 A A acces cascada ce reee aE aeaaaee N eE 243 General Operation ISSUCS stissi de ceeccuisacnaddchannedscdedsacduaddateadececenabeuentcedaaaasananthacdnecexhasauadetaansccccssdagedss 243 Calling WE TTT 246 Fax TT 247 Tested Fax Model 248 Issues Arising from Specific Combinations ScenarioS eee eee eee e eee eee eee ee 249 Configuration ISSUCS cisma teed desdeeteeueebesiauacecst senduedateendareenvetuaress vende 250 Software Upgrade T 251 SNMP Management Software ISSUES eee ee eee ee ee eee eee eee eee 253 Appendix A Standards Compliance and Safety Information ooooccccccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanananananancnnnnnnnnnos 255 Standards SUPPORT EE 255 RE UE CN 256 Federal Communications Commission FCC Part 1 256 Federal Communications Commission FCC Part GB sese eee eee 256 Industry Cana
338. ng This feature could be useful in the case where your ISP Internet Service Provider and your ITSP Internet Telephony Service Provider use different DNS IP addresses or when a Mediatrix 2102 and a networked PC need to use a different DNS The Mediatrix 2102 may receive DNS addresses from three sources gt from an ISP via PPPoE or DHCP gt from the static local host DNS IP addresses gt from the static telephony DNS IP addresses Table 34 explains how DNS addresses are attributed to the Mediatrix 2102 and the networked PC Table 34 DNS Addresses Possibilities localHostDns telephonyDns DNS address of DNS address of OverrideEnable OverrideEnable Mediatrix 2102 the Networked PC disabled disabled DNS from ISP DNS from ISP disabled enabled static telephony DNS from ISP DNS enabled disabled static local host static local host DNS DNS enabled enabled static telephony static local host DNS DNS gt To use static DNS IP addresses 1 In the ipAddressConfig folder set the localHostDnsOverrideEnable variable under the ipAdressConfigLocalHost group to enable The primary DNS and secondary DNS addresses are set with the static values defined in the localHostStaticPrimaryDns and localHostStaticSecondaryDns variables If you set the variable to disable the primary DNS and secondary DNS addresses provisioning depends on the setting of the telephonyDnsOverrideEnable variable 2 In the jpAddressCon
339. ng the value of this variable resets statistics to 0 Mediatrix 2102 237 Chapter 26 Statistics RTP Statistics 3 Set the maximum number of periods to cumulate in the sysConfigStatsNumberPeriods variable The maximum number of periods cumulated is 24 If this variable is set to 0 statistics are collected indefinitely in the current variables Note that modifying the value of this variable resets statistics to 0 K To reset statistics 1 In the sysAdminMIB set the sysAdminCommand variable to resetStats This resets all cumulated call statistics Statistics by Syslog You can configure the Mediatrix 2102 to send the RTP and T 38 statistics by syslog message You will thus be able to see them by using your syslog daemon K The RTP statistics are sent at the end of a call gt The T 38 statistics are sent at the end of a fax The syslog message level is informational and uses the module name Statistics Table 140 lists the different statistics fields to send Table 140 Statistics by Syslog Short Name Description Corresponding MIB Variable TxByte Number of octets transmitted rtpStatsLastConnNumberOctetsTransmitted RxByte Number of octets received rtpStatsLastConnNumberOctetsReceived TxPkt Number of packets transmitted rtpStatsLastConnNumberPacketsTransmitted RxPkt Number of packets received rtpStatsLastConnNumberPacketsReceived NbrPktLost Number of packet
340. ng update succeeded The configuration update experienced Error The specific configuration an error and has not been completed update failed configuration file fetching The software update has been Informational The software update succeeded successful The software update experienced an Error The software update failed error and has not been completed Set the maximal number of syslog messages the Mediatrix 2102 handles in the syslogMsgLocalMaxNbr variable Modifying this value resets the messages If the Mediatrix 2102 sends a new syslog message and the maximum number of messages is reached the oldest one is removed You can view the syslog messages in the following locations e Inthe syslogLocalMsg Table of the syslogMIB Inthe System log page of the web interface 236 Mediatrix 2102 CHAPTER 26 Statistics The Mediatrix 2102 collects meaningful statistics that can be read via the RTP MIB RTP Statistics RTP statistics are related to the transmission of information and include but are not limited to gt Number of octets transmitted received gt Number of packets transmitted received gt Number of lost packets gt Percentage of lost packets gt Minimum maximum and average Jitter interarrival time time in milliseconds between the arrival of packets gt Minimum maximum and average latency time These statistics are located under the rtpStats group of the ol See the MIB Refere
341. ng individual codecs allows you to define codecs that can be considered during negotiation If codecs are disabled they are not considered K To enable voice codecs 1 In the voicelfMIB choose the codec you want to use voicelfCodec Table You have the choice between the following codecs Table 97 Enabling Voice Codecs Codec Variable Set to PCMU G 711 u Law voicelfCodecPcmuEnable enable PCMA G 711 a Law voicelfCodecPcmaEnable enable G 723 1 voicelfCodecG723Enable g723 53kbs g723 63kbs G 729 A voicelfCodecG729Enable enable Mediatrix 2102 147 Chapter 12 Voice Transmissions Packetization Time Packetization Time The packetization time also called packetization period or ptime is the duration in ms of the voice packet K To set the packetization time 1 In the voicelfMIB set the packetization time of the codec s as required voicelfCodecTable Available values vary from one codec to another Table 98 Packetization Time Settings Variable Definition Values ms PCMU G 711 u Law voicelfCodecPcmuMinPTime Lower boundary for the packetization period Default Value 10 10 100 with increments of 1 voicelfCodecPcmuMaxPTime Upper boundary for the packetization period Default Value 100 10 100 with increments of 1 PCMA G 711 a Law voicelfCodecPcmaMinPTime Lower boundary for the packetization period
342. nnection network conditions and servers conditions If Transparent Address Sharing is enabled during the software download the PC connected to the Mediatrix 2102 may experience momentary loss of Internet connectivity 9 Update the MIB browser with the MIB version coming with the software version 132 Mediatrix 2102 Download Procedure Reference Manual SIP Version Download via HTTP The following steps explain how to download a software by using the HTTP protocol To download a software via HTTP 1 If not already done setup the Image server used to download the software see Before Downloading on page 125 2 If not already done configure the Image path as described in Setting up the Image Path on page 128 3 If not already done configure the image hosts and ports as defined in Software Servers Configuration on page 126 assigned in the imagePrimaryPort and imageSecondaryPort read only variables in the pAddressStatus f Caution When downloading via HTTP the image server s port must be 80 You can query the actual port folder If you are using a DHCP server and it did not provide the proper port reconfigure it with the proper port or use a static configuration See Software Servers Configuration on page 126 for more details 4 In the imageMIB set the image TransferProtocol variable to http Your HTTP server may activate some caching mechanism for the software download
343. nnection may not be established The Mediatrix 2102 has the possibility to force the desired Ethernet link speed and duplex mode by disabling the auto negotiation and selecting the proper setting sysConfigNetworkEthernetSpeed or sysConfigComputerEthernetSpeed variable When forcing a link speed at one end be sure that the other end a hub switch etc has the same configuration To avoid any problems the link speed and duplex mode of the other endpoint must be exactly the same Mediatrix 2102 69 Chapter 4 IP Address and Network Configuration Ethernet Connection Speed 70 Mediatrix 2102 CHAPTER 5 SIP Servers The Mediatrix 2102 uses three types of servers gt Registrar server gt Proxy server K Outbound Proxy server This chapter describes how to configure the Mediatrix 2102 to properly use these servers Registrar Server The registrar server accepts REGISTER requests and places the information it receives in those requests into the location service for the domain it handles a In the Unit Manager Network Administration Manual refer to chapter Signalling Protocols Parameters section j SIP Configuration Window Configuration Source The Mediatrix 2102 must know the IP address and port number of the Registrar server You can assign these information to the Mediatrix 2102 through a DHCP server or manually enter them yourself with the static variables Note When defining whether the Mediatrix 2102 must g
344. ns The management information is actually a collection of managed objects and these rules are used to both name and define these managed objects Management Information Base MIB A MIB is a structured collection of all the managed objects a device maintains The managed objects are structured in the form of a hierarchical tree At the top of the tree is the most general information available about a network Each branch of the tree then gets more detailed into a specific network area with the leaves of the tree as specific as the MIB can get Object Identifier OID Object Identifiers OID are strings of numbers They are allocated in a hierarchical manner so that for instance the authority for 1 2 3 is the only one that can say what 1 2 3 4 means The formal definition of OIDs comes from ITU T recommendation X 208 ASN 1 which is available from the ITU Mediatrix 2102 39 Chapter 3 MIB Structure and SNMP SNMP Overview SNMP Versions The Mediatrix 2102 supports three versions of SNMP SNMPv1 SNMPv2c and SNMPv3 SNMP defines a few types of messages that are exchanged between the manager and agent SNMPv1 Messages The following messages are specific to SNMPv1 Table 20 SNMPv1 Message Types Operator Description messages sent from the manager to the agent get request Get the value of one or more variables get next request Get the next variable after one or more specified
345. nternet to send content to multiple other computers that have identified themselves as interested in receiving the originating computer s content Configuration Steps The following are the steps to follow to properly setup the TAS service and where to get information on each of these steps K To setup the TAS service 1 Define the PPPoE parameters as described in PPPoE Service on page 90 This only applies if you are using a DSL modem 2 Define the WAN IP address configuration source as described in WAN Information Configuration Source on page 92 3 Configure the TAS mechanism as described in Configuring TAS on page 93 4 Optionally modify port allocation settings as described in Ports Settings on page 99 5 Restart the Mediatrix 2102 so that the changes may take effect Mediatrix 2102 Chapter 8 Transparent Address Sharing PPPoE Service PPPOE Service Standards Supported The Mediatrix 2102 uses the PPPoE protocol to interact with a DSL broadband modem It can discover a PPP access concentrator AC and establish a PPP session with it Note This section applies only if you are using a DSL modem If you are using a cable modem go directly to WAN Information Configuration Source on page 92 The PPPoE service is required to properly use the TAS service with DSL modems You must perform the following tasks to configure the PPPoE service K Enable the PPPoE servic
346. o make emergency calls and maintain telephone services in the event of a power outage or network failure Bypass Connector Settings During normal operation the SCN line connected to the Bypass connector is switched out of the circuit through commuting relays The Bypass connector can be activated by three different conditions gt When power is removed from the Mediatrix 2102 gt When the IP network is down gt When the user dials a pre configured digits sequence e g 911 which indicates to the Mediatrix 2102 that the user wants to make an emergency call If one of these conditions is met a phone fax used on FXS connector 1 is directly connected to the SCN Bypass line Connector 1 stays in Bypass connection until gt The error conditions have been cleared gt The device connected to it is on hook and a delay has elapsed Emergency Number Bypass If the Bypass connection has been triggered because of an emergency call the user automatically bypasses the VolP connection of the Mediatrix 2102 Connector 1 of the unit is thus directly connected to the SCN and the unit dials the emergency number on the SCN side Once the call is finished and the telephone is on hook the Mediatrix 2102 stays connected to the SCN for a period of time you can define During this period of time the emergency operator can reach the caller through the SCN bypass connector When this period of time elapses the Mediatrix 2102 goes back to it
347. ocumentation Mediatrix 2102 125 Chapter 10 Software Download Software Servers Configuration Software Servers Configuration The Mediatrix 2102 must know the IP address and port number of its Primary and Secondary software servers These servers contain the files required for the software update You can assign these information to the Mediatrix 2102 through a DHCP server or manually enter them yourself in static variables E In the Unit Manager Network Administration Manual refer to chapter Administration Parameters section Software and Emergency Download DHCP Configuration Using the DHCP configuration assumes that you have properly set your DHCP server with the relevant information See Chapter 4 IP Address and Network Configuration on page 51 for more details To use DHCP assigned information 1 In the ipAddressConfig folder locate the imageSelectConfigSource variable under the pAddressConfiglmage group This variable defines whether the Mediatrix 2102 must ask for its Image server settings through a DHCP server or not 2 Set the imageSelectConfigSource variable to dhcp You can query the Image server s IP address and port number assigned by the DHCP server in the following read only variables in the pAddressStatus folder e imagePrimaryHost e magePrimaryPort e imageSecondaryHost e imageSecondaryPort 3 Set how you want to define the Primary Image server information in the DHCP server
348. ode Point Digital Subscriber Lines Dual Tone Multi Frequency Federal Communications Commission USA Frequency Shift Keying Greenwich Mean Time Hyper Text Markup Language Hyper Text Transfer Protocol Hertz Internet Assigned Numbers Authority Institute of Electrical amp Electronics Engineers Internet Engineering Task Force Internet Group Management Protocol Internet Protocol IP Control Protocol Internet Service Provider Internet Telephony Service Provider Kilobits Per Second Local Area Network Liquid Crystal Display Light Emitting Diode Media Access Control Megabits Per Second Management Information Base Maximum Transmission Unit Message Waiting Indicator Name Address Translation Mediatrix 2102 307 Appendix F List of Acronyms OSI PAP PBX PCM PIN PPP PPPoE PSTN QoS REN RFC RTCP RTP SCN SDP SIP SME SMI STP STUN TAS TBRL TCP IP TPE UDP UL UTC UTP VAD VBD VDC VLAN VoIP WAN XML Open Systems Interconnection Password Authentication Protocol Private Branch eXchange Pulse Code Modulation Personal Identification Number Point to Point Protocol Point to Point Protocol Over Ethernet Public Switched Telephone Network Quality of Service Ringer Equivalence Number Request For Comment Real Time Control Protocol Real Time Protocol Switched Circuit Network Session Description Protocol Session Initiation Protocol Small and Medium sized Enterpr
349. of a call to know if the call requires a distinctive ringing The supported vaue of the Alert Info are Table 155 Distinctive Ring Patterns Alert Info value Ring Name On Off Sequence s lt http 127 0 0 1 Bellcore dr2 gt Bellcore dr2 0 8 0 4 0 8 4 0 lt http 127 0 0 1 Bellcore dr3 gt Bellcore dr3 0 4 0 2 0 4 0 2 0 8 4 0 270 Mediatrix 2102 Definitions Reference Manual SIP Version Table 155 Distinctive RIng Patterns Continued Bellcore dr4 Alert Info value On Off Sequence s lt http 127 0 0 1 Bellcore dr4 gt 0 3 0 2 1 0 0 2 0 3 4 0 The Mediatrix 2102 plays the default ring of the country selected if the Alert Info value is not present or the value is not supported Note Since the first pause of the distinctive ring is lower that 1 second a splash ring followed by an Off of 1 second precedes the distinctive ring pattern Mediatrix 2102 271 Appendix D Country Specific Parameters Australia Australia The following parameters apply if you have selected Australia as location Australia 1 The following parameters apply if you have selected Australia1 as location Table 156 Australia 1 Parameters Parameter Value On Off Sequence s Elect Levels Dial Tone 425 Hz 25 CONTINUOUS 18 dBm Busy Tone 425 Hz 0 375 0 375 18 dBm Ringback Tone
350. older If you are using a DHCP server and it did not provide the proper port reconfigure it with the proper port or use a static configuration See Configuration File Server Settings on page 108 for more details 2 Place the configuration files to download on the computer hosting the HTTP server These files must be in a directory under the root path 3 If not already done set the configuration file path as described in Setting up the Configuration File Download on page 109 4 In the configFileFetchingMIB set the configFileTransferProtocol variable to http Your HTTP server may activate some caching mechanism for the file download This mechanism caches the initial file download for later processing thus preventing changes or update of the original file by the user This can cause strange problems if a user wants to edit a configuration file to modify values and upload it immediately The result will still return the original file and not the new one 5 If your HTTP server requires authentication when downloading the configuration file set the following The user name in the configFile TransferUsername variable The password in the configFile TransferPassword variable 6 In the groupAdminMIB set the groupSetAdmin variable to ForceLock All activities in progress on the Mediatrix 2102 are terminated immediately and the unit enters the maintenance mode the value of the groupAdminState variable is locked The
351. on Country D K Toseta country location It is very important to set variables according to the country in which the Mediatrix 2102 is used because a number of parameter values are set according to this choice These parameters are K Tones K Rings K Impedances K Line Attenuations See Appendix D Country Specific Parameters on page 269 for more information on these country specific settings In the Unit Manager Network Administration Manual refer to chapter Ports Parameters section Port Configuration Window t 1 In the telephonyMIB locate the telephonyCountrySelection variable This variable indicates the current country used by the Mediatrix 2102 It can also be used to select a caller ID standard in countries that support more than one caller ID standard 2 Set the variable with one of the following parameters North America 1 Australia 2 Mexico North America 2 Australia 3 Denmark Austria Japan New Zealand France Israel uk bellcore Germany 1 Thailand uk cca Germany 2 Indonesia uk etsi fsk UK China france etsi fsk Italy Hong Kong france etsi dtmf Spain Malaysia Switzerland Russia Sweden Netherlands Australia 1 Brazil 3 Restart the Mediatrix 2102 so that the changes may take effect Mediatrix 2102 85 Chapter 7 Country Specific Configuration Setting the Location Country Caller ID Selection In countries that support more than one caller ID standard this standard can be selected with
352. on which to listen for HTTP requests in the httpServerPort variable under the pAddressConfigHttpEngine group 2 In the httpServerMIB enable the service by setting the httpServerEnable variable to enable Using the Web Interface To properly access the web interface you need a web browser that supports frames and HTML 4 0 Suitable web browsers are Netscape Navigator Version 4 7 or above K Microsoft Internet Explorer Version 5 0 or above K To use the web interface configuration 1 In your web browser s address field type the default IP address of the Mediatrix 2102 which is 192 168 10 1 The following opens Mediatrix 2102 25 Chapter 2 Web Interface Using the Web Interface Figure 10 Enter Network Password Window Enter Network Password HP Please type your user name and password Site 192 168 13 67 Realm Mediatrix 2102 User Name Password T Save this password in your password list cor Enter the proper user name and password The user name and password must be valid They are case sensitive hence they must be entered properly Default factory values are User Name admin Password 1234 Once you have accessed the web interface you can change the password as described in HTTP Server Password Page on page 33 Click OK The Overview web page displays It stays accessible for as long as the Internet browser used to access the Mediatrix 2102 web interfac
353. ondary servers setting up a server at one of these addresses within the correct subnet will provide an ultimate way to rescue the unit However if these addresses cannot be reached from the unit s subnet the default gateway must provide appropriate routing to them 4 If the software download also fails with the two default servers the Mediatrix 2102 idles for one minute 5 After this one minute the Mediatrix 2102 tries to initiate the software download again 6 If the software download fails again with the primary secondary and default software servers the Mediatrix 2102 idles for two minutes before attempting to initiate the software download 7 If the emergency software download still fails the Mediatrix 2102 tries to initiate the software download again by doubling the delay between each attempt up to a maximum of 16 minutes e first attempt 1 minute delay second attempt 2 minutes delay e third attempt 4 minutes delay e fourth attempt 8 minutes delay e fifth attempt 16 minutes delay e sixth attempt 16 minutes delay e etc This procedure continues until the software download completes successfully The software download can fail if the software server cannot be reached or if the software directory is not found on the software server 138 Mediatrix 2102 CHAPTER 11 Line Configuration This chapter describes the features available on the lines connected to the Mediatrix 2102 For information on voice code
354. onditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment e This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLAR
355. ons is dependent upon the system configuration quality of the analog lines as well as the number of analog to digital and digital to analog conversions Modem performance may therefore be reduced below the optimum values stated above Mediatrix 2102 145 Chapter 12 Voice Transmissions Codec Descriptions G723 1 G 729 Specified in ITU T Recommendation G 723 1 dual rate speech coder for multimedia communications transmitting at 5 3 kbit s and 6 3 kbit s This Recommendation specifies a coded representation that can be used to compress the speech signal component of multi media services at a very low bit rate The audio is encoded in 30 ms frames A G 723 1 frame can be one of three sizes 24 octets 6 3 kb s frame 20 octets 5 3 kb s frame or 4 octets These 4 octet frames are called SID frames Silence Insertion Descriptor and are used to specify comfort noise parameters Table 95 G 723 1 Features Feature Description Packetization time Range of 30 ms to 120 ms with increment of 30 ms See Packetization Time on page 148 for more details Voice Activity Detection VAD The Mediatrix 2102 supports the annex A Annex A is the built in support of VAD in G 723 1 Specified in ITU T Recommendation G 729 coding of speech at 8 kbit s using conjugate structure algebraic code excited linear prediction CS ACELP For all data rates the sampling frequency and RTP timestamp clock rate is 8000 Hz
356. ons or for connecting to a service provider s network xxiv Mediatrix 2102 Mediatrix Products Reference Manual SIP Version Mediatrix 1600 E1 PRI VoIP Gateways The Mediatrix 1600 series E1 PRI VolP gateways provide 30 Mediatrix 1631 or 60 Mediatrix 1632 VolP channels to allow enterprises to lower communications costs over any IP link They constitute an ideal solution for enterprise voice applications or for connecting to a service provider s network Mediatrix 2400 BRI IP Routers The Mediatrix 2400 series BRI IP routers combine VolP and call switching with QoS access routing and VPN tunnelling to provide a comprehensive and complete enterprise solution The Mediatrix 2400 series units are integrated IP routers with two Ethernet ports and two Mediatrix 2402 or four Mediatrix 2404 ISDN BRI ports They constitute an ideal solution for office networks or for connecting to a service provider s network Mediatrix 2500 T1 PRI IP Routers Designed to address the voice fax and data transmission needs of enterprises the Mediatrix 2500 series T1 PRI IP routers combine VoIP and call switching with QoS access routing and VPN The Mediatrix 2500 series units are integrated IP routers with two Ethernet ports a serial V 35 X 21 port and one Mediatrix 2531 or two Mediatrix 2532 ISDN T1 ports They constitute an ideal solution for enterprise networks or for connecting to a service provider s network Mediatrix 2600
357. op de hoogte te zijn van standaard maatregelen om ongelukken te voorkomen Varoitus T m varoitusmerkki merkitsee vaaraa Olet tilanteessa joka voi johtaa ruumiinvammaan Ennen kuin ty skentelet mink n laitteiston parissa ota selv s hk kytkent ihin liittyvist vaaroista ja tavanomaisista onnettomuuksien ehk isykeinoista Attention Ce symbole d avertissement indique un danger Vous vous trouvez dans une situation pouvant causer des blessures ou des dommages corporels Avant de travailler sur un quipement soyez conscient des dangers pos s par les circuits lectriques et familiarisez vous avec les proc dures couramment utilis es pour viter les accidents Warnung Dieses Warnsymbol bedeutet Gefahr Sie befinden sich in einer Situation die zu einer K rperverletzung f hren k nnte Bevor Sie mit der Arbeit an irgendeinem Ger t beginnen seien Sie sich der mit elektrischen Stromkreisen verbundenen Gefahren und der Standardpraktiken zur Vermeidung von Unf llen bewu t Avvertenza Questo simbolo di avvertenza indica un pericolo La situazione potrebbe causare infortuni alle persone Prima di lavorare su qualsiasi apparecchiatura occorre conoscere i pericoli relativi ai circuiti elettrici ed essere al corrente delle pratiche standard per la prevenzione di incidenti Advarsel Dette varselsymbolet betyr fare Du befinner deg i en situasjon som kan f re til personskade F r du utf rer arbeid p utstyr m du vare oppmerk
358. ot support i e T 38 SOLUTION Disable the T 38 capability in the Mediatrix 2102 See T 38 Fax on page 159 for more details The following gives information pertaining to faxes This includes a list of fax models tested with the Mediatrix 2102 and some specific issues the unit may encounter DESCRIPTION Poor line condition error during a fax transmission Be POSSIBLE CAUSE The analog transmission between the fax machine and the Mediatrix 2102 is flaky preventing the fax transmission to terminate properly This problem is known to occur with some fax machines and it can also occur with a few fax modems SOLUTION Set the Input sound level to 6 dB If this still does not solve the problem try the 6 dB value See User Gain on page 156 for more details DESCRIPTION Unable to send a fax in T 38 and Clear Channel Be POSSIBLE CAUSE To properly send faxes both units must be configured with the same settings If you are attempting to send a fax and the transmission fails there could be many reasons for this but most likely the fax codec settings are at fault The following explains the logic behind fax transmissions When transmitting a fax Unit A first verifies if Unit B supports the codec you have set in Unit A If the codec is supported the fax should be transmitted properly If the fax codec is not supported by Unit B Unit A tries to find a common preferred G 711 clear channel codec between t
359. owed on the WAN port between 64 and 4096 kbps 52 PO trtemet 2 Enable the Bandwidth Management feature by selecting the Enable option 3 Set the maximum outgoing bandwidth allowed on the WAN port in the corresponding field Available values are between 64 kbps and 4096 kbps 4 Click Apply changes The Mediatrix 2102 automatically restarts to apply all the new settings Mediatrix 2102 35 Chapter 2 Web Interface STUN Page STUN Page The STUN web page allows you to configure the STUN client of the Mediatrix 2102 See Chapter 16 STUN Configuration on page 181 for more information K To configure the STUN client of the Mediatrix 2102 1 In the web interface click the STUN link or the STUN button This links to the STUN web page Figure 17 STUN Web Page F Mediatrix 2102 Microsoft Internet Explorer Biel ES File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Eek gt OA A Asn ves Grei FG Address http 192 168 10 1 eo Mediatrix 2102 overview admin config File Bandwidth STUN Overview Administration Configuration file HTTP server password System log Bandwidth Management STUN 2 STUN Enable di Disable STUN cache duration 0 to 3600 seconds 0 disabled 0 Timeout for a query to a STUN server 500 to 10000 milliseconds 1000 Keep alive packet transmission interval 0 to 120 seconds 0 disabled STUN server IP host STUN server IP port 2 Enable
360. owing describes the behaviour Table 87 Scheduled Periodic Update Time s Description 0 Beginning of the automatic update mechanism 2 Automatic update The software download starts 4 Automatic update The Mediatrix 2102 skips this scheduled update because the previous update has not finished yet 6 Automatic update The Mediatrix 2102 skips this scheduled update because the previous update has not finished yet 7 The software download is finished and the new software is applied 8 Automatic update The software download starts 8 If you have selected days in Step 6 set the time of the day when to initiate a software update in the imageAutoUpdateTimeOfDay variable The time of the day is based on the snip TimeZoneString variable setting see Chapter 17 SNTP Settings on page 183 for more details You must have a time server SNTP that is accessible and properly configured or the automatic software update feature may not work properly It is assumed that you know how to configure your SNTP server If not refer to your SNTP server s documentation You can also refer to Chapter 17 SNTP Settings on page 183 for more details on how to configure the Mediatrix 2102 for a SNTP server The software is downloaded at the first occurrence of this value and thereafter atthe period defined by the imageAutoUpdatePeriod variable Let s say for instance the automatic software download is set with t
361. owing disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Mediatrix Telecom Inc Reference Manual OpenSSL License Copyright c 1998 2002 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of c
362. ows a user to link two or more calls together to form a single conversation called a conference Only 3 way conferences are currently supported A participant of the conference can put the conference on hold and attempt other calls This participant may then rejoin the conference at a later time by unholding it The participant who initiated the conference cannot put it on hold You must enable the call hold and second call services for this service to work See Call Hold on page 203 and Second Call on page 204 The following is a conference call flow example Requirements Figure 39 Conference Call Flow ACK L INVITE 6 729 Trying Ringing 200 OK gt gt lt q Invite HOLD _ Trying 200 OK _ gt ACK INVITE UNHOLD PCMU Trying 200 OK gt L INVITE G 729 _ gt d Trying Ringing 200 OK ACK gt lt Trying200 ok _ INVITE PCMU __ gt ACK For the conference call to occur successfully all parties must meet the following requirements Support at least one of the PCM codecs G 711 u law and G 711 A law enabled on the line that is having the conference See Enabling Individual Codecs on page 147 for more details Ability to dynamically change codec during a call The packetization period ptime should be t
363. pPenaltyBoxTime variable Changing the value does not affect IP addresses that are already in the penalty box The sipPenaltyBoxTime only affects new entries in the penalty box Mediatrix 2102 173 Chapter 15 SIP Protocol Features Max Forwards Header 3 Enable the SIP penalty box feature by setting the sipPenaltyBoxEnable variable to enable The penalty box is always active This means that even if the feature is disabled IP addresses are marked as invalid but they are still tried This has the advantage that when the feature is enabled IP addresses that were already marked as invalid are instantly put into the penalty box Max Forwards Header Standards Supported You can configure whether the Mediatrix 2102 inserts the Max Forwards header into sent requests as per RFC 3261 Max Forwards serves to limit the number of hops a request can make on the way to its destination It consists of an integer that is decremented by one at each hop If the Max Forwards value reaches 0 before the request reaches its destination it will be rejected with a 483 Too Many Hops error response This feature is currently located under the mediatrixExperimental branch of the MIB structure See MIB Structure on page 43 for more details K To insert the Max Forwards header into SIP requests 1 In the groupAdminMIB set the groupAdminState variable to locked You can only change the Max Forwards header while the Mediatrix 2
364. page 261 Mediatrix 2102 Appendix C Cabling Considerations on Describes the pin to pin connections for cables used page 267 with the Mediatrix 2102 Appendix D Country Specific Parameters on Lists the various parameters specific to a country such page 269 as loss plan tones and rings etc Document Conventions The following information provides an explanation of the symbols that appear on the Mediatrix 2102 and in the documentation for the product Warning Definition equipment you must be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar with standard Warning Means danger You are in a situation that could cause bodily injury Before you work on any practices for preventing accidents Where to find Translated Warning Definition For safety and warning information see Appendix A Standards Compliance and Safety Information on page 255 This Appendix describes the international agency compliance and safety information for the Mediatrix 2102 It also includes a translation of the safety warning listed in the previous section Other Conventions The following are other conventions you will encounter in this manual Caution Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury and or damage to the equipment or property LF Note Note indicates important information about the current topic Standard
365. ployment configuration and provisioning of Mediatrix access devices and gateways The Unit Manager Network offers the following key features enabling the simple and remote configuration and deployment of numerous Mediatrix units gt Detection of the state of each Mediatrix unit e g power on off Automatic update of the list with installation of new Mediatrix units Real time graphical presentation of actual configuration Tracking of all configuration options of the Mediatrix units on the network Control of configuration parameters of all Mediatrix units within the same network Storage of backup configuration file of each Mediatrix unit Display of firmware release for any Mediatrix unit v vv v v v v Field upgrade of all Mediatrix units Mediatrix 2102 XXV Preface About this Manual End User Technical Support K Controlled Implementation of new software Supports SNMP requests GET GET NEXT GET TABLE GET WALK SET TRAP SNMP abstraction layer configuration can be changed without SNMP MIB knowledge The demo version of the Unit Manager Network is located on the Documentation CD ROM See the Unit Manager Network Administration Manual for more details on how to use it to configure any Mediatrix 2102 unit on the network End User Technical Support In order to maximize technical support resources Mediatrix works through its partners to resolve technical support issues All end users requiring tec
366. port is used 2 In the sipUAlfTable group set a main user name in the sipUAMainUsername variable The main user name uniquely identifies this endpoint in the domain such as a telephone number It is used to create the Contact and From headers The From header carries the permanent location IP address home domain where the endpoint is located The Contact header carries the current location IP address where the endpoint can be reached Contact headers are used in two ways e First contacts are registered to the registrar This enables callers to be redirected to the endpoint s current location Second a contact header is sent along with any request the user agent sends e g INVITE and is used by the target user agent as a return address for later requests to this endpoint 3 Set a display name in the sipUADisplayName variable This is a friendly name for the user agent It contains a descriptive version of the URI and is intended to be displayed to a user interface d Define a list of other accepted user names in the sipUAOfherAcceptedUsernames variable This is a list of user names that the endpoint recognizes as its own but does not register in contacts sent to the registrar The endpoint only registers the user name in sipUAMainUsername Mediatrix 2102 163 Chapter 15 SIP Protocol Features Session Timers You can use this variable to add variations on the main user name For instance let s say that the main us
367. puterEthernetSpeed isiiririsssi iiini i de iaieiiea 69 E S HUIS R e e ele lt ls la iiaia ii aia aa n naaa 115 117 121 sysConfigDownloadConfigMOde cooccicicccicicioicccnooncononnncnnnnnnrononcn conocer 121 SysContigMaxDMaAMIC di aaa 99 sysConfigMinDynamicPort sese eee eee 99 sysConfigNetworkEthernetSpeed 0 ce ececeesesseeneesereeeseeeseseseneeceeecevacseaeaeeeeeeeecevacaeaeaeeeeeeeeseeasaeaeeeeeeeeesaveeaeatarenerenes 69 sysConfigStatsBySyslogEnable seene 238 SySConfigStatsSNUMberPeriods ENEE da dci 238 SvstConfioG iatsbertodl engt 237 Ee t Eet 21 syslogDhepSiteSpecifi EE 60 234 SA NN 21 60 234 Glen 235 SySlOgMsgDisplayMaCcAddress EE 235 SYSIOGMSGDISplay TIME oia A a syslogMsgLocalMaxNbr ele e Eu EE 236 syslogMsgMaxSeveritY eee eee 233 246 SSI PO diia aci 21 61 234 syslogSelectConfigSource concciciciccninncconncncnnnnnnnonironorcr cnn carne 60 234 SYSIOIS Ati HOS EE 234 Syslog Static PON imc ED E aa rA e ise EE EEEa EEr an eG done 234 SYSIVIACACCICSS iiihana a a r ee aatake i aieia 8 63 Ch Elle TEE 48 T telephonyAttributesAutomaticCallEnable sese eee eee 217 telephonyAttributesAutomaticCallTargetAddress sss eee 217 telephonyAttributesCallDirectioNREstriCtion sese ee eee eee eee 218 telephonyAttributesIpAddressCallENable sese 218 telephonyCountyS election tdi aa ba 85 telephonyDnsOvermide Enable oo 55 V VOIceIAdaptative lterbBurmrerEnable seene 152 245 elle ee 147 WS e 21T Ss 2 E eT TT 9 HT 148 vV ice
368. qual to the minimum value that the user agent server was ready to accept located in the Min SE header This means that the maximum value as set in the Mediatrix unit might not be followed This has the advantageous effect of establishing the call even if the two endpoints have conflicting values Mediatrix units will also keep retrying as long as they get 422 answers with different Min SE values Who Refreshes the Session Re sending a session timer INVITE is referred to as refreshing the session Normally the user agent server that receives the INVITE has the last word on who refreshes Mediatrix units always let the user agent client caller perform the refreshes if the caller supports session timers In the case where the caller does not support session timers the Mediatrix unit assumes the role of the refresher Mediatrix 2102 165 Chapter 15 SIP Protocol Features Authentication Authentication Standards Supported Authentication information allows you to add some level of security to the Mediatrix 2102 lines by setting user names and passwords You can add two types of authentication information K line specific authentication K unit authentication When a realm requests authentication the line specific authentication is tried first and then the unit authentication if required Line Specific Authentication You can define up to five user names and five passwords for each line of the Mediatrix 2102 A line can thu
369. r 18 Digit Maps on page 187 Dialing this digit map does not have any effect unless the service s status is enabled The activating sequence is set for all the lines of the Mediatrix 2102 You cannot have different sequences for each line 3 Set the destination to call to retrieve messages in the mwiConfigFetchAddress variable The user typically initiates a call to the voice messaging system and then uses an auto attendant to get the messages Available formats are e telephone numbers 5551111 SIP URLs such as scheme user host For instance sip user foo com This string is used literally so cosmetic symbols such as the dash in 555 xxxx should not be present Because this variable is located in a table you can define a different destination for each line of the Mediatrix 2102 4 Define the duration in seconds of dynamic subscription to a messaging service in the mwiExpirationTime variable 5 Enable the MWI by setting the mwiConfigActivation variable to enable Because this variable is located in a table you can enable disable the service on a per line basis LF Note The MWI subscription refresh is not supported when the caller ID is DTMF based so modifiying the variable mwiConfigActivation will have no effect K To refresh the MWI subscription 1 In the mwiMIB set the mwiSubscriptionCmdRefresh variable Available values are e noOp No operation e refresh Refresh message w
370. r Value on page 45 for more details H Note The recovery mode does not alter any persistent configuration data of the Mediatrix 2102 Factory Reset The Factory reset reverts the Mediatrix 2102 back to its default factory settings It deletes the persistent MIB values of the unit including gt The entire mediatrixMIBs configuration gt The MIB II setup K The software download configuration files K The SNMP configuration including the SNMPv3 passwords and users gt The PPPoE configuration including the user names and passwords The Factory reset creates a new configuration file with the default factory values It should be performed with the Mediatrix 2102 connected to a network with access to a DHCP server If the unit cannot find a DHCP server it sends requests indefinitely You can disable the Factory reset to avoid users deleting the existing configuration See Disabling the Factory Reset on page 23 for more details gt To trigger the Factory Reset 1 Power the Mediatrix 2102 off 2 Insert a small unbent paper clip into the Default Settings switch hole located at the rear of the Mediatrix 2102 While depressing the Default Settings switch plug the power cord back in to power up the unit Do not depress before all the LEDs stop blinking and are steadily ON 3 Release the paper clip The Mediatrix 2102 restarts This procedure resets all variables in the MIB modules to their default value defau
371. r a network interface The MTU is the maximum packet size in bytes that the transport will transmit over the underlying network The size includes the transport header Note that an IP datagram may span multiple packets Values larger than the default for the underlying network will result in the transport using the network default MTU Values smaller than 68 will result in the transport using an MTU of 68 To validate that the changes are correct try to ping the Mediatrix 2102 with large packets once restarted ping 1 2000 This will cause IP fragmentation the first fragment being as large as the interface allows it With the MTU reduced you should now receive an answer For more informations see http support microsoft com default aspx scid kb en us 120642 242 Mediatrix 2102 CHAPTER 28 Troubleshooting You can experience some problems when connecting the Mediatrix 2102 to the network The following section examines some of these problems and possible solutions A Syslog message lists the problems the Mediatrix 2102 encounters You can see this message with the Syslog daemon This chapter covers the following types of issues General Operation Issues Calling Issues Fax Issues Configuration Issues Software Upgrade Issues SNMP Management Software Issues General Operation Issues The following are general operation issues you may encounter DESCRIPTION Unit does not oper
372. r an example of vendor specific and site specific settings Vendor Specific Options Standards Supported The vendor specific DHCP option is a standard DHCP option used to store information specific to the vendor of the DHCP client The vendor specific option code is 43 Because there are different information elements that can be stored in this option each element has been allocated a sub option number See Table 47 on page 66 for the complete list Like all other options the vendor specific information field option 43 first contains a code 43 a length in byte and some data that spans the number of bytes specified in the length The data is organized as a series of sub options each of them laid out like a regular option code len data The codes can be anything between 1 and 254 and the vendor Mediatrix chooses these codes See Table 47 on page 66 for actual codes The following figures show the general and encapsulated layout of the vendor specific information option Figure 20 General Layout of a Vendor Specific Information Option ler pe e Joa Tone E Figure 21 Layout for Encapsulated Vendor Specific Options e e odes tent bate Dat Coded tena Dae aaa 64 Mediatrix 2102 Vendor and Site Specific DHCP Options Reference Manual SIP Version Figure 22 on page 65 is an example of a vendor specific option containing an msHost IP address 192 168 1 2 Figure 22 Example of Encapsulated Ve
373. r the pAddressStatusSipServer group of the ipAddressStatus folder e sipOutboundProxyHost e sipOutboundProxyPort SIP Outbound Proxy From RFC 3261 A proxy that receives requests from a client even though it may not be the server resolved by the Request URI Typically a user agent is manually configured with an outbound proxy or can learn about one through auto configuration protocols When enabled the initial route for all SIP requests containa the outbound proxy address suffixed with the loose routing parameter Ir The Request URI still contains the home domain proxy address Requests are directed to the first route the outbound proxy Mediatrix 2102 75 Chapter 5 SIP Servers Outbound Proxy Server 3 Set how you want to define the outbound proxy server information in the DHCP server Table 56 Outbound Proxy Server DHCP Information To use a Set vendor specific code The sipOutboundProxyDhcpSiteSpecificCode variable under the ipAddressConfigSipServer group to 0 Set the outbound proxy server IP address in the DHCP server inside the vendor specific sub option 205 hexadecimal OxCD site specific code The sipOutboundProxyDhcpSiteSpecificCode variable under the ipAddressConfigSipServer group to any value between 128 and 254 Set the outbound proxy server IP address in the DHCP server inside the site specific option you have chosen it must match the value of the sipOutboundProx
374. ransferee by resending the REFER to the initial target instead of the initial transferee As a last resort if none of the participants supports replaces the transfer is carried out without using the replaces extension useReplacesNoRequire The Replaces header is used It can be seen in the Refer To header of the REFER request sent by the transferor It can also be seen in the INVITE sent by the transferee The target that supports Replaces uses its information to merge the new INVITE with an existing call specified in the Replaces header This disables the transfer fallback The replaces information is still present but no check is made that it is effectively used to complete the transfer Replaces Version Standards Supported You can select the version of the etf sip replaces draft to which the Mediatrix 2102 must conform The provisioned version affects the way blind transfers are executed This feature is currently located under the mediatrixExperimental branch of the MIB structure See MIB Structure on page 43 for more details The Mediatrix 2102 supports the following versions Table 112 Replaces Versions Supported Version Description replaces01 When following the sip replaces 01 draft the Transferor can use a REFER with Replaces when proceeding to initiate a blind transfer This results in the Transferee including a Replaces header in its INVITE to the Transfer Target repla
375. ransmit Data Minus The negative signal for the TD differential pair This contains the same output as pin 1 3 Receive Data Plus The positive signal for the RD differential pair This signal contains the serial input data stream received from the network 4 not connected 5 not connected 6 Receive data minus The negative signal for the RD differential pair This signal contains the same input as pin 3 7 not connected 8 not connected Crossover Cable A RJ 45 crossover cable is used when only two systems are to be connected to each other peer to peer at the Ethernet Cards by crossing over reversing their respective pin contacts An example would be connecting two computers together to create a network The crossover eliminates the need for a hub when connecting two computers A crossover cable may also be required when connecting a hub to a hub ora transceiver to transceiver or repeater to repeater When connecting a hub to a transceiver a straight through cable is always used H o Note This is not an IEEE supported configuration and should be used for test purposes only A crossover cable is sometimes called a null modem The coloured wires at either end are put into different pin numbers or crossed over Figure 43 Crossover Connectivity 1 TX TX 1 2 TX TX 2 3 RC RC 3 6 RC RC 6 268 Mediatrix 2102 APPENDIX Country Specific Parameters The following parameters differ depe
376. rce 126 emergency download 138 HTTP server configuring 125 HTTP via 133 Image path 128 LED states 131 SNTP server configuring 125 Spanning Tree Protocol 136 TFTP server configuring 125 TFTP via 132 troubleshooting 251 zip file 128 DTMF defined 300 duration value 151 out of band 149 signalling caller ID 83 transport type 149 over the SIP protocol 151 payload type 150 using SIP INFO method 150 E echo cancellation 154 emergency call bypass 161 enabling 201 emergency software download 138 enabling lines 139 encryption of configuration files decrypt generic 112 decrypt specific 112 defined 112 end user technical support xxvi Ethernet connection setting speed of 69 F factory reset disabling 23 reverting to 22 see also recovery mode far end disconnect signalling 144 fax call waiting tone disabling 212 clear channel 157 T 38 159 user gain vs communication quality 156 flash hook setting 141 Foreign Exchange Service Station FXS defined 301 see also lines FSK generation caller ID 84 G G 711 145 comfort noise 155 defined 301 voice activity detection 153 G 723 1 146 defined 301 G 729 146 defined 301 voice activity detection 154 gateway using analog to place a call 199 group of lines 140 GUI using a 45 H hardware cleaning 7 condensation 7 front indicators 4 proper location 6 rear connections 5 header SIP user agent sending 164 hold putting a call on 203 212 direction attribute
377. rcuit An FXS port will provide dial tone and ring voltage G 711 ITU T recommendation for an algorithm designed to transmit and receive A law PCM Pulse Code Modulation voice at digital bit rates of 48 kbps 56 kbps and 64 kbps It is used for digital telephone sets on digital PBX and ISDN channels G 723 1 A codec that provides the greatest compression 5 3 kbps or 6 3 kbps typically specified for multimedia applications such as H 323 videoconferencing G 729 A codec that provides near toll quality at a low delay which uses compression to 8 kbps 8 1 compression rate Gateway A device linking two different types of networks that use different protocols for example between the packet network and the Public Switched Telephone Network Impedance Impedance is the apparent resistance in an electric circuit to the flow of an alternating current analogous to the actual electrical resistance to a direct current being the ratio of electromotive force to the current International Telecommunication Union ITU Organization based in Geneva Switzerland that is the most important telecom standards setting body in the world Internet Drafts Internet Drafts are working documents of the IETF its areas and its working groups Note that other groups may also distribute working documents as Internet Drafts Internet Protocol IP A standard describing software that keeps track of the Internet s addresses for different nodes routes outgo
378. re upgrade zip file SNTP server properly configured HTTP server with proper root path Y v v v Syslog daemon optional Configuring the TFTP Server If you are to perform a software download by using the TFTP protocol you must install a TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol server running on the PC designated as the software file server This PC must not have a firewall running Mediatrix also recommends to place the PC and the Mediatrix 2102 in the same subnet It is assumed that you know how to set the TFTP root path If not refer to your TFTP server s documentation Configuring the SNTP Server If you are to use the automatic software update feature see Automatic Software Update on page 134 for more details you must have a time server SNTP that is accessible and properly configured It is assumed that you know how to configure your SNTP server If not refer to your SNTP server s documentation You can also refer to Chapter 17 SNTP Settings on page 183 for more details on how to configure the Mediatrix 2102 for a SNTP server Configuring the HTTP Server If you are to perform a software download by using the HTTP protocol you must install a HTTP server running on the PC designated as the server host This PC must not have a firewall running Mediatrix also recommends to place the PC and the Mediatrix 2102 in the same subnet It is assumed that you know how to set the root path If not refer to your HTTP server s d
379. rity over the SIP INFO method DTMF Payload Type Standards Supported When selecting the outOfBandUsingRtp DTMF transport mode see DTMF Transport Type on page 149 for more details you can determine the actual RTP dynamic payload type used for the telephone event in an initial offer The payload types available are as per RFC 1890 K To define the DTMF payload type 1 In the voicelfMIB set the DTMF transport type in the voicelfDtmfTransport variable voicelfDtmfTransportTable group to outOfBandUsingRtp 2 Set the payload type in the voicelfDimfPayloadType variable Available values range from 96 to 127 150 Mediatrix 2102 DTMF Transport Type Reference Manual SIP Version DTMF Transport over the SIP Protocol Standards Supported You can select the method used to transport DTMFs out of band over the SIP protocol This feature is effective only if the voicelfDtmf Transport variable is set to outOfBandUsingSignalingProtocol see DTMF Transport Type on page 149 for more details K To select the DTMF transport method over the SIP protocol 1 In the voicelfMIB set the DTMF transport type in the voicelfDtmfTransport variable to outOfBandUsingSignalingProtocol In the sipinteropMIB set the DTMF transport type in the sipInteropDtmfTransportMethod variable sipInteropDimfTransportBySipProtocol group The following methods are available Table 101 DTMF Out of Band Transport Methods
380. rix 2102 137 Chapter 10 Software Download Emergency Software Procedure Emergency Software Procedure If the software download is suddenly interrupted it may not be complete Without any protection against this situation the Mediatrix 2102 is not functional A transfer may be interrupted for the following reasons gt An electrical shortage gt The user of the Mediatrix 2102 can accidentally power off the unit Depending on the moment when the software download has been interrupted the emergency software procedure also called rescue application can automatically start a new software download to repair the software if it has been corrupted by the interruption However there is a small but critical time frame during which unrecoverable errors could happen This is why it is very important that the unit is not turned off during software downloads Using the Emergency Software When the emergency software procedure starts the following steps apply 1 The Mediatrix 2102 tries to initiate the software download with the primary software server 2 If the software download fails with the primary software server the Mediatrix 2102 tries to initiate the software download with the secondary software server 3 If the primary and the secondary servers cannot be reached the Mediatrix 2102 tries two default servers 192 168 0 10 and then 192 168 0 2 If for some reason it is impossible to rescue the unit by using the primary and sec
381. rs section Telephony Attributes Configuration Window When this service is enabled the second line service is disabled but the call waiting feature is still functional The user can still accept incoming calls K To set the automatic call feature 1 In the telephonyAttributesMIB locate the telephonyAttributesifFeatures Table group This group contains all of the variables required to set the automatic call feature Define the number to dial when the handset is taken off hook in the telephonyAttributesAutomaticCallTargetAddress variable Accepted formats are telephone numbers 5551111 SIP URLs such as scheme user host For instance sip user foo com This string is used literally so cosmetic symbols such as the dash in 555 xxxx should not be present Because this variable is located in a table you can define a different number for each line of the Mediatrix 2102 Enable the automatic call feature by setting the telephonyAttributesAutomaticCallEnable variable to enable Because this variable is located in a table you can enable disable the feature on a per line basis Mediatrix 2102 217 Chapter 21 Telephony Attributes Call Direction Restriction Call Direction Restriction You can define in which direction calls are allowed E In the Unit Manager Network Administration Manual refer to chapter Telephony Attributes Parameters section Telephony Attributes Configuration Window K To
382. rsal The Mediatrix 2102 may be used in a private domain that is not directly connected to the IP network For instance this may be the case for ITSP Internet Telephony Service Provider clients that have a small private network This private network is connected to the public IP network through the NAT Name Address Translation technology Currently only one Mediatrix unit can be deployed behind a standard NAT You can configure the Mediatrix 2102 with the public IP address of the NAT system which allows to reach the unit SIP packets sent by the Mediatrix 2102 contain the NAT address configured as SIP contact If the NAT service is not activated the real IP address of the Mediatrix 2102 is used This method is recommended when the public IP address of the NAT system is static or does not change regularly since it would cause downtime until it is changed manually Mediatrix 2102 Configuration This section describes how to activate the NAT service of the Mediatrix 2102 K To activate the NAT service 1 In the pAddressContfig folder set the localHostWanAddressSelectConfigSource variable to static LF Note If you want to do NAT traversal you cannot use a PPPoE connection 2 Enter the public IP address of the NAT system in the localHostStaticWanAddress variable This is the public IP address used as Contact address by outgoing SIP packets crossing a NAT system NAT System Configuration You must configure the NAT sys
383. rty to effectively replace a current call by another instead of disconnecting the call to be replaced and creating a second call This allows you to control how the Mediatrix 2102 interoperates with other vendor s products and older Mediatrix units This feature is currently located under the mediatrixExperimental branch of the MIB structure See MIB Structure on page 43 for more details K To set Replaces configuration 1 In the sipinteropMIB set the Replaces configuration in the sipInteropReplacesContfig variable You have the following choices Table 111 Replaces Configuration Configuration Description doNotUseReplaces The Replaces header is not used Mediatrix 2102 169 Chapter 15 SIP Protocol Features Call Transfer Capacity Table 111 Replaces Configuration Continued Configuration Description useReplacesWithRequire The Replaces header is used It can be seen in the Refer To header of the REFER request sent by the transferor It can also be seen in the INVITE sent by the transferee The target that supports Replaces uses its informations to merge the new INVITE with an existing call specified in the Replaces header The transferee requires to use the replaces extension for proper completion of the transfer If the target of the transfer does not support the replaces extension the Mediatrix 2102 retries the transfer using replaces by reversing the roles of the target and the t
384. ry Specific Parameters Hong Kong Hong Kong The following parameters apply if you have selected Hong Kong as location Table 166 Hong Kong Parameters Parameter Value On Off Sequence s Elect Levels Dial Tone 350 440 Hz CONTINUOUS 13 dBm Busy Tone 480 620 Hz 0 5 0 5 13 dBm Ringback Tone 440 480 Hz 0 4 0 2 0 4 3 0 13 dBm Special Information Tone 950 Hz 0 33 16 dBm 1400 Hz 0 33 1800 Hz 0 33 1 0 Stutter Dial Tone 350 440 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 20 CONTINUOUS 16 dBm Confirmation Tone 350 440 Hz 0 1 0 1 0 3 End 16 dBm Receiver Off Hook ROH Tone 1400 Hz 0 1 0 1 19 dBm 2060 Hz 19 dBm 2450 Hz 19 dBm 2600 Hz 19 dBm Message Waiting Indicator Tone 350 440 Hz 0 2 0 2 0 5 0 2 x 4 CONTINUOUS 16 dBm Network Congestion Tone 480 620 Hz 0 25 0 25 13 dBm Ring AC 45 VRMS 20 Hz 0 4 0 2 0 4 3 0 DC 15 Vdc Input Impedance 600 Q Default Caller ID BELLCORE FXS Line Attenuation Input 0 dBr FXS Line Attenuation Output 6 dBr 282 Mediatrix 2102 Indonesia Reference Manual SIP Version Indonesia The following parameters apply if you have selected Indonesia as location Table 167 Indonesia Parameters Parameter Value On Off Sequence s Elect Levels Dial Tone 425 Hz CONTINUOUS 9 dBm Busy Tone 425 Hz 0 5 0 5 9 dBm Ringback Tone 425 Hz 1 0 4
385. s register with five different realms Keep in mind that K Rows 1 5 of the table where you define the user names and passwords are reserved for line 1 K Rows 6 10 of the table where you define the user names and passwords are reserved for line 2 gt etc For instance to enter a user name for the second line you must do so in the sixth row of the table To enter a user name for the third line you must do so in the eleventh row of the table and so on K To set line specific authentication 1 In the sipUAlfAuthenticationTable group set the following information Table 107 Line Specific Authentication Variable Description sipUAAuthRealm When authentication informations are required from users the realm identifies who requested the information sipUAAuthUsername A string that uniquely identifies this endpoint in the realm used for authentication purposes The user name always maps to a password sipUAAuthPassword User password Unit Authentication You can define up to five user names and five passwords for the Mediatrix 2102 These user names and passwords apply to all lines of the unit a In the Unit Manager Network Administration Manual refer to chapter Signalling Protocols Parameters section SIP Authentication gt To set unit authentication 1 In the sipUnitAuthenticationTable group set the following information Table 108 Unit Specific Authentication Variable Description
386. s 175 HTTP configuration file download 114 server configuring 107 125 requirement 1 software download via 133 humidity level 6 IEEE 802 1q in QoS 229 IGMP in router service 89 Image server DHCP information using 126 static information using 127 indicators of the hardware 4 installation before proceeding 8 connecting the hardware 8 free standing unit 7 package contents 1 provisioning sequence with cable modem 13 provisioning sequence with DSL modem 14 requirements 1 reserving IP address 8 router with a 11 safety recommendations 1 selecting site for 6 setting up the unit for the first time 13 single computer with a 9 verifying 24 wall mounting 7 intended audience xx inter digit dial delay 151 IP address default router 30 54 defining decimal 51 Mediatrix 2102 319 Index IP address continued defining hexadecimal 51 octal 51 DHCP server 54 DHCP using 53 DNS primary 30 54 static 55 DNS secondary 30 54 static 55 download server 108 entering 66 Image server 126 locating 51 Management Server 225 of unit 30 54 SIP outbound proxy 75 SIP proxy server 73 SIP registrar server 71 SNTP server 184 static setting configuration sources to 54 using 54 subnet mask 30 54 syslog daemon 234 vocal identification of 15 WAN 15 WAN 92 IP address call 218 IP address dialing 199 218 jitter buffer protection 152 defined 301 L LAN cable 24 defined 302 interface configuring in transparent a
387. s 31001 2 Set the upper boundary for the range of dynamic UDP and TCP ports in the sysConfigMaxDynamicPort variable The default upper boundary value is 32000 3 If you do not need to configure other parameters restart the Mediatrix 2102 as per Restarting the Mediatrix 2102 on page 100 H Note The smallest acceptable range between the lower and upper boundaries is 500 T 38 Base Port Range The T 38 ports are allocated starting from the base port T 38 uses one port for each FXS interface K To define a T 38 base port 1 In the datalfMIB set the datalfT38BasePort variable with the port number you want to use as T 38 base port The default T 38 base port is 6004 In the case of the base port defined on 6004 e Ifthere is currently no ongoing call and FXS connector 1 has an incoming or outgoing call it uses the T 38 port 6004 If there is currently a call on FXS connector 1 and FXS connector 2 has an incoming or outgoing call then FXS connector 2 uses the T 38 port 6005 2 If you do not need to configure other parameters restart the Mediatrix 2102 as per Restarting the Mediatrix 2102 on page 100 UDP and TCP Ports Ranges The UDP and TCP ports are separated in three ranges well known ports 0 to 1023 registered ports 1024 to 49151 and dynamic ports 49152 to 65535 The IANA Internet Assigned Numbers Authority www iana org assigns the well known ports The IANA also lists the registered
388. s Supported User Interface The text will provide the location in the Unit Manager Network Administration Manual where to x This symbol indicates you can also set the current configuration by using the Unit Manager Network Graphical find information related to the specific configuration xxii Mediatrix 2102 Obtaining Documentation Reference Manual SIP Version SCN vs PSTN In Mediatrix and other vendor s documentation the terms SCN and PSTN are used A SCN Switched Circuit Network is a general term to designate a communication network in which any user may be connected to any other user through the use of message circuit or packet switching and control devices The Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN or a Private Branch eXchange PBX are examples of SCNs Standards Supported When available this document lists the standards onto which features are based These standards may be RFCs Request for Comments Internet Drafts or other standard documents The Mediatrix 2102 s implementations are based on the standards so it s possible that some behaviour differs from the official standards For more information on and a list of RFCs and Internet Drafts refer to the IETF web site at http www ietf org Obtaining Documentation These sections explain how to obtain documentation from Mediatrix World Wide Web Registered Mediatrix Partners can access and download the most current Mediatrix documentation on
389. s and port The default port number is 69 if you are using TFTP as protocol The default port number is 80 if you are using HTTP as protocol 118 0x76 Image Primary Server host address and port The default port number is 69 if you are using TFTP as protocol The default port number is 80 if you are using HTTP as protocol 200 0xC8 Management Server SNMP Trap host address and port 201 0xD2 Configuration file fetching host The default port number is 69 if you are using TFTP as protocol The default port number is 80 if you are using HTTP as protocol 203 OxCB SIP Registrar host address and port 204 0xCC SIP Home Domain Proxy address and port 205 OxCD SIP Outbound Proxy address and port Entering IP Addresses In the DHCP server IP addresses can be entered in decimal hexadecimal or octal format See IP Addresses on page 51 for more details There are two formats of address string gt Long Has a size of 6 bytes 12 hexadecimal characters and includes the IP address and port gt Short Has a size of 4 bytes 8 hexadecimal characters and includes only the IP address In this case the default port is used Numeric values are stored in network byte order Big Endian Table 48 Address String Formats Variable Valid Range Typical Value Note IP Address Any valid IP 192 168 0 2 N A address hex 0xC0 0xA8 0x0 0x2 Port 1 32 768 162 Not present in the format with hex OxA
390. s lost ripStatsLastConnNumberPacketsLost PctPktLost Percentage of packets lost rtpStatsLastConnPercentPacketsLost JitMin Minimum interarrival time in milliseconds rtpStatsLastConnInterarrivalJitterMin JitMax Maximum interarrival time in milliseconds rtpStatsLastConnInterarrivalJitterMax JitAvg Average interarrival time in milliseconds rtpStatsLastConnInterarrivalJitterAvg LatMin Minimum latency in milliseconds rtpStatsLastConnLatencyMin LatMax Maximum latency in milliseconds rtpStatsLastConnLatencyMax LatAvg Average latency in milliseconds rtpStatsLastConnLatencyAvg The syslog mes RTP Example with th TxByte lt TxByte gt NbrPktLost lt NbrPktLost gt JitMax lt JitMax gt JitAvg lt JitAvg gt LatAvg lt LatAvg gt sage sent will have the following format RxByte lt RxByte gt e syslog message prefix Dec 31 19 15 05 10 2 130 31 Statistics 0073 RTP TxByte 32002 TxPkt 156 LatMin 8 RxPkt 140 NbrPktLost 0 LatMax 8 LatAvg 8 K To enable to send statistics by syslog TxPkt lt TxPkt gt PctPktLost lt PctPktLost gt JitMin lt JitMin gt LatMin lt LatMin gt RxPkt lt RxPkt gt LatMax lt LatMax gt RxByte 24514 PctPktlLost 0 JitMin 0 JitMax 6 JitAvg 3 1 In the sysConfigMIB set the sysConfigStatsBySyslogEnable variable to enable 238 Mediatrix 2102 RTP Statistics Reference Manual SIP Version Example The following is an example with s
391. s normal operational mode if the telephone is on hook If the telephone is off hook the unit stays in bypass mode until the telephone is put on hook and the period of time you defined has elapsed gt gt Note The Emergency number bypass feature has priority over all other dial maps of the Mediatrix 2102 including the Emergency call service Emergency Call on page 201 As soon as the user dials the emergency number the Bypass connector activates and the call is sent on the PSTN No INVITE SIP is sent even if the Emergency call service dial map is set with the same value To enable the emergency number bypass feature 1 In the fxsMIB define the emergency number that must be connected to the SCN in the fxsEmergencyBypassDialMap variable For instance you could decide to put 911 as the emergency number This number must follow the syntax for digit maps see Chapter 18 Digit Maps on page 187 2 Define the period of time for which the Mediatrix 2102 stays connected to the SCN once the telephone is on hook in the fxsEmergencyBypass Timeout variable During this period of time the emergency operator can reach the caller through the SCN bypass connector Mediatrix 2102 161 Chapter 14 Bypass Configuration Bypass Connector Settings 3 Define how long in seconds the Mediatrix 2102 will wait before playing emergency digits on the SCN side once in bypass mode in the fxsEmergencyBypassDialDelay variable
392. s service to work See Call Hold on page 203 Enabling Second Call You must enable this service before your users can use it K To enable the second call service 1 In the subscriberServicesMIB locate the subscriberServices fEnablingTable group 2 Set the subscriberServicesSecondCallEnable variable to enable Because this variable is located in a table you can enable disable the service on a per line basis You can find the current status of the service in the subscriberServicesSecondCallStatus read only variable under the subscriberServices fStatus Table Using Second Call The following is the procedure to use this service on the user s telephone K To use the second call service 1 Perform a Flash Hook by pressing the Flash button on your analog telephone This puts the call on hold and the second line is automatically connected to your line 2 Initiate the second call 204 Mediatrix 2102 Call Forward Reference Manual SIP Version Call Forward Unconditional The Call Forward service offers various ways to forward calls gt gt gt Unconditional On Busy On No Answer The Call Forward Unconditional feature allows users to forward all of their calls to another extension or line Setting up Call Forward Unconditional You must condigure and enable this service before your users can use it P To set the Call Forward Unconditional feature 1 2 In the subscriberServicesM
393. s that the user has finished entering digits If you want to remove the specify in this variable and the resulting number is 25 This rule is applied AFTER applying digitMapPrefixedDigitRemovalCount Step 2 but BEFORE applying digitMapPrependedString Step 4 4 Define the string to insert at the beginning of the dialed number before initiating the call in the digitMapPrependedString variable For instance let s say that you need to dial a special digit 9 for all local calls Dialing xxx xxxx with a value of 9 would yield 9 xxx xxxx as the number with which to initiate the call This rule is applied AFTER applying both digitMapPrefixedDigitRemovalCount Step 2 and digitMapSuffixString ToRemove Step 3 190 Mediatrix 2102 Setting up Digit Maps Reference Manual SIP Version 5 Enable the digit map by setting the digitMapAllowedEnable variable to enable When enabled this digit map is recognised and accepted only if it is also valid Refused Digit Maps A refused digit map forbids your users to call specific numbers for instance you want to accept all 1 8xx numbers except 1 801 You can create edit ten refused digit maps for each Mediatrix 2102 K To set up refused digit maps 1 In the digitMapMIB define the digit map string that is considered invalid when dialed in the digitMapRefusedDigitMap variable The string must use the syntax described in Digit Maps on page 187
394. s the DTMFs to be dialed The supported digits are 0123456789 abcdABCD Pause characters and p are also supported and represent 1 second Note The draft choudhuri sip info digit 00 txt draft does not support the pause characters and p This is a proprietary support 2 Set the delay prior to sending the PIN in the pinDialingDelay variable This value is expressed in milliseconds ms The default value is 1000 ms 3 Enable the PIN dialing feature by setting the pinDialingEnable variable to enable Mediatrix 2102 219 Chapter 21 Telephony Attributes PIN Dialing 220 Mediatrix 2102 CHAPTER 22 Message Waiting Indicator This chapter explains how to set the Mediatrix 2102 to use the Message Waiting Indicator service What is Message Waiting Indicator MWI The Message Waiting Indicator MWI service alerts the user when new messages have been recorded on a voice mailbox When the user receives a call and does not answer the notification mechanism detects this situation and starts the auto attendant The caller can then leave a message After the message is recorded the server sends a message to the Mediatrix 2102 listing how many new and old messages are available The Mediatrix 2102 alerts the user of the new message in two different ways K The telephone s LED blinks if present K A message waiting stutter dial tone replaces the normal dial tone when
395. s the user to temporarily put an existing call on hold usually by using the flash button of the telephone The user can resume the call in the same way You must enable this service for the following services to work properly K Call Waiting gt Second Call gt Blind Transfer gt Attended Transfer gt Conference Enabling Call Hold You must enable this service before your users can use it To enable the call hold service 1 In the subscriberServicesMIB locate the subscriberServices fEnablingTable group 2 Set the subscriberServicesHoldEnable variable to enable Because this variable is located in a table you can enable disable the service on a per line basis You can find the current status of the service in the subscriberServicesHoldStatus read only variable under the subscriberServices fStatus Table Using Call Hold The following is the procedure to use this service on the user s telephone K To put the current call on hold 1 Perform a Flash Hook by pressing the Flash button on your analog telephone This puts the call on hold You can resume the call in the same way Mediatrix 2102 203 Chapter 20 Subscriber Services Second Call Second Call The Second Call service allows a user with an active call to put the call on hold and then initiate a new call on a second line This service is most useful with the transfer and conference services The call hold service must be enabled for thi
396. s to access national time and frequency dissemination services organize the time synchronization subnet and adjust the local clock in each participating subnet peer In most places of the Internet of today NTP provides accuracies of 1 50 ms depending on the characteristics of the synchronization source and network paths 304 Mediatrix 2102 Stack Reference Manual SIP Version Stack A set of network protocol layers that work together The OSI Reference Model that defines seven protocol layers is often called a stack as is the set of TCP IP protocols that define communication over the Internet Subnet An efficient means of splitting packets into two fields to separate packets for local destinations from packets for remote destinations in TCP IP networks 1 38 An ITU T Recommendation for Real time fax over IP T 38 addresses IP fax transmissions for IP enabled fax devices and fax gateways defining the translation of T 30 fax signals and Internet Fax Protocols IFP packets Telephony The science of translating sound into electrical signals transmitting them and then converting them back into sound Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP The basic communication language or protocol of the Internet It can also be used as a communications protocol in a private network either an intranet or an extranet Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP A simplified version of FTP that transfers files but does not provide p
397. s used to determine to which subnet an IP address belongs An IP address has two components the network address and the host address For example let s consider the IP address 192 168 0 1 Assuming this is part of a Class B network the first two numbers 192 168 represent the Class B network address and the second two numbers 0 1 identify a particular host on this network Let s say you have the following information e Mediatrix 2102 IP address 192 168 0 1 e Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Class B DHCP Server IP address 192 168 0 20 If you happen to change the Mediatrix 2102 IP address to 192 169 0 1 for instance the subnet mask is still valid but cannot reach your DHCP server anymore Refer to subnet mask documentation for more details DESCRIPTION Unable to reach the Mediatrix 2102 after changing the Ethernet speed at run time Be POSSIBLE CAUSE Some hubs cannot adapt completely their port speed at run time SOLUTION Always restart the Mediatrix 2102 for the new setting to take effect See Ethernet Connection Speed on page 69 for more details DESCRIPTION In the case where my NAT Firewall device is connected to the Computer port of the Mediatrix 2102 and have a PC connected to the NAT Firewall the PC has limited web access in time Be POSSIBLE CAUSE The NAT Firewall device does not support well the small DHCP lease time of the Mediatrix 2102 30 seconds SOLUTION Modify the pRoutingDhcpServerLease Ti
398. s z areant ie aia iaa rd 150 DTMF Payload Typer eeren aeea rats araara iaeaea Da adaa aet aaaea harie aeae Peada deee Ee ean e Ea neat 150 DTMF Transport over the SIP Protocol csiis ia ae ia 151 Adaptative TTT 152 About Changing Jitter Butter EE 152 Voice Activity Re Te nensis n aE dd 153 GIVA EE 153 E WEE 154 Beete le Ee 154 G 711 Comfort Noise sss eee 155 Bel 156 Chapter 13 Fak FANS MESSI AAA 157 INTFOdUCION TTT 157 Clear CARA A do 158 A E 159 Chapter 14 A E 161 NETAS ARA A 161 Emergency Number Bypass sees eee eee 161 Standard BYPAss icsnicntiisniaciina irc e rd A arine aria r diia eee 162 Chapter 15 SIP FP POO PEI 163 e EC 163 SIP User Agent A TT 164 SESSION RR Tu 164 SESSION aT e LEE 165 Background OMAN ii a cia 165 LH Ee Le NEEN 166 MEA tee EE 166 Unit Authenticati m arrere eeir e aa aaa E e ea a a LEa a E ea A TEREE 166 Authentication Request Protec miii ic airea iaaa ia aai aaa aiaa eda Eaa aeiaai 167 NAT E TTT 168 Mediatrix 2102 CONIguUrallON oprima ra 168 NAT System Configuration lada 168 Call Transter Capacity TT 169 Call Transfer Versi n a ind de 169 Replaces Configuration Zetting 169 Replaces Meteo mimica ida ica a ada ce dea 170 Transmission TIMEQU EE 171 SIP Transport Tvpe sese eee 171 Transport Parameter onccccnnnnnoniccnnnnn noc RRE RR RARA Ann RR nn reiha Esia EEet 172 UDP Source Port BehaViQUE aiii aii ii EE iaia ad fete 172 xii Mediatrix 2102 Reference Manual SIP Version SIP Penalty e 17
399. scriberServicesCallForwardOnNoAnswerEnableDigitMap variable under the subscriberServicesActivationDigitmaps group For instance you could decide to put 74 as the sequence to activate the service This sequence must be unique and follow the syntax for digit maps see Chapter 18 Digit Maps on page 187 Dialing this digit map does not have any effect unless the service s status is enabled The activating sequence is set for all the lines of the Mediatrix 2102 You cannot have a different sequence for each line Define the digits that users must dial to stop the service in the subscriberServicesCallForwardOnNoAnswerDisableDigitMap variable under the subscriberServicesActivationDigitmaps group For instance you could decide to put 75 as the sequence to deactivate the service This sequence must be unique and follow the syntax for digit maps see Chapter 18 Digit Maps on page 187 Dialing this digit map does not have any effect unless the services status is enabled The deactivating sequence is set for all the lines of the Mediatrix 2102 You cannot have different sequences for each line Define the address to which forward incoming calls in the subscriberServicesCallForwardOnNoAnswerForwardingAddress variable Accepted formats are telephone numbers 5551111 SIP URLs such as scheme userfhost For instance sip user foo com This string is used literally so cosmetic symbols such
400. scription syslogStaticHost Syslog server static IP address or domain name Default Value 192 168 0 10 syslogStaticPort Syslog server static IP port number Default Value 514 234 Mediatrix 2102 Syslog Daemon Configuration Reference Manual SIP Version Customizing Syslog Messages You can display additional information in the prefix of syslog messages the Mediatrix 2102 sends This allows you to later filter the messages The following is the additional information you can enable gt MAC address gt local time K local host H Note This applies only to syslog messages sent on the network and not the local syslog messages K To add the MAC address of the unit in the syslog messages 1 In the syslogMIB set the syslogMsgDisplayMacAddress variable to enable The MAC address of the Mediatrix 2102 is part of the prefix for all syslog messages If you set the variable to disable the MAC address is not displayed in the prefix of the syslog messages K To add the local time of the unit in the syslog messages 1 In the syslogMIB set the syslogMsgDisplayTime variable to enable The current local time of the Mediatrix 2102 is part of the prefix for all syslog messages If you set the variable to disable the time is not displayed in the prefix of the syslog messages K To add the local host of the unit in the syslog messages 1 In the syslogMIB set the syslogMsgDisplayLocalHost variable to enable
401. se conditions be unsatisfactory performance of T 38 fax transmissions may vary and be reduced below expectations A fax call works much like a regular voice call with the following differences 1 The fax codec may be re negotiated by using a re INVITE 2 The goal of the re INVITE is to allow both user agents to agree on a fax codec which is either a Clear channel PCMU PCMA without Echo Cancellation nor Silence Suppression automatically disabled b T 38 3 Upon fax termination if the call is not BYE the previous voice codec is recovered with another re INVITE All lines of the Mediatrix 2102 can simultaneously use the same codec for instance T 38 or a mix of any of the supported codecs Set and enable these codecs for each line Mediatrix 2102 157 Chapter 13 Fax Transmission Clear Channel Fax Clear Channel Fax The Mediatrix 2102 can send faxes in clear channel The following is a clear channel fax call flow Figure 36 Clear Channel Fax Call Flow User Agent 1 INVITE a rtpmap 18 G729 8000 a rtpmap 18 G729 8000 L GE m audio 5004 RTP AVP 18 0 13 m audio 5006 RTP AVP 18 0 13 a rtpmap 0 PCMU 8000 a rtpmap 0 PCMU 8000 200 OK 4 Ringin9g Trying AA AER n Fax Tone Detected emm B E a 200 OK User Agent 2 K Toseta preferred clear channel fax transmission codec 1 Set the clear channel codec to use upon detecting a fax
402. se the factory reset to clear the SNMPv3 password See Factory Reset on page 22 for more details See also the Unit Manager Network Administration Manual Mediatrix 2102 41 Chapter 3 MIB Structure and SNMP SNMP Overview Non Secure Management Mode In non secure management mode the unit responds to SNMP requests as follows SNMPv1 read write on all MIB tree SNMPv2c read write on all MIB tree K SNMPv3 read write on all MIB tree by using MDB authentication e Authentication password Md5Password initial password DES encryption e Encryption password DesPassword initial password K SNMPv3 read write on all MIB tree by using BHA authentication e Authentication password ShaPassword initial password DES encryption e Encryption password DesPassword initial password Secure Management Mode In secure management mode the unit responds to SNMP requests as follows gt SNMPVv1 read only on all MIB tree gt SNMPv2c read only on all MIB tree gt SNMPv3 the same values as for SNMPv3 in non secure management mode H zi Note If you forget or lose a password perform a Factory Reset to reset the unit to the non secure management mode See Factory Reset on page 22 for more details Notes K When using SNMPv3 with encryption DES you may experience delays when accessing MIB variables This is normal because encrypting an IP packet takes in general longer than sendin
403. send a new registration to the current registrar with the current parameters Variables whose modification require a registration refresh are v v v v v v v v sipRegistrarStaticHost sipRegistrarStaticPort sipUAMainUsername sipUADisplayName sipServerSelectConfigSource sipTransportRegistrationEnable K To refresh the registrations sipTransportEnable if sipTransportRegistrationEnable is enabled sipTransportQValue if sipTransportRegistrationEnable is enabled 1 In the sipMIB locate the sipRegistrationCmdRefresh variable The following values are available noOp No operation refresh Refresh registrations 2 Define the time in seconds at which a registered unit begins updating its registration before the registration expiration in the sipReRegistrationTime variable 176 Mediatrix 2102 Registration Parameters Reference Manual SIP Version For instance if the variable is set to 43 and the registration lasts one hour the unit will send new REGISTER requests 59 minutes and 17 seconds after receiving the registration acknowledgement 43 seconds before the unit becomes unregistered Note Normally the Mediatrix 2102 cannot make or receive calls until the REGISTER has completed KL z successfully Because the timeout for a SIP transaction in UDP is 32 seconds it is possible to have an ongoing re REGISTER transaction at the same moment that the registration itself expires This could happen if sipReR
404. sequence The default value is 10 If this variable is set to 1 then the provisioning sequence never stops The trap is sent until the Management Server replies Configuration Source The Mediatrix 2102 must know the IP address and port number of the Management Server You can assign these information to the Mediatrix 2102 through a DHCP server or manually enter them yourself with the static variables DHCP Configuration Using the DHCP configuration assumes that you have properly set your DHCP server with the relevant information See Chapter 4 IP Address and Network Configuration on page 51 for more details To use DHCP assigned information 1 In the ipAddressConfig folder locate the msSelectConfig Source variable This variable defines whether the Mediatrix 2102 shall get its Management Server configuration through a DHCP server or not 2 Set the msSelectConfigSource variable to dhcp You can query the Management Server s IP address and port number assigned by the DHCP server in the msHost and msTrapPort read only variables in the joAddressStatus folder Mediatrix 2102 225 Chapter 23 Management Server Configuration Using the Management Server 3 Set how you want to define the Management Server information in the DHCP server Table 133 Management Server DHCP Information To use a Set vendor specific code The msDhepSiteSpecificCode variable to 0 Set the management server IP address in th
405. sequently it assumes a basic working knowledge of LANs From the perspective of the LAN administrator a Mediatrix 2102 presents itself like another device to add to the LAN It requires the same kind of TCP IP addressing The Mediatrix 2102 can also use a DHCP server on the LAN to automatically receive its IP configuration assignment Related Documentation In addition to this manual the Mediatrix 2102 document set includes the following gt MIB Reference Manual Lists and explains all parameters in the MIB structure gt Mediatrix 2102 Hardware Installation Guide This printed booklet allows you to quickly setup and work with the Mediatrix 2102 Be sure to read any readme files technical bulletins or additional release notes for important information Document Structure The Mediatrix 2102 Reference Manual contains the following information Table 2 Mediatrix 2102 Reference Manual Chapter Appendices Title Chapter 1 Installation on page 1 Summary Describes the various installation scenarios of the Mediatrix 2102 Also presents the possible states and LED patterns of the Mediatrix 2102 as seen from an operator perspective Chapter 2 Web Interface on page 25 Describes how to access the embedded web server of the Mediatrix 2102 to set parameters by using the HTTP protocol Chapter 3 MIB Structure and SNMP on page 39 Describes how the Mediatrix 2102 uses the SNMP protocol for i
406. server Error Cannot resolve address of image Server XXX A DNS request failed to resolve the domain name of the image server primary or secondary Error Target image at location xxx from host xxx is invalid or corrupted For periodic and automatic updates the target image to download is first compared with the installed image This error occurs when this comparison failed because of corruption in the target image files Informational mage download transfer initiated When manual periodic or at restart image download is initiated Warning The file xxx from host xxx exceeds the size limit The selection file or setup inf file received exceeds 10000 bytes Informational Target image at location XXX from host xxx is identical to currently installed image Transfer aborted For periodic and automatic updates the target image to download is first compared with the installed image This message occurs when this comparison determined that the target image is identical to the installed image HTTP Specific Messages Warning HTTP image transfer of file xxx from host xxx was closed by peer The HTTP transfer was closed by the peer 130 Mediatrix 2102 Download Procedure Reference Manual SIP Version Table 84 Software Update Syslog Messages Continued Level Message Event Warning HTTP image transfer of fi
407. set has been performed In recovery mode the provisioning source of the localHostConfigSource variable is set to default meaning that the default factory setting is used The following variables use their default values in the MIBs e localHostAddress localHostPrimaryDns localHostSecondaryDns e localHostDefaultRouter e localHostSnmpPort e localHostSubnetMask e imagePrimaryHost e magePrimaryPort e imageSecondaryHost e imageSecondaryPort msHost e msTrapPort e syslogHost e syslogPort The following variables of the mediatrixMgmt group are all set to static imageConfigSource e configFileFetchingConfigSource e msConfigSource e syslogConfigSource e sntpConfigSource All the persistent MIB values are kept Mediatrix 2102 21 Chapter 1 Installation Default Settings Switch In this mode SIP is deactivated Only SNMP can be used to set the IP addresses listed above and the protocol specific IP addresses all IP addresses located under the pAddressContfig folder in the MIB structure You can also download a software version but you cannot download a configuration file 6 When the Mediatrix 2102 has finished its provisioning sequence perform the changes and then turn it off plug it on the network and turn it on again When restarting the Mediatrix 2102 will not be in Recovery mode and will use the IP addresses configuration set forth in the MIBs See Changing a Paramete
408. sipUnitAuthRealm When authentication informations are required from users the realm identifies who requested the information sipUnitAuthUsername A string that uniquely identifies this endpoint in the realm used for authentication purposes The user name always maps to a password 166 Mediatrix 2102 Authentication Reference Manual SIP Version Table 108 Unit Specific Authentication Continued Variable Description sipUnitAuthPassword User password Authentication Request Protection When the Mediatrix 2102 sends an authentication request you can configure it so that it tries to apply the authentication with integrity protection when this feature is supported by the SIP server However you can disable this behaviour to only apply the authentication K To set the quality of protection 1 In the sipinteropMIB specify the quality of protection the SIP User Agent should apply to its authentication request in the sipInteropAuthenticationQop variable The following values are supported Table 109 Quality of Protection Parameter Description auth The SIP User Agent applies authentication only This is the default value auth int The SIP User Agent applies authentication with integrity protection see RFC 2617 2 Restart the Mediatrix 2102 so that the changes may take effect Mediatrix 2102 167 Chapter 15 SIP Protocol Features NAT Traversal NAT Trave
409. software adjustable DTMF Tone Detection Table 147 DTMF Tone Detection Parameter Description 16 Digit DTMF Decoding 0 to 9 A B C D Permitted Amplitude Tilt High frequency can be 2 dB to 8 dB relative to low frequency Dynamic Range 35 dBm to 3 dBm per tone Frequency Accept 1 5 of nominal frequencies Minimum Tone Duration 40 ms can be increased with software configuration Interdigit Timing Detects like digits with a 40 ms interdigit delay DTMF Tone Generation Table 148 DTMF Tone Generation Parameter Description Per Frequency Nominal 6 dBm to 4 dBm Frequency Deviation Less than 1 MTBF Value The Mean Time Before Failure MTBF value of the Mediatrix 2102 is 250 000 hours at 25 degrees Celsius ambient temperature It has been defined using RelCalc v5 0 Bellcore method LimitedStress Method l Case 3 Desktop unit without the external power supply 264 Mediatrix 2102 Power Consumption Reference Manual SIP Version Power Consumption Measurements at the DC input Table 149 Power Consumption at the DC Input Parameter Description Idle Mode 12Vdc Hardware revision 7 1 415mA P 5W Idle Mode 24Vdc Hardware revision 6 1 130 mA P 3 15 W Ringing Mode worst case 4 REN load 12Vdc Hardware revision 7 1 625mA P 7 5W Ringing Mode worst case 3 REN load 24Vdc Hardware revision 6 1
410. som p de faremomentene som elektriske kretser inneb rer samt gj re deg kjent med vanlig praksis n r det gjelder unng ulykker Aviso Este s mbolo de aviso indica perigo Encontra se numa situa o que Ihe poder causar danos fisicos Antes de come ar a trabalhar com qualquer equipamento familiarize se com os perigos relacionados com circuitos el ctricos e com quaisquer pr ticas comuns que possam prevenir poss veis acidentes Advertencia Este s mbolo de aviso significa peligro Existe riesgo para su integridad f sica Antes de manipular cualquier equipo considerar los riesgos que entra a la corriente el ctrica y familiarizarse con los procedimientos est ndar de prevenci n de accidentes Varning Denna varningssymbol signalerar fara Du befinner dig i en situation som kan leda till personskada Innan du utf r arbete p n gon utrustning m ste du vara medveten om farorna med elkretsar och k nna till vanligt f rfarande f r att f rebygga skador 258 Mediatrix 2102 Safety Warnings Reference Manual SIP Version Safety Warnings This section lists the following safety warnings gt Circuit Breaker 20A Warning gt TN Power Warning gt Product Disposal Warning K No 26 AWG Warning K LAN Connector Warning K Socket Outlet Warning Circuit Breaker 20A Warning that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than 120 VAC 20A U S 240 VAC 10A international is used on the Warning This product reli
411. ssage including the file name and location with the TFTP server address Error in the TFTP transfer of the configuration file XXX from host XXX and port number XXX Set sysAdminDownloadConfigFileStatus to fail File size too big Downloading a file with a size exceeding 512000 bytes Abort the transfer by sending error code 3 disk full or allocation exceeded to the TFTP client HTTP Specific Erro r Handling Access unauthorized Received a 401 Unauthorized from the HTTP server Send a syslog warning message including the file location name with the HTTP server address The access to configuration file XXX is unauthorized on HTTP server XXX Set sysAdminDownloadConfigFileStatus to fail File not found Received a 404 Not Found from the HTTP server Send a syslog warning message including the file location name with the HTTP server address The configuration file XXX was not found on the HTTP server XXX Set sysAdminDownloadConfigFileStatus to fail Mediatrix 2102 119 Chapter 9 Configuration File Download Configuration File Download Server Table 76 Configuration File Fetching Error Handling Continued Error Type Cause Behaviour Session timeout No answer from the HTTP Send a syslog warning message including the server The time elapsed since file location name with the HTTP server the HTTP request was sent address
412. sts they cannot access the Mediatrix 2102 with read write permission 254 Mediatrix 2102 APPENDIX A Standards Compliance and Safety Information This Appendix lists the various standards compliance of the Mediatrix 2102 Standards Supported The Mediatrix 2102 complies to the following standards Table 143 Standards Compliance Category Specification Agency approvals e UL e European Union CE mark Declaration of Conformity e Anatel e NOM e A Tick e FCC Safety standards e UL60950 1 e CAN CSA C22 2 No 60950 00 1 e Resolution 238 2000 IEC 60950 1 Edition 2001 With all national deviations e AS NZS 60950 1 e NOM 019 SCFI 1998 Emissions s FCC Part 15 1998 Class B EN55022 1994 Class B With amendments A1 and A2 e AS NZS CISPR 22 Class B EN61000 3 2 2000 Harmonic current emissions EN61000 3 3 1995 Voltage fluctuations and flicker with amendment A1 e Resolution 237 2000 Title 11 Immunity EN55024 1998 including the following with amendments A1 and A2 EN61000 4 2 1995 ESD e EN61000 4 3 1996 Radiated RF EN61000 4 4 1995 Burst Transients EN61000 4 5 1995 Surge EN61000 4 6 1996 Conducted RF EN61000 4 11 1995 Voltage Dips and Interruptions Mediatrix 2102 255 Appendix A Standards Compliance and Safety Information Disclaimers Table 143 Standards Compliance Continued Category Specification Telecom
413. t match the value of the imageDhcpPrimarySiteSpecificCode variable in the unit s configuration See Vendor and Site Specific DHCP Options on page 64 for more details Static Configuration Use the static configuration if you are not using a DHCP server or if you want to bypass it K To use static information 1 In the pAddressContfig folder locate the imageSelectConfigSource variable This variable defines whether the Mediatrix 2102 must ask for its Image server settings through a DHCP server or not 2 Set the imageSelectConfigSource variable to static 3 Set the following variables Table 81 Image Static Information Variable Description imageStaticPrimaryHost Static primary image server IP address or domain name This is the current address of the PC that hosts the files required for the download extracted from the zip file Default Value 192 168 0 10 imageStaticPrimaryPort Static primary image server IP port number Default Value 69 imageStaticSecondary Host Static secondary image server IP address or domain name This is the current address of the PC that hosts the files required for the download extracted from the zip file Default Value 192 168 0 10 imageStaticSecondaryPort Static secondary image server IP port number Default Value 69 The default port value complies to RFC 1340 on the well known ports assigned numbers This value 69 appl
414. t least one parameter value defined in the downloaded configuration files is different from the actual unit configuration Mediatrix 2102 115 Chapter 9 Configuration File Download Configuration File Download Server Automatic Update at a Specific Time Interval You can configure the Mediatrix 2102 to download new configuration files at a specific day and or time K To set the automatic update at a specific time interval 1 Set the configuration file server host and port as defined in Configuration File Server Settings on page 108 A Caution When downloading via HTTP the configuration file server s port must be 80 You can query the actual port assigned in the imagePrimaryPort and imageSecondaryPort read only variables in the pAddressStatus folder If you are using a DHCP server and it did not provide the proper port reconfigure it with the proper port or use a static configuration See Configuration File Server Settings on page 108 for more details 2 Place the configuration files to download on the computer hosting the HTTP or TFTP server These files must be in a directory under the root path If not already done set the configuration file path as described in Setting up the Configuration File Download on page 109 In the configFileFetchingMIB set the configFileTransferProtocol variable to either http or tftp If you are using the HTTP protocol to download the configuration be awar
415. te da aca Candee tdci 188 How to Use a Digit Map 189 Combining EEN E 189 Using the Rand e EE CN 189 Validating a Digit E EE 190 Setting up Digit Maps 190 Refused Elie Ee E 191 Digit Maps Time outs coa 191 Mediatrix 2102 xiii Contents Digit Map Exvamples eee eee 192 Digit Map Example 1 Standard Calle AA 192 Digit Map Example 2 PBX Emulation esse sees sees eee eee eee eee eee 194 Chapter 19 Telephony Features aso a 197 Call PrOcessesS eee eee eee 197 Calls Involving Another Mediatrix 2107 197 Calls Involving a Mediatrix 2102 and a LAN Endpoint sese eee eee eee eee e 198 Calls Involving an Analog Gateway eee eee eee eee eee ee 199 Making CallS 00ootoicinsa a a e ii SSES ceda 200 Complete Dialing SEQUENCE sinirinin ieee rin ie e EENS ee 200 Dialing a Telephone Number or Numerical Alias A 200 Emergency Call iio iii ia idad 201 Chapter 20 S bserib r SOrViCO iii 203 Gall Hold cere das eee ade Se bec desea id da gece hd un ea de dada ai 203 Enabling Call le BEE 203 MSIE CANTON APRA baad oe ace ches ees cangns ate stenactenshs ones enesastessanesectaceades NN 203 Second e EE 204 Enabling Second eT a e ahead ipods 204 Using Second BE 204 Call FOPWANG osier indenni adaa a a aaa aaa edd deed Addad 205 eene ul 205 On BUSY inneni leat cee case tee ve EES d eEe EE ee ewe bh AFER EES dees 207 CR NOVAS WOM rah ceed eebe Seege 209 CAU WANING DEE 211 Setting p Call Waiting cance ace ns ca
416. telephones and exterior communications networks Programmable Read Only Memory PROM A memory chip where data is written only once as it remains there forever Unlike RAM PROMs retain their contents when the computer is turned off Protocol A formal set of rules developed by international standards bodies LAN equipment vendors or groups governing the format control and timing of network communications A set of conventions dealing with transmissions between two systems Typically defines how to implement a group of services in one or two layers of the OSI reference model Protocols can describe low level details of machine to machine interfaces or high level exchanges between allocation programs Proxy Server An intermediary program that acts as both a server and a client for the purpose of making requests on behalf of other clients Requests are serviced internally or by passing them on possibly after translation to other servers A proxy interprets and if necessary rewrites a request message before forwarding it Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN The local telephone company network that carries voice data over analog telephone lines Quality of Service QoS Measure of the telephone service quality provided to a subscriber This could be for example the longest time someone should wait after picking up the handset before they receive dial tone three seconds in most U S states Mediatrix 2102 303 Appendix
417. tem to some degree The configuration required depends on the type of NAT system you are using but this usually involves port forwarding configuration Network Address Translation Network Address Translation NAT is a method of connecting multiple computers to the Internet or any other IP network by using one IP address This allows home users and small businesses to cheaply and efficiently connect their network to the Internet The basic purpose of NAT is to multiplex traffic from the internal network and present it to the Internet as if it was coming from a single computer having only one IP address NAT automatically provides firewall style protection without any special set up because it only allows connections originating on the inside network This means for instance that an internal client can connect to an outside FTP server but an outside client cannot connect to an internal FTP server because it would have to originate the connection and NAT does not allow that 168 Mediatrix 2102 Call Transfer Capacity Reference Manual SIP Version Call Transfer Capacity The following are parameters you can set to define how the Mediatrix 2102 handles call transfers Call Transfer Version Standards Supported You can select the version of the transfer draft that the Mediatrix 2102 uses The provisioned version is used for initiating transfers and receiving them Transfer versions other than those provisioned do not
418. ter Description inBand The DTMFs are transmitted like the voice in the RTP stream outOfBandUsingRtp The DTMFs are transmitted as per RFC 2833 see DTMF Payload Type on page 150 for additional information outOfBandUsingSignalingProtocol The DTMFs are transmitted as per draft choudhuri sip info digit 00 txt see DTMF Transport Using SIP INFO on page 150 and DTMF Transport over the SIP Protocol on page 151 for more details signalingProtocolDependent The signalling protocol has the control to select the DTMF transport mode The SDP body includes both RFC 2833 and draft choudhuri sip info digit 00 txt in that order of preference DTMF out of band Certain compression codecs such as G 723 1 and G 729 effectively distort voice because they lose information from the incoming voice stream during the compression and decompression phases For normal speech this is insignificant and becomes unimportant In the case of pure tones such as DTMF this distortion means the receiver may no longer recognize the tones The solution is to send this information as a separate packet to the other endpoint which then plays the DTMF sequence back by re generating the true tones Such a mechanism is known as out of band DTMF The Mediatrix 2102 receives and sends out of band DTMFs as per RFC 2833 using RTP DTMFs supported are 0 9 A D Mediatrix 2102 149 Chapter 12 Voice Transmissions DTMF Transport
419. ter and Network connectors use the same IP address as set in the localHostAddress variable See Local Host on page 54 for more details TAS enabled cable modem PPPoE disabled The Network connector receives an IP address to access the WAN This IP address is coming from the DHCP server and is stored in the localHostAddress variable See Local Host on page 54 for more details The IP address of the Computer connector LAN interface is configured statically as described in LAN Interface on page 95 Figure 29 Cable Modem IP Addresses Network Connector Computer Connector WAN IP address set in LAN IP address set in ipAddressConfigLocalHost group ipAddressConfigLaninterface group Mediatrix 2102 For example The Mediatrix 2102 is set up to get a WAN address via DHCP e The local host address is set to the DHCP derived address let s say 10 40 40 53 s The LAN side address is also 10 40 40 53 This is consistent with the transparent IP address sharing feature The lanStaticAddress variable is set by default to 192 168 10 1 In summary a WAN is good IP address 10 40 40 53 on both sides WAN and LAN The web page of the Mediatrix 2102 is at 192 168 10 1 b WAN goes down The IP address 10 40 40 53 is not available on the WAN side The web page of the Mediatrix 2102 is still at 192 168 10 1 The IP address of the Computer connector is then IP address of the Mediatrix 2102 plus or minus 1 i e the IP addr
420. ter assumes that you know how to set up and use a DHCP and DNS server If not ask your network administrator to set up DHCP related variables This chapter also refers to the MIB structure of the configuration variables Refer to Chapter 3 MIB Structure and SNMP on page 39 for more details IP Addresses The MIB structure contains IP addresses that can be set or viewed These IP addresses are physically located in their relevant MIB For instance the IP addresses for the Syslog daemon are located in the syslogMIB However when viewing the MIB structure in a MIB browser such as the Mediatrix Unit Manager Network the IP addresses are grouped in two distinct folders for easy management Table 30 IP Addresses Folders Folder Description ipAddressStatus Lists all the IP addresses used by the unit in read only format ipAddressConfig Lists all the IP addresses you can set Changes made in this folder are reflected in the ipAddressStatus folder IP Addresses Formats in the DHCP Server You can use a number of formats when defining IP addresses in the DHCP server Table 31 IP Addresses Formats in DHCP Server Allowed Format Description Char Decimal You can enter IP addresses in the widely used base 10 decimal 0 9 format For instance a decimal IP address would be 192 168 0 9 IP addresses cannot contain decimal numbers higher than 255 Hexadecimal You can enter IP addresses in base
421. th 2 3 or 4 The corresponding digit map could look as follows 2 4 xx If the number you dial begins with anything other than 2 3 or 4 the call is not placed and you get a busy signal Combining Several Expressions You can combine two or more expressions in the same digit map by using the operator which is equal to OR Let s say you want to specify a choice the digit map is to check if the number is internal extension or external a local call Assuming that you must first dial 9 to make an external call you could define a digit map as follows 2 4 xx 9 2 9 xxxxxx The digit map checks if gt the number begins with 2 3 or 4 and gt the number has 3 digits If not it checks if gt the number begins with 9 and gt the second digit is any digit between 2 and 9 and gt the number has 7 digits LF Note Enclose the digit map in parenthesis when using the option Using the and Characters lt may sometimes be required that users dial the or to make calls This can be easily incorporated in a digit map XXXXXXXH XXXXXXX The or character could indicate users must dial the ff or character at the end of their number to indicate it is complete You can specify to remove the ff or found at the end of a dialed number See Setting up Digit Maps on page 190 Using the Timer You can configure the Timer See Digit Maps Timeouts
422. th the downgrade operation If you perform a recovery mode as per Recovery Mode on page 21 you must manually change the default router IP address to a valid address other than 0 0 0 0 then restart the Mediatrix 2102 If you perform a factory reset procedure as per Factory Reset on page 22 everything should be working properly However this deletes any custom setting you may have done in other variables as it reverts the Mediatrix 2102 back to its default factory settings Mediatrix 2102 251 Chapter 28 Troubleshooting Software Upgrade Issues DESCRIPTION The TFTP server does not recognize the download path and produces an error Be POSSIBLE CAUSE You should use the character when defining the path to indicate sub directories i e c temp download However some TFTP servers on the Windows operating system do not recognize the character and produce an error SOLUTION Use the Y character in the path definition DESCRIPTION Performing a software download takes an unusually long time Be POSSIBLE CAUSE If the following happens e Any information is set to come from the DHCP server for example the SNTP server address and the DHCP server cannot be reached The primary software server address is invalid either set by DHCP or static The unit tries to reach the primary software server without realizing that the address is invalid It keeps trying for a few minutes even if
423. the telephonyCountrySelection variable Be careful to properly select the option corresponding to your caller ID Table 62 Caller ID Mappings Country Caller ID telephonyCountrySelection variable Mapping British Telecom uk Bellcore uk bellcore UK CCA uk cca ETSI FSK uk etsi fsk Bellcore france France ETSI FSK france etsi fsk ETSI DTMF france etsi dtmf See Caller ID Information on page 83 for more details 86 Mediatrix 2102 CHAPTER Transparent Address Sharing This chapter explains how to properly configure the Transparent Address Sharing service for a cable or DSL modem When the Mediatrix 2102 is set in this mode it shares a public IP address with a networked PC or other IP equipment What is Transparent Address Sharing When in Transparent Address Sharing TAS mode the Mediatrix 2102 creates a Local Area Network LAN between itself and the PC and routes IP packets between the LAN and the network providing the public address generally a Wide Area Network WAN The Mediatrix patent on transparent IP address sharing allows both WAN and LAN interfaces to be used with a single IP address from the service provider in a user friendly way without the configuration complexities of an integrated NAT The Mediatrix 2102 thus connects up to two analog phones or fax machines to a broadband access equipment allowing Service Providers to offer IP telephony services to residenti
424. the World Wide Web from the Mediatrix Partner Support Site at http www mediatrix com support_login php To access the site you need a user name and a password If you are not a Registered Mediatrix Partner and would like to become one there are two possibilities K If you have purchased your units from Mediatrix contact your Mediatrix sales representative gt If you don t have a Mediatrix sales representative contact sales mediatrix com to request information on how to become a Registered Mediatrix Partner Documentation CD ROM The Mediatrix 2102 documentation is available in a Documentation CD ROM package that you can order at any time You can order Mediatrix documentation in these ways gt If you have purchased your units from Mediatrix contact your Mediatrix sales representative gt If you don t have a Mediatrix sales representative contact sales mediatrix com to request information on how to order a Documentation CD ROM Documentation Feedback Mediatrix welcomes your evaluation of this manual and any suggestions you may have These help us to improve the quality and usefulness of our publications Please send your comments to Mediatrix Telecom Inc Attention Documentation Department 4229 Garlock Street Sherbrooke Quebec Canada J1L 2C8 FAX 1 819 829 5100 We appreciate your comments Mediatrix 2102 xxiii Preface About this Manual Mediatrix Products Mediatrix Products Mediatrix VolP products
425. the request present in the Request URI from the set of proxies that need to be visited along the way present in the Route header field A proxy compliant to these mechanisms is also known as a loose router Mediatrix 2102 77 Chapter 5 SIP Servers Outbound Proxy Server 78 Mediatrix 2102 CHAPTER DNS SRV Configuration This chapter describes the configuration required for the Mediatrix 2102 to work with a DNS SRV What is a DNS SRV Standards Supported Currently one must either know the exact address of a server to contact it or broadcast a question DNS SRV is an extension of the standard DNS server SRV Service Record is a type of entry a network administrator may put into the DNS answers A DNS SRV is used to get one or more IP addresses of servers each one having its own weight and priority Each server received when using DNS SRV depending on its weight and priority can be used as a primary or backup server or can be part of a load balancing system For instance the client requests the SRV for SIP servers in some domain The DNS server may return the A B and C addresses which are all SIP servers Each address has a weight and the client must choose one of those three addresses by using a random algorithm that considers the weight To use DNS SRV an administrator must set a service records SRV into the DNS servers available on the network DNS SRV implementation should imply a shared d
426. the MWI service for the specified port user Mediatrix 2102 223 Chapter 22 Message Waiting Indicator MWI Notify Service Figure 40 Example of the MWI Notify Service Wl Analog voice mail Analog signal with MWI ON or Destination MWI OFF endpoint ZR SIP Notify with rere Message Waiting Yes or Mediatrix Unit Message Waiting No Analog voice mail goes off hook on one port Dialing 72x or 73x Where x is the extension number of destination endpoint SIP INVITE SIP Move Temp with contact p MxBlindMwiNotify Yes or p MxBlindMwiNotify No IP Communication Server v3 1 Configuring the IP Communication Server In the Route Manager of the IP Communication Server you must configure routes that would be triggered by a pre defined prefix The prefix could be any valid digits DTMF The example described above uses 72 to enable the MWI and 73 to disable the MWI For more information on how to configure the Route Manager please refer to the P Communication Server Administration Manual or the IP Communication Server contextual help Configuring the Mediatrix 2102 There is no special unit configuration required The Mediatrix unit behaves as if in a standard call until it receives one of the following parameters in the Contact field p MxBlindMwiNotify Yes or K p MxBlindMwiNotify No Upon receiving one of these parameters the unit sends a NOTIFY to the destination endpo
427. the Mediatrix 2102 is properly connected to the IP network and is working K By contacting it with a SNMP Browser K By pinging it These two procedures assume that you know the IP address of the Mediatrix 2102 you want to verify If the Mediatrix 2102 does not respond do the following K Verify that the LAN cable is securely connected to the Mediatrix 2102 and to the network connector K Be sure that you did not connect a crossover network cable K Verify the state of the IP network to ensure it is not down the LAN LED should be ON or blinking 24 Mediatrix 2102 CHAPTER 2 Web Interface The Mediatrix 2102 contains an embedded web server to set parameters by using the HTTP protocol This web server may either be accessed via the LAN or the WAN interface of the Mediatrix 2102 depending on the current access limitation This access limitation may be modified in Web Interface Access Limitation on page 37 Standards Supported Introduction The web interface may be used to K View the status of the Mediatrix 2102 K Set the basic uplink parameters of the Mediatrix 2102 K Peruse syslog messages the Mediatrix 2102 sends K Upload a configuration file to the Mediatrix 2102 K Modify the password required to access the web interface Before using the web based configuration service you must ensure that it is enabled K To enable the web based configuration service 1 In the pAddressContfig folder set the TCP port
428. the SNMP trap number the management server address and port Informational Parameter values defined in the configuration file were successfully committed Restarting the unit A downloaded configuration file was successfully committed Warning None of the parameter values defined in the configuration file was successfully committed No parameter value from the downloaded configuration file was successfully applied e g because of bad OIDs Mediatrix 2102 123 Chapter 9 Configuration File Download Configuration File Example Configuration File Example The configuration file format uses XML eXtensible Markup Language The following is the accepted format lt MX Config File Fileld MX_MIBFILE MIBVersionNumber VersionNumber 1 0 gt lt Object Prefix Suffix Value gt lt Object Prefix Suffix Value gt lt MX Config File gt The following is an example of a configuration file lt MX Config _ File Fileld MX_MIBFILE MIBVersionNumber 1 0 VersionNumber 1 0 gt lt Object Prefiix 1 3 6 1 4 1 4935 15 1 8 1 Suffix 0 Value 0 gt lt Object Prefix 1 3 6 1 4 1 4935 15 1 10 1 Suffix 0 Vallue 0 gt lt Object Prefix 1 3 6 1 4 1 4935 15 1 10 10 1 Suffix 0 Value 192 168 0 10 gt lt Object Prefix 1 3 6 1 4 1 4935 15 1 20 1 Suffix 0 Vallue 0 gt objec tiere niki So Gol Ao MAW IS Sol SOY SMES OS O lt
429. the STUN client by selecting the Enable option 3 Set the amount of time in seconds the Mediatrix 2102 should keep a STUN query result in its internal cache in the STUN cache duration field Keeping a query in a cache helps to reduce the amount of unnecessary STUN queries when an RTP or T 38 socket is re used within a short period of time Available values range from 0 s to 3600 s When set to 0 the cache is disabled and the unit performs a STUN query each time a socket needs to be used d Set the maximum amount of time in milliseconds the Mediatrix 2102 should wait for an answer to a STUN query sent to a STUN server in the Timeout for a query to a STUN server field Available values range from 500 ms to 10000 ms Caution is advised in setting long timeouts In the advent of an unresponsive STUN server the unit may end up waiting a long time before it determines that a call cannot be made due to the STUN server failure 5 Define the interval in seconds at which the Mediatrix 2102 sends blank keepalive messages to keep a firewall hole opened in the Keepalive packet transmission interval field Keepalive messages are used by both the signalling protocol socket and the RTP socket to keep those connections opened through a firewall Available values range from O s to 120 s When set to 0 no keepalive packet is sent H Note Keepalive messages are not supported on the T 38 socket 36 Mediatrix 2102 Web Interface Access Limit
430. the configFileFetchingFileName variable with the name of the generic configuration file to download The file name is case sensitive hence it must be entered properly This file should be used to update a large number of units with the same configuration If you leave the variable empty the Mediatrix 2102 does not download the generic configuration file Set the configFileFetchingSpecificFileName variable with the name of the specific configuration file to download The file name is case sensitive hence it must be entered properly This file should be used to update the configuration of a single unit This variable may contain macros that are substituted by actual values when downloading the configuration file Supported macros are mac the MAC address of the unit the character For instance e The mac xml value for a Mediatrix 2102 with MAC address O090F12345AB will be O090F12345AB xml e The value Hello Hi will result in Hello Hi e The value mac mac xml will result in 0090F12345AB mac xml From left to right the first macro encountered is first substituted the second macro encountered is then substituted etc When the character is not part of a macro it is not replaced The following are examples The value Y mac xml stays Y mac xml The value Hello Hi stays Hello Hi e The value Y moc xml stays Ymoc xml If
431. the download procedure fails This delay is caused by the Mediatrix 2102 that cannot function as configured if part of its configuration the DHCP information is unavailable Furthermore there is an issue with switches that use the Spanning Tree Protocol When this protocol is enabled the Mediatrix 2102 may be denied from the network for a certain time which causes the long delay SOLUTION Mediatrix recommends to set up all information to use a valid static value or have a DHCP server answer the requests See Static Configuration on page 54 for more details 252 Mediatrix 2102 SNMP Management Software Issues Reference Manual SIP Version SNMP Management Software Issues The following are issues you may encounter when trying to contact the Mediatrix 2102 with a SNMP management software DESCRIPTION The SNMP network management software cannot access the Mediatrix 2102 Be POSSIBLE CAUSE The SNMP network management software does not have the proper Mediatrix 2102 information SOLUTION Check that s The IP information for the Mediatrix 2102 is correctly configured e The Mediatrix 2102 was restarted after defining the IP information The line through which you are trying to access the Mediatrix 2102 has been unlocked or is not the correct line If it is locked check the connections and network cabling for the connector Try to locate the Mediatrix 2102 IP address If impossible perform a recovery reset as indic
432. the firewall The Mediatrix 2102 only sends keepalive packets to the last destination for a specific socket When a unit is not configured with an outbound proxy it can send through its SIP socket messages to various destinations such as a SIP redirect server another SIP unit or a MWI server If for instance the last SIP message was sent to the MWI server the Mediatrix 2102 will keep the pinhole opened for the MWI server only sending keepalive message to the MWI server and won t be reacheable by other units outside the firewall To avoid those issues all SIP message should come and go from the same source destination on the public side of the firewall i e a SIP outbound proxy Mediatrix thus recommends that you use a SIP outbound proxy See Outbound Proxy Server on page 75 for more details Restrictions on the Mediatrix STUN Implementation The Mediatrix 2102 does not currently support NAT type discovery The Mediatrix 2102 does not currently support STUN NAT binding time to live discovery The Mediatrix 2102 does not currently support the TLS security mechanism Due to a limitation of most routers an RTP portal might be required in order for two units behind the same NAT firewall to be able to communicate with each other Mediatrix 2102 181 Chapter 16 STUN Configuration STUN Client Configuration STUN Client Configuration The following describes how to configure the Mediatrix 2102 STUN client
433. the variable is empty after macro substitution the Mediatrix 2102 does not download the specific configuration file 110 Mediatrix 2102 Configuration File Download Server Reference Manual SIP Version Configuration Update Status Ifvalid configuration files are successfully downloaded then the Mediatrix 2102 automatically restarts to apply all the new settings If the Mediatrix 2102 does not restart this could mean the download failed or that the configuration in the file is the same as the configuration in the unit You can validate the status of the configuration update in various ways MIB Variable You can query the status of the last configuration file download in the sysAdminDownloadConfigFileStatus variable gt idle No configuration file download has been performed yet gt fail The last configuration file download failed gt success The last configuration file download succeeded gt inProgress A configuration file download is in progress gt listening The unit is listening and waiting for a configuration file to be sent by the management server Syslog Messages A lot of information is transmitted as system log syslog messages The following are some of the syslog messages sent by the unit Table 72 Configuration File Download Syslog Messages Level Message Event Informational The specific configuration update succeeded The configuration update with the specific con
434. tion every x days You can specify the x value in the variable configFileAutoUpdatePeriod see Step 7 You can also define the time of day when to perform the update in the configFileAutoUpdate Time OfDay variable see Step 8 Set the waiting period between each configuration update in the configFileAutoUpdatePeriod variable The time unit for the period is specified by the configFileAutoUpdate TimeUnit variable see Step 6 Available values are from 1 to 48 lt may be possible that the Mediatrix 2102 skips a scheduled periodic update ifthe previous periodic update has not finished yet This may happen with periods of a few seconds 116 Mediatrix 2102 Configuration File Download Server Reference Manual SIP Version Let s say for instance that you set the period to two seconds and the automatic update mechanism takes five seconds to complete The following describes the behaviour Table 75 Scheduled Periodic Update Time s Description 0 Beginning of the automatic update mechanism 2 Automatic update The file transfer starts 4 Automatic update The Mediatrix 2102 skips this scheduled update because the previous update has not finished yet 6 Automatic update The Mediatrix 2102 skips this scheduled update because the previous update has nat finished yet 7 The file transfer is finished and the configuration file is applied 8 Automatic update The file transfer starts 8
435. tion file s from server s can not be decrypted 118 Mediatrix 2102 Configuration File Download Server Reference Manual SIP Version Table 76 Configuration File Fetching Error Handling Continued Error Type Cause Behaviour TFTP Specific Error Handling File not found Received error code 1 file not found from the TFTP server Send a syslog warning message including the file name and location with the TFTP server address The configuration file XXX was not found on the TFTP server XXX Set sysAdminDownloadConfigFileStatus to fail Access violation Received error code 2 access violation from the TFTP server Send a syslog warning message including the file name and location with the TFTP server address The configuration file XXX was not fetched There was a TFTP access violation with server XXX Set sysAdminDownloadConfigFileStatus to fail Connection timeout No answer from the TFTP server The time elapsed since the TFTP request was sent exceeds 32 seconds Send a syslog warning message including the file name and location with the TFTP server address The configuration file XXX was not fetched The TFTP connection with server XXX timed out Set sysAdminDownloadConfigFileStatus to fail Transfer error Received a TFTP error other than error code 1 and 2 from the TFTP server Send a syslog warning me
436. tions The two lines of the Mediatrix 2102 can simultaneously use the same codec for instance G 711 PCMA or a mix of any of the supported codecs Set and enable these codecs for each line Table 93 Codecs Comparison Compression Voice Quality G 711 None Excellent G 723 1 Highest Good G 729a ab High Fair Good G 711 PCMA and PCMU Specified in ITU T Recommendation G 711 The audio data is encoded as 8 bits per sample after logarithmic scaling PCMU denotes p law scaling PCMA A law scaling Table 94 G 711 Features Feature Description Packetization time Range of 10 ms to 100 ms with increment of 1 ms See Packetization Time on page 148 for more details Voice Activity Detection VAD Can be enabled or disabled When enabled two levels of detection are available transparent or conservative See G 711 VAD on page 153 for more details Comfort noise Supports white and custom comfort noise as defined in draft ietf avt rtp cn 05 txt See G 711 Comfort Noise on page 155 for more details Analog Modem The Mediatrix 2102 can send modem transmissions in clear channel G 711 It supports 9 6 kbps to 33 6 kbps analog modems V 34 support over clear channel If configured adequately modems with higher rate capabilities for instance V 90 will automatically fall back in the transmission range supported which is usually near 33 6 kbps Quality of modem transmissi
437. try code an area code and a number The country code is missing in this number and must be added Note that in this scenario the country code is the same as the code used when the user wants to indicate a communication outside of his or her own area code It is still good practice to have this number removed and to add the country code even if these two numbers are the same 192 Mediatrix 2102 Digit Map Examples Reference Manual SIP Version Digit Map Rule 3 This digit map rule checks for local calls outside your area code in the 425 Area Code Table 126 Digit Map Rules 3 Settings Variable Setting digitMapAllowedEnable Enable digitMapAllowedDigitMap 425XXXXXXX digitMapPrependedString 1 country code A valid telephone number must contain a country code an area code and a number The country code is missing in this number and must be added Digit Map Rule 4 This digit map rule checks for local calls in the same area code Table 127 Digit Map Rules 4 Settings Variable Setting digitMapAllowedEnable Enable digitMapAllowedDigitMap 235 9 xxxxxx 45 1 9 xxxx 4 0 469 xxxxx digitMapPrependedString 1206 country code and area code A valid telephone number must contain a country code an area code and a number The country code and area code are missing in this number and must be added Mediatrix 2102 193 Chapter 18
438. ts configuration Chapter 4 IP Address and Network Configuration on page 51 Describes how to set IP information in the Mediatrix 2102 and how to configure a DHCP server Chapter 5 SIP Servers on page 71 Describes how to configure the Mediatrix 2102 to properly use the SIP servers Chapter 6 DNS SRV Configuration on page 79 Describes the Mediatrix 2102 s behaviour with a DNS SRV Chapter 7 Country Specific Configuration on page 83 Describes how to set the Mediatrix 2102 with the proper country settings Chapter 8 Transparent Address Sharing on page 87 Explains how to properly configure the Transparent Address Sharing service for a cable or DSL modem XX Mediatrix 2102 Document Structure Reference Manual SIP Version Table 2 Mediatrix 2102 Reference Manual Chapter Appendices Continued Title Chapter 9 Configuration File Download on page 107 Summary Describes how to use the configuration file download feature to update the Mediatrix 2102 configuration Chapter 10 Software Download on page 125 Describes how to download a software version available on the designated software server into the Mediatrix 2102 Chapter 11 Line Configuration on page 139 Describes the features available on the lines connected to the Mediatrix 2102 Chapter 12 Voice Transmissions on page 145 Describes the var
439. ttrtatttsrtnrentntnrtare 209 subscriberServicesCallForwardOnNoAnswerEnableDigitMap sese eee eee eee 209 subscriberServicesCallForwardOnNoAnswerForwardingAddress 209 subscriberServicesCallForwardOnNoAnswerTimeout 209 SubscrlberGericesCallFopnwardlncondtional Activation 205 Mediatrix 2102 313 Appendix G List of MIB Parameters SUubsacriberaervicesCalltonwardUncondithonaiDseabieDIarMap sss sees eee eee 205 SubscrlberGericesCallFonwardlncondtionalnable sese 205 SUubsacriberaervicesCalltonwardUnconditonaiEnabieDIamMap sss eee 205 subscriberServicesCallF orwardUnconditionalForwardingACdress sss 205 subscriberServicesCallWaitingCancelDigitMap eee eee eee eee 211 subscriberServicesCallWaitingEnable cociocnincicinininininnionncncncncncnnn conocen conca arnes 211 subscriberServicesCallWaitingStatus ooociconncnccicininnnnioncnrncncnncn circa 211 subscriberServicesConference Enable sscccscsessecssesseeseseneseuseseseseessnsssesseseneceasessnseseusesenecensessnsssenseaeseanenensneees 216 subscriberServicesConference Status iida ld E ltd 216 subscriberServicesHoldENADle seg ii e aa lence 203 SubsacriberaevicesHoldSatus eee 203 subscriberServicesSecondCallEnable eee 204 subscriberServicesSecondCallStatUS eee eee 204 SYSAGMINCOMMANG EE 54 132 133 sysAdminDefaultSettingsEnable eee eee 23 sysAdminDownloadConfigFile3Status sss sees 111 121 SysContig Command ic ia 113 114 sysConfigCom
440. ty Name gt Visual Indicator MWI Caller ID Generation There are two methods used for sending caller ID information depending on the application and country specific requirements gt caller ID generation using DTMF signalling gt caller ID generation using Frequency Shift Keying FSK Both methods can be used on different lines at the same time The displayed caller ID for all countries may be up to 20 digits for numbers and 50 digits for names DTMF Signalling The data transmission using DTMF signalling is performed during or before ringing depending on the country settings or line configuration The Mediatrix 2102 provides the calling line identity according to the following standards gt Europe ETSI 300 659 1 January 2001 Annex B Access and Terminals AT Analogue access to the Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN Subscriber line protocol over the local loop for display and related services Part 1 On hook data transmission gt Brazil STD 220 250 713 Issue 01 November 1993 General specification identification of the calling party for SPC with DTMF Note For units in Brazil set the analogScnGwinterDigitDialDelay and analogScnGwDtmfDuration value to 70 ms in the analogScnGwMIB This will ensure that the caller ID displays properly Mediatrix 2102 83 Chapter 7 Country Specific Configuration Caller ID Information K Denmark TDK TS 900 301 1 January 2003 Public Switched Telephone Network
441. u can define the configuration file download g In the Unit Manager Network Administration Manual refer to chapter Performing Actions on Mediatrix Units ad ba section Downloading a Configuration File K To download the configuration file from the management server 1 Place the configuration file on the computer hosting the management server 2 In the sysConfigMIB request a configuration file download by setting the sysConfigDownloadConfigFile variable to requestFileDownload 3 Set the sysConfigDownloadConfigMode variable to request The Mediatrix 2102 sends a notification msTrapConfiginformation to the management server via SNMP traps to request the configuration file The management server then initiates the TFTP session and pushes the file into the unit If the management server is the Unit Manager Network from Mediatrix the following steps are automatically performed If you are using another management server you may have to perform them manually a The Unit Manager Network sets the sysConfigDownloadConfigMode variable to record b The Unit Manager Network sends the configuration file to the Mediatrix 2102 Once the configuration file has been sent the Unit Manager Network sets the sysConfigDownloadConfigFile variable to noFileDownload d The Unit Manager Network sets the sysConfigDownloadConfigMode variable to commit If a valid configuration file is successfully downloaded then the Mediatrix 2102 automatically rest
442. u were using a standard telephone with country code and area code when required Examples 8298749 15145701234 A Forced SCN Call allows you to specify that the user you want to reach is located on the SCN network This leaves no decision to the server it must find a proper gateway and place the call on the SCN This option can be useful only when a SCN number is shadowed by a network number H zi Note A forced SCN call is only be possible if an analog gateway such as the Mediatrix 1204 is available on the IP network 200 Mediatrix 2102 Emergency Call Reference Manual SIP Version Emergency Call The Emergency Call service also called urgent gateway allows a 911 style service It allows a user to dial a special digit map resulting in a message being sent to a specified urgent gateway bypassing any other intermediaries If enabled whenever the user dials the specified digit map a message is sent to the target address K To enable the emergency call service 1 In the emergencyCallMIB locate the emergencyCallUrgentGatewayEnable variable under the emergencyCallUrgentGatewayCustomization group This variable sets the usage state of the urgent gateway Urgent messages bypass the outbound proxy and go directly to the urgent gateway 2 Define the digits that users must dial to start the urgent gateway call feature in the emergencyCallUrgentGatewayDigitMap variable For instance you could decide to put
443. ualified partially matches at least one entry in the digit map waits for more digits If the result matches dials the number If the result is over qualified i e no further digits could possibly produce a match sends a fast busy signal Special Characters Digit maps use specific characters and digits in a particular syntax Those characters are Table 123 Digit Map Characters Character Use Digits 0 1 2 9 Indicates specific digits in a telephone number expression T The Timer indicates that if users have not dialed a digit for the time defined it is likely that they have finished dialing and the SIP Server can make the call Matches any digit excluding and Indicates a choice of matching expressions OR Matches an arbitrary number of occurrences of the preceding digit including 0 Indicates the start of a range of characters Indicates the end of a range of characters 188 Mediatrix 2102 How to Use a Digit Map Reference Manual SIP Version How to Use a Digit Map Let s say you are in an office and you want to call a co worker s 3 digits extension You could build a digit map that says after the user has entered 3 digits make the call The digit map could look as follows XXX You could refine this digit map by including a range of digits For instance you know that all extensions in your company either begin wi
444. ully uploaded then the Mediatrix 2102 automatically restarts to apply all the new settings If the Mediatrix 2102 does not restart this could mean the upload failed 32 Mediatrix 2102 HTTP Server Password Page Reference Manual SIP Version HTTP Server Password Page Standards Supported The HTTP server password page allows you to modify the default password to access the web interface The Mediatrix 2102 supports basic HTTP authentication as described in RFC 2617 K To change the password 1 In the web interface click the HTTP server password link or the Password button of the Menu frame The following opens Figure 14 HTTP server password Page A Mediatrix 2102 Microsoft Internet Explorer Loix File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Heak gt 9 A Asearch Favorites Ameda A D GEA Address T http 192 168 10 1 F ee Mediatrix 2102 overview admin Config File Bandwidth STUN Overview Administration Configuration file HTTP server password System log Bandwidth Management STUN HTTP server password Change HTTP server password Username New password Confirm password 2 Enter the new password The password is case sensitive It can be a string of 0 to 16 characters All characters are allowed However some special characters such as accented characters etc may not work Retype the password in the Confirm Password field 4 Click Apply The
445. umber is complete and dials it The administrator has set up the Mediatrix 2102 so it knows exactly how many digits it must collect before it places the call It finds the number of digits to collect by looking at the first few numbers dialed For example a telephone number beginning by 1 should be followed by 10 more digits in North America Dialing a Telephone Number or Numerical Alias This section assumes that the Mediatrix 2102 is configured to do SCN emulation The Mediatrix 2102 could be configured to do any other kind of emulation thus its users would simply have to dial as if they were using their old system K To dial a Standard Call 1 Dial the telephone number as if you were using a standard telephone with country code and area code when required Examples 223 8298749 15145701234 A Standard Call uses the server to contact the remote dialed user The server takes the decision about redirecting the call on the SCN or keeping it on the network Keeping the call on the network takes precedence over redirecting it on the SCN If the call needs to go on the SCN the server redirects it to a proper analog gateway such as the Mediatrix 1204 that will place the call to the SCN network Note You can dial one star numbers xx such as 69 These numbers are automatically inserted in the Request URL of the SIP INVITE request K To dial a Forced SCN call 1 2 Dial Dial the telephone number as if yo
446. und in the SDP received from the peer To put an endpoint on hold a SDP containing a connection address of 0 0 0 0 is sent The method to put a session on hold is in conformance with RFC 2543 Mediatrix 2102 175 Chapter 15 SIP Protocol Features Registration Parameters Table 115 SDP Direction Attribute Continued Parameter Description enable The Mediatrix 2102 always sends the direction attribute in the SDP of the initial INVITE The initial handshake determines if the peer supports the direction attribute or not e If the direction attribute is present in the SDP received from the peer the Mediatrix 2102 sends the direction attribute in the SDP for the remainder of the session e If the direction attribute is not present in the SDP received from the peer the Mediatrix 2102 does not send the direction attribute in the SDP for the remainder of the session If present in the SDP the direction attribute is preferred over the connection address to transmit session modification information This method is in conformance with RFC 3264 Registration Parameters The following describes registration parameters and behaviours you can configure Refreshing Registration You can refresh the registration i e commit the changes you have done to the registration When refreshing the registration all enabled endpoints unregister themselves from the previous registrar and
447. ur MIB browser s table functionality Depending on the MIB browser you are using the tables may not appear the same way Digit map rules are checked sequentially If a telephone number potentially matches two of the rules the first rule encountered is applied Each of these digit map rules has six specific variables to define for the digit map to work properly K To set up digit maps 1 In the digitMapMIB define the digit map string that is considered valid when dialed in the digitMapAllowedDigitMap variable The string must use the syntax described in Digit Maps on page 187 The string format is validated upon entry Invalid entries are refused The default value is x T 2 Define the amount of digits to remove from the beginning of the dialed number after dialing but before initiating the call in the digitMapPrefixedDigitRemovalCount variable For instance when dialing 1 819 xxx xxxx specifying a value of 4 means that the call is started by using the number xxx xxxx The default value is 0 This rule is applied BEFORE applying both digitMapSuffixString ToRemove Step 3 and digitMapPrependedString Step 4 3 Define the string to look for and remove from the end of the dialed number in the digitMapSuffixStringToRemove variable This is helpful if one of the digit maps contains a terminating character that must not be dialed For instance let s take a digit map such as 254 in which the ff signal
448. ur when the 18x Provisional response contains SDP which allows to establish an early media session before the call is answered K To define the local ring behaviour on provisional response 1 In the sipinteropMIB set the sipinteropLocalRingOnProvisionalResponse variable to the proper value Figure 38 Local Ring Behaviour Parameter Description disable The local ring is not started on a 18x Provisional response without SDP except for a 180 Ringing message This is the default value Note Using this default value means you are implementing a behaviour that is different from previous versions of the Mediatrix 2102 application The 180 Ringing message is a provisional or informational response used to indicate that the INVITE message has been received by the user agent and that alerting is taking place enable The local ring is started on any 18x Provisional response without SDP SIP Credential You can configure how the Mediatrix 2102 reuses the credential in different transactions of the same call or registration For instance it may be required that a new SIP request does not reuse the credential negotiated in the previous transaction of the same call or registration For example a re INVITE will not reuse the credential of the INVITE but will be challenged K To enable the Mediatrix 2102 not to reuse the SIP credential 1 In the sipinteropMIB set the sipInteropReuseCredentialEn
449. urces the Mediatrix 2102 supports to static g In the Unit Manager Network Administration Manual refer to chapter Performing Actions on Mediatrix Units afa section Removing all DHCP Options K Tosetall configuration sources to static 1 In the sysAdminMIB set the sysAdminCommand variable to setConfigSourcesStatic Local Host The pAddressConfigLocalHost group allows you to set the IP information the Mediatrix 2102 needs to work properly This group is vital to the proper operation of the Mediatrix 2102 If a variable of this group is not properly set the Mediatrix 2102 may not be able to restart and be contacted after it has restarted S In the Unit Manager Network Administration Manual refer to chapter Administration Parameters section IP afa Configuration K To select the local host configuration source 1 In the ipAddressConfig folder locate the localHostSelectConfigSource variable under the ipAdressConfigLocalHost group 2 Set this variable to either static or dhcp Table 33 Local Host Variables Variable Default Static Value DHCP Source localHostAddress 192 168 0 1 Yiaddr field localHostPrimaryDns 192 168 0 10 Option 6 first of the list localHostSecondaryDns 192 168 0 10 Option 6 second of the list localHostDefaultRouter 192 168 0 10 Option 3 first of the list localHostSubnetMask 255 255 255 0 Option 1 localHostDhcpServer cannot be set
450. use it does not support dynamic IP address change Mediatrix 2102 103 Chapter 8 Transparent Address Sharing Routing Mechanism Routing Mechanism Usually the packets go through the Mediatrix 2102 If the PC wants to directly contact the Mediatrix 2102 it must use the units LAN address localHostAddress variable if TAS is disabled or lanStaticAddress if TAS is enabled Blocked Ports The Mediatrix 2102 uses some ports for signalling media transport and management purposes Packets sent to these ports are blocked Most of the ports can be configured by using a MIB variable Table 67 Blocked Ports Port Description Port Number Configurable SNMP 161 UDP Yes DHCP offer listening 68 UDP No TFTP server for configuration downloads 69 UDP No Note This port is used only if the configuration download service is enabled and only for the time it is required SIP 5060 UDP Yes TCP RTP RTCP 5004 UDP Yes Note The Mediatrix 2102 uses up to four UDP ports per FXS interface See RTP RTCP Base Port Range on page 100 for details T 38 6001 UDP Yes Note The Mediatrix 2102 uses one UDP port per FXS interface See T 38 Base Port Range on page 99 for details 104 Mediatrix 2102 Using the Mediatrix 2102 with a Low Bandwidth Connection Reference Manual SIP Version Using the Mediatrix 2102 with a Low Bandwidth Connection You can use the Mediatrix 2102 wit
451. useful to limit broadcasts that cross bridges and it may also prioritize frames in the queuing algorithm of switches However it also increases the maximum possible size of Ethernet frames from 1518 to 1522 bytes and this might not be handled adequately by every hardware A workaround is available for PCs running Windows to avoid sending 1522 bytes packets note that this happens only in special and rare cases The workaround is to reduce the MTU of the interface the one that sends packets with 802 1q framing by 4 bytes 1 Use the registry editor regedt32 and go to the key Windows 2000 and later HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services Tcpip Parameters Interfaces lt ethernet adapter gt Windows NT4 and 98 MHKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services lt ethernet adapter gt Parameters Tcpip where lt Ethernet adapter gt can be found by using the command ipconfig all 2 Add or modify a value named MTU of type REG_DWORD Set it to 1496 instead of 1500 in decimal Restart the computer to have those changes in effect In Windows 2000 and later this value is under the following key e Kev Tcpip Parameters Interfaces ID for Adapter2 Mediatrix 2102 241 Chapter 27 Maximum Transmission Unit MTU Possible Hardware Problem Value Type REG_DWORD Number e Valid Range 68 the MTU of the underlying network Default OxFFFFFFFF e Description This parameter overrides the default MTU fo
452. via SNMP You can also use the web interface to configure the STUN parameters See STUN Page on page 36 for more details gt To configure the STUN client 1 In the ipAddressConfig folder locate the pAddressConfigStunStatic group No DHCP value is available you can only define STUN server information with static values 2 Set the static STUN server IP address or Fully Qualified Domain Name FQDN in the stunStaticHost variable The default value is 192 168 0 10 3 Set the static STUN server IP port number in the stunStaticPort variable The default value is 3478 4 Set the amount of time in seconds the Mediatrix 2102 should keep a STUN query result in its internal cache in the stunQueryCacheDuration variable Keeping a query in a cache helps to reduce the amount of unnecessary STUN queries when an RTP or T 38 socket is re used within a short period of time Available values range from 0 s to 3600 s When set to 0 the cache is disabled and the unit performs a STUN query each time a socket needs to be used 5 Set the maximum amount of time in milliseconds the Mediatrix 2102 should wait for an answer to a STUN query sent to a STUN server in the stunQuery Timeout variable Available values range from 500 ms to 10000 ms The default value is 1000 ms Caution is advised in setting long timeouts In the advent of an unresponsive STUN server the unit may end up waiting a long time before it determines that a call cannot be made due
453. vices fCallForwardActivationTable group Set the status of the service in the subscriberServicesCallForwardOnBusyActivation variable to inactive or active To let the user activate or deactivate this service with his or her handset proceed to steps 3 and 4 In that case the variable is automatically updated to reflect the activation status Define the digits that users must dial to start the service in the subscriberServicesCallForwardOnBusyEnableDigitMap variable under the subscriberServicesActivationDigitmaps group For instance you could decide to put 72 as the sequence to activate the service This sequence must be unique and follow the syntax for digit maps see Chapter 18 Digit Maps on page 187 Dialing this digit map does not have any effect unless the service s status is enabled The activating sequence is set for all the lines of the Mediatrix 2102 You cannot have a different sequence for each line Define the digits that users must dial to stop the service in the subscriberServicesCallForwardOnBusyDisableDigitMap variable under the subscriberServicesActivationDigitmaps group For instance you could decide to put 73 as the sequence to deactivate the service This sequence must be unique and follow the syntax for digit maps see Chapter 18 Digit Maps on page 187 Dialing this digit map does not have any effect unless the services status is enabled The deactivating sequence is set for a
454. ways to set up and configure a unit K By using a SNMP browser to contact the MIBs of the Mediatrix 2102 It is assumed that you have basic knowledge of TCP IP network administration You can use the MIB browser built in the Mediatrix Unit Manager Network See Unit Manager Network Element Management System on page xxv for more details You can also use any third party SNMP browser or network management application running the SNMP protocol to monitor and configure the Mediatrix 2102 However the information may not be presented in the same manner depending on the SNMP browser used K By using the graphical user interface of the Management Server The Management Server could be Mediatrix s Unit Manager Network See Unit Manager Network Element Management System on page xxv for more details Be sure to use the MIB files that match the version of the MIB located inside the current software build of the unit Locate the proper parameter to modify and change SET its value Most of the parameters require to restart the Mediatrix 2102 unit A restart may be software initiated or manually initiated by unplugging the unit It deletes all statistics stored and overwrites all volatile parameter values in the configuration file A restart also reinitiates the entire unit s initial provisioning sequence Note When performing a SET operation on any MIB variable Mediatrix recommends to wait at least 30 LF seconds before shutting down the un
455. ween 64 kbps and 4096 kpbs b Enable the Bandwidth Management feature by setting the pRoutingBandwidthControlEnable variable to enable 2 Configure the Mediatrix 2102 in TAS mode as described in this chapter Enable the TAS mode by setting the pRoutingEnable variable to enable See Enabling TAS on page 98 for more details 3 In the gosleee8021q group of the gosMIB define a 802 1q priority for the voice and fax packets in the following variables e qosVoiceleee8021qUserPriority for voice priority e qosT38Faxleee8021qUserPriority for fax priority The Mediatrix 2102 application uses 9 output queues with increasing priorities The lowest priority queue is always used for the traffic coming from the LAN port and routed to the WAN port You cannot change this priority level The 8 other queues are used for the traffic the Mediatrix 2102 sends By default the lowest priority queue of these 8 queues is used for all traffic and the other 7 are unused Mediatrix 2102 105 Chapter 8 Transparent Address Sharing Using the Mediatrix 2102 with a Low Bandwidth Connection However you can assign certain types of traffic to other queues of higher priority by configuring a 802 1q priority It is not required to activate the packet tagging feature only provide a priority to the protocol A good practice would be to always have a priority other than 0 for the voice and the fax The signalling could also receive a higher
456. weve A A a aia 211 Using Gall Walling coi ec 212 Call n cT TV 212 Blind aT adi s 212 ATENEO RT Ta EEN 214 Conterence TI 215 Requirements eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 215 Enabling the Conference Call Feature cesse sssss vesse esec css es sese cesses nono ese eesn resen eoar enner ene nenen reenn 216 Managing a Conference EU 216 Chapter 21 Telephony Attributes 217 Automatic aT TTT 217 Call Direction Restrtcton sscan a a a aE aa a AE a Aaaa AEAEE 218 IPAddress Call TTT 218 Enabling P Address UE 218 Dialing a n IP e E 218 PIN Dialing EE 219 xiv Mediatrix 2102 Reference Manual SIP Version Chapter 22 MESSAJOS Waiting E 221 What is Message Waiting Indicator MIN 221 Standard MWI Meth dS TTT 221 MW Method NEE 221 UO une e 222 UAH e O Ee TTT 222 How does th Service Work ciooconiinnsiaia it tt ti dd dd A d e Eege 223 Configuring the IP Communication SelVer cicciiinoninnici cc 224 Configuring the Mediatrix Cl KEE 224 Chapter 23 Management Server Configuration ccccccseccccceeeesseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseceeneeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 225 Using the Management Gernver ueeEkEREEEEENKERddEEEENENEEEENE ENEE dd dd KEREN EENEG 225 Configuration AAPP O 225 Chapter 24 e Ae 227 Differentiated Services DS Field l 227 JEEE 802 DT 229 VEAN TT 230 MIRE TT OTT 231 Chapter 25 Syslog Die MON oie n 233 Syslog Daemon Configuration ooonocccccnnnnocccccnoconcccnno non nccnn nono nc cnn annonces 233 Co
457. wire length longer than 2 5 km 292 Mediatrix 2102 Russia Reference Manual SIP Version Russia The following parameters apply if you have selected Russia as location Table 177 Russia Parameters Parameter Value On Off Sequence s Elect Levels Dial Tone 425 Hz CONTINUOUS 10 dBm Busy Tone 425 Hz 0 4 0 4 10 dBm Ringback Tone 425 Hz 0 8 3 2 10 dBm Special Information Tone 950 Hz 0 333 17 dBm 1400 Hz 0 333 1800 Hz 0 333 1 0 Stutter Dial Tone 425 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 End 10 dBm Confirmation Tone 1400 Hz 0 1 0 1 19 dBm 2060 Hz 19 dBm 2450 Hz 19 dBm 2600 Hz 19 dBm Receiver Off Hook ROH Tone 425 Hz 3 x 0 1 0 1 CONTINUOUS 10 dBm Message Waiting Indicator Tone 425 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 10 CONTINUOUS 10 dBm Network Congestion Tone 425 Hz 0 2 0 2 10 dBm Ring AC 45 VRMS 25 Hz 0 8 3 2 DC 15 Vdc Input Impedance 600 Q Default Caller ID BELLCORE FXS Line Attenuation Input 2 dBr FXS Line Attenuation Output 2 dBr Mediatrix 2102 293 Appendix D Country Specific Parameters Spain Spain The following parameters apply if you have selected Spain as location Table 178 Spain Parameters Parameter Value On Off Sequence s Elect Levels Dial Tone 425 Hz CONTINUOUS 10 dBm Busy Tone 425 Hz 0 2 0 2 13 dBm Ringback Tone 425 Hz 1 5 3 0 13 dBm Special In
458. xXxxxxxxx where x can be any digit or letter The MAC address could be the one of the PC connected to the Mediatrix 2102 You can view the current MAC address of the online device in the Computer connector in the pRoutingMacAddress variable jpoRoutingMacSpoof group of the pRoutingMIB L Note When dialing the 1 digits on a telephone connected to the Mediatrix 2102 the real MAC address of the unit is returned not the spoofed one See Special Vocal Features on page 15 for more details 2 Enable the MAC address spoofing by setting the pRoutingMacSpoofEnable variable to enable The unit s MAC address used on the WAN side is the configured MAC address If you set the variable to disable the unit s MAC address used on the WAN side is the actual unit s MAC address 3 If you do not need to configure other parameters restart the Mediatrix 2102 as per Restarting the Mediatrix 2102 on page 100 96 Mediatrix 2102 Configuring TAS Reference Manual SIP Version WAN Upstream Bandwidth Control The bandwidth management feature limits the upload bandwidth on the WAN interface This allows to optimize the voice quality over an Ethernet link the Mediatrix 2102 knows the available bandwidth on its WAN interface and can slow down the traffic coming from its LAN interface to use all the available bandwidth for voice traffic first When the bandwidth control is enabled packets sent from the PC or IP equipment to the WA
459. xperienced radio TV technician for help Note Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by Mediatrix could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Federal Communications Commission FCC Part 68 This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules On the underside of this equipment is a label that contains among other information the FCC Registration Number Ringer Equivalence Number REN and USOC jack type for this equipment You must upon request provide this information to your telephone company The REN is useful to determine the quantity of devices you may connect to your telephone line and still have all of those devices ring when your telephone number is called In most but not all areas the sum of the REN s of all devices connected to one line should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices you may connect to your line as determined by the REN you should contact your telephone company to determine the maximum REN for your calling area If your telephone equipment causes harm to the telephone network the Telephone Company may discontinue your service temporarily If possible they will notify you in advance but if advance notice is not practical you will be notified as soon as possible You will be informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC 256 Mediatrix 2102 Disclaimers Reference Manual SIP Version Your telephone company may make changes in its facilit
460. y modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of CMU and The Regents of the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written permission CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Networks Associates Technology Inc copyright notice BSD Copyright c 2001 Networks Associates Technology Inc All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met e Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer e Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright not
461. y setting the pRoutingEnable variable to enable You may want to disable the factory reset procedure of the Mediatrix 2102 even if users depress the Default Settings switch By default the factory reset reverts the configuration of the system to default factory settings See Disabling the Factory Reset on page 23 for more details 3 If you do not need to configure other parameters restart the Mediatrix 2102 as per Restarting the Mediatrix 2102 on page 100 Optionally you may want to modify the port allocation settings 98 Mediatrix 2102 Ports Settings Reference Manual SIP Version Ports Settings The Mediatrix 2102 allows you to define how to dynamically allocate the ports it uses This allows for better NAT and firewall traversal capabilities UDP and TCP Ports When needed the TCP IP implementation of the Mediatrix 2102 randomly selects a dynamic port amongst the free ports of the range Let s say for instance that the dynamic ports range is from 41000 to 42000 The Mediatrix 2102 needs to download a new version of its software The TCP IP implementation selects a local UDP port for the TFTP client The port is selected in the dynamic ports range so the port has a value between 41000 and 42000 K To set the range of the UDP and TCP ports 1 In the sysConfigMIB set the lower boundary for the range of dynamic UDP and TCP ports in the sysConfigMinDynamicPort variable The default lower boundary value i
462. yDhcpSiteSpecificCode variable in the unit s configuration Static Configuration Use the static configuration if you are not using a DHCP server or if you want to bypass it To use static information 1 In the ipAddressConfig folder locate the sipServerSelectConfigSource variable under the ipAddressConfigSipServer group This variable defines whether the Mediatrix 2102 must ask for its outbound proxy settings through a DHCP server or not 2 Set the sipServerSelectConfigSource variable to static 3 Set the following variables Table 57 Outbound Proxy Static Information Variable Description sipOutboundProxyStaticHost Static outbound proxy server IP address or domain name Default Value 192 168 0 10 sipOutboundProxyStaticPort Static outbound proxy server IP port number Note If this variable corresponds to a domain name that is bound to a SRV record the port must be set to 0 for the unit to perform DNS requests of type SRV as per RFC 3263 Otherwise the unit will not use DNS SRV requests but will rather use only requests of type A because it does not need to be specified which port to use Default Value 0 K To disable the outbound proxy 1 In the ipAddressConfig folder set the sipOutboundProxyStaticHost variable to 0 0 0 0 To re enable the outbound proxy enter a valid IP address You can now specify if the outbound proxy uses a loose routing or strict routing type
463. yToGroupTable K vacmAccessTable gt vacmViewTreeFamilyTable 42 Mediatrix 2102 MIB Structure Reference Manual SIP Version is saved in flash memory only if these conditions are met K The RowStatus variable eg vacnmAccessRowStatus is equal to active 1 gt The StorageType variable e g vacmAccessStorageType is equal to nonVolatile 3 H o Note The vacmContextTable is not saved under any condition MIB Structure The current MIB structure is defined in the SMI file called MX SMI my The SMI contains seven main groups Table 22 Structure of Management Information Group Description mediatrixProducts Each Mediatrix product has been assigned with its own sysObjectID value mediatrixAdmin Root of the modules used for the administration of the products mediatrixMgmt Root of the modules used to manage the products mediatrixConfig Root of the modules used to configure the products mediatrixlp Telephony Signaling Root of the modules used to configure the signalling protocols mediatrixModules Provides a root in which modules can register their module entity No MIB variables actually appear under this node mediatrixExperimental The experimental sub tree is the area where objects and events in MIBs under development can be placed without fear of conflicting with other MIBs When the items rooted under an experimental sub tree are ready for release
464. you have selected Netherlands as location Table 173 Netherlands Parameters Parameter Value On Off Sequence s Elect Levels Dial Tone 425 Hz CONTINUOUS 17 dBm Busy Tone 425 Hz 0 5 0 5 17 dBm Ringback Tone 425 Hz 1 0 4 0 17 dBm Special Information Tone 950 Hz 0 333 17 dBm 1400 Hz 0 333 1800 Hz 0 333 1 0 Stutter Dial Tone 425 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 CONTINUOUS 17 dBm Confirmation Tone 425 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 End 17 dBm Receiver Off Hook ROH Tone 1400 Hz 0 1 0 1 19 dBm 2060 Hz 19 dBm 2450 Hz 19 dBm 2600 Hz 19 dBm Message Waiting Indicator Tone 425 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 10 CONTINUOUS 17 dBm Network Congestion Tone 425 Hz 0 25 0 25 17 dBm Ring AC 45 VRMS 20 Hz 1 0 4 0 DC 15 Vdc Input Impedance 270 Q 750 Q 150 nF Default Caller ID BELLCORE FXS Line Attenuation Input 0 dBr FXS Line Attenuation Output 7 dBr Mediatrix 2102 289 Appendix D Country Specific Parameters New Zealand New Zealand The following parameters apply if you have selected New Zealand as location Table 174 New Zealand Parameters Parameter Value On Off Sequence s Elect Levels Dial Tone 400 Hz CONTINUOUS 17 dBm Busy Tone 400 Hz 0 5 0 5 17 dBm Ringback Tone 400 Hz 450 Hz 0 4 0 2 0 4 2 0 19 dBm Special Information Tone 1400 Hz 0 1 0 1 17 dBm Stutter Dial Tone 400 Hz 0 1 0 1 x 3 CONTINU
465. ysConfigStatsNumberPeriods 3 and sysConfigStatsPeriodLength 1 5 Table 141 Statistics Setting Example 5 minutes sections Statistics 1 SS 4 5 6 rtpStatsCurrentTotalOctetsTransmitted 50 30 60 40 100 50 rtpStatsCumulatedTotalOctetsTransmitted 0 50 80 140 130 200 50 total octets transmitted in the first 5 minutes period 30 total octets transmitted in the second 5 minutes period The previous statistics are transferred to the corresponding cumulated statistics variable for a cumulated total octets transmitted of 50 60 total octets transmitted in the third 5 minutes period The previous statistics are transferred to the corresponding cumulated statistics variable for a cumulated total octets transmitted of 80 40 total octets transmitted in the fourth 5 minutes period The previous statistics are transferred to the corresponding cumulated statistics variable for a cumulated total octets transmitted of 140 100 total octets transmitted in the fifth 5 minutes period The previous statistics are transferred to the corresponding cumulated statistics variable In the above example the rtpStatsCumulatedxx variables always contain the statistics for the last 15 minutes sysConfigStatsNumberPeriods X sysConfigStatsPeriodLength accurate to 5 minutes sysConfigStatsPeriodLength This means that the statistics for the first 5 minutes period are dropped for a cumulated total octets transmitte

Mediatrix 2102 Reference Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents